HP TurboIMAGE/XL database software Reference Manual

TurboIMAGE/XL
Database Management System
Reference Manual
HP 3000 MPE/iX Computer Systems
Edition 7
Manufacturing Part Number: 30391-90011
E0300
U.S.A. March 2000
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including,
but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for direct,
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing or
use of this material.
Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on
equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett-Packard.
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights
reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth
in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause
at DFARS 252.227-7013. Rights for non-DOD U.S. Government Departments and Agencies
are as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (1,2).
Acknowledgments
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Hewlett-Packard Company
3000 Hanover Street
Palo Alto, CA 94304 U.S.A.
© Copyright 1985, 1987, 1989, 1990, 1992, 1994, 1997, 2000 by
Hewlett-Packard Company
2
Contents
1. Introduction
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rapid Data Retrieval and Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program File Independence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Consolidation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Information Needs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
32
2. Database Structure and Protection
Database Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set Types and Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Data Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumbo Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The ORDERS Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Root File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privileged File Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account and Group Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Database Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Access Modes and Data Set Write Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Granting a User Class Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Classes and Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection in Relation to Library Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection Provided by the TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
36
37
38
41
41
43
46
48
48
48
50
50
50
51
54
54
59
59
59
3. Defining a Database
Database Description Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schema Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Item Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
62
62
64
65
65
3
Contents
TurboIMAGE/XL and Program Language Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Data Item Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Set Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Master Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Detail Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Master Key and Detail Search Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Data Set Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Schema Processor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Creating the Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
The Database Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Schema Processor Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Continuation Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
$PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
$TITLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
$CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Selecting the Block Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Schema Processor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Schema Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Schema Processor Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
4. Using the Database
Opening the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Database Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Database Access Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
User Transaction Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Entering Data in the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Sequence for Adding Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Coordinating Additions to a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Access Mode and User Class Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Key and Search Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Reading the Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Current Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Reading Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Rereading the Current Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Updating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Access Modes and User Class Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Updating Key, Search, and Sort Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Deleting Data Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Sequence for Deleting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Coordinating Deletions from a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
4
Contents
Access Modes and User Class Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Locking Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Locking Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditional and Unconditional Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Modes and Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deciding on a Locking Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing a Locking Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an Item for Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Issuing Multiple Calls to DBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releasing Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TurboIMAGE/XL Logging Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What User Logging Does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How User Logging Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Logging and Logical Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Logging and Process Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Database Structure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Uses of DBINFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Subsystem Flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Database or a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Status of a Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpreting Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abnormal Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
117
117
118
119
119
120
120
120
120
122
122
124
125
126
126
126
127
128
128
129
130
130
131
132
133
133
5. TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
Using TurboIMAGE/XL Intrinsics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intrinsic Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unused Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Status Array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBBEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRINSIC NUMBER 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRINSIC NUMBER 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
137
138
138
138
138
139
139
139
139
141
143
143
5
Contents
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
DBCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
INTRINSIC NUMBER 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
DBDELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
INTRINSIC NUMBER 408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
DBEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
INTRINSIC NUMBER 413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
DBERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
INTRINSIC NUMBER 419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
DBEXPLAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
INTRINSIC NUMBER 418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
DBFIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
INTRINSIC NUMBER 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
DBGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
INTRINSIC NUMBER 405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
DBINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
INTRINSIC NUMBER 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Mode 101: Item Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Mode 102: Item Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
6
Contents
Mode 103: Items in Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 104: Items in Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 113: BTREEMODE1 and Wildcard Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 201: Set Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 202: Set Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 203: Sets in Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 204: Sets with Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 205: Set Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 206: Number of Data Set Chunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 207: Size of Data Set Chunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 208: Primary and Actual Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 209: B-Tree Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 301: Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 302: Key or Search Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 401: Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 402: ILR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 403: Dynamic Roll-Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 404: Logging Subsystem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 406: Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 501: Subsystem Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 502: Critical Item Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modes 8nn: Third-Party Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode 901: Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRINSIC NUMBER 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBMEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRINSIC NUMBER 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBOPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRINSIC NUMBER 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRINSIC NUMBER 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
192
193
193
194
194
195
195
196
196
197
198
198
199
200
200
201
202
203
203
204
204
204
205
205
205
205
206
213
213
213
213
213
215
215
215
215
218
222
222
222
222
7
Contents
Discussion for Master Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Discussion for Detail Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
DBUNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
INTRINSIC NUMBER 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
DBUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
INTRINSIC NUMBER 406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
DBXBEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
INTRINSIC NUMBER 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
DBXEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
INTRINSIC NUMBER 421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
DBXUNDO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
INTRINSIC NUMBER 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
6. Host Language Access
Model Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
ORDERS Database Schema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Model Program Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
ORDERS Database Model Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Main Body of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Opening the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Retrieving a Data Entry Using a Record Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Retrieving Master Data Using a Key Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Retrieving Data Serially (with Set Level Locking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Adding an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Updating an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Deleting an Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Rewinding a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
8
Contents
Obtaining Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C ........................................................................
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Body of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COBOL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Body of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving a Data Entry Using a Record Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving Master Data Using a Key Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving Data Serially (with Set Level Locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rewinding a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORTRAN 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Body of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Body of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
259
259
260
260
261
262
263
263
266
267
270
271
271
273
275
276
277
279
282
284
284
285
286
287
287
289
289
290
291
294
294
296
297
298
301
301
302
302
304
304
9
Contents
7. Logging and Recovery
Database Utilities Used in Logging and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Recovery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Logging and Recovery Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Logical Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
A Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Locking Requirements for Logical Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Intrinsic Level Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Logging Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Step 1--Checking MPE/iX Logging Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Step 2--Acquiring Logging Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Step 3--Logging to Tape or Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Step 4--Building a Log File for Logging to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Step 5--Creating the Log Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Step 6--Setting the Log Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Step 7--Setting Flags for the Database Backup Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Step 8--Making a Database Backup Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Logging Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Logging Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Starting the Logging Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Setting Database Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
CHANGELOG Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Ending the Logging Maintenance Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Logging Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Roll-Forward Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Enabling the Roll-Forward Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Restoring the Database Backup Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Performing Roll-Forward Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Roll-Back Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Enabling the Roll-Back Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Disabling the Roll-Back Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Performing Roll-Back Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
DBRECOV Commands Used with Roll-Forward and Roll-Back Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
CONTROL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
FILE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
PRINT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
RECOVER Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
ROLLBACK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
RUN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Recovery Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
10
Contents
Post-Recovery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mirror Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the Mirror Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing DBRECOV STOP-RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Logging Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
364
364
366
367
375
8. Using the Database Utilities
Restructuring the Database with TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Structural Changes Using DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsupported Structural Changes Using DBUNLOAD and LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Utility Routines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utility Program Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBRECOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
378
378
380
382
382
382
383
383
384
384
384
386
387
387
387
387
388
388
388
389
390
390
390
391
393
394
394
394
395
395
395
396
396
11
Contents
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
>PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
>RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
>ROLLBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
>RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
DBRESTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Operation Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
DBSTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Operation Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
DBUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Message Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Operation Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Example (Session Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Example (Job Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
DBUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
12
Contents
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>ACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>ADDINDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>CREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example (Session Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example (Job Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>DEACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>DETACH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>DROPINDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417
417
419
419
419
420
421
421
421
421
422
422
422
423
423
424
424
424
424
425
425
425
425
426
426
426
426
427
427
428
428
428
428
429
429
429
429
430
431
432
432
432
13
Contents
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
>>EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
>>HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
>>MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
>>PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
>>REBUILDINDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
>>REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
>>RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
>>SECURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
>>SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
>>SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Example (Show Users) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
14
Contents
Example Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example (Show All). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example (Show Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of Show Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example (Show Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of Show Indices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example (Show Indices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of Show Locks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1 (Show Locks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2 (Show Locks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
>>VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
451
452
452
454
454
454
455
455
455
456
456
457
457
458
458
458
458
9. Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method 1--Establishing Communications Link and Remote Session Interactively . . . . .
Method 2--Using the COMMAND Intrinsic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method 3--Using a Database-Access File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Using QUERY/3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
460
460
460
461
470
10. Internal Structures and Techniques
Data Set Internal Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chain Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secondary Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocks and Bit Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Data Set Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Data Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approach in Version C.07.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-Time TurboIMAGE/XL Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Database Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
472
472
472
472
472
474
474
474
475
476
477
477
479
479
481
481
15
Contents
Remote Database Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Control Block Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Internal Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Primary Address Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Migrating Secondaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Space Allocation for Master Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Space Allocation for Detail Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Buffer Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Locking Internals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
MPE/iX Transaction Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
System Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
11. B-Tree Indices
Overview of B-Tree Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Key Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
External Commands and Utilities Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Root File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
DBSCHEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
DBUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
DBCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
DBFIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
DBGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
DBINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Quick Start for Using B-Tree Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
A. Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Schema Processor File Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Schema Processor Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Schema Syntax Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Library Procedure Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Abort Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
I and J Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Library Procedure File System and Memory Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Library Procedure Calling Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Library Procedure Exceptional Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Library Procedure Abort Condition Messages in I File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Utility Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Utility Program Conditional Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
16
Contents
Utility Unconditional Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Extended Utility Program Unconditional Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
B. Results of Multiple Access
C. Database Design Considerations
D. Multiple Calls to DBLOCK
Sort Sequence for Lock Descriptors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Conditional Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Remote Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
E. TurboIMAGE/XL Log Record Formats
F. MPE/iX Log Record Formats
G. Recovery and Logging Quick Reference
Recovery Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll-Forward Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll-Back Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Device Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Job Streams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
659
659
660
660
661
662
663
663
663
664
H. TurboIMAGE/XL versus TurboIMAGE/V
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving to TurboIMAGE/XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intrinsic Level Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving from MPE/iX to MPE V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
671
672
675
675
677
677
679
679
681
681
682
17
Contents
18
Figures
Figure 1-1.. How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 2-1.. CUSTOMER Data Set Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 2-2.. Master and Detail Data Set Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 2-3.. Master and Detail Data Sets Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 2-4.. Adding Entries to a Sorted Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 2-5.. ORDERS Data Sets and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 2-6.. A Sample Entry for Each Data Set in the ORDERS Database . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 2-7.. Granting Capability to User Class 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 2-8.. Security Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 3-1.. Database Definition Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 3-2.. Sample Schema Creation Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 3-3.. Schema Processor Batch Job Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 3-4.. Data Set Summary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 3-5.. ORDERS Database Schema ORDERS Database Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 4-1.. Sample Data Entries from ORDERS Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 4-2.. Reading Access Methods (DBGET Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 4-3.. Lock Descriptor List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 5-1.. Sample DBEXPLAIN Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 5-2.. Qualifier Array Format for Locking Modes 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 5-3.. Lock Descriptor Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 5-4.. Lock Descriptor Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 6-1.. ORDERS Database Schema Listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 7-1.. Transactions and Transaction Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 7-2.. Suppression of Transactions Due to Inadequate Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 7-3.. Transferring Log Files to the Secondary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 8-1.. DBUNLOAD File: Sequence of Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 9-1.. Using a Remote Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Figure 9-2.. Using Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Figure 9-3.. Using Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Figure 9-4.. Using Method 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Figure 9-5.. Preparing a Database-Access File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Figure 9-6.. Using a Database-Access File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Figure 10-1.. Media Record for Detail Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Figure 10-2.. Media Record for Primary Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Figure 10-3.. Media Record for Secondary Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Figure 10-4.. Block with Blocking Factor of Four . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Figure 10-5.. Independent Sub-Databases for Concurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Figure B-1.. Actions Resulting from Multiple Access of Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Figure C-1.. Selected Prime Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
19
Figures
Figure G-1.. Sample Job Stream for Starting Logging Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Figure G-2.. Sample Job Stream for Roll-Forward Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Figure G-3.. Sample Job Stream for Roll-Back Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Figure G-4.. Sample Job Stream for Starting Logging Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Figure G-5.. Sample Job Stream for Backup with Database Open for Access . . . . . . . . . 669
Figure G-6.. Sample Job Stream for Roll-Forward Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Figure G-7.. Sample Job Stream for Roll-Back Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
20
Tables
Table 2-1.. Manual and Automatic Masters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 2-2.. Sample Read/Write Class Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table 2-3.. Enabling a User Class to Perform a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table 2-4.. Sample Read and Write Class Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 3-1.. Additional Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 3-2.. Type Designators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 3-3.. TurboIMAGE/XL Data Types and Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 3-4.. Examples of an Item Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 3-5.. Schema Processor Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 3-6.. Examples of RUN and FILE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 3-7.. Data Set Summary Table Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 4-1.. Library Procedures DBOPEN Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 4-2.. Database Access Mode Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 4-3.. Logged Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Table 4-4.. Locking in Shared-Access Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 4-5.. Types of Logical Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Table 5-1.. TurboIMAGE/XL Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Table 5-2.. Calling a TurboIMAGE/XL Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 5-3.. Types of Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 5-4.. DBBEGIN Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 5-5.. DBCLOSE Modes 2 and 3 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Table 5-6.. DBCLOSE Return Status Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 5-7.. DBCONTROL Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 5-8.. DBDELETE Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 5-9.. DBEND Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 5-10.. DBERROR Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Table 5-11.. DBEXPLAIN Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Table 5-12.. DBFIND Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Table 5-13.. DBGET Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Table 5-14.. DBINFO Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Table 5-15.. Locking Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Table 5-16.. Lock Descriptor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table 5-17.. DBLOCK Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Table 5-18.. DBMEMO Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Table 5-19.. DBOPEN Return Status Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Table 5-20.. Special list Parameter Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Table 5-21.. DBPUT Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Table 5-22.. DBUNLOCK Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Table 5-23.. DBUPDATE Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
21
Tables
Table 5-24.. DBXBEGIN Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Table 5-25.. DBXEND Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Table 5-26.. DBXUNDO Return Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 7-1.. Types of Logical Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Table 8-1.. TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Table 10-1.. Static System Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Table 11-1.. DBFIND Mode Summary Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Table A-1.. Status Area Changes for MPE/iX Native Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Table G-1.. Roll-Forward Flag Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Table G-2.. Roll-Back Flag Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Table H-1.. TurboIMAGE/XL Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Table H-2.. DBINFO Mode 402 Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Table H-3.. Condition Code -9 Status Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Table H-4.. Status Area Changes for MPE/iX Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
22
Preface
This manual describes the TurboIMAGE/XL Database Management System for the
HP 3000 Series 900 computers. It is the reference document for anyone designing,
creating, and maintaining a database and for application programmers writing database
access programs.
TurboIMAGE/V users will find information and instructions on how to move from
TurboIMAGE/V to TurboIMAGE/XL in appendix H.
Designers of TurboIMAGE/XL databases will find knowledge of the HP 3000 MPE/iX
operating and file systems useful in determining the amount of system resources, such as
disk space and computation time, needed to maintain a specific database. Because access
to TurboIMAGE/XL databases requires the use of a host programming language,
application programmers need familiarity with at least one of the programming languages
available on the HP 3000 computer: BBASIC, C, COBOL II, FORTRAN 77, Pascal, or RPG.
NOTE
In this manual, a word is a 32-bit storage unit and a halfword is a 16-bit
storage unit. One byte is 8 bits.
MPE/iX
MPE/iX, Multiprogramming Executive with Integrated POSIX, is the latest in a series of
forward-compatible operating systems for the HP 3000 line of computers.
In Hewlett-Packard documentation and in talking with HP 3000 users, you will encounter
references to MPE XL, the direct predecessor of MPE/iX. MPE/iX is a superset of MPE XL.
All programs written for MPE XL will run without change under MPE/iX, and you can
continue to use MPE XL system documentation.
You may encounter references to MPE V, an HP 3000 operating system that is not based
on the PA-RISC architecture. MPE V software can be run on the PA-RISC (Series 900)
HP 3000 computers in what is known as compatibility mode (CM).
23
What's New in this Edition
TurboIMAGE/XL version C.07.04 or later includes the following enhancements:
Jumbo Data Sets
By using the JUMBO option of $CONTROL, data sets can be greater than 4 GBytes.
B-Tree Indices
Provides the capability for wildcard and range searches. A new chapter 11 was added on
this topic.
Dynamic Roll-Back of Multiple Database Transactions
This enhancement is an extension of the dynamic roll-back (DBX) feature to include
multiple databases.
Dynamic Master Data Set Expansion
Dynamic master data set expansion allows a master data set to be expanded dynamically
(up to a new maximum capacity specified in the root file) during DBPUT when the data set
space is exhausted. To facilitate the dynamic master data set expansion enhancement,
DBSCHEMA, DBUTIL, and some of the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics are enhanced.
Support for TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-On-line Backup in
DBRECOV
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-On-line Backup can be used to backup the database even when
open if the option ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END is used. DBRECOV will recover such a
database using logfiles.
Native-mode Utilities
DBUTIL and DBSCHEMA are now native-mode utility programs.
New Modes for DBINFO and DBFIND
DBINFO, DBFIND, and DBCONTROL have additional modes for handling B-Tree index files
and master data set expansion.
New DBUTIL Commands and Options
These new DBUTIL commands are added: DETACH, REDO, DO, LISTREDO, ADDINDEX,
DROPINDEX, and REBUILDINDEX. A new INDEXED option is added for the SHOW command.
Enhanced Database Integrity
The DBPUT and DBUPDATE intrinsics check the integrity of neighboring entries to detect
possible data corruption before inserting into a chain.
Scalability
TurboIMAGE/XL is enhanced to increase the concurrency of modification intrinsics,
DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE (Critical Item Update feature ON).
24
How to Use This Manual
The information in this manual is presented in the order you will use the various
TurboIMAGE/XL modules. A text discussion of the overall purpose of a module and
definitions of terms used to describe the module precede the reference specifications. Each
chapter assumes a knowledge of the material presented in preceding chapters.
Chapter 1
Introduces the TurboIMAGE/XL Database Management System.
Chapter 2
Describes database concepts useful for new users of the TurboIMAGE/XL
database structure.
Chapter 3
Discusses design implementations and includes a schema listing for the
sample database used throughout the book.
Chapter 4
Provides a discussion on using the database. It is useful for both new and
existing TurboIMAGE/XL users.
Chapter 5
Contains the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures with syntax and examples.
Chapter 6
Provides executable sample programs in C, COBOL II, and RPG; provides
sample routines in Pascal and FORTRAN 77.
Chapter 7
Discusses database recovery and logging options.
Chapter 8
Contains the TurboIMAGE/XL utilities with syntax and examples.
Chapter 9
Provides information about accessing a database residing on another
MPE/iX or MPE V system. Use this chapter if your system has Network
Services (NS3000 or NS3000/XL) capability.
Chapter 10
Presents the internal structure of TurboIMAGE/XL elements and methods
used to perform certain functions. You need not understand all the
material in this chapter to use TurboIMAGE/XL, but refer to it as needed.
Chapter 11
Discusses the key points for the B-Tree index enhancement that is new
with this edition. It addresses the changes in TurboIMAGE/XL utilities
and intrinsics. It explains how to create and maintain B-Tree indices and
perform searches with DBFIND.
Appendix A
Contains a description of the error messages issued by the various
TurboIMAGE/XL modules.
Appendix B
Provides additional information about sharing the database.
Appendix C
Contains a summary of important considerations for designing a database.
Appendix D
Contains information about the special locking (multiple RIN) capability.
Appendix E
Contains TurboIMAGE/XL log record formats to aid in interpreting log
and user recovery files.
Appendix F
Contains MPE/iX log record formats to aid in interpreting log and user
recovery files.
Appendix G
Provides a quick reference guide of recovery and logging processes.
Appendix H
Contains a detailed discussion of the differences between TurboIMAGE/V
and TurboIMAGE/XL.
25
Other Information Sources
You may need to consult the following manuals:
Migration Process Guide
MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual
MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual
Native Language Programmer's Guide
NLS/3000 Reference Manual
Query/V Reference Manual
NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference Manual
TurboIMAGE/XL Database Management System DBChange Plus User's
TurboIMAGE/XL Database Management System DBChange Plus
Volume Management Reference Manual
Training
For current information on available training courses, see the HP Education Catalog.
26
Introduction
Data Security
1 Introduction
TurboIMAGE/XL is a set of programs and procedures that you can use to define, create,
access, and maintain a database. A database is a collection of logically-related files
containing both data and structural information. Pointers within the database allow you to
gain access to related data and to index data across files.
The primary benefit of the TurboIMAGE/XL database management system is time
savings. These savings are typically provided in the following areas:
• Data security
• Rapid data retrieval and formatting
• Program development
• Program maintenance
• Program file independence
• File consolidation
• Special information needs
This chapter describes each of these topics in detail.
Effective use of TurboIMAGE/XL can remove a large portion of the overhead associated
with integrated system design from application analysts and programmers.
TurboIMAGE/XL can channel system design talents into functional rather than
structurally-supportive design tasks.
Data Security
Conventional file management systems have limited data security provisions. Access to
computer readable data can only be denied to individuals with system access by providing
physical protection for the media upon which the file is stored, such as using a data vault
for storing sensitive data stored on magnetic tape or disk.
TurboIMAGE/XL, in conjunction with MPE/iX, provides security at account, group, data
item, and data set levels. Implementing security at the item level allows sensitive data to
be stored on-line under the control of TurboIMAGE/XL, a database manager or designer,
and system manager, with minimal regard for additional security provisions.
TurboIMAGE/XL security provisions can limit programmer or operator access to sensitive
information.
Chapter 1
27
Introduction
Rapid Data Retrieval and Formatting
Rapid Data Retrieval and Formatting
Conventional file organization frequently requires using multiple file extracts, sorts, and
report programs to produce meaningful output. Information requests frequently require
weeks to implement, during which time the usefulness of the requested data can decrease.
QUERY/3000, the Hewlett-Packard database inquiry facility, or user-written inquiry
programs that use the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures, allow instant interrogation of the
database by individuals with access to the system. Other ad-hoc reporting packages are
also available.
Program Development
The database structure can be defined and built without using special purpose application
level programming. Because control of the linkage portion of the database is under
TurboIMAGE/XL software control, the programmer does not need to be concerned with
testing the structure and can concentrate on the functional programming task.
QUERY/3000 can be used to build test data, as well as to interrogate the results of
program and system tests. This feature eliminates the requirement that file-related
programs be completed before meaningful functional programs can be written. It is no
longer necessary to hold up functional program testing until file building or file
maintenance programs are completed. More modules of a given system can be tested at the
same time.
A specific benefit in the COBOL environment is program coding time. The programmer
need only define File Division entries for those files that exist outside the control of
TurboIMAGE/XL. Typically, such files are concerned with original entry into the
processing cycle (data entry files) and with report files. All data under the control of
TurboIMAGE/XL is implicitly defined in every program that accesses the database. The
programmer need not code the Data Division entries associated with anything except the
detail data used by a given program. The time savings generated in correct data definition
the first time the program is coded, as well as in the correct description of the physical
location of the data to be processed, will reap significant benefits in the program test cycle.
28
Chapter 1
Introduction
Program Maintenance
Program Maintenance
Throughout the life of a system, processing requirements evolve as the usefulness of the
data is explored. As file organization concepts change with the needs of the application,
some data restructuring can be done with little impact on existing programs. Changes to
the structure of an existing database affect only those programs that process the changed
data; no other programs in the system need to be recompiled to reflect the new database
structure.
The evolution of the database is not limited by the need to balance the cost of changing an
existing system against the benefits to be derived from the new structure. It is not
necessary to do a "where-used" evaluation on a data item carried in multiple files to assess
the impact of a data change on existing systems.
Finally, the accessibility of data is not limited by design decisions made during initial
system design. The structure of a database can evolve with the needs of the application
user. The application designer no longer has to anticipate the needs of the user across the
full life of the system.
Program File Independence
Conventional file structures tend to be rigid and inflexible. The nature of conventional file
management systems requires that the logic of application programs be intricately
interwoven with file design. When it is necessary to alter the structure of a file, a program
must be written to change the file and programs that access the file must be changed to
reflect the file change. Because change is the rule rather than the exception in data
processing, a large percentage of total time and manpower is spent reprogramming.
TurboIMAGE/XL allows the data structure to be independent of the application program.
Data item relationships are independently defined. Changes in the database structure
need only be incorporated into those programs that manipulate the changed data. User
programs need to view only that portion of the database description that pertains to each
program's processing requirements. Because all references to the database are resolved at
execution time, only those programs affected by changes to the database description need
to be changed.
Chapter 1
29
Introduction
File Consolidation
File Consolidation
Most information processing systems that serve more than one application area contain
duplicate data. For example, a vendor's name can appear in an Inventory file, an Accounts
Payable file, and an Address Label file.
The data stored in these three files probably varies slightly from file to file, resulting not
only in wasted file space but also inconsistent program output. Redundant and
inconsistent information severely impedes any system's capacity to deal with large
amounts of data.
File consolidation into a database eliminates most data redundancy. Through the use of
pointers, logically related items of information are chained together, even if they are
physically separated. In the example of vendor names and addresses, only one set of data
would be stored. Using logical associations, the data can be used by any program needing
it. Because there is only one record to retrieve, the work required for data maintenance is
greatly reduced. Finally, all reports drawn from that item of information are consistent.
Special Information Needs
The requirement for one-time information in a format that has never been requested is no
longer a problem for data processing users. The user with a special data requirement can
get to any subset of information on the database, frequently without the intervention of a
programmer.
Volatile analytical data requirements can be filled in a minimal amount of time by the
people who need the data. The time savings in programming overhead and report
specification generation can be enormous.
Native Language Support (NLS/3000) can be used with TurboIMAGE/XL, which allows
character sets other than US ASCII to be used in defining a database and allows data to be
sorted in a database according to the local alphabet. NLS enhancements are recognized by
four TurboIMAGE/XL utilities: DBSCHEMA, DBUTIL, DBUNLOAD, and DBLOAD. For more
information on these utilities, refer to the NLS/3000 Reference Manual and chapters 6
and 8 in this manual.
30
Chapter 1
Introduction
Database Personnel
Database Personnel
The terms database administrator or database manager, database creator, and database
designer can refer to one or more persons involved in administering, creating, or designing
the database. The database administrator coordinates database use. This person knows
the passwords and can authorize others to use the database by making a password
available if it is needed for a particular application. The database administrator is also
responsible for system backup and recovery. The database creator is defined by the
MPE/iX user name, account, and group used when executing the Schema Processor to
create the root file and when executing the DBUTIL program to create the database files.
The database creator and administrator can be the same person. If not, the administrator
will probably have access to the user name and account in which the database resides or to
the maintenance word that is defined in chapter 8.
Chapter 1
31
Introduction
How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL
How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL
The following steps summarize how to use TurboIMAGE/XL. Refer to Figure 1-1. for an
illustration of each of the steps.
1. Design the Database.
A database designer (system analyst) or team of designers determine what data is
required by all the application projects that will share the database. They determine
which data should be protected from unauthorized access and how the data will be
used. These design considerations and others described in appendix C determine the
database content and structure.
2. Describe the Database.
After the design is complete, it is described using the TurboIMAGE/XL Database
Definition Language (DDL). This external definition is called a schema. The database
creator processes the schema using the TurboIMAGE/XL Schema Processor which
creates an internal definition of the database called a root file. The person who creates
the root file is identified as the database creator and can subsequently create and
initialize the database. Chapter 3 contains the description language syntax and
operating instructions for the Schema Processor.
3. Create the Database Files.
DBUTIL, a TurboIMAGE/XL utility program, builds the database files according to
requirements of the database structure specified in the root file. The files contain no
data initially.
4. Store and Retrieve the Data.
TurboIMAGE/XL provides a set of library procedures that can be called from BBASIC,
C, COBOL II, FORTRAN 77, Pascal, or TRANSACT/V language application programs.
The database can also be used with RPG programs but the Report Program Generator
issues the calls to TurboIMAGE/XL procedures.
The application project members can design and write programs in the programming
language which best suits their needs and call the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures to
store, modify, retrieve, and delete data. These procedures rapidly locate the data,
maintain pointer information, manage the allocated file space, and return status
information about the activity requested. Each procedure is described in detail in
chapter 5, and examples of calling several procedures from the different languages are
given in chapter 6.
5. Maintain the Database.
The TurboIMAGE/XL utility programs can be used to maintain backup copies of the
database and perform other utility functions such as logging, recovering, or
restructuring the database. These programs are described in chapters 7 and 8. You can
also use the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures to write your own maintenance programs, or
you can acquire a database restructuring facility.
32
Chapter 1
Introduction
How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL
Figure 1-1. How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL
Chapter 1
33
Introduction
How to Use TurboIMAGE/XL
34
Chapter 1
Database Structure and Protection
Database Elements
2 Database Structure and Protection
This chapter describes the structure of a TurboIMAGE/XL database. The discussion
defines the elements of a database and describes how they are related and how they can be
accessed. If you are designing a TurboIMAGE/XL database, use this chapter with chapter
3 which describes how to define a database.
Database Elements
A database is a named collection of related data. The formal description of this data is
called a schema. The database is defined in terms of data items, data entries, and data
sets which are described in the text below.
Data Items
A data item is the smallest accessible data element in a database. Each data item consists
of a value referenced by a data item name. The name is usually selected to describe the
data value. Many data item values can be referenced by the same data item name with
each value existing in a different data entry.
A compound data item is a named group of identically defined, adjacent items within
the same data entry. Each occurrence of the data item is called a sub-item, and each
sub-item can have a value. A compound item is similar to an array in programming
languages such as FORTRAN 77 and BBASIC. For example, a data entry might contain a
compound item named MONTHLY-SALES with 12 sub-items in which the total sales for each
month are recorded.
Critical items are defined as the key item in a master data set and the search and sort
items in detail data sets. These are described later in this chapter.
A data item type can be one of several types of integers, real or floating-point numbers, or
ASCII character information. The database designer defines each data item as a particular
type depending on what kind of information is to be stored in the item. The data types are
described in detail in the next chapter and are summarized in Tables 3-2 and 3-3.
Data Entries
A data entry is an ordered set of related data items (sometimes referred to as a record).
Specify the order of data items in an entry when you define the database. Data entries can
be defined with at most 255 data item names; none can be repeated. The length of the data
entry is the combined length of the data items it contains and cannot exceed 2348
half-words or 4696 bytes.
Chapter 2
35
Database Structure and Protection
Database Elements
Data Sets
A data set is a collection of data entries where each entry contains values for the same
data items. For example, a customer data set can contain entries composed of the same
nine data items: ACCOUNT, LAST-NAME, INITIAL, STREET-ADDRESS, CITY, STATE,
ZIP, and CREDIT-RATING. Normally, each data set is associated with some real-world
entity, such as orders, customers, employees, and so forth.
A database can contain up to 199 data sets. Each data set is referenced by a unique data
set name that follows certain naming conventions. The data set names are made up of the
root file name appended by two characters. For example, if the root file is named XXXX,
the first data set defined in the schema is named XXXX01, the second data set is named
XXXX02, and so on. To name the maximum of 199 data sets per database, names are
incremented from XXXX01-99, XXXXA0-A9, XXXXB0-B9, up to XXXXJ9.
If the data set is a jumbo data set, the additional files created for the data set are named
by appending POSIX extensions such as .001, .002, and so on to the data set name. For
example, if the jumbo data set XXXX02 requires two additional files, they are named
XXXX02.001 and XXXX02.002. The additional files are called chunks.
Each data set is stored in one disk file, or more if a jumbo data set, consisting of storage
locations called records. When you describe the database with the database definition
language, you specify the maximum capacity, or number of records, of each data set. Each
record is identified by a record number that can be used to retrieve the entry within it.
Figure 2-1. shows a sample of one data set from a database named ORDERS which will be
used as an example throughout this manual. The data set is named CUSTOMER. The
information in this data set pertains to the customers of a business. All the data about a
particular customer is contained in a data entry. Each piece of information such as account
number or last name is a data item. Many data item values can be referenced by the same
data item name if each value exists in a different data entry. For example, the data item
FIRST-NAME has the value JAMES in one data entry and ABIGAIL in another data
entry.
36
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Figure 2-1. CUSTOMER Data Set Sample
Data Set Types and Relationships
A TurboIMAGE/XL data set is either a master or a detail data set; these data sets are
described in this section. Figure 2-2. illustrates the relationships and the types of six data
sets in the ORDERS database. Master data sets are identified by triangles and detail data
sets by trapezoids.
Chapter 2
37
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Figure 2-2. Master and Detail Data Set Relationships
Master Data Sets
Master data sets have the following characteristics:
• They are used to keep information relating to a uniquely identifiable entity. For
example, the CUSTOMER data set contains information describing customers.
• They allow for rapid retrieval of a data entry because one of the data items in the entry,
called the key item, determines the location of the data entry. A key item cannot be a
compound item. In Figure 2-3. on the next page, the CUSTOMER data set contains a
key item named ACCOUNT. The location of each entry is determined by the value of the
customer's account number.
• They can serve as indexes to the detail data set (that is, they can be related to one or
more detail data sets). The ACCOUNT key item in the CUSTOMER master data set is
related to the ACCOUNT search item in the SALES detail data set in Figure 2-3. The
entry for a customer named Abigail Brighton with account number 95430301 serves as
an index to two entries in the SALES detail data set which contain information about
purchases she made.
Although there are unused storage locations in the CUSTOMER master data set,
TurboIMAGE/XL disallows any attempt to add another data entry with account number
95430301. The key item value of each entry must remain unique. The values of other data
items in the master data set are not necessarily unique because they are not key items and
are not used to determine the location of the data entry.
38
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Figure 2-3. Master and Detail Data Sets Example
Chapter 2
39
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Automatic and Manual Masters
A master data set is defined as either automatic or manual. The characteristics of both are
described below:
Table 2-1. Manual and Automatic Masters
Manual Master
Automatic Master
Can be standalone (not related to any detail
data set) or can serve as an index for one or
more detail data sets.
Must serve as an index to one or more detail
data sets.
Must contain a key item and can contain other
data items.
Must contain only one data item, the key item.
The user must explicitly add or delete all
entries. A related detail data set entry cannot
be added until a manual master data set entry
with matching key item value has been added.
When the last detail entry related to a master
entry is deleted, the manual master entry still
remains in the data set. Before a master entry
can be deleted, all related detail entries must
be deleted.
TurboIMAGE/XL automatically adds or deletes
entries when needed based on the addition or
deletion of related detail data set entries.
When a detail entry is added with a search
item value different from all current key item
values, a master entry with matching key item
value is automatically added. Deletions of
detail entries trigger an automatic deletion of
the matching master entry if it is determined
that all related detail entries have been
deleted.
The key item values of existing master entries
serve as a table of legitimate search item
values for all related detail data sets. A
nonstandalone manual master can be used to
prevent the entry of invalid data into the
related detail data sets.
In Figure 2-3., CUSTOMER is a manual master data set, and DATE-MASTER is an
automatic master data set. Before the SALES entry for account 12345678 is added to
SALES, CUSTOMER must contain an entry with the same account number. However, the
DATE-MASTER entries for DATE equal to 910927 and 910928 are automatically added by
TurboIMAGE/XL when the detail entry is added to SALES unless they are already in the
DATE-MASTER data set.
DATE-MASTER, an automatic master, contains only one data item which is the key item
DATE. CUSTOMER, a manual master, contains several data items in addition to the key
item.
If the SALES entry with account number 95430301 and stock number 35624AB3 are
deleted, and no other SALES entry contains a PURCH-DATE or DELIV-DATE value of
910905, the DATE-MASTER entry with that value is automatically deleted by
TurboIMAGE/XL.
40
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Manual versus Automatic Data Sets
Database designers can choose a manual or automatic master data set depending on the
following:
• Manual masters help ensure that valid search item values are entered for related detail
entries. They can also serve as indexes to detail data sets.
• Automatic masters serve as indexes to detail data sets and save time when the search
item values are unpredictable or so numerous that manual addition and deletion of
master entries is undesirable.
Whenever a single data item is sufficient for a master data set, the database designer must
decide between the control of data entry available through manual masters and the
program simplicity offered by automatic masters. For example, because DATE-MASTER is
an automatic data set, erroneous dates such as 331299 can be accidentally entered.
Detail Data Sets
Detail data sets have the following characteristics:
• They are used to record information about related events such as information about all
sales to the same account.
• They allow retrieval of all entries pertaining to a uniquely identifiable entity. For
example, account number 95430301 can be used to retrieve information about all sales
made to Ms. Brighton.
• They can be defined with from zero to 16 search items (unlike a master data set which
contains at most one key item). The values of a particular search item need not be
unique. Generally, a number of entries will contain the same value for a specific search
item.
• They can be defined for automatic expansion of their capacity.
The SALES data set contains four search items: ACCOUNT, STOCK#, PURCH-DATE,
and DELIV-DATE. Two entries in the example in Figure 2-3. have identical values for the
ACCOUNT item in the SALES data set. TurboIMAGE/XL stores pointer information with
each detail data entry that links all entries with the same search item value. Entries
linked in this way form a chain. A search item is defined for a detail data set to retrieve all
entries with a common search item value (that is, all entries in a chain). The SALES
entries with ACCOUNT equal to 95430301 form a two-entry chain. The number of entries
in a single chain is limited only by the maximum number of entries in a data set.
Paths
A master data set key item can be related to a detail data set search item of the same type
and size. This relationship forms a path. A path contains a chain for each unique search
item value. In Figure 2-3., the ACCOUNT key item in CUSTOMER and the ACCOUNT
search item in SALES form a path to link the CUSTOMER master data set to the SALES
detail data set. One chain links all SALES entries for account number 95430301. The
chain for account number 12345678 consists of one entry. Both chains belong to the same
path.
Chapter 2
41
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Because a detail data set can contain as many as 16 search items, it can be related to at
most 16 master data sets. Each master-to-detail relationship must be relative to a different
detail search item. The SALES data set is related to the CUSTOMER, PRODUCT, and
DATE-MASTER data sets.
A detail data set can be multi-indexed by a single master data set. For example, SALES is
indexed twice by DATE-MASTER. The DATE search item forms one path with the
PURCH-DATE search item and one path with the DELIV-DATE search item. Each master
data set can serve as an index to one or more detail data sets. No master data set can be
related to more than 16 detail data sets. For each such relationship, TurboIMAGE/XL
keeps independent chain information with each master entry. This information consists of
pointers to the first and last entries of the chain whose search item value matches the
master data set entry's key item value and a count of the number of entries in the chain.
This is called a chain head. The format of chain heads is given in chapter 10. For
example, the DATE-MASTER data entries each contain two sets of pointers, one for
PURCH-DATE chains and one for DELIV-DATE chains. TurboIMAGE/XL automatically
maintain the chain heads.
Primary Paths
One of the paths of each detail data set can be designated by the database designer as the
primary path. The main reason for designating a primary path is to maintain the entries
of each chain of the path in contiguous storage locations. To maintain contiguous locations,
occasionally use the DBUNLOAD utility program to copy the database to tape, the DBUTIL
utility program to erase the database, and the DBLOAD program to reload the database from
the tape. When the database is reloaded, contiguous storage locations are assigned to
entries of each primary path chain. Therefore, the database designer should designate the
path most frequently accessed in chained order as the primary path. This type of access is
discussed in chapter 5.
A primary path also serves as the default path when accessing a detail data set if no path
is specified by the calling program. This characteristic of primary paths is described with
the DBGET procedure in chapter 5.
Sort Items
For any path, it is possible to designate a data item other than the search item as a sort
item. If a sort item is specified, each of the chains of the path are maintained in ascending
sorted order based on the values of the sort item. Different paths can have different sort
items, and one path's sort item can be another path's search item. Only data items of type
logical or character can be designated as sort items.
For example, chains in the SALES data set composed of entries with identical ACCOUNT
values are maintained in sorted order by PURCH-DATE. When information about sales to
a particular customer is required, the SALES data entries for that customer's account can
be retrieved in sorted order according to purchase date. PURCH-DATE is a meaningful
sort item because the dates are stored in a properly form for collating (year-month-day).
The sorted order of entries is maintained by logical pointers rather than physical
placement of entries in consecutive records. Figure 2-4. illustrates the way that
TurboIMAGE/XL maintains sorted paths. When an entry is added to a detail data set, it is
added to or inserted in a chain. If the path does not have a sort item defined, the entry
42
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
follows all existing entries in the chain. If the path has a sort item, the entry is inserted in
the chain according to the value of that item.
If the entry's sort item value matches the sort item values of other entries in the chain, the
position of the entry is determined by an extended sort field consisting of the sort item
value and the values of all items following the sort item in the entry. If the extended sort
field matches another extended sort field, the entry is inserted chronologically following
the other entries with the same extended sort field value. This also occurs if the sort item
is the last item in the entry and its value matches another entry's sort item value. Note
that Native Language Support does not support extended sort items. The only database
language that supports extended sort fields is Native-3000 which uses US ASCII. If an
extended sort field is used, the sort is done in ASCII collating sequence (negative integers
sort higher than positive).
If you depend on extended sort fields to sort a chain, do not call DBUPDATE to modify any of
the values in the extended sort fields because the chain will not be automatically resorted
according to the new extended sort data values. Instead, call DBDELETE and DBPUT to
re-enter the records with modified values. DBUPDATE only recognizes extended sort items
when the actual search or sort item is changed. Chapter 5 describes DBUPDATE, DBDELETE,
and DBPUT in detail.
If you do not want TurboIMAGE/XL to sort chains by extended sort fields, structure the
data record so that the sort item is in the last field of the record.
When the database content is copied to magnetic tape using the TurboIMAGE/XL utility
program DBUNLOAD, the pointers that define an entry's position in a chain are not copied to
the tape. When the data is loaded back into the database, the chains are re-created.
Therefore, entries that were previously ordered chronologically will not necessarily be in
that same order. The new chronological ordering is based on the order the entries are read
from the tape. The chains of a primary path are an exception; the order of these chains is
preserved if the tape was created with DBUNLOAD in the chained mode. See chapter 8 for
more information about DBUNLOAD.
NOTE
It is important to limit the use of sorted chains to paths consisting of
relatively short chains or chronological sort items that are usually added to
the end of chain (for example, date). Sorted paths should not be used for
multiple key sorts or for sorting entire data sets. These functions are handled
more efficiently by user-written routines or the MPE/iX HP Sort subsystem.
Jumbo Data Sets
You can create data sets greater than 4 GB in size. A data set of this type, called a jumbo
data set, can span more than one MPE file. The naming convention uses POSIX
extensions. For example, a dataset named SALES03 with four multiple files results in a
total of five files with the following names and filecodes:
SALES03
SALES03.001
SALES03.002
SALES03.003
SALES03.004
Chapter 2
filecode
filecode
filecode
filecode
filecode
-408
-409
-409
-409
-409
43
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
SALES03 is the Chunk Control file. It has information about the other files, but no user
data of its own. The remaining files in the data set are called Chunk Data files or
chunks.
To specify a jumbo data set, the JUMBO option must be included in the schema before
defining a jumbo data set. Then any data set whose capacity is greater than 4 GB
automatically becomes a jumbo data set. Use the NOJUMBO option of DBSCHEMA to
turn-off the jumbo option. Then any data set whose capacity is greater than 4 GB will
generate an error. For existing databases, you must use a third-party tool to create jumbo
data sets.
NOTE
44
Any third-party and diagnostic tools used must support jumbo data sets.
DBSTORE does not store a jumbo data set; to store a jumbo data set, use the
STORE command, and specify POSIX names.
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Figure 2-4. Adding Entries to a Sorted Chain
Chapter 2
45
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
The ORDERS Database
Figures 2-5 and 2-6 illustrate the complete ORDERS database. Figure 2-5. lists the data
items within each data set as defined in the schematic of the ORDERS database shown in
Figure 2-2. The data types (in parentheses) are described in chapter 3 with the item part of
the schema. Paths are indicated by arrows. CUSTOMER, SUP-MASTER, PRODUCT, and
DATE-MASTER are master data sets and SALES and INVENTORY are detail data sets.
Figure 2-6. shows a sample entry from each data set and two sample entries for
DATE-MASTER.
Chains of the path formed by CUSTOMER and SALES are maintained in sorted order
according to the value of PURCH-DATE. The primary path for INVENTORY is the one
defined by SUP-MASTER and the primary path for SALES is the one defined by
PRODUCT.
Figure 2-5. ORDERS Data Sets and Paths
46
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Data Set Types and Relationships
Figure 2-6. A Sample Entry for Each Data Set in the ORDERS Database
Chapter 2
47
Database Structure and Protection
Database Files
Database Files
Database elements are stored in privileged MPE/iX disk files. In addition to the root file
which contains the database definition, other files that contain data are called data sets.
Root File
The root file serves as a common point of entry to, and a source of information about, the
database. The root file is a single-extent MPE/iX disk file; that is, the entire file occupies
contiguous sectors on the disk.
The person who creates the root file is the database creator and can subsequently create
and initialize the database. The root file is created within the database creator's logon
group and account when the Schema Processor is executed. The root file has a local file
name identical to the database name. Thus, the name of the root file for the ORDERS
database is ORDERS. Refer to the MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual for more
information about MPE/iX account and logon groups.
Data Files
For non-jumbo data sets, there is one data file for each data set of a database. The size of
each record and number of records in the file are defined by the database schema, and that
information is recorded in the root file. The data files are created and initialized by the
DBUTIL utility.
Each data file is created within the same group and account as the root file. Local file
names are created by appending two characters to the local name of the root file. These two
characters are assigned to the data sets according to the order defined in the schema. For
example, the ORDERS database is defined with DATE-MASTER and CUSTOMER as the
first two data sets. These data sets are in data files ORDERS01 and ORDERS02. For
jumbo sets and sets with B-Tree indices, the chunks or index files are created using POSIX
file format. For chunks, the local file name is appended with ".001", ".002", and so on. For
example, ORDERS01.001 and ORDERS01.002 for two chunks of ORDERS01. For index
files, the local file name of the master is appended with ".idx" (lowercase). For example,
ORDERS02.idx for the master set CUSTOMER with a B-Tree index. (Refer to the
>>CREATE command of DBUTIL in chapter 8.)
Each data file is physically constructed with as many extents of contiguous disk sectors as
needed to meet the capacity requirements of the file, subject to the constraints of the
MPE/iX file system. Each data file contains a user label in a disk sector maintained and
used by the TurboIMAGE/XL library procedures. The label contains structural pointers
and counters needed for dynamic storage allocation and deallocation.
Media Record Length
Media record lengths vary between data sets but are constant within each file. Each record
is large enough to contain a data entry and the associated TurboIMAGE/XL pointer
information. The amount of pointer information depends on the way the data set is
defined. Pointer information is described in chapter 10. The maximum number of records
in a data set file depends on the media record size, the available disk space, and the
48
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Database Files
MPE/iX file system constraints.
Blocks
The media records in a data file physically reside together in a group called a block. Each
block corresponds to one MPE file record. The number of media records in each block is
called the blocking factor. The Schema Processor determines the blocking factor during
creation of the root file. Chapter 3 contains more information about block size and blocking
factors. The format of blocks is given in chapter 10.
Chapter 2
49
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Protecting the Database
TurboIMAGE/XL prevents unauthorized persons from gaining access to the database. It
provides external protection through the MPE/iX privileged file, account, and group
constructs and, in addition, provides the database designer and database manager with
methods to refine security within the database.
Privileged File Protection
All TurboIMAGE/XL database files are privileged files. (Refer to the MPE/iX Intrinsics
Reference Manual for a description of the MPE/iX privileged file capability.) Access by
unprivileged processes or through most MPE/iX file system commands is not allowed.
Therefore, non-privileged users are prevented from accidentally or deliberately gaining
access to the database.
Using MPE/iX commands that permit copying TurboIMAGE/XL files to tape represents a
potential breach of database privacy, and their use should be controlled. In particular,
anyone who uses the MPE/iX SYSGEN, STORE, or RESTORE commands should notify the
database manager. The SYSGEN and STORE commands permit system supervisors, system
managers, and other privileged users to copy files to tape. The RESTORE command can
purge and replace a database file with a different file from tape if the files have the same
name.
Account and Group Protection
To gain access to a TurboIMAGE/XL database, you must be able to access the files in the
account and group in which the database resides. The system manager and account
manager administer the security levels for accounts and groups. The system manager
creates accounts, and either the system or account manager creates new groups and users.
The system and account managers can prevent members of other accounts from accessing
the database by specifying access as user type AC (account member) for the account and
group containing the database. They can prevent users who are members of the account,
but not of the group, containing the database from accessing it by specifying GU (group
user) for the group access. On the other hand, they can allow access from other accounts by
specifying user type ANY at both the account and group levels.
50
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Defining Database Security
After the data items, data sets, and paths for the database have been defined, database
security can be addressed. Defining security involves the following two steps:
1. Defining user classes and passwords
2. Setting up read and write class lists
User Classes and Passwords
Consider who will be using the database. Do all users perform the same tasks or are the
tasks varied? Do all users need to read and update the same data items? The answers to
these questions will help define how many user classes are needed.
For each type of user, define a password and user class number. Each user class is
identified by an integer from 1 to 63. Because more than one user at a time can use the
same password, you may only need to define a few passwords for your database. You may
want to relate the user class number to the user's job position; for example, the ORDERS
database is defined with these user classes and passwords:
User Class
Password
11
CREDIT;
12
BUYER;
13
SHIP-REC;
14
CLERK;
18
DO-ALL;
When you initiate access to the database, you must supply a password to establish the user
class. If the password is null or does not match any password defined for the database, the
user class assigned is zero which has read access to unprotected data sets.
NOTE
Because user class 0 has read access, calls requiring read access to an item or
set will complete successfully (condition word 0) even if an invalid password
was supplied.
The database creator does not need to supply a password. If you are the logged on as the
database creator and enter a semicolon in place of a password, you are granted full access
to all data sets in the database. TurboIMAGE/XL uses the number 64 to identify the
database creator and the numbers 0 to 63 to identify all others.
Read and Write Class Lists
After you have defined user classes and passwords, define the type of access allowed by
each password to the data items and data sets in the database. Establish security in the
schema by including or excluding the user class numbers in the read or write class list of
the data items and data sets, or by omitting a user class list entirely. Omitting a user class
list (known as an absent list) has the same effect as including all user classes, including
user class 0, in the read class list.
Chapter 2
51
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
The combinations of the data set and data item user class lists result in one of the
following five types of access:
• Write access
• Update access
• Read access
• No access
• Creator-only access
Write Access A user class that has write access can add entries to or delete from the data
set. Write access means that update and read access are also granted, and is sometimes
referred to as full data access. To grant write access to a user class for a data set, include
the user class number in the write list of the data set. The specified user class then needs
to open the database using mode 1, 3, or 4 to take advantage of write access. The user class
is ignored if it appears in the user class lists of data items that belong to the data set
because write access to a user class at the data set level supersedes that at the item level.
NOTE
Database access modes 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8 do not allow write access. Programs
that open the database in these modes must pass data set and data item level
security. For additional information, refer to chapter 4 and to "Database
Access Modes and Data Set Write Lists" later in this chapter.
Update Access A user class that has update access can change the values of a particular
data item in an existing data entry. However, the user class cannot add or delete entries
from the data set. Update access means that read access is also granted. To grant update
access to a user class for a data item, include the user class in the read list of the data set
and in the write list of the data item. The specified user class then needs to open the
database in mode 1, 2, 3, or 4 to take advantage of this type of access. The user class can
have update, read, or no access to other data items in the data set depending on the user
class lists of the other data items.
NOTE
TurboIMAGE/XL provides an option called critical item update (CIUPDATE)
which lets you update the values of detail data set search and sort items if the
database access mode is 1, 3, or 4 and if permitted for the current process. You
can restrict update of these data items by assigning read-only access at the
set level and controlling write or update access at the item level. See chapter
4 for more information on CIUPDATE.
Read Access A user class that has read access can only view the values of a particular
data item. To grant read access to a user class for a data item, include the user class in the
read class list of the data set and in the read class list of the data item. This user class can
have update, read, or no access to other data items in the data set depending on the user
class lists of the other items.
No Access A user class that has no access cannot read data item values. No access to a
user class can be defined for an entire data set or for specific data items in a data set.
52
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Specify no access for a user class to an entire data set by excluding the user class from the
read and write class lists of the data set. To allow no access to a specific data item, include
the user class in the read class list of the data set and exclude the user class from the read
and write class lists of the data item.
Note that the read or write portions of the user class list can be left empty; this is known
as a null list. In the example below, only the database creator has write access:
(11,14/)
The write class list is null.
Creator-Only Access If you specify an empty data set user class list, as shown below,
only the database creator has access:
(/)
This is called a null list.
Sample Read and Write Class Lists Table 2-2. contains sample lists for the
CUSTOMER data set and CREDIT-RATING data item in the ORDERS database.
Table 2-2. Sample Read/Write Class Lists
CUSTOMER (data set)
CREDIT-RATING (data item)
Read Class List
Write Class List
11,14
11,18
14
14
Because a write class list of 14 implies that user class 14 is in the read class list, the
CREDIT-RATING read class list is redundant. However, it could be included as a reminder
in the schema of the total capability granted to user class 14.
Table 2-4. later in this chapter contains examples of the effects of read and write class lists.
Note that the examples take into account how the database access mode affects the data
set write list.
Null and Absent Lists
A distinction is made between the absence of both read and write class lists (which by
default allows read access) and a null list. When you specify the lists in the schema, they
are enclosed in parentheses and separated by a slash, for example, (11,14/15). A null list
can be one of the following:
(/)
Both read and write class lists are null.
(11,14/)
The write class list is null.
Because the existence of a write class list implies a read class list, even if no user classes
are listed in the read list and at least one user class is specified in the write list, the read
class list is not considered null.
An absent list and the following null write list, in which the read portion contains all user
classes and the write portion is null, yield the same result:
(0,1,2,3,...63/)
The effect of null and absent lists is illustrated in Figure 2-8. later in this chapter.
Chapter 2
53
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Database Access Modes and Data Set Write Lists
Before you can gain access to a database, you must open it specifying a password that
establishes your user class number and an access mode that defines the type of database
tasks you want to perform. Access modes are described in chapter 4 with the instructions
for opening a database. At this time it is necessary only to note that some of the eight
available access modes do not allow write or update access even if the user class is allowed
these capabilities through the user class lists. If the database is opened in access mode 2,
5, 6, 7, or 8, all data set write class lists are merged into the read class lists, and the
merged read class lists are used for all data sets.
Granting a User Class Access
Figure 2-7. and Table 2-3. illustrate the use of read and write class lists from two different
perspectives. Figure 2-7. shows what capability user class 11 has if it appears in the lists
as shown. The same rules apply to any user class. The access mode must be as indicated.
Figure 2-7. Granting Capability to User Class 11
LIST
Control at
Data Set
Level
(1/11)
or
(11/11)
Control at
Data Set
Level
CAPABILITY
LIST
Total access to
set if database
opened in
access mode 1,
3, or 4
(/)
No access
to set
(/)
No access to
item even if
read access
at set level
(1/11)
or
(11/11)
Update and
read item
CAPABILITY
LIST
(11/) or
absent
list
(11/) or
absent
list
CAPABILITY
Read access to
set; item access
controlled at
item level.
Read item
A null read and write class list can be used by the database creator at the data set level to
deny access to the data set by all user classes; that is, only the database creator will be
able to use the data set.
Table 2-3. presents the same rules organized by the task that the user class is to perform.
It lists the required access modes and the security rules at both the data set and data item
level. For simplicity, assume there are always read and write class lists even if they are the
default lists (0, 1, 2,...63 /) resulting when the lists are omitted in the schema (absent lists).
54
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Table 2-3. Enabling a User Class to Perform a Task
Task
Read Data
Item
Update Data
Item
Add or Delete
Data Entries
Database
Access Mode
1, 3, or 4
Data Set\Security Rules
Data Item\Security Rules
User class must be in data
set write list, or
User class must be in data
set read list and pass data
item security.
User class must be in read or
write list.
2, 5, 6, 7, or
8
User class must be in data
set read or write list and
pass data item security.
User class must be in read or
write list.
1, 3, or 4
User class must be in data
set write list, or
User class must be in data
set read list and pass data
item security.
User class must be in write
list.
2
User class must be in data
set read or write list and
pass data item security.
User class must be in write
list.
1, 3, 4
User class must be in data
set write list.
In summary, the database designer can grant access to a data set in the following ways:
• Specify the user class number in the data set read class list (or omit both read
and write lists entirely). This grants the user class read access to the data set that is
controlled at the data item level as described later. If both read and write class lists are
absent, the user class is granted this type of access because the lists are (0,1,2,...63/) by
default. Opening the database in access mode 2, 5, 6, 7, or 8 is the same as specifying
the user class number in the data set read class list only.
• Specify the user class number in the data set write class list. If the database is
opened in access mode 1, 3, or 4, this grants the user class complete access to the data
set. Users in this class can add and delete entries, update the value of any data item,
and read any item, regardless of the data item read and write class lists. Master data
set key item values cannot be updated. Detail data set search or sort item values can be
updated if permitted by the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option settings for the
database and the current process. A user class number must be in the data set write list
in order to add and delete entries. For information about critical item update
(CIUPDATE), refer to chapter 4.
• Exclude the user class number from both the specified read and write class
lists of the data set. This denies the user class any type of access to the data set.
Chapter 2
55
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Assuming the database designer has granted only read access at the data set level as
summarized above, control at the data item level is established in the following ways:
• Specify the user class number in the data item read class list (or omit both read
and write class lists entirely). This grants the user class read access to the data item.
• Specify the user class number in the data item write class list. This grants the
user class the ability to update or change the data item value. Master data set key item
values cannot be updated. Detail data set search or sort item values can be updated in
database access mode 1, 3, or 4 if permitted by the critical item update (CIUPDATE)
option settings for the database and the current process. Because the user class is
implied to be in the read class list, the user class can also read the item. A user class
number must be in the data item write list in order to update the value.
• Exclude the user class number from both the specified read and write class
lists of the data item. This denies the user class any type of access to the data item.
The protection of data set and data item values is designed so that the database designer
must explicitly specify the user class number to allow that class to make any type of
change to the database. Read access can be granted by default in some situations, for
example, by omitting the lists entirely (also known as absent lists). To deny read access to
a data set or data item, the database designer must specify a list and deliberately exclude
the user class number.
Figure 2-8. provides a security flowchart. The database has been opened in modify access
mode 1, 3, or 4; these are the only allowable access modes for CIUPDATE which allows
update of detail data set search and sort items. As you read the flowchart, consider the
following examples based on the sample ORDERS database:
• Only user classes 11 and 18 can add and delete CUSTOMER data entries because these
are the only user class numbers in the data set write list as shown earlier in Table 2-2..
To do so, they must open the database in access mode 1, 3, or 4.
• User class 14 can update the CREDIT-RATING data item in the CUSTOMER data set
because it is in the data item write list and the data set read list. To do so, the database
must be opened in access mode 1, 2, 3, or 4.
56
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Figure 2-8. Security Flowchart
Chapter 2
57
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
Table 2-4. contains more illustrations of the effects of read and write class lists. These are
general examples that are not based on the ORDERS database shown in this manual.
Note that these examples take into account the effects of the access mode in which the
database is opened. The database creator and user class 9 (in access mode 1, 3, or 4) have
complete access to data set 1, but only the creator has complete access to data set 2.
Complete access includes the ability to add and delete entries, read all items, and update
the values of all items with the following exceptions. Master data set key item values
cannot be updated. Detail data set search and sort item values can be updated only in
database access mode 1, 3, or 4, and only if permitted by the CIUPDATE option settings for
the database and the current process. Note that except where user class 9 is specifically
identified in a read and write class list, user class 9 has complete access to data set 1 only
when the database access mode is 1, 3, or 4.
Table 2-4. Sample Read and Write Class Lists
Data Item
Read/Write List
Item Read Access
Item Update Accessa
Data Set 1 (0,18,13/9)
A
0,13,18,9
9b
B
(13/)
13,9
9
C
(/)
9
9
D
(/19)
9
9
E
(18/13)
13,18,9
13,9
F
(/13,18)
13,18,9
13,18,9
G
(12/0)
0,9
0,9
H
(13/)
13,9
9
Data Set 2c
A
I
0,1,. . .,63
(13/9)
13,9
9
a. User has access only if the database access mode is 1, 2, 3, or 4. For access modes 1, 3,
and 4, the CIUPDATE option settings for the database and the current process need to
permit updates of any items that are detail data set search or sort items.
b. User has access only if the database access mode is 1, 3, or 4. For update access, the
CIUPDATE option settings for the database and the current process need to permit
updates of any items that are detail data set search or sort items.
c. Data set 2 has an absent list. The database creator has full access to the data set if the
database access mode is 1, 3, or 4. If the database is opened in access mode 2, the user
has item update access to all items, except master data set key items or detail data set
search and sort items even if the CIUPDATE option settings for the database and the
current process permit updates of search and sort item values.
58
Chapter 2
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
User Classes and Locking
TurboIMAGE/XL does not consider user classes when locking a database entity. Any data
set or any data item can be referenced in a lock request by any user of a database
regardless of his or her user class.
Protection in Relation to Library Procedures
All access to a database is achieved through database control blocks that reside in
privileged MPE/iX files which are not directly accessible to database users. Because no
user process can read or modify these control blocks, TurboIMAGE/XL guarantees
protection of the database from unauthorized programmatic access. Refer to the detailed
description of these control blocks in chapter 10. For more information about MPE/iX files
and privileged mode, refer to the MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual.
All TurboIMAGE/XL library procedures that structurally modify the database execute in
critical mode. This defers any requested process termination while modifications are in
progress. If any file system failures occur during such database modification,
TurboIMAGE/XL causes process termination because the database integrity is
questionable.
The Database Buffer Area Control Block (DBB) contains pointers to the data set blocks
that are used to transfer data (see chapter 10 for additional information). All data set
blocks whose contents are changed, reflecting a modification of the database, are always
logged by an internal MPE/iX service called Transaction Management (XM) before the
library procedure returns to the calling program. This guarantees database integrity
despite any program termination that might occur between successive procedure calls.
However, deferred output (AUTODEFER) allows the user to override this scheme. When
AUTODEFER is enabled, the database does not use MPE/iX Transaction Management.
Instead, AUTODEFER uses the MPE/iX file system default recovery mode. This mode keeps
data pages in memory for as long as possible until file close time. In this mode, a system
failure can cause the loss of database integrity. For more information about AUTODEFER,
refer to the >>ENABLE command of DBUTIL in chapter 8.
Protection Provided by the TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities
The TurboIMAGE/XL utilities perform various checks to ensure database integrity:
• They acquire exclusive or semi-exclusive access to the database being processed.
(Chapter 4 contains more information about types of access in the discussion of opening
a database.)
• Only the database creator or a user supplying the correct maintenance word can
execute the utilities. The database creator defines the maintenance word when the
database is created with the DBUTIL utility (refer to chapter 8). In addition, anyone
without system manager (SM) capability intending to use the DBUTIL >>SHOW
command or anyone running the utilities other than DBRECOV must be logged on to the
group in which the database resides (refer to chapter 8).
If no maintenance word is defined, only the database creator can execute the utilities.
The exception to this rule is that a user with system manager (SM) capability can use
the DBUTIL >>SHOW command on any database without having to supply the
Chapter 2
59
Database Structure and Protection
Protecting the Database
maintenance word.
• Unrecoverable disk or tape problems are treated as functional failures rather than
limited successes and result in program termination.
60
Chapter 2
Defining a Database
3 Defining a Database
After the database has been designed, it must be described with the database description
language and processed by the Schema Processor to create the root file. Figure 3-1.
illustrates the steps in defining the database.
Figure 3-1. Database Definition Process
Chapter 3
61
Defining a Database
Database Description Language
Database Description Language
The database description, called a schema, can exist in the MPE/iX system as an ASCII
file. Regardless of the actual physical record size of the file, the Schema Processor reads,
prints, and processes only the first 72 characters of each record. Any remaining character
positions in the record are available for your convenience, to be used for comments or
collating information. The database description language is a free-format language; you
can insert blanks anywhere in the schema to improve its appearance, except within
symbolic names and reserved words.
Language Conventions
The conventions used in describing the database language are the same as those described
on the conventions page at the beginning of this manual. In addition, these conventions
apply.
Table 3-1. Additional Conventions
Convention
Punctuation
Comments
Description
All punctuation appearing in format statements must appear exactly as
shown.
Comments take this form: <<comment>>
Comments can contain any characters and can appear anywhere in the
schema except embedded in another comment. They are included in the
schema listing but are otherwise ignored by the Schema Processor program.
Data Names
Data names can consist of from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters, the first of
which must be alphabetic. Characters after the first must be chosen from this
set:
Letters A through Z, digits 0 through 9, or + − * / ? ‘ # % & @
Upshifting
All alphabetic input to the Schema Processor is upshifted (converted to
uppercase) with the exception of passwords which can contain lowercase
characters. Because the Schema Processor upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this if the programming language you use does not
require uppercase characters.
Schema Structure
The overall schema structure is:
BEGIN DATABASE database name[,LANGUAGE: language];
PASSWORDS: password part
ITEMS: item part
SETS: set part
62
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Database Description Language
END.
The database name is an alphanumeric string from 1 to 6 characters. The first character
must be alphabetic.
The language is the native language definition name or number for the database. Refer to
the Native Language Support Programmer's Guide for further information. The default
language is NATIVE-3000 which uses the US ASCII character set.
NOTE
When using DBLOAD, the database language must match the language ID
stored in the backup media. If they do not match, DBLOAD will give you a
warning message in a session, and if you reply Y, the DBLOAD will continue.
However, in a job, DBLOAD does not load the database.
The password part, item part, and set part are described on the following pages. Figure 3-5.
contains a complete schema for the ORDERS database used in the examples in this
manual.
Chapter 3
63
Defining a Database
Password Part
Password Part
The password part defines user classes and passwords. Chapter 2 contains a description of
user classes and how they are used to protect data elements from unauthorized access.
Syntax
user class number [password];
.
.
.
user class number [password];
Parameters
user class number is an integer between 1 and 63, inclusive. User class numbers must be
unique within the password part.
password
contains from 1 to 8 ASCII characters including lowercase characters and
excluding carriage return, slash, semicolon, and blank. Blanks are
removed by the Schema Processor and are not counted in the password
length. If you include blanks in your password, the following message is
displayed:
BLANKS HAVE BEEN REMOVED
Example
11
12
14
CREDIT;
BUYER;
CLERK;
Description
If the same password is assigned to multiple user class numbers, the highest numbered
class is used. It is not an error to omit the password, but the Schema Processor ignores
lines containing only a user class number.
64
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Item Part
Item Part
The item part defines data items including the data item name, length, and the user
classes that have access to the item. The data set(s) in which the data item appears is
defined in the set part definition.
Syntax
item name, [sub-item count] type designator [sub-item length]
[(read class list/write class list)];
Parameters
item name
is the data item name. It must be a valid TurboIMAGE/XL data name as
described earlier in Table 3-1.. It must be unique within the item part.
sub-item count is an integer from 1 to 255 that denotes the number of sub-items within an
item. If omitted, the sub-item-count equals one by default. A data item
whose sub-item count is 1 is a simple item. If the sub-item count is greater
than 1, it is a compound item.
type designator defines the form in which a sub-item value is represented in the computer.
The type designators E, I, J, K, P, R, U, X, and Z are described in Table 3-2.
in the section "Data Item Length."
sub-item length is an integer from 1 to 255. It is the number of halfwords, bytes, or nibbles
(depending on the type designator) in a sub-item. If omitted, it is equal to 1
by default.
read class list
is a group of user class numbers between 0 and 63, inclusive, separated by
commas. User class numbers are described in chapter 2.
write class list is a group of user class numbers between 0 and 63, inclusive, separated by
commas. User class numbers are described in chapter 2.
Example
FIRST-NAME, X10 (12,14/11);
Description
There can be no more than 1023 data items in a database. A data item name can appear in
more than one data set definition. For example, a data item named ACCOUNT appears in
both the CUSTOMER and SALES data sets of the ORDERS database. The complete
ORDERS database schema appears at the end of this chapter.
Data Item Length
Each data item value is allotted a storage location whose length is equal to the product of
the item's sub-item length and its sub-item count. The unit of measure for the length
Chapter 3
65
Defining a Database
Item Part
depends upon the type designator and can be a halfword, a byte, or a nibble. A halfword
is 16 bits, a byte is eight bits, and a nibble is four bits or a half-byte.
NOTE
In this manual, a word is a 32-bit storage unit and a halfword is a 16-bit
storage unit. One byte is 8-bits.
Table 3-2. describes the type designators and the unit of measure used for each.
Table 3-2. Type Designators
Unit
Halfword
Bits
16-bit
Type\
Designator
Description
E
A real (IEEE floating point) number.
I
A signed binary integer in 2's complement form.
J
Same as I, but QUERY/3000 allows only numbers
conforming to specifications for COBOL II
COMPUTATIONAL data to be entered.
K
An absolute binary quantity (no negative values).
R
A real (HP 3000 floating point) number.
Nibble
4-bit
P
A packed decimal number.
Byte
8-bit
U
An ASCII character string containing no lowercase
alphabetic characters.
X
An unrestricted ASCII character string.
Z
A zoned decimal format number.
A data item must be an integral number of halfwords in length regardless of the type
designator and its unit of measure. In other words, data items of type P, which are
measured in nibbles, must have a sub-item length and sub-item count such that their
product is evenly divisible by 4, because 4 nibbles equal 1 halfword. Data items of type U,
X, or Z, which are measured in bytes, must have a sub-item length and sub-item count
such that their product is an even number. If a data item is defined as U3, it cannot be a
simple item and must have an even numbered sub-item count so that the data item length
is an integral number of halfwords.
A data item cannot exceed 2047 halfwords in length. The entire item, whether simple or
compound, is always handled as a unit by TurboIMAGE/XL.
TurboIMAGE/XL and Program Language Data Types
The type designator, sub-item count, and sub-item length you specify for a data item
defines its length. TurboIMAGE/XL does not perform any conversions of data or examine
the item to check its validity as it is being added to the database. The only data item
values that TurboIMAGE/XL checks are those specified as part of a lock descriptor in calls
to the DBLOCK procedure. Refer to the discussion on DBLOCK in chapter 5. There are no rules
requiring that a specific type of data defined by a programming language must be stored in
66
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Item Part
a specific type of TurboIMAGE/XL data item. However, for consistency, R-type items are
recommended for storing item values in HP 3000 real format and E-type items are
recommended for storing values in IEEE format.
Table 3-3. relates TurboIMAGE/XL type designators and sub-item lengths to the data
types typically used to process them in the available programming languages.
Note that the UNIT-COST item (P8) in the INVENTORY data set is easier to process with
COBOL II or RPG programs than with the other languages because packed data is a
standard data type in COBOL II and RPG. An actual database can be designed so that
some data sets are processed by programs coded in one language and others by programs
coded in another language. Another data set can be conveniently processed by programs
written in any of the languages.
Table 3-3. TurboIMAGE/XL Data Types and Programming Languages
Data\
Type
BBASIC
C
E2
Short
real
E4
FORTRAN
77
Pascal
float
Real
Real
Real
double
Double
precision
Longreala
I
Short
integer
short int
Computational
S9 to S9(4)
Integer*2
−32768..32767
[subrange]
Binary
I2
Integer
int
Computational
S9(5) to S9(9)
Integer*4
Integer
Binary
Longint
Binary
I4
COBOL II
Computational
S9(10) to S9(18)
RPG
J
Short
integer
short int
Computational
S9 to S9(4)
Integer*2
−32768..32767
[subrange]
Binary
J2
Integer
int
Computational
S9(5) to S9(9)
Integer*4
Integer
Binary
Longint
Binary
J4
K1
Computational
S9(10) to S9(18)
unsigned
short
Knb
Logical
0..65535
[subrange]
Logical
Integerc
P4
char[2]
Computational-3
S9(3)
Packed array
[1..2] of charc
P8
char[4]
Computational-3
S9(7)
Packed array
[1..4] of charc
Pn
Chapter 3
Computational-3
S9(n-1)
Numeric
67
Defining a Database
Item Part
Table 3-3. TurboIMAGE/XL Data Types and Programming Languages
Data\
Type
BBASIC
R2d
FORTRAN
77
Pascal
Short
real
Real
Real
R4d
Real
Double
precision
Longreala
U
String
char
Display Picture A
Character
Char
[subrange]
Character
X
String
char
Display Picture X
Character
Char
Character
char[n]
Display Picture
X(n)
Xn
C
COBOL II
Z
Display Picture
S9
Zn
Display Picture
S9(n)
RPG
Packed array
[1..n] of char
Character
Packed array
[1..n] of charc
a. The Pascal long real is an extension for double-word floating point.
b. For data type Kn, n is a length qualifier ranging from 2 to 255, inclusive. Note that,
although the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, allows you to define a Kn data type, not all
languages support it. Be sure to select an appropriate data type based on your
programming language and report writer requirements.
c. These Pascal declarations provide correct storage allocation.
d. The Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, allows you to define an E or R data type ranging in
length from 1 to 255, inclusive. However, not all languages support these data types. Be
sure to select an appropriate data type based on your programming language and report
writer requirements. Compiler options are usually required to choose between HP 3000
floating point and IEEE reals. Be sure your program is compiled correctly and check your
data values with QUERY/3000.
Data Items of Type P
The bits used to represent the sign of a packed decimal value can vary depending on
whether the value is entered using QUERY/3000, a COBOL II program, or an RPG
program. Here is a summary of what happens in each case:
• For values entered using QUERY/3000:
NO sign specified: Sign is 11112
PLUS sign specified: Sign is 11002
MINUS sign specified: Sign is 11012
• For values entered using COBOL II:
PICTURE clause specifies NO sign: Sign is 11112
PICTURE clause specifies PLUS sign: Sign is 11002
68
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Item Part
PICTURE clause specifies MINUS sign: Sign is 11012
• For values entered using RPG:
NO sign or PLUS specified: Sign is 11002
MINUS sign specified: Sign is 11012
When using TurboIMAGE/XL to locate all packed data items with a particular value (as
described under "DBLOCK" in chapter 5), you must be aware that TurboIMAGE/XL
differentiates between unsigned, positive, and negative data items with the same absolute
value. For example, if you search for all data items with the value +2, TurboIMAGE/XL
will not retrieve any items with the unsigned value 2.
In general, TurboIMAGE/XL treats any two values with different binary representations
as unequal regardless of their type.
Complex Numbers
Applications programmed in BBASIC or FORTRAN 77 can define and manipulate complex
numbers by using data type R2 with a sub-item count of 2, storing the real part in the first
sub-item and the imaginary part in the second sub-item.
Business BASIC Decimal Numbers
BBASIC decimal numbers should be stored as K2 or K4 data types if QUERY/3000 is to be
used on the decimal numbers. QUERY/3000 processes these decimals via a run-time
parameter.
QUERY/3000 and Data Types
QUERY/3000 supports only a subset of the available data item types. If you intend to use
QUERY/3000, you should consult the QUERY/V Reference Manual for specific information
about the way QUERY/3000 handles the various TurboIMAGE/XL data types, including
compound data items.
Data Item Identifiers
When using the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures described in the chapter 5, you can reference
a data item by name or number. The data item number is determined by the item's
position in the item part of the schema. The first item defined is item 1, the second is item
2, and so forth.
It is more flexible to use data item names because a change in the order of the item
definitions or deleting an item definition from the schema might require changes to all
application programs referencing the data items by number. Thus, to maintain program
file independence, it is recommended that you use data item names if possible.
Chapter 3
69
Defining a Database
Item Part
Table 3-4. shows examples of item parts.
Table 3-4. Examples of an Item Part
Item Example
Description
A,I2;
32-bit signed integer.
MELVIN,3I(1,20/44);
Compound item. Three single halfword signed integers. Read
classes are 1 and 20; write class is 44. (Write classes can also read.)
BLEVET,J;
Single halfword signed integer between −9999 ανδ 9999 (ΧΟΒΟΛ ΙΙ).
COSTS,2X10;
Compound item. Two 10-character ASCII strings.
DATE,X6;
Six-character ASCII string.
VALUES,20R2(1/8);
Compound item. 20 two-halfword real (HP 3000 floating point)
numbers. Read class is 1; write class is 8. (Write classes can also
read.)
PURCHASE-MONTH,U8;
Eight-character ASCII string with no lowercase alphabetics.
MASK,K2;
32-bit absolute binary quantity.
TEMPERATURE,17R4;
Compound item. 17 four-halfword real (HP 3000 floating point)
numbers.
SNOW*#@,Z4;
Four-digit zoned decimal (numeric display) number.
POPULATION,P12;
Eleven decimal digits plus a sign in the low order nibble. Occupies
three halfwords.
ATOMIC-WEIGHT,E4;
64-bit IEEE real.
70
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Set Part
Set Part
The set part of the schema defines data sets. It indicates which data items listed in the
item part belong to which sets and links the master data sets to the detail data sets by
specifying key and search items. In addition, it defines security at the set level and at the
item level within each data set.
Master Data Sets
The set part syntax and parameters for master data sets are provided below.
Syntax
{NAME:
N:
}set name,{M[ANUAL]
A[UTOMATIC]}[/INDEXED] [(read class list/write class list)]
[,device class];
{ENTRY:
E:
} item name [(path count)],
.
.
.
item name;
{CAPACITY:
C:
}maximum capacity [(blocking factor)][,initial capacity
[,increment]
];
Parameters
set name
is the data set name. It must be a valid TurboIMAGE/XL data name as
described earlier in "Data Sets" in chapter 2 and in the discussion of the
DBUTIL >>CREATE command in chapter 8. A maximum of 199 data sets,
including both masters and details, is allowed.
MANUAL (or M)
denotes a manual master data set. Each entry within a manual master
must be created manually and can contain one or more data items.
AUTOMATIC (or A) denotes an automatic master data set. Each data entry within an
automatic master is created automatically by TurboIMAGE/XL and
contains only one data item.
/INDEXED
denotes that a B-Tree index is desired for the master data set key item.
read class list
is a group of user class numbers between 0 and 63, inclusive, separated by
commas. User class numbers are described in chapter 2.
write class list is a group of user class numbers between 0 and 63, inclusive, separated by
commas. User class numbers are described in chapter 2.
device class
Chapter 3
is the class name of the MPE/iX device on which the data set resides. The
device must be a member of the volume set on which the database resides.
71
Defining a Database
Set Part
item name
is the name of a data item defined in the item part.
path count
is an integer between 0 and 16, inclusive, which is used with the key item
only. It indicates the number of paths that will be established to various
detail data sets. Refer to chapter 2 for more information about paths. A
path count must be specified for one, and only one, item in the master set.
A zero path count can be used with a manual master data item to indicate
the key item. A manual master defined in this way is not linked to any
detail data set. An automatic master has one item that must have a path
count greater than zero.
maximum capacity is the maximum number of entries the data set can contain: that is,
the data set's capacity. It must be less than or equal to 231 −1
(2,147,483,647) and is limited by the size of the entry as well as the
maximum size of an MPE/iX file, jumbo or non-jumbo.
For non-jumbo data sets, if the capacity expansion parameter, initial
capacity, is specified and is less (not zero) than the maximum capacity, the
data set is enabled for dynamic expansion. Note that specifying initial
capacity for a jumbo data set will generate an error. When enabled for
dynamic expansion, the maximum capacity is adjusted by
TurboIMAGE/XL to represent an even multiple of the blocking factor.
Otherwise, it remains unchanged.
blocking factor is the number of data set media records in one block. If a value is not
specified, it is calculated by DBSCHEMA.
initial capacity is the initial capacity for the data set, that is, the number of entries for
which space will be allocated and initialized when the data set is created.
This number must be between 1 and 231 −1 inclusive but must be less than
or equal to the maximum capacity. Specifying initial capacity for a jumbo
data set will generate an error. This parameter should be used to closely
approximate the current volume of data. If it is very low, there can be
frequent expansions leading to severe disk fragmentation. If it is very
high, DBPUT may take a long time to complete which could impact other
database users. The initial capacity is adjusted to represent an even
multiple of the blocking factor. Initial capacity is an optional parameter. If
initial capacity is not specified, or if initial capacity is either zero or equal
to the maximum capacity, then dynamic capacity expansion is not enabled
for the data set, and maximum capacity is used for the data set file
creation.
increment
72
is either the number of entries or the percentage of the initial capacity by
which the data set will be expanded each time its initialized space is
exhausted. If a percentage is used, the percent sign (%) must follow the
incremental amount. This increment parameter can only be used if the
initial capacity parameter is also specified. This number must be 1 to
32767 inclusive for percent, or 1 to 231 −1 (2,147,483,647) inclusive for
number of entries. If it is very low, there can be frequent expansions
leading to severe disk fragmentation. If it is very high, DBPUT may take a
long time to complete which could impact other database users.
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Set Part
The number of entries defined, or the entries calculated from the percent,
cannot exceed the maximum entry count minus the initial allocation. The
increment is adjusted to represent an even multiple of the blocking factor.
The increment is an optional parameter. If the increment is not specified
for the data set, or is zero, but the initial capacity is greater than zero,
then the increment for each expansion is defaulted to ten percent (10%) of
the initial capacity for the data set. If the initial capacity is equal to the
maximum capacity, or the initial capacity is zero, then this indicates the
data set cannot be expanded and increment is ignored.
Examples
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
SUP-MASTER,MANUAL /INDEXED (13/12,18),DISC1;
SUPPLIER(1),
STREET-ADD,
CITY,
STATE,
ZIP;
2001,501,20%;
Description
The example also shows the data set SUP-MASTER which will reside on Disc1. Assigning
the device class where a data set will reside can provide greater performance for the
TurboIMAGE/XL database and can aid in better use of system resources. An
understanding of how to spread the data sets over multiple disk devices can be obtained
from your system manager. Your system manager will be able to give you a listing of logical
devices and their corresponding device class names (each logical device can have up to
eight names).
To retrieve information on where each data set resides after specifying device classes in
the schema, you can use the MPE/iX command LISTF,3 (after the database is created).
This command lists the device type, logical device number, and the device class name for
each data set in the database. The DBUTIL >>SHOW command can also be used to display
the devices on which data sets reside.
The data set SUP-MASTER will have a B-Tree index created on the key item, SUPPLIER.
B-Tree DBFINDs can be done using SUPPLIER for SUP-MASTER. Also, B-Tree DBFINDs
will be allowed using all of its corresponding search items in the detail sets. In the above
example, SUPPLIER has only one path. Hence, B-Tree DBFIND can be done using the
related search item and the detail data set. The presence of capacity expansion parameters
indicate that it is enabled for dynamic data set expansion.
The example also shows that the maximum capacity is 2001, the initial capacity is 501,
and the increment is 20%.
Another example is capacity defined as follows:
CAPACITY: 2001,501,25;
The maximum capacity is set at 2001, has an initial capacity of 501, and will be
automatically expanded by 25 when the initialized space is exhausted.
To allow dynamic expansion for a master data set, specify the maximum capacity and the
initial capacity when defining the data set. If dynamic expansion is not needed for the data
Chapter 3
73
Defining a Database
Set Part
set, the maximum capacity is the only required parameter.
Verify that there is enough disk space for a data set to be expanded. Performance may be
impacted by the number of entries incremented when a master data set is dynamically
expanded. The number of disk extents used for the data set file may also impact the
performance of TurboIMAGE/XL.
NOTE
For existing databases, use DBChange Plus or a third-party utility to specify
the expansion parameters.
Detail Data Sets
The set part syntax and parameters for detail data sets are provided below. The maximum
capacity, the initial capacity, and the incremental amount are new parameters for the
detail data set CAPACITY definition. These parameters allow a detail data set to be
expanded dynamically (up to a new maximum capacity specified in the root file) during
DBPUT when the detail data set space is exhausted.
Syntax
{NAME:
N:
}set name, D[ETAIL]][(read class list/write class list)][,device class];
{ENTRY:
E:
} item name [([!] master set name [(sort item name) ])],
.
.
.
item name [( master set name [(sort item name) ])];
{CAPACITY:
C:
}maximum capacity [(blocking factor)][,initial capacity
[,increment]
];
Parameters
set name
is the data set name. It must be a valid TurboIMAGE/XL data name as
defined in "Data Sets" in chapter 2 and in the discussion of the DBUTIL
>>CREATE command in chapter 8. A maximum of 199 data sets, including
both masters and details, is allowed.
DETAIL (or D) denotes a detail data set.
read class list
is a group of user class numbers between 0 and 63, inclusive, separated by
commas. User class numbers are described in chapter 2.
write class list is a group of user class numbers between 0 and 63, inclusive, separated by
commas. User class numbers are described in chapter 2.
device class
is the class name of the MPE/iX device on which the data set resides. The
device must be a member of the volume set on which the database resides.
item name
is the name of a data item defined in the item part. Each item defined as a
search item must be a simple item. Up to 16 items can be search items.
74
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Set Part
(Refer to master set name for more information about search items.)
! (exclamation point) denotes a primary path. Only one path in each detail data set can be
designated as a primary path. If no path is designated as primary, the first
unsorted path is the primary path by default. If all of the paths are sorted,
the default primary path is the first sorted path.
master set name is the name of a previously defined master data set. When a master set
name follows an item name, the data item is a search item linking the
detail set to the named master. Up to 16 search items can be defined for a
detail data set. If no data items have a master name following them, the
detail is not related to any master. In this case, the combined length of all
data items in the data set must equal or exceed two halfwords.
sort item name is the name of a detail data item of type U, K, or X which is a part of the
data set being defined. A sort item defines a sorted path. Each entry added
to a chain of a sorted path will be linked logically in ascending order of the
sort item values. If sort item is omitted, the path order is chronological;
that is, new entries are linked to the end of chains. For performance
reasons, sorted chains should be kept short. (Refer to "Sort Items" in
chapter 2.)
maximum capacity is the maximum number of entries allowed in a data set (data
capacity). It must be less than or equal to 231 −1 (2,147,483,647) and is
limited by the size of the entry as well as the maximum size of a data set,
jumbo or non-jumbo. This number can differ from the number of entries
specified in the schema itself because the capacity of each detail is
adjusted to represent an even multiple of the blocking factor. Selecting a
very large maximum capacity minimizes the chances that the set will run
out of space.
For non-jumbo data sets, if the capacity expansion parameter, initial
capacity, is specified and is less (not zero) than the maximum capacity, the
data set is enabled for dynamic expansion. Note that specifying initial
capacity for a jumbo data set will generate an error.
blocking factor is the number of data set records in one block. If a value is not specified, it
is calculated by DBSCHEMA.
initial capacity is the initial capacity for the data set, that is, the number of entries for
which space will be allocated and initialized when the data set is created.
This number must be between 1 and 231 −1 inclusive but must be less than
or equal to the maximum capacity. Specifying initial capacity for a jumbo
data set will generate an error. This parameter should be used to closely
approximate the current volume of data. If it is very low, there can be
frequent expansions leading to severe disk fragmentation. If it is very
high, DBPUT may take a long time to complete which could impact other
database users. The initial capacity is adjusted to represent an even
multiple of the blocking factor. Initial capacity is an optional parameter. If
initial capacity is not specified, or if initial capacity is either zero or equal
to the maximum capacity, then dynamic capacity expansion is not enabled
for the data set, and maximum capacity is used for the data set file
Chapter 3
75
Defining a Database
Set Part
creation.
increment
is either the number of entries or the percentage of the initial capacity by
which the data set will be expanded each time its initialized space is
exhausted. If a percentage is used, the percent sign (%) must follow the
incremental amount. This increment parameter can only be used if the
initial capacity parameter is also specified. This number must be 1 to
32767 inclusive for percent, or 1 to 231 −1 (2,147,483,647) inclusive for
number of entries. If it is very low, there can be frequent expansions
leading to severe disk fragmentation. If it is very high, DBPUT may take a
long time to complete which could impact other database users.
The number of entries defined, or the entries calculated from the percent,
cannot exceed the maximum entry count minus the initial allocation. The
increment is adjusted to represent an even multiple of the blocking factor.
The increment is an optional parameter. If the increment is not specified
for the data set, or is zero, but the initial capacity is greater than zero,
then the increment for each expansion is defaulted to ten percent (10%) of
the initial capacity for the data set. If the initial capacity is equal to the
maximum capacity, or the initial capacity is zero, then this indicates the
data set cannot be expanded and increment is ignored.
Example
NAME:
ENTRY:
SALES,DETAIL(11/14,18),DISC1;
ACCOUNT(CUSTOMER(PURCH-DATE)),
STOCK#(!PRODUCT),
QUANTITY,
PRICE,
TAX,
TOTAL,
PURCH-DATE (DATE-MASTER),
DELIV-DATE (DATE-MASTER);
CAPACITY: 1008,504,112;
Description
The example above shows the detail data set SALES which will reside on Disc1. The
maximum capacity is 1008, the initial capacity is 504, and the increment is 112.
Another example is a detail data set defined as follows:
CAPACITY: 500000(10),10000,25%;
The maximum capacity is set at 500000 with a blocking factor of 10. It has an initial
capacity of 10000, but will be automatically expanded by 2500 when the initialized space is
exhausted. Since the incremental amount is defined as a percent, the percent is calculated
as a constant number based on the initial (or original) capacity (25% of 10000 is 2500.)
To allow dynamic expansion for a detail data set, specify the maximum capacity and the
initial capacity when defining the data set. If dynamic expansion is not needed for the data
set, the maximum capacity is the only required parameter.
Verify that there is enough disk space for a data set to be expanded. Performance may be
impacted by the number of entries incremented when a detail data set is dynamically
76
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Set Part
expanded. The number of disk extents used for the data set file may also impact the
performance of TurboIMAGE/XL.
NOTE
For existing databases, use DBChange Plus or a third-party utility to specify
the expansion parameters.
Master Key and Detail Search Items
The master key items and detail search items (also called critical items) that define a path
between two data sets must have identical type designators and simple sub-item lengths
when they are defined in the item part. The sub-item lengths must be simple because the
key and search items cannot be compound items. Because the same data item name can
appear in more than one data set, you can use the same data item name and definition for
both the master key items and detail search items. For example, the data item ACCOUNT
is used as the key item in the CUSTOMER master and as the search item in the SALES
detail data sets. If you want to make a distinction between the search items, they can be
defined separately. An example of this technique is found in the ORDERS database. The
key item DATE links the DATE-MASTER data set to the SALES data set through two
paths and two search items, PURCH-DATE and DELIV-DATE. These three data items
look like this in the item part:
DATE,
DELIV-DATE,
PURCH-DATE,
X6;
X6 (/14);
X6 (11/14);
Each data item has type designator X and sub-item length 6. However, the item names,
read class lists, and write class lists differ. Figure 3-5. at the end of this chapter contains
the listing printed by the Schema Processor when the ORDERS database schema is
processed. Refer to this figure for examples of the schema parts.
Data Set Identifiers
Similar to data items, data sets can be referenced by name or number. The data set
number is determined by the set's position in the set part of the schema. It is more flexible
to use data set names in order to maintain program file independence.
Chapter 3
77
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Operation
Schema Processor Operation
The Schema Processor is a program that accepts a textfile containing the schema as input,
scans the schema and if no errors are detected, optionally produces a root file. The Schema
Processor prints a heading, an optional list of the schema, and summary information on a
listfile.
The Schema Processor executes as either an MPE/iX job or session. For further
information about sessions and jobs, refer to the MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual.
In either case, you must use the following MPE/iX command to initiate execution of the
Schema Processor:
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS
Table 3-5. lists the formal file designators and default actual file designators that the
Schema Processor uses for the text file and list file. The input/output devices to which
$STDINX and $STDLIST refer depend upon the way the system is generated. However,
$STDINX is the standard job or session input device and $STDLIST is the standard job or
session output device.
Table 3-5. Schema Processor Files
File
Use
Formal File
Designator
Default Actual File
Designator
textfile
Schema and Schema Processor commands
DBSTEXT
$STDINX
listfile
Output listing
DBSLIST
$STDLIST
If you want to equate these files to some other actual file designator, you can use the
MPE/iX FILE command. If a FILE command is included in the job stream, you must inform
the Schema Processor of this in the RUN command in the following way:
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS;PARM=n
where:
n = 1 if an actual file designator has been equated to DBSTEXT.
n = 2 if an actual file designator has been equated to DBSLIST.
n = 3 if actual file designators have been equated to both DBSTEXT and DBSLIST.
NOTE
78
Parm equals 1 or 3 is recommended for large schema files.
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Operation
Table 3-6. shows sample combinations of MPE/iX RUN and FILE commands that can be
used to initiate DBSCHEMA execution.
Table 3-6. Examples of RUN and FILE Commands
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS
Uses all default files. Prompts for lines of schema in
session mode.
:FILE DBSTEXT=ORDERSSC
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS;PARM=1
Processes schema from a user disk text file named
ORDERSSC. Outputs listing to $STDLIST.
:FILE DBSLIST;DEV=LP
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS;PARM=2
Prompts for lines of schema and outputs the listing to a
line printer.
:FILE DBSTEXT=ORDERSSC
:FILE DBSLIST=ORDERLST
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS;PARM=3
Processes schema from user text file named ORDERSSC;
outputs the listing to a disk text file named ORDERLST.
Only the first 72 characters of each text file record are processed.
If the schema is error-free, a root file is created, given the same name as the one specified
for the database in the schema, initialized, and saved as a catalogued disk file. To process
the schema without creating a root file, use the NOROOT option of the $CONTROL
command. For more information, refer to "Schema Processor Commands" later in this
chapter.
Creating the Text File
A convenient method for creating the input file is to use a text editor, for example,
EDIT/3000, to enter the commands and schema in a disk file.
Figure 3-2. illustrates this process in a sample session that also executes the Schema
Processor. The example shown in Figure 3-2. uses EDIT/3000.
The steps to follow are listed below and correspond to the numbers in Figure 3-2.
1. Initiate an MPE/iX session by logging on with the appropriate user name and account.
2. Initiate text editor execution. Enter an Editor ADD command in response to the first
prompt.
3. Enter Schema Processor commands and the schema itself into records of the Editor
work file.
4. Save the work file in a disk file named ORDERSSC. Then terminate the Editor.
5. Use the MPE/iX FILE command to equate the formal file designator DBSLIST to the
line printer and DBSTEXT to the disk file ORDERSSC.
6. Initiate execution of DBSCHEMA and indicate that the text file and list file have been
defined in FILE commands. When the Schema Processor has finished processing the
schema, it prints the number of error messages and verifies that the root file has been
created.
Chapter 3
79
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Operation
The Schema Processor can also be executed in batch mode. See "Schema Processor
Commands" later in this chapter.
Figure 3-2. Sample Schema Creation Session
1
2
3
4
5
6
:HELLO USER.ACCOUNT
HP3000 RELEASE: B.30.00
...
TUE, SEP 10, 1991, 1:49 PM
MPE/iX HP31900 B.08.14 Copyright (C) Hewlett-Packard 1987.
:EDITOR
HP32201A.00.00
EDIT/3000
TUE, SEP 10, 1991, 2:07 PM
(C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1985
/ADD
1 $PAGE "SCHEMA OF DATA BASE ORDERS"
2 $CONTROL ERRORS=5, BLOCKMAX=256
3 BEGIN DATABASE ORDERS;
.
.
.
59 END.
60 //
...
KEEP ORDERSSC
/EXIT
:FILE DBSLIST;DEV=LP
:FILE DBSTEXT=ORDERSSC
:RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS;PARM=3
HP30391C.03.02
NUMBER OF ERROR MESSAGES: 0
ROOT FILE ORDERS CREATED
END OF PROGRAM
:BYE
...
The Database Creator
The person who creates the root file is identified as the database creator and can
subsequently create and initialize the database. To do so, the database creator must log on
with the same account, user name, and group used to create the root file and execute the
TurboIMAGE/XL utility program DBUTIL. This program is described in chapter 8.
80
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Commands
Schema Processor Commands
TurboIMAGE/XL provides several commands that you can use anywhere in the schema to
specify options available while processing the schema. The commands are: $PAGE,
$TITLE, and $CONTROL. The dollar sign ($) must always be the first character of the record,
immediately followed by the command name, which must be completely spelled out.
If a parameter list is included with the command, it must be separated from the command
name by at least one blank. Parameters are separated from each other by commas. Blanks
can be freely inserted between items in the parameter list.
Command records cannot contain comments.
Figure 3-3. illustrates the order of commands and other input required when executing the
Schema Processor in batch mode. The job can also be stored in a disk file and executed
from a terminal.
Figure 3-3. Schema Processor Batch Job Stream
!JOB USER.ACCOUNT
!RUN DBSCHEMA.PUB.SYS
$PAGE
$TITLE
$CONTROL
BEGIN DATABASE B;
.
.
.
!EOJ
← Job command
← Run command
← Schema Processor commands (optional)
← Schema
← EOJ command
Continuation Records
To continue a command to the next record, use an ampersand (&) as the last non-blank
character in the current record. The following record must begin with a $. The records are
combined and the $ and & are deleted and replaced by one blank character. A command
name or parameter cannot be broken by &. Characters beyond the 72nd character of each
record are ignored.
Chapter 3
81
Defining a Database
$PAGE
$PAGE
The $PAGE command causes the list file to eject to the top of the next page, print
character-strings that you can optionally specify, and skip two more lines before continuing
the listing.
Syntax
$PAGE [["character-string"],...]
Parameters
character-string is a list of characters enclosed in quotation marks. When the
command is executed, the quotation marks are stripped and the
character-strings are concatenated. A quotation mark within a
character-string is specified by a pair of quotation marks.
Example
$PAGE
"ORDERS DATABASE SCHEMA", "VERSION 3"
$PAGE "MASTER DATA SETS"&
$,"ACCOUNTING APPLICATION"
$PAGE
Description
The $PAGE command is effective only if the LIST option of the $CONTROL command is on.
The LIST option is on by default until a $CONTROL command sets NOLIST. The $PAGE
command itself is not listed.
The contents of the character-strings replace those specified by a previous $PAGE or $TITLE
command. If no character-strings are specified, the character-strings specified in the
preceding $PAGE or $TITLE command, if any, are printed at the top of the next page.
82
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
$TITLE
$TITLE
The $TITLE command specifies a list of characters to be printed each time a heading is
printed on a new page. It does not cause a page eject.
Syntax
$TITLE [["character-string"],...]
Parameters
character-string is a list of characters enclosed in quotation marks. When the
command is executed, the quotation marks are stripped and the
character-strings are concatenated. A quotation mark within a
character-string is specified by a pair of quotation marks.
Example
$TITLE"""PRELIM""ORDERS DATABASE"
$TITLE "ORDERS DATABASE SCHEMA
JULY, 1991"
Description
The $TITLE command can be overridden by a subsequent $TITLE or $PAGE command. If no
character-string is specified, no title is printed after the command is encountered until
another $TITLE or $PAGE command specifies one.
Chapter 3
83
Defining a Database
$CONTROL
$CONTROL
The $CONTROL command allows you to specify options in relation to processing the schema.
Syntax
$CONTROL [LIST
NOLIST] [,ERRORS=nnn][,LINES=nnnn][,ROOT
,NOROOT]
[,BLOCKMAX=nnnn] [,TABLE
,NOTABLE] [,JUMBO
,NOJUMBO]
[, ODDPALLOWED]
Parameters
LIST
causes each source record of the schema to be printed on the list file.
NOLIST
specifies that only source records with errors be printed on the list file. An
error message is printed after these records.
ERRORS=nnn
sets the maximum number of errors to nnn. If more than nnn errors are
detected, the Schema Processor terminates. nnn can have a value between
0 and 999, inclusive. The default value is 100.
LINES=nnnnn
sets the number of lines per page on the list file to nnnnn which can be
between 4 and 32767, inclusive. The default value is 60 if the list file is a
line printer and 32767 if it is not.
ROOT
causes the Schema Processor to create a root file if no errors are detected
in the schema. This is the default.
NOROOT
prevents the Schema Processor from creating a root file.
BLOCKMAX=nnnn sets the maximum physical block length (in halfwords) for any data set in
the database. nnnn can have a value between 128 and 2560, inclusive. The
default value is 512. This is an important parameter and is discussed in
detail in the section "Selecting the Block Size."
TABLE
causes the Schema Processor to write a table of summary information
about the data sets to the list file device if no errors are detected. This is
the default.
NOTABLE
suppresses the TABLE option.
JUMBO
allows a data set, defined following this option whose capacity is greater
than 4 GB, to automatically become a jumbo data set.
NOJUMBO
disallows data sets, defined following this option, to be jumbo data sets.
ODDPALLOWED
DBSCHEMA will return an error if the sub-item length of the P data type
is an odd number. Use this option to bypass the checking. However, the
product of the sub-item length and sub-item count still needs to be evenly
divisible by 4.
84
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
$CONTROL
Description
The default parameters are LIST, ROOT, TABLE, and NOJUMBO. If no $CONTROL command
is used, the results are the same as if the following $CONTROL command is used:
$CONTROL LIST,ERRORS=100,LINES=60,ROOT,BLOCKMAX=512,TABLE
The parameters can be placed in any order but must be separated by commas.
To specify a jumbo data set, the JUMBO option must be included in the schema before
defining any jumbo data sets. Then any data set whose capacity is greater than 4 GB
automatically becomes a Jumbo data set. If the JUMBO option is not specified, an error is
generated for the data sets exceeding the 4 GB limit. Use the NOJUMBO option to turn off
the jumbo feature.
DBSTORE does not store jumbo data sets; instead use
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup using ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option.
NOTE
Use only third-party utilities and diagnostic tools that are enhanced to
handle Jumbo data sets.
Selecting the Block Size
The data set records are transferred from the disk to memory in 4096-byte pages in
TurboIMAGE/XL blocks. The block format is described in chapter 10. When you specify a
maximum block size with the $CONTROL command, you should consider:
• Efficient disk space utilization.
• Localizing the block's bit map to the actual data entries within a 4096-byte page.
The Schema Processor determines the number of data records that fit in a block. Note that
DBSCHEMA chooses a block size (less than or equal to the maximum block size) that makes
the best use of disk space, and which can be substantially less than the maximum block
size specified by $CONTROL BLOCKMAX (or the default of 512 halfwords). If the record size is
greater than 512 halfwords, BLOCKMAX must be set greater than or equal to the record size.
A certain amount of tuning may be necessary to determine the best block size. In general,
the default block size of 512 halfwords yields reasonable performance on TurboIMAGE/XL
and should be changed only when needed.
Chapter 3
85
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
Schema Processor Output
The Schema Processor prints the following heading on the first page of the listing:
PAGE 1
HEWLETT-PACKARD 30391C.05.00 TurboIMAGE/3000: DBSCHEMA
MON, JAN 10, 1994, 3:32 PM (C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1987
If your standard output device ($STDLIST) is different from the list file, an abbreviated
product identification is also printed on $STDLIST. Subsequent pages of the list file are
headed by a page number, the database name if it has been encountered, and the title most
recently specified by a $TITLE or $PAGE command.
If the LIST option is active, a copy of each record of the schema is sent to the list file.
However, if the text file and list file are the same, as for example they are when you enter
the schema source from your terminal in session mode, the records are not listed. If you
are entering the schema in this way, the Schema Processor prompts for each line of input
with a right angle bracket (>).
Summary Information
After the entire schema has been scanned, several types of summary information can be
printed on the list file.
• If some of the items defined in the item part are not referenced in the set part, and if no
errors are encountered, the message UNREFERENCED ITEMS:list of items is printed to
the list file. The list includes all items defined but not referenced in a data set. Although
they are not considered errors, these extraneous items should be removed to reduce the
size of the tables in the root file and the size of the control blocks used by the library
procedures.
• If no errors are detected in the schema, the Schema Processor prints a table of
summary information about the data sets. Figure 3-4. contains a sample printout of this
information. Figure 3-4. describes the information contained in the summary. The
NOTABLE parameter of the $CONTROL command suppresses printing of this table.
Figure 3-4. Data Set Summary Table
DATA SET
NAME
TYPE
FLD
CNT
PT
CT
ENTR
LGTH
MED
REC
MAXIMUM
CAPACITY
BLK
FAC
BLK
LGTH
DISC
SPACE
EMPLOYEE
Mi 4
1
7
17
500
30
512
72
PROJECT-MASTER M
2
1
10
20
75
19
382
15
LABOR
D
4
2
10
18
20048
28
506
1436
INITIAL CAPACITY: 10024
INCREMENT ENTRIES: 2016
TOTAL DISC SECTORS INCLUDING ROOT:
86
1532
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
Table 3-7. Data Set Summary Table Information
Headings
Description
DATA SET NAME
The name of the data set.
TYPE
A for automatic, M for manual, or D for detail. A small letter "i"
adjacent to the "M" or "A" indicates the data set has a B-Tree
index on the key item.
FLD CNT
The number of data items (fields) in each entry of the data set.
PT CT
Path count. For a master data set, this is the number of paths
specified for the data set key item. For a detail data set, it is the
number of search items defined for the data set.
ENTR LNGTH
The length in halfwords of the data portion of the data entry
(not including any of the TurboIMAGE/XL pointers or structure
information associated with a data entry).
MED REC
The total length in halfwords of a media record of the data set.
This length includes the entry length plus any of the
TurboIMAGE/XL pointers associated with the data entry.
Media records are discussed in chapter 10.
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
The maximum number of entries allowed in the data set. For
master data sets specified for dynamic expansion and for detail
data sets, this number can differ from the number of entries
specified in the schema itself, because the capacity is adjusted
to represent an even multiple of the blocking factor (see below).
BLK FAC
The number of media records that are blocked together for
transfer to and from the disk.
BLK LGTH
The total length in halfwords of the physical block as defined in
BLK FAC. This includes the media records and a bit map. Bit
maps are discussed in chapter 10.
DISC SPACE
The amount of disk space occupied by the MPE/iX file
containing the data set.
INITIAL CAPACITY
The number of entries for which space will be allocated or
initialized when the data set is created.
INCREMENT ENTRIES
The number of entries by which the data set will be expanded
each time its space is exhausted.
TOTAL DISC SECTORS
INCLUDING ROOT: nnnn
The total number of disk sectors that will be occupied by the
database when created using the DBUTIL program.
• Two lines of summary totals are printed on the list file. For example:
NUMBER OF ERROR MESSAGES: 0
ITEM NAME COUNT: 23
DATA SET COUNT:
6
The error count includes both errors in the schema and in the Schema Processor
Chapter 3
87
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
commands. The error count is also sent to $STDLIST if it is different from the list file.
• If no schema syntax or logical errors are encountered, a third line is printed. The form
of this line is:
ROOT LENGTH: r
BUFFER LENGTH: b
TRAILER LENGTH: t
ROOT LENGTH is the length in halfwords of the body of the root file. BUFFER
LENGTH is the length in halfwords of each of the data buffers (unused by
TurboIMAGE/XL but provided for compatibility with TurboIMAGE on MPE V; refer to
the discussion on buffer specifications in appendix H). TRAILER LENGTH is the length
in halfwords of an area in the control block used by TurboIMAGE/XL to transfer
information to and from a calling program's stack.
• If no errors are detected and the ROOT option is active, the following message is sent to
the list file:
ROOT FILE database name CREATED
where database name is the name given in the BEGIN DATABASE statement in the
schema.
• The initial capacity and increment entries are optional parameters. If dynamic
expansion is required, include these parameters when defining the detail data set (See
chapter 3.) For existing databases, use DBChange Plus or other third-party tools you
may be using to specify the expansion parameters.
Schema Errors
When the Schema Processor detects an error, it prints a message to the list file. If the LIST
option is active, it is printed immediately after the offending statement. If NOLIST is
active, the current line of the schema is printed, followed by the error message.
Schema Processor error messages are explained in appendix A. The root file is not created
if any of the listed errors are detected. However, the Schema Processor attempts to
continue checking the schema for logical and syntactical correctness.
One error can obscure detection of subsequent errors, particularly if it occurs early in a
data set. It may be necessary to process the schema again after the error is corrected to
find subsequent errors. Conversely, some errors early in the schema can generate
subsequent apparent errors which will disappear after the original error has been
corrected.
If schema errors prohibit creation of the root file, the following message is sent to the list
file and to $STDLIST if it is not the same as the list file:
PRECEDING ERRORS -- NO ROOT FILE CREATED
A few conditions, including the number of errors exceeding the total number allowed,
cause immediate termination of the Schema Processor without the normal summary lines.
In this case, the following message is printed:
SCHEMA PROCESSING TERMINATED
88
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
Schema Processor Example
Figure 3-5. contains the list file output printed when the schema of the sample ORDERS
database is processed. The database has 5 passwords and contains 23 data item definitions
and 6 data set definitions. The Schema Processor summary information is printed
following the schema.
Figure 3-5. ORDERS Database Schema ORDERS Database Schema
PAGE 1
HEWLETT-PACKARD 30391C.05.00 TurboIMAGE/3000: DBSCHEMA
MON, JAN 10, 1994, 3:32 PM (C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1987
$CONTROL LIST,LINES=46
$PAGE "SCHEMA FOR DATABASE ORDERS"
BEGIN DATABASE ORDERS;
PASSWORDS:
11
12
13
14
18
CREDIT;
BUYER;
SHIP-REC;
CLERK;
DO-ALL;
ITEMS:
ACCOUNT,
BINNUM,
CITY,
CREDIT-RATING,
DATE,
DELIV-DATE,
DESCRIPTION,
FIRST-NAME,
INITIAL,
LAST-NAME,
LASTSHIPDATE,
ONHANDQTY,
PRICE,
PURCH-DATE,
QUANTITY,
STATE,
STOCK#,
STREET-ADDRESS,
SUPPLIER,
TAX,
TOTAL,
UNIT-COST,
ZIP,
SETS:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
Chapter 3
<<
<<
<<
<<
<<
CUSTOMER CREDIT OFFICE >>
BUYER - RESPONSIBLE FOR PARTS INVENTORY >>
WAREHOUSE - SHIPPING AND RECEIVING >>
SALES CLERK >>
FOR USE BY MGMT >>
<< IN ALPHABETICAL
J2 ;
Z2 (/13);
X12 (12,13,14/11);
R2 (/14);
X6 ;
X6 (/14);
X20 ;
X10 (14/11);
U2 (14/11);
X16 (14/11);
X6 (12/ );
J2 (14/12);
J2 (14/);
X6 (11/14);
I (/14);
X2 (12,13,14/11);
U8 ;
X26 (12,13,14/11);
X16 (12,13/);
J2 (14/);
J2 (11,14/);
P8 (/12);
X6 (12,13,14/11);
ORDER FOR CONVENIENCE >>
<< CUSTOMER ACCOUNT NUMBER>>
<< STORAGE LOCATION OF PROD>>
<< CITY>>
<< CUSTOMER CREDIT RATING>>
<< DATE (YYMMDD)>>
<< DELIVERY DATE (YYMMDD)>>
<< PRODUCT DESCRIPTION>>
<< CUSTOMER GIVEN NAME>>
<< CUSTOMER MIDDLE INITIAL>>
<< CUSTOMER SURNAME>>
<< DATE LAST REC D(YYMMDD)>>
<< TOTAL PRODUCT INVENTORY>>
<< SELLING PRICE (PENNIES)>>
<< PURCHASE DATE (YYMMDD)>>
<< SALES PURCHASE QUANTITY>>
<< STATE -- 2 LETTER ABB>>
<< PRODUCT STOCK NUMBER>>
<< NUMBER AND STREET ADDRESS>>
<< SUPPLYING COMPANY NAME>>
<< SALES TAX (PENNIES)>>
<< TOTAL AMOUNT OF SALE(PENNIES)>>
<< UNIT COST OF PRODUCT>>
<< ZIP CODE>>
DATE-MASTER,AUTOMATIC,DISC1;
DATE(3);
365;
<<DATE MASTER>>
89
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
PAGE 2
CUSTOMER,MANUAL /INDEXED (14/11,18),DISC1;
ACCOUNT(1),
LAST-NAME,
FIRST-NAME,
INITIAL,
STREET-ADDRESS,
CITY,
STATE,
ZIP,
CREDIT-RATING;
201;
<<CUSTOMER MASTER>>
SCHEMA FOR DATABASE ORDERS
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
PRODUCT,MANUAL(13,14/12,18),DISC1;<<PRODUCT MASTER>>
STOCK#(2),
DESCRIPTION;
300;
SUP-MASTER,MANUAL(13/12,18),DISC1; <<SUPPLIER MASTER>>
SUPPLIER(1),
STREET-ADDRESS,
CITY,
STATE,
ZIP;
201;
INVENTORY,DETAIL(12,14/13,18),DISC2; <<INVENTORY DETAIL>>
STOCK#(PRODUCT),
ONHANDQTY,
SUPPLIER(!SUP-MASTER),
UNIT-COST,
LASTSHIPDATE(DATE-MASTER),
BINNUM;
1800,450,10%;
<<PRIMARY PATH>>
SALES,DETAIL(11/14,18),DISC2; <<SALES DETAIL>>
ACCOUNT(CUSTOMER(PURCH-DATE)),
STOCK#(PRODUCT),
QUANTITY,
PRICE,
TAX,
TOTAL,
PURCH-DATE(DATE-MASTER),
DELIV-DATE(DATE-MASTER);
1008,504,112;
END.
90
Chapter 3
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
DATA SET
NAME
DATE-MASTER
CUSTOMER
PRODUCT
SUP-MASTER
INVENTORY
SALES
TYPE
FLD
CNT
PT
CT
ENTR
LGTH
A
1
3
3
Mi 9
1
41
M
2
2
14
M
5
1
31
D
6
3
20
INITIAL CAPACITY: 450
D
8
4
19
INITIAL CAPACITY: 504
MED
REC
26
52
31
42
32
35
MAXIMUM
CAPACITY
BLK
FAC
BLK DISC
LGTH SPACE
365
19
496 96
201
7
365 96
300
16
497 80
201
12
505 80
1800
15
481 128
INCREMENT ENTRIES: 45
1008
14
491 160
INCREMENT ENTRIES: 112
TOTAL DISC SECTORS INCLUDING ROOT:
672
NUMBER OF ERROR MESSAGES: 0
ITEM NAME COUNT: 23
DATA SET COUNT: 6
ROOT LENGTH: 1176
BUFFER LENGTH: 505
TRAILER LENGTH: 256
ROOT FILE ORDERS CREATED.
Chapter 3
91
Defining a Database
Schema Processor Output
92
Chapter 3
Using the Database
Opening the Database
4 Using the Database
After you design the database, create the root file, and build the data sets, you can write
application programs to enter and use the data. Programs written in BBASIC, C,
COBOL II, FORTRAN 77, or Pascal gain access to the database through calls to
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures. RPG programs contain specifications used by the Report
Program Generator to make calls to the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures for you. This chapter
contains a text discussion of the procedures used to open the database and to enter, read,
update, and delete data; it also contains information on locking, transaction logging,
checking procedure status, and interpreting errors. Use this chapter with chapter 5 which
gives details about each procedure call, its parameters, and status information.
NOTE
Before application programs can be executed, the database must be created
using the TurboIMAGE/XL utility program DBUTIL described in chapter 8.
Opening the Database
Before you can gain access to the data, the process you are running must open the
database with a call to the DBOPEN procedure. A process is a unique execution of a
particular program by a particular user at a particular time, as described in the MPE/iX
Intrinsics Reference Manual. In opening a database, DBOPEN establishes an access path
between the database and your program by doing the following:
• Verifying your right to use the database under the security provisions provided by the
MPE/iX file system and the TurboIMAGE/XL user-class-password scheme.
• Determining that the access mode you have requested in opening the database is
compatible with the access modes of other users currently using the database.
• Opening the root file and constructing the control blocks to be used by all other
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures when they are executed. The root file remains open until
the database is closed.
Note that DBOPEN does not open the individual data sets that compose a database.
DBOPEN also determines if the operating system supports the native language as defined in
the root file. The following error message is returned if the language attribute of the
database is not supported by the current system configuration:
Language is not supported
Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on Host Language Access and appendix A for
more information on error messages.
Chapter 4
93
Using the Database
Opening the Database
Database Control Blocks
TurboIMAGE/XL executes using data stored in different types of control blocks stored in
privileged mapped files or virtual data objects: the Database System Control Block (DBS),
the Database Globals Control Block (DBG), the Database Buffer Area Control Block
(DBB), the Database User Local Control Block (DBU), the Remote Database Control Block
(DBR), Database User Local Index Control Block (DBUX), the Lock Table (TURBOLKT),
Global Dynamic Multi-database Transaction Table (TURBOGTX), DBQUIESCE and DBOPEN
Table (QOPEN), and DBQUIESCE Lock Table (QLOCK). These are described below:
• The Database System Control Block (DBS) is created by DBOPEN if it does not already
exist. The DBS is used as a system-wide table to locate the current Database Globals
Control Block (DBG) for any opened database. Each system has only one DBS, created
as a permanent file called TURBODBS in the PUB group and the SYS account on that
system.
• The Database Globals Control Block (DBG) is created for a particular database when
the first user's process calls the DBOPEN procedure to open the database. The DBG
contains global information required by TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics during run-time,
including a pointer to the Database Buffer Area Control Block (DBB). Each open
database has exactly one DBG regardless of the number of concurrent access paths to
the database. All TurboIMAGE/XL procedures on a particular database (except
DBERROR and DBEXPLAIN) reference the DBG. In addition, the DBG contains the lock
table which holds user-level locking information. The DBG is purged when the last
user's process closes the database (DBCLOSE).
• The Database Buffer Area Control Block (DBB) is created for a particular database
when the first user's process calls the DBOPEN procedure to open the database. The DBB
contains a set of buffer headers which point to data in memory from any of the data
sets, and contains a pointer to the DBG. Global information regarding logging and
recovery is also contained within the DBB. The DBB is used to retrieve, log, and update
data located in the data set files on disk. The DBB is purged when the last user closes
the database (DBCLOSE).
• One Database User Local Control Block (DBU) is created each time a user's process
successfully calls DBOPEN. Each DBU contains information about the user's individual
access to the database and contains pointers to the DBS, DBG, and DBB. The privileged
mapped file containing the DBU is associated with this DBOPEN. The DBU is purged
when the corresponding DBCLOSE closes the database. A process can open a maximum
of 127 databases (or one database 63 times), depending upon the system resources;
therefore, a maximum of 127 DBUs can be created. It is recommended that a process
close a database once it is no longer needed for that process.
• One Remote Database Control Block (DBR) is created on the local system each time a
user's process successfully opens a remote database. The DBR contains database set
and item information as well as the work areas necessary to set up communications to
the remote computer.
• The Database User Local Index Control Block (DBUX) is created the first time the
user's process calls DBOPEN. One DBUX exists for each user's process. Its purpose is to
keep track of the addresses of all the DBUs and/or DBRs for that process. Because a
maximum of 127 entries are allowed in the DBUX, each process is allowed 127 DBOPENs
94
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Opening the Database
(63 per database) depending on the availability of system resources. The DBUX
remains allocated until the user's process is terminated.
• The TurboLock Table is a permanent file, TURBOLKT.PUB.SYS, that is created by
DBOPEN (if it does not exist beforehand). Thereafter, it is opened when the first user
opens any database on the system. It is purged when the system is rebooted. Each
system has only one TURBOLKT file. It is used to avoid deadlocks for all IMAGE/SQL
users. Additionally, it is also used to detect potential deadlock for TurboIMAGE/XL
users if, and only if, deadlock detection is activated by DBCONTROL mode 7.
• The Global Dynamic Multi-database Transaction Table is a permanent file,
TURBOGTX.PUB.SYS, that is created by DBXBEGIN (if it does not exist beforehand).
Thereafter, it is opened for all users who employ dynamic multi-database transaction(s)
(DMDBX). Each system has only one TURBOGTX file, and it remains on the system even
after the system is rebooted. It is used for tracking DMDBX.
• The DBQUIESCE and DBOPEN Table, QOPEN, is an unnamed global object and is first
created by DBOPEN when the first writer of any database enabled for user logging opens
a database. It is subsequently accessed only by writers of databases enabled for user
logging. Each system has only one QOPEN table, and it is purged when all processes
accessing it are terminated. It contains information pertaining to DBOPEN and user
logging process. This information is used to write to log records for DBRECOV and to
coordinate with DBQUIESCE called by TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup.
• The DBQUIESCE LOCK Table, QLOCK, is an unnamed permanent global structure that
is created by DBOPEN (if it does not exist beforehand). There is one per system, and it is
accessed by all writers to all databases. It is purged only at system reboot time. It is
used for containing database information required to quiesce database(s) for
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup.
All TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics process on the DBU except accesses for global and buffer
area information found in the two global blocks (DBG and DBB).
Passwords
When you open the database you must provide a valid password to establish your user
class number. If you do not provide one, you will be granted user class number 0. If you
are the database creator and supply a semicolon as a password, you are assigned user class
64, which grants you unlimited database access privileges. Passwords and user classes are
discussed in chapter 2.
Database Access Modes
There are eight different access modes for opening the database with the DBOPEN
procedure. Each mode determines the type of operation that you can perform on the
database, as well as the types of operations other users can perform concurrently. To
simplify the definition of the various DBOPEN modes, the following terminology is used:
• Read access modes (5, 6, 7, and 8) allow the user to locate and read data entries.
• Update access mode (2) allows read access and permits the user to replace values in
all data items except master data set key items and detail data set search and sort
items. The critical item update (CIUPDATE) option, which can permit the values of
Chapter 4
95
Using the Database
Opening the Database
detail data set search and sort items to be updated and which is discussed later in this
chapter, is not available in this mode.
• Modify access modes (1, 3, and 4) allow updates and permit the user to add and delete
entries. For access modes 1, 3, and 4 only, users can update the values of detail data set
search and sort items if the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option settings for the
database and the current process permit them to do so. CIUPDATE is discussed later in
this chapter.
The TurboIMAGE/XL library procedures (also called intrinsics) that can be used with each
type of DBOPEN mode are as follows:
Table 4-1. Library Procedures DBOPEN Modes
DBOPEN Mode
Read
Library Procedures Available
DBFIND and DBGET
Update
DBFIND, DBGET, and DBUPDATE
Modify
DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE, DBPUT, and DBDELETE
Table 4-2. summarizes the type of database access granted in each access mode, provided
the MPE/iX security provisions and your password permit it. Access modes 3 and 7 provide
exclusive access to the database; all other modes allow shared access.
Table 4-2. Database Access Mode Summary
Access
Mode
Type of Access
Mode Granted
Concurrent Access
Modes Allowed
1
Modify
1, 5
Modify
(with
locking)
2
Update
2, 6
Update
3
Modify
4
Modify
5
None
6
Read
Read
1, 5
Modify
(with
locking)
6
Read
2, 4, 6, 8
Modify
7
Read
8
Read
None
6, 8
Special
Requirements
Locking must be used for update
or modify.
Exclusive Access
TurboIMAGE/XL does not require
locking, but it should be used to
coordinate access with users who
are modifying the database.
Exclusive Access
Read
Concurrent Database Access Modes
A database can only be shared in certain well-defined environments. The access mode
specified when a process opens a database must be acceptable for the environment
established by others who are already using the database.
96
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Opening the Database
Here is a summary of the acceptable environments:
• Multiple access mode 1 and access mode 5 users
• Multiple access mode 6 and access mode 2 users
• Multiple access mode 6 users and one access mode 4 user
• Multiple access mode 6 and access mode 8 users
• One access mode 3 user
• One access mode 7 user
Subsets of these environments are also allowed. For example, all users can be access mode
5, 6, or 8 users; or there could be one access mode 1 user; and so on.
If an access mode 3 or 7 user is currently accessing the database, it cannot be opened until
that user closes the database. This is true any time an attempt is made to open a database
in an access mode that is not compatible with the access modes of others using the
database.
Database Operations
This section explains in detail what occurs when a database is opened in a particular
mode. Locking is available in all modes. In the discussion that follows, brief suggestions
are given as to when locking can be used. Refer to the discussion of the locking facility
later in this chapter for more information.
• Access Mode 1. The database is opened for shared modify access. Opening in mode 1
succeeds only if all other current users of the database are using access modes 1 or 5.
All TurboIMAGE/XL procedures are available in this mode. The critical item update
(CIUPDATE) option, which can permit you to update the values of detail data set search
and sort items, is available in this mode. A program must obtain temporary exclusive
control of the data entries before calling any procedure that changes them, such as,
DBUPDATE, DBPUT, or DBDELETE. In this way, changes to the database are synchronized
and carried out properly. This exclusive control must subsequently be relinquished to
permit other access mode 1 or mode 5 users to access these entries. Acquiring and
relinquishing is referred to as locking and unlocking, respectively. These functions are
supplied by the TurboIMAGE/XL library procedures, DBLOCK and DBUNLOCK. The
locking requirements can be met by locking the affected entries, the sets containing the
entries, or the whole database.
A mode 1 (and mode 5) user who has all or part of the database locked is assured that
no concurrent user is modifying that part of the database.
It is possible to read entries in the database using calls to DBFIND and DBGET without
locking, but the calling program must provide for the possibility that another process
could be simultaneously modifying the database. This can result in an entry being
deleted from a chain which the calling program is reading.
• Access Mode 2. The database is opened for shared update access. The DBOPEN call
succeeds only if all current users of the database are using access modes 2 and 6. All
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures are available to the access mode 2 user except DBPUT and
DBDELETE which are disallowed in this mode. The critical item update (CIUPDATE)
Chapter 4
97
Using the Database
Opening the Database
option, which can permit you to update the values of detail data set search and sort
items, is not available in this mode. Therefore, the access mode 2 user is able to read all
data entries and update some data entries, but is not permitted to add or delete data
entries in any data set.
The programmer must be aware of the possibility that other access mode 2 users are
simultaneously updating data entries. In many applications, it may be possible to
arrange for each user's process to update unique data entries or data items so that the
database will correctly reflect all changes, even data items in the same entry updated
by different processes. On the other hand, if two or more processes update the same
data items of the same entry, the database will reflect only the latest values. Locking
can be used, if desired, to coordinate update sequences to an entry or to coordinate with
access mode 6 readers.
• Access Mode 3. The database is opened for exclusive modify access. If any other users
are accessing the database, it cannot be opened in this mode. All TurboIMAGE/XL
procedures are available to the access mode 3 user. The critical item update (CIUPDATE)
option, which can permit you to update the values of detail data set search and sort
items, is available in this mode. No other concurrent process is permitted to gain any
type of access to the database.
• Access Mode 4. The database is opened for semi-exclusive modify access. Only one
access mode 4 user can access the database, and all other current users must be in
access mode 6 (read only). The access mode 4 user is permitted to call any
TurboIMAGE/XL procedure and has complete control over database content. The
critical item update (CIUPDATE) option, which can permit you to update the values of
detail data set search and sort items, is available in this mode. Other read-only users
are permitted concurrent access to the database in mode 4, but not in mode 3. Locking
can be used to coordinate with access mode 6 readers.
• Access Mode 5. The database is opened for shared read access. All other concurrent
users must be in access mode 1 or 5. Access mode 5 operates the same as access mode 1,
except that the DBUPDATE, DBPUT, and DBDELETE procedures, which alter the
database, are disabled for the access mode 5 user. Locking can be used, if desired, to
ensure that data is not being modified while you are reading it.
Access mode 5 is appropriate for inquiry-type applications if they can tolerate the
possibility of database modifications taking place simultaneously with access mode 1
users.
• Access Mode 6. The database is opened for shared read access. Concurrent users must
be in access mode 2, 4, 6, or 8. Access mode 6 can also be used while the database is
being stored with the TurboIMAGE/XL utility program DBSTORE. Some of these modes
are incompatible with each other as shown in the preceding discussion of concurrent
access modes. All TurboIMAGE/XL procedures that alter the database are disabled.
Locking can be used to synchronize with users who are concurrently updating.
Access mode 6 is appropriate for inquiry-type applications if they can tolerate the
possibility of database modifications taking place simultaneously with access mode 2
and 4 users.
98
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Opening the Database
• Access Mode 7. The database is opened for exclusive read access. No other users can
access the database concurrently. Access mode 7 operates the same as access mode 3,
except that the DBUPDATE, DBPUT, and DBDELETE procedures, which alter the
database, are disabled for the access mode 7 user.
• Access Mode 8. The database is opened for shared read access. Concurrent users must
either be in access mode 6 or 8, or using the TurboIMAGE/XL utility, DBSTORE.
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures that alter the database are not permitted. Because access
mode 8 allows only concurrent readers, a user program with this access mode can be
assured that the database values it reads are unchanging.
Selecting a Database Access Mode
When deciding which access mode to use, the following are two important considerations:
• Use the minimum capability required to accomplish the task. For example, select a
read-only access mode (5, 6, 7, or 8) if the program does not alter the database in any
way. Read access modes allow concurrent database STORE operations and do not set the
MPE/iX "file modified" flag.
• Allow concurrent users to have as much capability as is required for successful
completion of the task. If the task is merely browsing through the database, producing a
quick report, or accessing an unchanging portion of the database, choose an access mode
that allows concurrent users to make database modifications to other parts of the
database. Allowing concurrent read-only access (modes 2, 4, and 8) can be appropriate
in many situations. For programs that must be assured of no concurrent structural
changes, but can tolerate simultaneous updates to entries, mode 2 is suitable. Locking
can be used to control simultaneous updates to a data entry. If it is necessary to make
additions or deletions to a database from concurrent multiple processes, modes 1 and 5
must be used. Fully exclusive operation (modes 3 and 7) are available if needed.
The following access mode selection guidelines are organized according to the task to be
performed. For some tasks, one of several modes can be selected depending on the
concurrent activity allowed with each mode.
• Programs that perform operations, which include adding and deleting entries or which
need to update detail data set search and sort items via the critical item update
(CIUPDATE) option, should open with mode 1, 3, or 4. Consider the following when
choosing among access modes 1, 3, and 4:
Access Mode 1 Can be used if other processes need to add and delete entries
simultaneously. In this case, the affected parts of the database must be
locked while performing updates, additions, or deletions.
Access Mode 3 Can be used if the program must have exclusive access to the database.
Access Mode 4 Can be used if exclusive ability to change the database is required but
access mode 6 processes need to be able to read the database while
changes are being made.
• Programs that locate, read, and replace data in existing entries but do not need to add
or delete any entries, and do not want any other processes to do so, should open the
database in access mode 2. Consider the following when choosing access mode 2:
Chapter 4
99
Using the Database
Opening the Database
Access Mode 2 Can be used if processes are allowed to update the database
concurrently. Locking should be used to coordinate updates. The critical
item update (CIUPDATE) option, which can permit you to update the
values of detail data set search and sort items, is not available in this
mode.
• Programs that only locate and read or report on information in the database should
open with one of the read-only access modes. In this case, the access mode selected
depends upon either the type of process running concurrently or the need for an
unchanging database while the program is running. Consider the following when
choosing among access modes 5, 6, 7, and 8:
Access Mode 5 Can be used if concurrent processes will operate in access mode 1 or 5.
Parts or all of the database should be locked to prevent concurrent
changes during one or more read operations. Because concurrent access
mode 1 processes are allowed, programs performing chained reads
should lock the chain (see the discussion of DBGET in chapter 5).
Access Mode 6 Can be used if it is not important what other processes are doing to the
database. In this case, access mode 2 processes can update entries; one
access mode 4 user can update, add, or delete entries; or access mode 6
or 8 users can read entries while the program is using the database.
Access Mode 7 Can be used if the program must have exclusive read access to the
database.
Access Mode 8 Can be used if other processes are allowed to read but not modify the
database. In this case, access mode 6 and 8 users can read entries while
the program is using the database.
Locking within a Database Process
Refer to the locking discussion later in this chapter for considerations when locking and
unlocking transactions within a database process.
User Transaction Logging
Users opening the database in access modes 1 through 4 use the MPE/iX user logging
facility if the database administrator has enabled the database for logging (a procedure
described in chapter 7). In this case, calls to the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics listed in Table
4-3. are automatically logged to a log file. Note that nothing is logged for programs opening
the database with read-only access modes (5 through 8), regardless if the database was
enabled for logging. The logging facility is described more fully later in this chapter and in
chapter 7.
Table 4-3. Logged Intrinsics
DBBEGIN
DBCLOSE
DBDELETE
DBEND
DBMEMO
DBOPEN
DBPUT
DBUPDATE
DBXBEGIN
DBXEND
DBXUNDO
100
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Opening the Database
The DBBEGIN and DBEND intrinsics are used to designate or block logical, static
transactions for logging and recovery purposes. The DBXBEGIN and DBXEND intrinsics are
used to mark logical, dynamic transactions spanning one database, or multiple databases
up to fifteen, for dynamic roll-back recovery. Refer to Table 4-5. later in this chapter for a
definition of TurboIMAGE/XL transaction types.
In addition to the above intrinsics, log records for DBQUIESCE procedures called by
True-Online Backup to quiesce and unquiesce the database can also be logged to a log file.
Dynamic roll-back uses the MPE/iX Transaction Management (XM) facility to roll back
transactions online while other database activity is occurring. User logging is not required
for this type of recovery, but is recommended to guard against a hard disk failure. See
chapter 7 for a discussion of logging and recovery methods.
Chapter 4
101
Using the Database
Entering Data in the Database
Entering Data in the Database
Data is added to the database, one entry at a time, using the DBPUT procedure. You can add
data entries to manual master and detail data sets. Entries are automatically added to
automatic master data sets when you add entries to the associated detail data sets.
To add an entry, you specify the data set name or number, a list of data items in the set,
and the name of a buffer containing values for these items. Values must be supplied for
search and sort items but are optional for other data items in the entry. If no value is
supplied, the data item value is set to binary zeroes.
Sequence for Adding Entries
Before you can add an entry to a detail data set indexed by a manual master data set, the
manual master must contain an entry with a key item value equal to the search item value
you intend to put in the detail. If more than one manual master is used to index the detail,
entries that have a key item value identical to the detail search item value for the same
path must exist in each master. To illustrate, consider the ORDERS database again.
Figure 4-1. contains sample data entries in four of the ORDERS data sets.
Before the SALES data entry can be added to the data set, the CUSTOMER manual
master data set must contain an entry with ACCOUNT equal to 12345678 because
ACCOUNT is the search item used to index the SALES detail. Similarly, the SALES data
set is indexed by the PRODUCT manual master through the STOCK# search item, so the
entry with STOCK# equal to 34624AB3 must be added to PRODUCT before a sales
transaction for that STOCK# can be entered in SALES.
Once the entry for customer account 12345678 has been entered, the next sales
transaction can be entered in the SALES detail set without changing the CUSTOMER
master. This entry will be chained to the previous entry for the account. If a different
customer buys a bicycle tire pump, the PRODUCT data set will not require any additional
entries, but if the customer's account is not yet in the CUSTOMER data set, it must be
added before entering the sales transaction in SALES.
When the entry for account 12345678 and stock number 35624AB3 is added to SALES,
TurboIMAGE/XL automatically adds entries to the DATE-MASTER with a DATE item
value of 910927 and 910928 if such entries do not already exist. If the entries do exist, each
chain head is modified to include the entry added to the chain.
102
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Entering Data in the Database
Figure 4-1. Sample Data Entries from ORDERS Database
Coordinating Additions to a Database
A single DBPUT call involves chain maintenance and other activity that can span multiple
data sets and multiple blocks within data sets even if an application is only adding entries
to a single data set. TurboIMAGE/XL coordinates calls to DBPUT to ensure that one
database user's DBPUT activity does not interfere with calls made by other users accessing
the same database. Each DBPUT request finishes processing before TurboIMAGE/XL moves
on to the next one. DBPUT calls are serialized even if they access unrelated data sets.
TurboIMAGE/XL provides a data prefetching option to enhance DBPUT (and DBDELETE)
processing. You can enable this option with the DBUTIL utility and are recommended to do
so only when all of the following conditions are true:
• Multiple processes are accessing the database.
• The processes are adding data with the DBPUT intrinsic (or deleting data with the
DBDELETE intrinsic).
• Adequate CPU and memory resources are available on your system.
For additional information, refer to the discussion of DBPUT in chapter 5 and the
description of the DBUTIL >>ENABLE command in chapter 8.
Access Mode and User Class Number
An entry cannot be added to a data set unless the user class number established when the
database is opened grants write access to the data set. The user class number must be in
the data set write class list.
The database must also be opened with an access mode allowing entries to be added. These
access modes are 1, 3, and 4. If it is opened with access mode 1, the DBLOCK procedure must
Chapter 4
103
Using the Database
Entering Data in the Database
be used to establish a lock covering the entry to be inserted. For detail data sets, this can
be a data entry, data set, or database lock. For master data sets, this can be a data set or a
database lock. Note that the locking mechanism accepts a request to lock a data entry that
does not yet exist; therefore, you can lock a data entry before you add it.
Key and Search Items
TurboIMAGE/XL performs checks on the values of detail data set search items before
adding an entry to a data set. When adding records to a manual master, TurboIMAGE/XL
verifies that the master data set key item value is unique for the set (that is, no entry
currently contains a key item with the same value). If the data set is a detail,
TurboIMAGE/XL verifies that the value of each search item forming a path with a manual
master has a matching key value in that master. It also checks to be sure that room is
available to add an entry to any automatic master data sets linked to the detail if a
matching search item value does not exist.
104
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Reading the Data
Reading the Data
When you read data from the database, you specify which data set and which entry in that
data set you want. If the user class number with which you opened the database grants
you read access, you can read the entire entry or specific data items from the entry. You
specify the items to be read and the array where the values should be stored. You can read
items or entries in any access mode if your user class grants read access to the data
element.
To understand the various ways you can select the data entry to be read, it is important to
know a little about the data set structure. Each data set consists of one or more disk files
depending on whether or not the set is jumbo, and each data entry is a logical record in
that file. Each entry is identified by the relative record number in which it is stored. The
first record in the data set is record number 1 and the last is record number n, where n is
the capacity of the data set.
At any given time, a record may or may not contain an entry. TurboIMAGE/XL maintains
internal information indicating which records of a data set contain entries and which do
not.
Current Path
TurboIMAGE/XL maintains a current path for each detail data set and for each database
accessor (that is, each DBOPEN). The current path is established by the DBFIND procedure,
or if no call has been made to this procedure, it is the primary path for the data set. Each
time an entry is read, no matter what read method is used, TurboIMAGE/XL saves the
entry's backward and forward chain pointers for the current path. For more information
about how the current path is used, refer to the discussion of chained access later in this
chapter.
If an entry is read from a master data set, the chain pointers are synonym chain pointers
and have no relationship to a path.
Reading Methods
The methods for requesting a data entry are categorized as follows:
• Directed access
• Serial access
• Calculated access
• Chained access
• Sorted sequential access
All of these methods are available through the TurboIMAGE/XL library procedure DBGET.
The chained access method also requires the use of the DBFIND procedure. Figure 4-2.
illustrates the access methods using two data sets from the ORDERS database.
Chapter 4
105
Using the Database
Reading the Data
Figure 4-2. Reading Access Methods (DBGET Procedure)
Directed Access
The directed access method of selecting the data entry to be read requires that you specify
the record number of that entry. Record numbers are returned in status halfwords 3-4 by a
successful call to the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic DBPUT (refer to the discussion of DBPUT in
chapter 5). Other numbers that can be used for directed reads are the forward and
backward pointers returned in status halfwords 7-8 and 9-10. To use these numbers for
directed reads, you need to save them because subsequent TurboIMAGE/XL procedure
calls can overwrite the status area.
106
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Reading the Data
During directed access the calling program specifies a record number or address. If any
entry exists at this address, TurboIMAGE/XL returns the values for the data items
requested in the calling program's buffer. If no such entry exists, the program is notified by
an exceptional condition return, such as end-of-file, beginning-of-file, or no entry.
This access method can be used with any type of data set and is useful in situations where
the calling program has already determined the record number of the entry to be read. For
example, if a program surveys several entries using another access method to determine
which one it wants to use in a report, it can save each record number and use the record
number of the entry it selects to read the entry again using the directed access method.
If a program performs a directed read of record 3 of the INVENTORY data set, the entry
marked with a hollow arrow in Figure 4-2. is read. If a directed read of the SUP-MASTER
data set record 7 is performed, the entry in that set marked with the same type of arrow is
read.
NOTE
When using directed access with master data sets, you should be aware of
migrating secondaries. These are described in chapter 10.
Locking. If concurrent users are allowed to add to or delete from a data set, locking
should be used during the search and report sequence to ensure the record numbers do not
change before they are used. In this type of application, a data set lock is usually the most
appropriate.
Serial Access
In this mode of retrieval, TurboIMAGE/XL starts at the most recently accessed storage
location for the data set, called the current record, and sequentially examines adjacent
records until the next entry is located. Data items from this entry are returned to the
calling program, and its location becomes the current record.
You can use both forward and backward serial access. Forward serial access consists of
retrieving the next greater-numbered entry, and backward serial access consists of
retrieving the previous lower-numbered entry. If no entry is located, TurboIMAGE/XL
returns an end-of-file if requested access is forward, or a beginning-of-file if it is
backwards.
Because no current record exists the first time a program requests an entry from a data
set, a request for forward serial access causes TurboIMAGE/XL to search from record 1.
Similarly, a backward serial retrieval begins at the highest numbered record.
The entries connected by curved arrows in Figure 4-2. are read by a program using the
serial access method. If a forward serial read is performed on the INVENTORY data set
before any other type of read, the entry in record number 2 is read. If another forward
serial read is performed on the same data set, the entry in record 3 is read. On the other
hand, if a serial read is performed and the current record is 6, the entry in record 9 is read.
The next forward serial read returns an end-of-file.
The serial access method can be used with any type of data set and is very useful if most or
all of the data in the data set is to be retrieved, for example, to be used in a report. It is
efficient to retrieve all the data in a serial manner, copy it to a file, and sort it with routines
external to TurboIMAGE/XL before printing the report. The availability of serial access
Chapter 4
107
Using the Database
Reading the Data
effectively allows you to use a data set in the same way you would use an MPE/iX file.
Thus, you have the advantages of TurboIMAGE/XL database organization and the
efficiency of serial access.
NOTE
When using serial access with master data sets, you should be aware of
migrating secondaries. These are described in chapter 10.
Locking. If concurrent users are allowed to modify the data set (access mode 1), you may
wish to lock the data set or database before you begin the serial access sequence. Locking
prevents entries from being added, modified, moved, or removed by the other processes.
Calculated Access
The calculated access method allows you to retrieve an entry from a master data set by
specifying a particular key item value. For example, the SUP-MASTER data entry for the
supplier Acme shown in Figure 4-2. can be retrieved with this method because SUPPLIER
is a key item in the SUP-MASTER data set. TurboIMAGE/XL locates the entry in the data
set whose key item value matches the requested value. The exact technique used to
perform calculated access is described in chapter 10.
Calculated access can be used only with master data sets. It is very useful for retrieving a
single entry for some special purpose. For example, a program used infrequently to get
information about a particular customer or supplier could use calculated access to quickly
locate the information in the ORDERS database.
Chained Access
The chained access method is used to retrieve the next entry in the current chain. To
perform chained access of detail data set entries, you must first locate the beginning of the
chain you want to retrieve, and thus establish the current chain, by calling the DBFIND
procedure. The calling program specifies the name of the detail search item that defines
the path to which the chain belongs and a value for the item. TurboIMAGE/XL determines
which master set forms a path with the specified search item and locates the entry in that
master data set whose key item value matches the specified value. The entry it locates
contains pointers to the first and last entries in the desired chain and a count of the
number of entries in the chain. This information is maintained internally and defines the
attributes of the current path.
If a program uses chained access to read the INVENTORY data set entries pertaining to
the supplier H&S SURPLUS shown in Figure 4-2. it must first call the DBFIND procedure
to locate the chain head in the SUP-MASTER data set. The program specifies the
INVENTORY data set, the SUPPLIER search item in the INVENTORY data set, and the
value H&S SURPLUS for that item. TurboIMAGE/XL uses a calculated read to locate the
SUP-MASTER entry with a key item value of H&S SURPLUS. If the program then
requests a forward chained read using the DBGET procedure, the entry in record 9 of
INVENTORY, which is set at the beginning of the chain, is read. If a backward chained
read is requested, the entry in record 5 is read.
If the last call to DBGET used chained access to read the entry in record 9, the next forward
chained read reads the entry in record 2 of the INVENTORY data set.
Once a current path and chain have been established for a detail data set, the calling
108
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Reading the Data
program can use the chained access method of retrieving data. You can use both forward
and backward chained access. In either case, if there are no more entries in the chain when
you request the next one, DBGET returns an exceptional condition, beginning-of-chain or
end-of-chain for backward and forward access, respectively.
Chained access to master data sets retrieves the next entry in the current synonym
chain. The use of synonym chains applies to only a limited number of special situations.
They are discussed in chapter 10.
Chained access to detail data sets is particularly useful when you want to retrieve
information about related events such as all inventory records for the H&S Surplus
supplier in the ORDERS database. When a B-Tree index is created on the key item of the
master set, chained access following a DBFIND can also be done on the master data set.
More detailed information on B-trees is given in chapter 11.
Locking. If concurrent users are allowed to modify data entries in the chain you are
currently accessing, you can use locking to ensure data consistency. For example, suppose a
chain consists of several data entries, each containing a line item from a particular order.
If user A is performing a series of chained reads while user B is canceling the order by
deleting data entries one by one, user A could retrieve an incomplete order. To prevent this
from happening, a lock can be established covering the group of data entries to be retrieved
(the chain, in this case). This can usually be done with a single DBLOCK call. Refer to the
discussion of the locking facility later in this chapter.
Sorted Sequential Access
The sorted sequential access is used for B-Tree indices and can be used both for master
and detail data sets. It is used for retrieving records in a sorted sequential order of the key
item or search item value. For masters, each key item value is different and the records
retrieved will be in a sorted sequential order of the key item value. The order can be
ascending when DBGET mode 5 is used, and it is descending when DBGET mode 6 is used
following a B-Tree DBFIND. For detail data sets, the B-Tree search can result into
traversing multiple chains of the detail data set. Each chain has the same search item
value. The subsequent chain will have a different search item value in a sorted sequential
order. Therefore, even for detail data sets, the records retrieved will be in a sorted
sequential order of the search item value. Note that within each such chain of the detail
data set, the order of the records is chronological.
For example, when a B-Tree index is created on the key item SUPPLIER of
SUP-MASTER, DBFIND can be used with SUP-MASTER in the dset parameter and the
key item SUPPLIER in the item parameter. If the argument is equivalent to "Greater than
BAY PAPER CO.", the order of records retrieved will be record number 5, the entry
pertaining to the supplier H & S SURPLUS and record number 1 pertaining to JAKE'S
SHOP in Figure 4-2. IF the DBFIND is for the detail data set, INVENTORY, and the same
argument, the order of records retrieved will be 9, 2, 5, and 6 in Figure 4-2. The record
numbers 9, 2, and 5 are pertinent to the supplier H & S SURPLUS (one chain) and 6 is
pertinent to JAKE'S SHOP (second chain). The second chain has only 1 record. The chain
head for H & S SURPLUS in SUP-MASTER contains record number 9 for beginning entry
and 5 as ending entry for the path related to detail data set INVENTORY.
Chapter 4
109
Using the Database
Reading the Data
Rereading the Current Record
The DBGET library procedure allows you to read the entry from the most recently accessed
record again. You may want to do this in a program that has unlocked the data entry and
locked it again and needs to check if the contents of the current entry have been changed.
Note that if a DBFIND procedure call has been made, the current record is zero and a
request to reread the entry causes DBGET to return an exceptional condition indicating that
the current record contains no entry. Refer to table 5-13 for more information on DBGET
return status values.
110
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Updating Data
Updating Data
TurboIMAGE/XL allows you to change the values of data items if the user class number
with which you opened the database grants this capability to you. These items cannot be
master data set key items or detail data set search or sort items, unless you take
advantage of the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option. Depending on the CIUPDATE
option settings for the database and the current process, you could change the values of
detail data set search and sort items if the database access mode is 1, 3, or 4. This option is
described later in this section.
Before you call the DBUPDATE library procedure to change the item values, you must call
DBGET to locate the entry you intend to update. This sets the current record address for the
data set. The DBUPDATE library procedure uses the current record address to locate the
data items whose values are to be changed.
A lock can be established before the call to DBGET to guard against accidental modification
of the record by another user. This is recommended in any shared access mode (as
discussed below).
When the program calls DBUPDATE, it specifies the data set name, a list of data items to be
changed, and the name of a buffer containing values for the items. For example, if a
program changes the street address of a customer in the CUSTOMER data set of the
ORDERS database, the program can first locate the entry to be changed by calling DBGET
in calculated access mode with the customer's account number and then calling the
DBUPDATE procedure to change the value of the STREET-ADDRESS data item in that
entry.
Access Modes and User Class Number
To update data items, the database must be opened in access mode 1, 2, 3, or 4. If it is
opened in access mode 1, the data entry, data set, or database must be locked while the
update is occurring. If the CIUPDATE option settings for the database and the current
process permit updates of detail data set search and sort items, the database must be
opened in access mode 1, 3, or 4 to take advantage of this option.
TurboIMAGE/XL guarantees that all updates to a data entry will be carried out even if
they are requested by different users concurrently and locking is not used. To ensure this,
TurboIMAGE/XL always completes the processing of one DBUPDATE request before it
begins processing under another. However, data consistency problems can still occur if an
update is based on data values that are not current. For example, while withdrawing 10
items from the stock, two users may read the same data entry from the INVENTORY data
set. If the current value of ONHANDQTY is 30 and they each subtract 10 from it and then
update the entry, both updates will operate successfully but the new value will be 20
rather than 10. To prevent such errors, a lock covering the data entry can be put in effect
before it is read and released after it is updated.
TurboIMAGE/XL attempts to enforce this locking technique for users in database access
mode 1 by checking to see if an appropriate lock is in effect before executing an update.
However, to have its proper effect, the lock should be made before the call to DBGET.
Chapter 4
111
Using the Database
Updating Data
NOTE
To avoid locking around terminal reads, you may need to establish the lock,
perform a mode 1 DBGET, check the value, update the entry, then remove the
lock.
The password you use to open the database must grant update capability to the data items
you intend to change. The user class number associated with the password must either be
in the write class list of the data set containing the items to be updated, or in both the read
class list of the data set and in the write class list of the data item.
Updating Key, Search, and Sort Items
For compatibility and security reasons, by default you cannot use the DBUPDATE library
procedure to update a master data set key item, or a detail data set search or sort item.
However, in database access mode 1, 3, or 4, you can update search or sort items if
permitted by the CIUPDATE option settings for the database and the current process; refer
to the following discussion of CIUPDATE. If you do not or cannot take advantage of the
CIUPDATE option and need to change search or sort items, or if you need to change master
data set key items, you can first delete the selected entry with DBDELETE (see the section
entitled "Deleting Data Entries"), and then add the entry back into the database with
DBPUT. However, keep in mind that this method places the new record at the end of each
unsorted chain, which disturbs the chronological order of each path.
The new entry must be complete. That is, you cannot delete an entry and then add a new
entry with only the item you want changed. If you do this, the rest of the entry will be set
to binary zeros by DBPUT. Furthermore, make sure the current list is truly current when
using an asterisk (*) to reference the list; otherwise, if items have been added or deleted,
you could cause DBPUT to write binary zeros over existing data. Note that using the
commercial "at sign" (@) to write all the items in a data entry avoids this problem.
To facilitate updates of detail data set critical items, you should design any new databases
to take advantage of the CIUPDATE option. Applications to be used with these databases
can be written as described in the next section.
Critical Item Update
TurboIMAGE/XL provides an option called critical item update (CIUPDATE) which,
depending on the settings for the database and the current process, can permit you to
update the values of detail data set search and sort items. To take advantage of this option,
you first need to set it through the TurboIMAGE/XL utility DBUTIL. Use the DBUTIL >>SET
command, and set the CIUPDATE option equal to ON or ALLOWED.
NOTE
The default setting is now ALLOWED. It was DISALLOWED in releases before
C.07.00.
The ON setting permits any process to use critical item update on the database unless the
process explicitly disables the option by calling the DBCONTROL procedure in mode 6; this
call disables the option for the duration of the process or until a call to DBCONTROL in mode
5 enables the option. The ALLOWED setting requires that a process first call DBCONTROL in
mode 5 to enable the CIUPDATE option for the duration of the process or until a call to
112
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Updating Data
DBCONTROL in mode 6 disables the option. Using DBCONTROL modes 5 and 6 does not alter
the permanent setting set with the DBUTIL >>SET command. The database must be opened
in access mode 1, 3, or 4; and your user class must have write access at the set level, or
both read access at the set level and write access at the item level.
Programmers should review the design of any of their applications that are used to update
the values of data items to ensure that the data will be updated as expected. Applications
that open the database in access mode 2 do not need to be modified, because only access
modes 1, 3, and 4 can be used with CIUPDATE. Applications that rely on TurboIMAGE/XL
to restrict update of detail data set search and sort items can continue to do so as long as the
database access mode is not 1, 3, or 4, or the CIUPDATE option is set as follows:
• DISALLOWED, or
• ALLOWED and the process does not call DBCONTROL in mode 5.
Otherwise, these applications need to be modified to call the DBINFO procedure to check the
CIUPDATE flags for the database and the current process, and (if need be) to disable
CIUPDATE for the current DBOPEN via the DBCONTROL procedure in mode 6. Another method
of restricting access to search and sort items is by granting read-only access at the data set
level and limiting write access at the data item level.
Applications that allow the sort item for the current chain to be updated must allow the
current entry to be moved within the chain. An entry which is moved can be encountered
twice within one chained read.
To update a detail data set search or sort item, the following sequence of operations is
recommended for your programs:
1. Call DBOPEN in access mode 1, 3, or 4.
2. Call DBLOCK to lock all data which must not be changed by other processes.
3. If this is a logical transaction, you need to declare the beginning of modifications by
calling DBBEGIN or, if you are using dynamic roll-back, DBXBEGIN (see the discussion of
logical transactions later in this chapter).
4. Read data using DBFIND and DBGET to determine what needs to be modified.
5. Call DBINFO to check the specific CIUPDATE option setting for the database and the
setting for the current DBOPEN.
6. If the CIUPDATE setting is ON and has not been disabled by a DBCONTROL mode 6, go to
the next step. If the setting is ALLOWED, call DBCONTROL mode 5 to enable the option.
Note that if the CIUPDATE setting is ON and the option has not been disabled, you can
still call a DBCONTROL mode 5 successfully.
7. If the CIUPDATE option is permitted, call DBUPDATE.
8. If the CIUPDATE option is not permitted, call DBDELETE and DBPUT.
9. Check the status code.
10.If the status code is not 0, call DBERROR and take appropriate action. For example, if
this is a dynamic transaction, you must call DBXUNDO to roll back the transaction.
Chapter 4
113
Using the Database
Updating Data
NOTE
If this is a dynamic transaction, a call to DBXUNDO must be processed if an
error occurs or if the transaction needs to be rolled back for any other reason.
TurboIMAGE/XL will not go on to the next transaction in the event of a
transaction abort unless an intervening call to DBXUNDO occurs.
11.If the status code is zero and this is a logical transaction, call DBEND or, alternatively,
DBXEND to declare the end of the modifications. However, if this is a dynamic
transaction and DBXUNDO was used to roll back the transaction, your program logic
should ensure that the subsequent call to DBXEND is not processed.
12.Call DBUNLOCK to release all of the locks.
114
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Deleting Data Entries
Deleting Data Entries
Data is deleted from the database using the DBDELETE procedure. You can delete entries
from manual master and detail data sets. Entries are automatically deleted from
automatic master data sets as explained below.
To delete an entry from a data set, you must first locate the entry to be deleted by reading
it with the DBGET library procedure, or the DBFIND and DBGET procedures if it is
advantageous to use chained access to locate the entry. You then call the DBDELETE
procedure specifying the data set name. TurboIMAGE/XL verifies that your password and
associated user class number allow you to delete the current entry of the specified data set.
Sequence for Deleting Entries
If the detail data entry deleted is the only member of a detail chain linked to an automatic
master, and all other chains linked to the same automatic master entry are empty,
TurboIMAGE/XL automatically deletes the master entry.
If the data entry is in a manual master data set, TurboIMAGE/XL verifies that the detail
chains associated with the entry's search item, if any, are empty. If not, it returns an error
condition to the calling program. For example, if a program attempts to delete the
SUP-MASTER entry in Figure 4-2. that contains a SUPPLIER value of H&S SURPLUS,
an error condition is returned because a three-entry chain still exists in the INVENTORY
detail data set.
To delete the CUSTOMER data set entry with ACCOUNT equal to 75757575, the program
can call DBGET in calculated access mode specifying the CUSTOMER data set and the key
item value 75757575. If the procedure executes successfully, the program then can call
DBDELETE specifying the CUSTOMER data set to delete the current entry, provided no
chains in the related SALES detail data set contain search item values of 75757575.
Coordinating Deletions from a Database
A single DBDELETE call involves chain maintenance and other activity that can span
multiple data sets and multiple blocks within data sets even if an application is only
deleting entries from a single data set. TurboIMAGE/XL coordinates calls to DBDELETE to
ensure that one database user's DBDELETE activity does not interfere with calls made by
other users accessing the same database. Each DBDELETE request finishes processing
before TurboIMAGE/XL moves on to the next one. DBDELETE calls are serialized even if
they access unrelated data sets.
TurboIMAGE/XL provides a data prefetching option to enhance DBDELETE (and DBPUT)
processing. You can enable this option with the DBUTIL utility and are recommended to do
so only when all of the following conditions are true:
• Multiple processes are accessing the database.
• The processes are deleting data with the DBDELETE intrinsic (or adding data with the
DBPUT intrinsic).
• Adequate CPU and memory resources are available on your system.
Chapter 4
115
Using the Database
Deleting Data Entries
For additional information, refer to the discussion of DBDELETE in chapter 5 and the
description of the DBUTIL >>ENABLE command in chapter 8.
Access Modes and User Class Numbers
To update data items, the database must be opened with access mode 1, 3, or 4. If it is
opened with access mode 1, the DBLOCK procedure must be used to lock the detail data
entry, data set, or database before an entry can be deleted and DBUNLOCK should be called
after one or all desired entries have been deleted. As a general rule, the lock should be
established before the whole delete sequence, that is, before the call to DBGET that
establishes which record is to be deleted. This will ensure that another user does not delete
the data entry between the call to DBGET and the call to DBDELETE.
An entry cannot be deleted from a data set unless the user has write access to the data set.
Write access to the data set means the database was opened in a write access mode and
the user class number associated with the DBOPEN password is on the set write class list.
116
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
Using the Locking Facility
The DBLOCK procedure applies a logical lock to a database or one or more data sets or data
entries. The DBUNLOCK procedure releases these locks.
Locking can be viewed as a means of communication and control to be used by mutually
cooperating users. The locking facility provides a method for protecting the logical
integrity of the data shared in a database. With the DBLOCK procedure, application
programs can isolate temporarily a subsection of the database in order to perform a
transaction against the isolated data. Locking is not required to protect the structure of
the database. TurboIMAGE/XL has internal mechanisms that do this.
If a program opens the database in access mode 1 and locks a part of the database, it can
perform the transaction with the certain knowledge that no other user will modify the data
until the application program issues a DBUNLOCK call. This is because TurboIMAGE/XL
does not allow changes in access mode 1 unless a lock covers the data to be changed. If one
process has the database opened in access mode 1, TurboIMAGE/XL requires that all other
processes that modify the database must also operate in access mode 1.
The DBLOCK procedure operates in one of six modes. Modes 1 and 2 can be used for locking
the database and modes 3 and 4 for locking a data set. In modes 5 and 6, you describe the
database entity or entities to be locked using lock descriptors.
At the data entry level, locking is performed on the basis of data item values. For example,
suppose a customer requests a change in an order the customer has placed. The data
entries for the customer's account that are in the SALES data set could be locked while the
order is changed and other database activity can continue concurrently.
Lock Descriptors
A lock descriptor is used to specify a group of data entries that are to be locked. It consists
of a data set name or number, a data item name or number, a relational operator, and an
associated value. For purposes of this discussion, the notation dset : ditem relop value is
used. For example, the lock descriptor SALES:ACCOUNT = 89393899 requests locking of all
the data entries in the SALES data set with an ACCOUNT data item equal to 89393899.
Note that the result of specifying a single lock descriptor can be that none, one, or many
entries are locked depending on how many entries qualify.
The following relational operators can be used:
• less than or equal (<=)
• greater than or equal (>=)
• equal (=
or
=), where
indicates a space character
The value must be specified exactly as it is stored in the database. A lock will succeed even
if no data item with the specified value exists in the data set; no check is made during the
DBLOCK procedure to determine the existence of a particular data item value. This allows
you to use techniques such as issuing a lock to cover a data entry before you actually add it
to a data set.
Chapter 4
117
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
With the exception of compound items, any data item can be used in a lock descriptor; that
is, the lock item need not be a search item.
TurboIMAGE/XL does not require that you have read or write access to a data set or data
item in order to specify it in a lock request.
A process can specify any number of lock descriptors with a single DBLOCK call. For
example, the following lock descriptors can be specified in one DBLOCK call:
CUSTOMER: ACCOUNT = 89393899
SALES: ACCOUNT = 89393899
SUP-MASTER: STATE = AZ
INVENTORY: ONHANDQTY <= 100
INVENTORY: ONHANDQTY >= 1500
NOTE
Multiple calls to DBLOCK without intervening calls to DBUNLOCK are not
allowed unless the program has Multiple RIN (MR) capability. Refer to
"Issuing Multiple Calls to DBLOCK" later in this chapter.
How Locking Works
The internal implementation of locking does not involve reading or writing to the database
element to be locked. TurboIMAGE/XL keeps a table of everything that is locked by all
processes that have the database opened. One table is associated with each database. This
table serves as a global list of lock descriptors. In locking mode 5 or 6, a database lock is
specified with the descriptor @:@ and a data set lock with dset:@. If you call DBLOCK in
locking mode 1, 2, 3, or 4, TurboIMAGE/XL sets up the appropriate lock descriptor and
puts it in the lock descriptor table. Figure 4-3. illustrates the contents of this list in a
situation where one process has locked all SALES data entries with ACCOUNT equal to
12121212 or equal to 33334444. Another process has locked all INVENTORY data entries
with STOCK# equal to 6650D22S. A third process has locked the whole SUP-MASTER
data set. The figure illustrates what the table represents, not the actual internal format.
When a lock request is made, TurboIMAGE/XL compares the newly specified lock
descriptors with those that are currently in the list. If a conflict exists, TurboIMAGE/XL
notifies the calling process that the entity cannot be locked or, if the process has requested
unconditional locking, it is placed in a waiting state until the entity can be locked. If there
are no conflicts, TurboIMAGE/XL adds the new lock descriptors to the list.
Users whose programs have MR capability and issue multiple DBLOCK calls, without a
DBUNLOCK call between the DBLOCK calls, may cause a deadlock if DBLOCK calls are not done
carefully. Recovery from a deadlock requires a restart of the operating system. If it is
desired to activate the database for automatic deadlock detection, DBCONTROL mode 7 must
be done prior to the first DBLOCK call for the database. In this case, when a possibility of a
potential deadlock is detected by the DBLOCK procedure, a status code of 26 is returned to
the calling process. The calling process must call DBUNLOCK to release all locks acquired by
DBLOCK(s) for the same access path.
118
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
Figure 4-3. Lock Descriptor List
Conditional and Unconditional Locking
You can request conditional or unconditional locking. If you request unconditional locking,
TurboIMAGE/XL returns control to your calling program only after the specified entity has
been locked. If you request conditional locking, TurboIMAGE/XL returns immediately. In
this case, the condition code must be examined to determine whether or not the requested
locks have been applied. If multiple lock descriptors are specified, the status area indicates
the numbers that have been applied. The calling program should call DBUNLOCK if only a
subset of the requested locks succeeded.
Access Modes and Locking
It is anticipated that access mode 1 will typically be used by applications implementing a
locking scheme. In this mode, TurboIMAGE/XL enforces the following rules:
• To modify (DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE) a data entry, you must first issue a
successful lock covering the affected data entry. It can be a data entry, data set, or
database lock.
• To add to or delete from (DBPUT or DBDELETE) a manual master data set, you must first
successfully lock the data set or database. To update (DBUPDATE) a master data set,
data entry level locks are sufficient.
If your application opens the database in access mode 2, it is recommended that you use
locking to coordinate updates with other users.
TurboIMAGE/XL does not prevent any process from reading data even though another
process holds a lock on it. If you want to ensure that no modifications are in progress while
you are reading from the database, you should place an appropriate lock on the data before
starting. Therefore, you may want to use locking in access modes 2, 4, 5, and 6 to
coordinate the reading and modifying sequences and ensure that they do not occur
concurrently.
Because access mode 3 and 7 users have exclusive control of the database and access mode
8 users allow concurrent reading only, locking need not be used in these modes.
Chapter 4
119
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
Automatic Masters
When adding or deleting entries from a detail data set, you need not have locks covering
the implicit additions or deletions that occur in any associated automatic masters.
Locking Levels
Locking can be viewed as operating on three levels: the whole database, whole data sets, or
data entries. TurboIMAGE/XL allows mixed levels of locking. For example, one user could
be locking data entries and another locking the data set. In this situation, a request to lock
the data set cannot succeed until all the currently locked data entries have been released.
Subsequent requests to lock data entries, those that are made while the data set lock is
pending, are placed in a queue behind the data set lock.
This principle is followed for database locks also. If data set or data entry locks are in effect
at the time a database lock is requested, the database lock must wait until they are
released and all subsequent locking requests must wait behind the pending database lock.
In either case, if the request is for a conditional lock, an exceptional condition is generated.
(Refer to the "Locking Mode Options" table in chapter 5.)
Deciding on a Locking Strategy
It is important, especially for on-line interactive applications, to establish a locking
strategy at application design time. In general, locking is related to the transaction, the
basic unit of work performed against a database. TurboIMAGE/XL transactions are either
single or logical, and logical transactions can be static, multiple database, or dynamic.
Refer to "User Logging and Logical Transactions" later in this chapter for more details and
to chapter 5 for additional information.
Typically a transaction consists of several calls to TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics to locate and
modify data. For example, a transaction to add a new order with three line items could
require several reads to locate customer information and several DBPUT calls to add the
order detail records.
One characteristic of a transaction is that the data in the database is consistent both
before and after the transaction, but not while it is in progress. For example, a user
reading the detail data set being modified by the above order transaction may only see
some of the line items and may get no indication that the transaction is incomplete. This
type of problem is referred to as logical inconsistency of data and can be prevented by
using the locking facilities.
The general principle that should be applied for any transaction in a shared-access
environment is: At the start of any transaction, establish locks that cover all data entries
that you intend to modify (with DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE) and/or all data entries
which must not be changed by other processes during the transaction.
Choosing a Locking Level
Because TurboIMAGE/XL needs more information to lock data entries than to lock the
whole database, program complexity tends to increase as locks are employed at lower and
lower levels. Locking the whole database or a single data set is the simplest operation,
followed in increasing order of complexity by locking multiple data sets and locking data
120
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
entries. At system design time, a compromise must be made between the benefits of
low-level locking and the extra programming effort required.
Data entry locking should give the best concurrency; however, there are situations in
which the extra programming effort for data entry locking is not worthwhile. Concurrency
is least optimum at the higher level of the lock. Concurrency and programming effort
should be considered; some other considerations that could affect your choice of locking
level are discussed below.
Locking at the Same Level
All programs concurrently accessing a database should lock at the same level most of the
time. For example, one process locking a data set will hold up all other processes that are
attempting to lock entries in that set. Therefore, the attempt by the process locking at the
data entry level to allow other processes to share the database is nullified by the process
locking at the data set level and the effect is as if all processes were locking at the data set
level. The rule of locking at the same level can be violated for infrequent operations such
as exception handling or rare transactions.
Length of Transactions
Generally, the longer the lock is to be held, the lower the level it should be. In other words,
if you are performing lengthy transactions, you should probably lock at the entry level. For
shorter transactions, you can use locks at either the database or data set level with
satisfactory results.
An extreme case of a long transaction is one in which user dialog takes place while a lock is
held. For example, a program can read some data entries, interact with a terminal
operator, and modify some or all of the entries. A lock to cover this transaction can last
several minutes which is an unacceptable amount of time to stop all database or data set
activity. In this situation, data entry level locking should be used.
Because the length of different transactions varies, the longest transaction (that is also
frequently used) should guide the choice of locking level.
Locking During User Dialog
In the situation described above, where a lock is held during interactive dialog with a
terminal operator, the terminal time-out feature of MPE/iX can be used to avoid having the
locked entity inaccessible when the terminal operator is interrupted in the middle of the
dialog. The time-out feature can be used to cause the terminal read to terminate
automatically if no response is received within a certain time period. Refer to the
discussion of "FCONTROL" in the MPE/iX Intrinsics Manual.
Strong Locking and Dynamic Transactions
Dynamic transactions, which are described later in this chapter, are only allowed with a
database access mode that enforces locking, because strong locking is required for this type
of transaction. TurboIMAGE/XL requires that dynamic transactions be independent of all
other types of transactions. This is guaranteed when the database access mode is 3 or 4,
because the mode guarantees exclusive modify access.
When a database is opened in access mode 1, the programmer must ensure that strong
locks are in place. In other words, any call to DBUNLOCK must occur after the call to DBXEND,
Chapter 4
121
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
or the dynamic transaction is aborted.
NOTE
A call to DBXUNDO must be processed if an error occurs or if the transaction
needs to be rolled back for any other reason, because TurboIMAGE/XL will
not go on to the next transaction in the event of a transaction abort unless an
intervening call to DBXUNDO occurs. Furthermore, if DBXUNDO was used to roll
back a transaction, the program logic should ensure that the subsequent call
to DBXEND is not processed.
Choosing an Item for Locking
An important convention to follow in designing a locking scheme is that all programs
sharing the database concurrently use the same data item to lock data entries in a
particular data set. At any one time, TurboIMAGE/XL allows no more than one data item
per data set to be used for locking purposes. However, several values of the data item can
be locked at the same time. For example, if one process has successfully locked
SALES:ACCOUNT = 54321000, another process could lock SALES:ACCOUNT = 11111111. If a
request is made to unconditionally lock SALES:STOCK# = 8888X22R, the requesting process
will be made to wait until all entries locked by ACCOUNT number are unlocked.
Furthermore, any new requests for locking other SALES:ACCOUNT values will wait until
SALES:STOCK# = 8888X22R is successfully locked and unlocked again.
With this in mind, it is apparent that it is more efficient if all processes locking data
entries in the SALES data set use the same data item because it is much less likely that
one process will have to wait until another process finishes using the data. Therefore, at
system design time, decide which item will be used in each data set for lock specification
purposes. It can be useful to add comments in the schema indicating which item is the
locking item for each set. If a chain is used heavily for chained reads, its search item is a
prime candidate for a lock item.
Examples of Locking
The examples in this section show the order in which TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics can be
called when locking is used. The ORDERS database is used in the examples. (Refer to the
ORDERS database schema in chapter 3.) For descriptions of the procedures used in these
examples, refer to chapter 5.
Table 4-4. contains guidelines that can be helpful in designing locking schemes for
shared-access environments which include users who might modify the database.
Although data entry level locks are recommended in this table and illustrated in the
following examples, data set or database locks could be more appropriate for similar tasks
depending upon other application requirements.
122
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
Table 4-4. Locking in Shared-Access Environments
Action
Recommended Locks
Chained DBGET calls
Lock all data entries in the chain. This usually requires
one lock descriptor.
Serial DBGET calls
Lock the data set.
Update a data entry (DBUPDATE)
Lock the data entry before calling DBGET to read the data
entry. Unlock after the update.
Directed reads (DBGET calls)
These are not recommended in a shared environment.
Lock the data set before determining which data entry is
needed.
Add a data entry to a detail data set
(DBPUT)
Any lock which covers this data entry, but preferably
uses the data item that was decided on as the "lock item"
for the data set.
Add to or delete from a master data
set (DBPUT and DBDELETE)
Lock the data set or database. This is mandatory if the
database is open in access mode 1.
Add a New Customer
1. DBLOCK the CUSTOMER data set or the whole database.
2. DBPUT new data entry in CUSTOMER data set.
3. DBUNLOCK.
Note that TurboIMAGE/XL requires a data set or database lock to cover the addition of an
entry to a master data set.
Update Inventory Information
1. DBLOCK INVENTORY: STOCK# = 6650D22S. (Alternatively, the INVENTORY set or
the whole database can be locked.)
2. DBFIND and DBGET the data entry that is locked in step 1.
3. Compute new UNIT-COST = UNIT-COST + .12
4. UNIT-COST.
5. DBUPDATE the data entry that is locked.
6. DBUNLOCK.
Insert a New Product with a New Supplier
1. DBLOCK the PRODUCT master data set, the SUP-MASTER data set, and the data item
STOCK# = 4444A33B in the INVENTORY detail data set. (This can be done in one
DBLOCK mode 5 call.)
2. DBBEGIN.
3. DBPUT a new data entry in PRODUCT master data set. (For example: 4444A33B
CALIPER).
Chapter 4
123
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
4. DBPUT a new data entry in SUP-MASTER data set.
5. DBPUT a new data entry in INVENTORY data set for STOCK# = 4444A33B.
6. DBEND.
7. DBUNLOCK.
The locking in the above example was done around the entire transaction to maintain data
consistency during the multistep transaction.
Interactively Modify a Customer Account Order
1. DBLOCK SALES: ACCOUNT = 89393899.
2. DBFIND the CUSTOMER master data set entry with ACCOUNT = 89393899 in order to
prepare to read the chain of SALES data entries with the same ACCOUNT value.
3. DBGET each entry in the chain and display it to the user until the correct order is
located.
4. DBUPDATE the contents of the data entry according to the user's request.
5. DBUNLOCK.
In this interactive example, all data entries for ACCOUNT 89393899 in the SALES data
set are locked. Note that these locks are held while a dialog takes place with the terminal
operator; therefore, the lock could be held for several minutes. For this type of transaction,
it may be best to first perform a conditional lock to determine if the records are accessible.
For example, when a mode 6 DBLOCK is called with lock descriptor SALES: ACCOUNT =
89393899 and the lock does not succeed, a message similar to the one below can be
displayed by the program:
RECORDS BEING MODIFIED.
WANT TO WAIT?
If the response is NO, then proceed with other processing. If the answer is YES, call
DBLOCK again with mode 5.
Issuing Multiple Calls to DBLOCK
In order to guarantee that two processes cannot deadlock, TurboIMAGE/XL does not allow
two DBLOCK calls to be made without a DBUNLOCK between the DBLOCK calls. Two exceptions
to this rule are stated here:
• A redundant call can be made to lock the whole database with DBLOCK mode 1 or 2
provided the call relates to the same access path. The redundant call will have no effect.
(This is allowed in order to maintain compatibility with earlier versions of IMAGE.)
• More than one DBLOCK call can be made if the program from which multiple DBLOCK
calls are issued has the MPE/iX Multiple RIN (MR) capability.
The DBLOCK procedure is similar to the MPE/iX FLOCK procedure in that DBLOCK can put a
process into a waiting state and thus can cause a deadlock to occur. For example, a
deadlock can occur if process A is waiting for an MPE/iX file to be freed by process B, and
process B is waiting for a database entity to be unlocked by process A. Therefore, issuing a
DBLOCK in conjunction with a lock applied by an MPE/iX intrinsic, such as FLOCK, or by the
COBOLLOCK procedure requires MR capability. The use of MR capability is not
124
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Using the Locking Facility
recommended unless absolutely necessary.
Users whose programs have MR capability and issue multiple DBLOCK calls are responsible
for deadlock prevention. This type of locking must be done very carefully. Recovery from a
deadlock requires a restart of the operating system. No matter how many descriptors are
listed in a single DBLOCK call, TurboIMAGE/XL guarantees that deadlocks will never occur
provided that no executing program that accesses the database has MR capability.
Programs that execute successfully using TurboIMAGE/XL locks in a single process
environment will not execute in a process-handling environment without MR (Multiple
RIN) capability. (Refer to appendix D for more information on the MR capability.)
Releasing Locks
The locks held by a process for a particular access path of a database are relinquished
when the process calls DBUNLOCK; they are automatically relinquished when the process
closes the database, terminates, aborts, or is aborted by an operator. Failure of a program
to release locks will result in other programs waiting indefinitely for any conflicting locks.
These programs, while in a waiting state, cannot be aborted by the operating system. An
attempt to abort such a waiting process will result in the abort taking effect as soon as the
process obtains the lock for which it was waiting.
NOTE
Chapter 4
Any program that executes a DBGET in mode 5 or 6 should lock the chain in
the detail data set. This prevents the execution of any DBPUTs or DBDELETEs
to the detail data set from modifying the current chain, thereby preventing a
status 18 (broken chain) error.
125
Using the Database
TurboIMAGE/XL Logging Services
TurboIMAGE/XL Logging Services
TurboIMAGE/XL provides logging through the following two MPE/iX services:
• Transaction Management (XM) logging
• User logging
XM logging is used to ensure the physical integrity of the database. It is transparent to the
user because it is automatically enabled unless AUTODEFER is enabled. Dynamic
roll-back recovery (explained in chapter 7) works in conjunction with XM and ensures the
logical integrity of the database. Dynamic roll-back uses XM to roll back dynamic
transactions online while other database activity is occurring. Dynamic transactions are
defined later in this chapter. User logging, which is described below, is not required for
dynamic roll-back recovery, but is recommended to guard against a hard disk crash.
User logging is used to ensure the logical integrity of the database. It is initiated by the
user and can be used for several purposes. For example, user logging is required to perform
roll-forward recovery. It can also be used to keep a record of individual database
transactions (see the description of the >FILE command of DBRECOV in chapter 8). In
addition, it is sometimes used for audit purposes to keep a record of all database
transactions. Because some user logging considerations are important to applications, they
are discussed below. For a more complete discussion of TurboIMAGE/XL logging services,
refer to chapter 7.
What User Logging Does
The user logging and recovery facility enables all database modifications to be logged
automatically to a tape or disk log file. In the event of a system failure the log file is read to
re-execute transactions or identify incomplete transactions, depending on what type of
recovery process is being used. In addition, the transaction logging system can be a useful
tool for auditing. The log file is actually a record of all modifications to the database. The
intrinsic DBMEMO, capable of logging user text, facilitates interpretation of the log files for
future reference.
The database administrator is responsible for enabling or disabling the logging and
recovery processes and generating backup database copies, thus making logging a global
function controlled at the database level rather than at the individual user level. A process
is said to be logging if all of the following are true:
• The database has been enabled for logging by the database administrator.
• A logging process has been initiated from the system console.
• The user is accessing the database in one of modes 1 through 4.
How User Logging Works
The following TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics are automatically logged when the database is
enabled for logging and a user opens the database in a mode which permits modifications:
DBOPEN, DBCLOSE, DBPUT, DBUPDATE, DBDELETE, DBBEGIN, DBEND, DBMEMO,
126
Chapter 4
Using the Database
TurboIMAGE/XL Logging Services
DBXBEGIN, DBXEND, and DBXUNDO. In addition, DBQUIESCE procedures called by TrueOnline Backup to quiesce and unquiesce the database are also logged to the logging file.
TurboIMAGE/XL calls the MPE/iX logging intrinsics OPENLOG, WRITELOG, and CLOSELOG
in order to log information to the log file. When a database is opened, DBOPEN calls the
OPENLOG intrinsic using the log identifier and password stored in the database root file. If
this call succeeds, DBOPEN calls WRITELOG to log a DBOPEN log record containing information
about the database and the new user. The WRITELOG intrinsic is also used to log
information when the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE are
called. WRITELOG is called after all error checks are made, but before actually modifying
the working database. Consequently, a log record is not written until the TurboIMAGE/XL
procedure has committed itself to succeed. WRITELOG is also used by the TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics DBBEGIN, DBEND, DBMEMO, DBXBEGIN, DBXEND, DBXUNDO, and DBQUIESCE
procedures.
DBCLOSE (mode 1) calls WRITELOG to log a DBCLOSE log record, and then calls CLOSELOG to
terminate access to the log file. If a transaction initiated with DBBEGIN fails to call DBEND,
or a DBXBEGIN does not have a matching DBXEND, DBCLOSE causes an abnormal DBEND or
DBXEND log record to terminate access to the log file. DBCLOSE also causes an abnormal
DBEND or DBXEND log record to be written if the program aborts with an unfinished
transaction.
User Logging and Logical Transactions
TurboIMAGE/XL transactions are of two basic types--single and logical. A single
transaction is a single call to an intrinsic. It is not delimited by begin and end intrinsics.
A logical transaction can be considered as the basic work unit performed against a
database. A logical transaction could consist of a single modification, but more typically
consists of several calls to TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics which lock, read, modify, and unlock
information. Logical transactions transfer the database from one consistent state to
another, but in the midst of a multiple-step transaction, the database could be temporarily
inconsistent with itself. (For an example, see "Logical Transactions" in chapter 7.)
TurboIMAGE/XL logical transactions are defined in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. Types of Logical Transactions
Transaction
Definition
Static
A logical transaction that begins with a DBBEGIN call and ends with a DBEND
call. A static transaction spans only one database. This type of transaction can
be recovered with DBRECOV.
Multiple
database
A logical transaction that spans more than one database. A multiple database
transaction begins with a DBBEGIN call and ends with a DBEND call. This type
of transaction is recovered with DBRECOV.
Dynamic
A logical transaction that begins with a DBXBEGIN call and ends with a
DBXEND call. Unlike non-dynamic transactions (that is, static and multiple
database transactions), dynamic transactions can be rolled back with a call to
the DBXUNDO procedure and are automatically rolled back in the event of a
system failure or program abort.
Chapter 4
127
Using the Database
TurboIMAGE/XL Logging Services
In the event of a system failure and subsequent recovery, only complete logical
transactions are re-executed, returning the database to a consistent state. Therefore, it is
essential that an application program use the intrinsics DBBEGIN and DBEND, or DBXBEGIN
and DBXEND, to mark the beginning and end of a sequence of calls which constitute a single
logical transaction.
For reasons explained more fully under "Locking Requirements for Logical Transactions"
in chapter 7, the following sequence of operations should be followed as closely as possible
when performing modifications:
1. Call DBLOCK to lock all data which must not be changed by other processes during the
transaction. This includes data to be read and data to be modified.
2. If you wish, read data using DBFIND and DBGET to determine the needed modifications.
3. Call DBBEGIN or DBXBEGIN to declare the beginning of modifications.
4. Make modifications using DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE.
5. If this is a dynamic transaction, call DBXUNDO in the event an error is encountered or
the modifications should be backed out for any other reason.
6. Call DBEND or DBXEND to declare the end of the modifications. However, if this is a
dynamic transaction and DBXUNDO was used to roll back a transaction, your program
logic should ensure that the subsequent call to DBXEND is not processed.
7. Call DBUNLOCK to release all of the locks.
NOTE
The call to DBUNLOCK must occur after the call to DBXEND in the case of a
dynamic transaction when the database is opened in access mode 1, because
TurboIMAGE/XL requires strong locking for dynamic transactions.
Transaction Numbers
TurboIMAGE/XL maintains a transaction number for each user accessing the database.
Transaction numbers enable the DBRECOV recovery program to associate one access path's
log records with a particular transaction. This number is initialized by DBOPEN and
incremented each time DBBEGIN or DBXBEGIN is called, or for each single call to DBPUT,
DBUPDATE, or DBDELETE if it is not included in a transaction delimited by DBBEGIN and
DBEND, or DBXBEGIN or DBXEND. Transaction numbers are included in all DBBEGIN,
DBXBEGIN, DBPUT, DBUPDATE, DBDELETE, and DBMEMO log records. The transaction
number is always incremented as described, regardless of whether the user's process is
actually logging. A user's process can determine its transaction count (and whether the
database and user is logging) by calling DBINFO using mode 401.
User Logging and Process Suspension
The MPE/iX logging intrinsics will suspend a calling process if the logging buffers become
full. Consequently, a user's process which calls TurboIMAGE/XL can become suspended,
for example, if a tape log file reaches the end of a reel and logging buffers become full
before a new tape can be mounted.
128
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Obtaining Database Structure Information
Obtaining Database Structure Information
The DBINFO library procedure allows you to acquire information programmatically about
the database. It provides information about database settings, data items, data sets, data
paths, B-Tree indices, and third-party indices. The information returned is restricted by
the user class number and access mode established when the database is opened.
Any data items, data sets, or paths of the database inaccessible to that user class or in that
access mode are considered to be non-existent. For example, if the access mode grants only
read access, this procedure will indicate that no data sets can have entries added. The
information that can be obtained through separate calls to DBINFO is summarized below.
In relation to data items, DBINFO can be used to:
• Determine whether the user class number established when the database is opened
allows a specified data item value to be changed in at least one data set, or allows a data
entry containing the item to be added or deleted.
• Get a description of a data item including the data item name, type, sub-item length,
and sub-item count. This information corresponds to that which is specified in the item
part of the schema.
• Determine the number of items in the database available to the current user and to get
a list of numbers identifying those items. The numbers indicate the position of each
data item in the item part of the schema. The type of access, for example read-only, can
also be determined.
• Determine the number of items in a particular data set available to the current user
and get a list of those item numbers and the type of access available for each one.
In relation to data sets, DBINFO can be used to:
• Determine whether the current user can add or delete entries to a particular data set.
• Get a data set description including the data set name, type, length in halfwords and
blocking factor for data entries in the set, number of entries in the set, and the capacity.
• Determine the number of data sets the current user can access and get a list of the data
set numbers indicating the position of the data set definition in the set part of the
schema. The type of access to each set is also indicated.
• Determine in which data sets a particular data item is available to the current user.
The number of data sets, a list of data set numbers, and the type of access available for
each set is returned.
• Obtain capacity information. Determine if a data set is jumbo, and if so, information on
chunks.
• Determine if master data set has a B-Tree index.
In relation to paths, DBINFO can be used to:
• Get information about the paths associated with a particular data set including the
number of paths. If the data set is a master set, the information includes the data set
number, search item number, and sort item number for each related detail. If the data
Chapter 4
129
Using the Database
Obtaining Database Structure Information
set is a detail set, the information includes the master data set number of the related
master data set, the detail search item number and sort item number for each path.
• Determine the key item number of a master data set or the search item number for the
primary path of the detail and the data set number of the related master. In either case,
if the search item is inaccessible to the current user, no information is returned.
Special Uses of DBINFO
If the application program uses data items and data set numbers when calling the other
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures, it is good practice to determine these numbers by calling
DBINFO at the beginning of the program to set up the numbers. It is not practical to code
the numbers into the program because a change to the database structure might require
extensive changes to the application programs. Likewise, it is inefficient and time
consuming to call DBINFO throughout the program to determine these numbers. Many
application programmers prefer the convenience and flexibility of using the data item and
data set names in procedure calls.
DBINFO is useful when writing general inquiry applications similar to the QUERY/3000
database inquiry facility. DBINFO can also be used to obtain information regarding the
logging facility, dynamic transactions, third-party indexing, and the critical item update
(CIUPDATE) option settings for a database and the current process. In relation to Native
Language Support (NLS), DBINFO can be used to get the MPE/iX numeric code that defines
the native language supported by the database. (Refer to "Database Description
Language" and "Schema Structure" in chapter 3.)
Checking Subsystem Flag
A subsystem flag can be set with the DBUTIL >>SET command. This flag indicates whether
subsystems, including user programs, can access the TurboIMAGE/XL database and, if
access is allowed, whether it is read only or both read and write. Because the flag does not
actually allow or prevent access, the subsystem or user program must include a call to
DBINFO to test this flag. QUERY/3000 is the primary subsystem which uses the subsystem
flag.
130
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Closing the Database or a Data Set
Closing the Database or a Data Set
After you have completed all the tasks with the database, use the DBCLOSE library
procedure to terminate access to the database. When DBCLOSE is used for this purpose, all
data sets and the root file are closed, and the DBU control block is released to the MPE/iX
system. If there are no other concurrent users of the database, the DBB and DBG control
blocks are also released. All locks that you could still have on the database through the
closed access path are automatically released.
The DBCLOSE procedure can also be used to rewind or close access to a data set. Rewinding
consists of resetting to its initial state the dynamic status information kept by
TurboIMAGE/XL. If a detail data set is closed or rewound, the current path does not
change when the status information is initialized.
The purpose of closing a data set completely is to return the resources required by that
data set to the MPE/iX system without terminating access to the database. A typical
reason for rewinding a data set is to start at the first or last entry again when doing a
forward or backward serial read.
Chapter 4
131
Using the Database
Checking the Status of a Procedure
Checking the Status of a Procedure
Each time a procedure is called, TurboIMAGE/XL returns status information in a buffer
specified by the calling program and, if the program is in Compatibility Mode, sets the CM
condition code maintained by MPE/iX. The CM condition code, or the TurboIMAGE/XL
return status (described later), should be checked immediately after TurboIMAGE/XL
returns from the procedure to the calling program before another procedure call is made.
A CM condition code is always one of the following and has the general meaning shown:
CM Condition Code
General Meaning
CCE
The procedure performed successfully. No exceptional condition was
encountered.
CCG
An exceptional condition, other than an error, was encountered.
CCL
The procedure failed due to an invalid parameter or a system error.
The first word of the status information returned in the calling program's buffer is a
return status whose value corresponds to the CM condition code as follows:
CM Condition Code
Return Status Value
CCE
0
CCG
>0
CCL
<0
The calling program must check either the CM condition code or the TurboIMAGE/XL
return status to determine the success or failure of the procedure. The return status is also
used to indicate various exceptional conditions and errors. See appendix A for a summary.
The other elements of status information vary with the outcome of the call and from one
procedure to another. The content of these elements is described in detail with each
procedure definition later in chapter 5 and in appendix A, which describes error conditions.
132
Chapter 4
Using the Database
Interpreting Errors
Interpreting Errors
TurboIMAGE/XL provides two library procedures, DBEXPLAIN and DBERROR, which can be
used to interpret status information programmatically. DBEXPLAIN prints on the $STDLIST
device an English language error message which includes the name of the database and
the name of the procedure that returned the status information. DBERROR returns the
English language error message contained in a buffer specified by the calling program.
Abnormal Termination
Under certain conditions, the calling process can be terminated by TurboIMAGE/XL.
Conditions giving rise to process termination and a description of the accompanying error
messages are presented in appendix A.
Chapter 4
133
Using the Database
Interpreting Errors
134
Chapter 4
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
5 TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
This chapter contains the reference specifications for the TurboIMAGE/XL library
procedures (also known as intrinsics), arranged alphabetically. Table 5-1. gives a summary
of the procedures with a brief description of their function.
Chapter 5
135
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
Using TurboIMAGE/XL Intrinsics
Using TurboIMAGE/XL Intrinsics
On the following pages, the calling parameters for each procedure are defined in
alphabetical order for easy look-up rather than the order in which they appear in the call
statement. Every parameter must be included when a call is made because a parameter's
meaning is determined by its position.
NOTE
All parameters must be on halfword boundaries. Database names, data set
names, and data item names that are passed to the TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics must be in uppercase.
Table 5-1. TurboIMAGE/XL Procedures
Procedure
Function
DBBEGIN
When logging, designates the beginning of a transaction and optionally
writes user information to the log file.
DBCLOSE
Terminates access to a database or a data set, or resets the pointers of a data
set to their original state.
DBCONTROL
Allows a process operating in exclusive mode to enable or disable the deferred
output (AUTODEFER) option. Also allows a process to enable or disable the
critical item update (CIUPDATE) option, activate deadlock detection, and set
wildcard character and BTREEMODE1 option for database, or for the current
DBOPEN without affecting other processes operating on the same database.
DBDELETE
Deletes an existing entry from a data set.
DBEND
When logging, designates the end of a transaction and optionally writes user
information to the log file.
DBERROR
Supplies an ASCII language message that interprets the status information
set by any callable TurboIMAGE/XL procedure. The message is returned to
the calling program in a buffer.
DBEXPLAIN
Examines status information returned by a TurboIMAGE/XL procedure and
prints a multiline message on the $STDLIST device.
DBFIND
Locates the first and last entries of a data chain in preparation for access to
entries in the chain for non-B-Tree searches. For B-Tree searches, master and
detail data sets can be included.
DBGET
Reads the data item values of a specified entry.
DBINFO
Provides information about the database being accessed, such as the name
and description of a data item or data set. It also provides information on
logging, including logging of dynamic and multiple database transactions,
and on third-party indexing, critical item update, and other options.
DBLOCK
Locks one or more data entries, a data set, or an entire database (or a
combination of these) temporarily to allow the process calling the procedure
to have exclusive access to the locked entities.
136
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
Using TurboIMAGE/XL Intrinsics
Table 5-1. TurboIMAGE/XL Procedures
Procedure
Function
DBMEMO
When logging, writes user information to the log file.
DBOPEN
Initiates access to a database. Specifies the user access mode and user class
number for the duration of the process.
DBPUT
Adds a new entry to a manual master or detail data set.
DBUNLOCK
Releases those locks obtained with previous call(s) to DBLOCK.
DBUPDATE
Modifies the values of data items. Cannot be used to update master data set
key items. Can be used to update detail data set search and sort items in
database access mode 1, 3, or 4 if permitted by the critical item update
(CIUPDATE) option settings for the database and the current process.
DBXBEGIN
Designates the beginning of a dynamic transaction. Refer to "Transactions"
later in this chapter for a description of dynamic transactions.
DBXEND
Designates the end of a dynamic transaction.
DBXUNDO
Rolls back the active dynamic transaction.
Table 5-2. illustrates the forms of the call statements for the languages that can be used to
call the procedures. Chapter 6 contains examples of using the procedures and
specifications for declaration of parameters for some of these languages. It also provides a
sample RPG program.
Table 5-2. Calling a TurboIMAGE/XL Procedure
COBOL II
CALL "name" USING parameter,parameter,...,parameter.
FORTRAN 77
CALL name (parameter,parameter,...,parameter)
Pascal
name (parameter,parameter,...,parameter);
BBASIC
linenumber CALL name (parameter,parameter,...,parameter)
C
name (parameter,parameter,...,parameter);
All procedures can be called from programs in any of the host languages.
Intrinsic Numbers
An intrinsic number is provided for each procedure. This number, which uniquely
identifies the procedure within TurboIMAGE/XL and the MPE/iX operating system, is
returned with other status information when an error occurs. You can use it to identify the
procedure that caused the error or call DBEXPLAIN to interpret the number and other
information.
Chapter 5
137
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
Using TurboIMAGE/XL Intrinsics
Database Protection
When each procedure is called, TurboIMAGE/XL verifies that the requested operation is
compatible with the user class number and access mode established when the database is
opened.
Unused Parameters
When calling some procedures for a specific purpose, one of the parameters can be ignored;
however, it still must be listed in the call statement. An application program may find it
useful to set up a variable named Not_Used_Parm or DUMMY to be listed as the unused
parameter as a reminder that the value of the parameter does not affect the procedure call.
Refer to the examples in chapter 6.
The Status Array
The status array is a communication area. If the procedure executes successfully, the
contents of the array reflect this as described under each intrinsic discussion in this
chapter. If the procedure fails, standard error information is returned in the array as
described in this chapter and appendix A.
Transactions
TurboIMAGE/XL transactions are defined below:
Table 5-3. Types of Transactions
Transaction
Definition
Single
A single call to an intrinsic. A single transaction is not delimited by DBBEGIN and
DBEND, or DBXBEGIN and DBXEND.
Logical
A sequence of one or more procedure calls that begins with a DBBEGIN or
DBXBEGIN call and ends with a DBEND or DBXEND call. A logical transaction can
contain several intrinsic calls, but is logically considered one transaction.
Static
A logical transaction that begins with a DBBEGIN call and ends with a DBEND call.
A static transaction spans only one database, and can be recovered with
DBRECOV.
Dynamic
A logical transaction that begins with a DBXBEGIN call and ends with a DBXEND
call. A dynamic transaction can be rolled back dynamically with DBXUNDO. A
dynamic transaction spans only one database.
Multiple
database
A logical transaction that spans more than one database. A multiple database
transaction begins with a DBBEGIN call and ends with a DBEND call. A multiple
database transaction can be recovered with DBRECOV. A dynamic transaction can
also span more than one database by beginning with a DBXBEGIN call and ending
with a DBEND call.
Refer to chapters 4 and 7 for more information on transactions.
138
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBBEGIN
DBBEGIN
INTRINSIC NUMBER 412
Designates the beginning of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls regarded as a
static or multiple database transaction (based on the mode) for the purposes of logging and
recovery. The text parameter can be used to log user information to the log file. DBBEGIN is
used in conjunction with DBEND to begin and end a static or multiple database transaction.
Syntax
DBBEGIN,{ base
baseidlist } ,text,mode,status,textlen
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.) Use
base when calling DBBEGIN mode 1 (static transaction).
baseidlist
is the name of the integer array containing the base IDs of the databases
which are involved in a multiple database transaction. Use baseidlist
when calling DBBEGIN mode 3 or 4 (multiple database transaction). The
layout of this array is shown here (each element is a halfword or two
bytes):
Element
Contents
1-2
The application program must set these two halfwords to
binary 0s before calling DBBEGIN. After returning to the
calling program, these two halfwords contain the
transaction ID. This ID can be used in order to end the
transaction by calling DBEND.
3
The number of base IDs involved in the multiple database
transaction. This must be a number between 1 and 15,
inclusive.
4-n
Base IDs of the databases involved in the transaction.
Base ID is the first halfword of the base parameter used
to call TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics.
text
is the name of an array up to 256 halfwords long which contains user
ASCII or binary data to be written to the log file as part of the DBBEGIN log
record. The text argument is used to assign each particular transaction a
distinct name. (Refer to "Discussion" below for more information.)
mode
is an integer indicating the type of transaction desired as follows:
Mode 1:
Chapter 5
Indicates a static transaction.
139
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBBEGIN
Mode 3:
Indicates a multiple database transaction with one log
record per database. If user logging is enabled for the
databases, mode 3 generates multiple entries in the log file
in order to mark multiple database transactions. For
example, assume that base IDs 11, 12, and 13 are involved
in a multiple database transaction. DBBEGIN mode 3 (with
base IDs 11, 12, and 13 specified in the baseidlist
parameter) generates the following log record sequence:
DBBEGIN (11, 1/3)
DBBEGIN (12, 2/3)
DBBEGIN (13, 3/3)
.
.
.
database updates
.
.
.
DBEND (11, 1/3)
DBEND (12, 2/3)
DBEND (13, 3/3)
where the notations 1/3, 2/3, 3/3 in the log records indicate
"first of three," "second of three," and "third of three."
Refer to chapter 7 for more details about user logging.
Mode 4:
Indicates a multiple database transaction. If user logging
is enabled for the databases, mode 4 generates one entry
in the log file in order to mark multiple database
transactions. For example, assume that base IDs 11, 12,
and 13 are involved in a multiple database transaction.
DBBEGIN mode 4 (with base IDs 11, 12, and 13 specified
in the baseidlist parameter) generates the following log
record sequence:
MDBXBEGIN (11, 12, 13)
.
.
.
database updates
.
.
.
MDBXEND (11, 12, 13)
Refer to chapter 7 for more details about user logging.
status
140
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information. If the procedure executes successfully, the status array
contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table 5-3.
describes the contents of element 1 when the procedure
does not succeed.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBBEGIN
textlen
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
is an integer equal to the number of halfwords to be logged from the text
parameter, or is a negative integer equal to the number of bytes to be
logged. Length can be zero.
Discussion
DBBEGIN is called to designate the beginning of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure
calls which are jointly considered a single logical transaction. The transaction is either a
static or multiple database transaction, based on the mode. The end of such a sequence is
designated by a matching call to DBEND. If the calling process is logging, DBBEGIN causes a
log record to be written to the log file which includes such information as the time, date,
and user text buffer. DBBEGIN log records are used by the database recovery program
DBRECOV to identify the beginning of all logical transactions.
DBBEGIN returns an error condition if it is called twice without an intervening call to DBEND
or if it is called while a dynamic transaction is still active, whether the process is actually
logging or not.
Table 5-4. DBBEGIN Return Status Values
Calling Errors:
Chapter 5
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-139
Invalid number of base IDs.
-140
Bad base ID list.
-141
All MDBX databases must be on the same system.
-142
All MDBX databases must log to the same log file.
-143
Logging must be enabled or disabled for all MDBX databases.
-144
MUSTRECOVER must be enabled or disabled for all MDBX
databases.
-145
Roll-back must be enabled or disabled for all MDBX databases.
-151
Text length greater than 512 bytes.
-152
Transaction is in progress.
-221
Cannot begin transaction when a dynamic transaction is active.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction encounters
an error.
141
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBBEGIN
Table 5-4. DBBEGIN Return Status Values
Communications
Errors:
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
Logging System
Failures:
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Exceptional
Conditions:
-193
DBU control block is full.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
62
DBU full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
142
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCLOSE
DBCLOSE
INTRINSIC NUMBER 403
Terminates access to a database or a data set, or rewinds a data set. DBCLOSE is used in
conjunction with DBOPEN to establish and terminate access to a database.
Syntax
DBCLOSE,base,dset,mode,status
Parameters
base
is the name of an array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
dset
is the name of an array containing the left-justified name of the data set to
be closed, or is an integer referencing the data set by number if mode
equals 2 or 3. If mode equals 1, this parameter is ignored. The data set
name can be up to 16 characters long. If shorter, it must be terminated by
a semicolon or a blank.
mode
is an integer equal to 1, 2, or 3 indicating the type of termination desired
as follows:
Mode 1:
Access to the database is terminated. Any locks held by
this user for this base ID are released. If DBCLOSE mode 1
is called while a dynamic transaction is still active, an
error is returned, the transaction is aborted, and the
database is closed automatically. You do not need to call
DBXEND or DBXUNDO.
Mode 2:
The data set referenced by the dset array is closed, but
locks held in the data set are not released. If DBCLOSE
mode 2 is called while a dynamic transaction is still active,
an error is returned. You must check the error and decide
to use DBXEND, DBXUNDO, or continue with the
transaction even if DBCLOSE mode 2 failed. DBXUNDO will
abort the entire dynamic transaction. DBXEND will
terminate the dynamic transaction; the modifications
completed thus far within the transaction will remain in
the database.
Mode 3:
If mode equals 3, the data set referenced by the dset array
is reinitialized but not closed.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBCLOSE mode information. The
section on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the
Chapter 5
143
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCLOSE
TPI option.
status
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table 5-5.
describes the contents of element 1 when the procedure
does not succeed.
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
Discussion
You must call DBCLOSE mode 1 to terminate access to the database when you have
completed all the tasks you want to perform. If a process has issued multiple calls to
DBOPEN for the same database, only the access path specified in the DBCLOSE base
parameter is affected by the call to DBCLOSE.
The capability to reset and close a data set is provided to perform functions such as
reinitializing dynamic status information for a process accessing a particular data set and
returning system resources. In both modes 2 and 3, status information is reinitialized, but
system resources are returned in mode 2 only. The current list is not reset. Table 5-5.
summarizes the functions performed in each mode.
Table 5-5. DBCLOSE Modes 2 and 3 Functions
Function
Mode 2
Mode 3
Reinitialize dynamic status information for the data set (chain
count, forward and backward pointers, current record number
and last return status).
YES
YES
Close the data set.
YES
NO
Release locks held within the data set.
NO
NO
Current list reset.
NO
NO
Because mode 3 does not close and reopen a data set, it is more efficient than mode 2 if the
data set is to be accessed again before the database is closed.
Only mode 3 is allowed within a dynamic transaction; mode 2 will return an error, and
mode 1 will abort the transaction.
If the process is logging, a mode 1 DBCLOSE causes a DBCLOSE log record to be written to the
log file. DBCLOSE log records contain such information as the time, date, and user log
identification number. A DBCLOSE log record is also written if the process aborts or
terminates without closing the database. If the process aborts before completing an active
transaction, a special DBEND log record is written prior to the DBCLOSE.
144
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCLOSE
DBCLOSE returns an error condition if the process has not completed an active transaction;
in other words, the process has called DBBEGIN without a matching call to DBEND.
Transactions that abort in this manner are not automatically suppressed by DBRECOV
during recovery in order to salvage as many subsequent transactions that may depend on
the aborted transaction as possible.
Table 5-6. DBCLOSE Return Status Values
File System, Memory
Management, and
Transaction Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
Communications Errors:
Logging System Failures:
Exceptional Conditions:
-2
FCLOSE failure.
-3
FREADDIR failed.
-5
FWRITEDIR failure.
-6
FWRITELABEL failure.
-11
Bad database reference.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic
transaction encounters an error.
-232
Illegal DBCLOSE mode 2 used during an active
dynamic transaction.
-235
Dynamic transaction aborted due to DBCLOSE
mode 1; database closed.
-420
Feature not implemented.
-101
DSCLOSE failure.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-103
Remote 3000 stack space insufficient.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
-111
WRITELOG failure.
-112
CLOSELOG failure.
-152
Transaction is in process.
-194
Invalid DBB.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
-333
Error in QOPEN table operation.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE
allowed.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
145
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCONTROL
DBCONTROL
INTRINSIC NUMBER 411
Allows a process accessing the database to have control over some DBUTIL options. In
exclusive mode (DBOPEN mode 3), DBCONTROL can be used to enable or disable the deferred
output (AUTODEFER) option and perform several B-Tree related tasks such as adding,
dropping, or rebuilding a B-Tree index. It can also be used to set BTREEMODE1 option to ON
or OFF and specify the wildcard character for the current DBOPEN or for the database
(permanent).
For database access modes 1, 3, and 4, DBCONTROL can be used to temporarily enable or
disable the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option, depending on the setting for the
database, without impacting other processes operating on the same database. Using
DBCONTROL does not alter the permanent AUTODEFER or CIUPDATE settings for the database
set with DBUTIL. However, the permanent setting for BTREEMODE1 and wildcard character
can be altered based on the DBCONTROL mode.
Syntax
DBCONTROL,base,qualifier,mode,status
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
qualifier
used only for certain DBCONTROL modes.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, or 16 indicating
the following:
146
Mode 1:
Turn on the deferred output option. If AUTODEFER has not
been enabled for the database (using DBUTIL >>ENABLE),
mode 1 enables the deferred output option for the duration
of only the current DBOPEN. When the database is closed,
AUTODEFER will no longer be enabled. Mode 1 is not
allowed while a dynamic transaction is active.
Mode 2:
Turn off the deferred output option. If AUTODEFER has
been enabled for the database (using DBUTIL >>ENABLE),
mode 2 disables the deferred output option for the
duration of only the current DBOPEN. When the database is
closed, AUTODEFER will again be enabled.
Mode 5:
Enable the critical item update option. If CIUPDATE is
ALLOWED for the database (default or by using DBUTIL
>>SET), mode 5 enables the option for the current DBOPEN
until either a DBCONTROL mode 6 call disables the option
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCONTROL
or the database is closed. You can call mode 5 successfully
if the CIUPDATE setting for the database equals ON, but
the call has no impact on the option setting for the current
process unless an intervening call to DBCONTROL mode 6
disabled the option. If the CIUPDATE flag is
DISALLOWED, a call to mode 5 returns an error. The
CIUPDATE option is available only in database access
modes 1, 3, and 4.
Mode 6:
Disable the critical item update option. If CIUPDATE has
been set to ON for the database (using DBUTIL>>SET),
mode 6 disables the option for the current DBOPEN until
either a DBCONTROL mode 5 call enables the option or the
database is closed. If the CIUPDATE option setting for the
database equals ALLOWED and the process has called
DBCONTROL in mode 5 to enable the option, then mode 6
disables the option for that same process. The CIUPDATE
option is available only in database access modes 1, 3, and
4.
Mode 7:
Allow the database to be included in the dynamic
multiple database transaction (DMDBX). DBCONTROL
mode 7 needs to be done once, for every database, before
including it in DBXBEGIN mode 3 call for DMDBX. Mode 7 is
used programmatically to allow it for DMDBX and remains
activated until the database is closed or the application
terminates.
Mode 7 also activates the database for deadlock detection.
In case of a deadlock, DBLOCK will return an error, 26,
instead of causing a process hang. Note that mode 7 will
activate both deadlock detection and inclusion in DMDBX. If
you only want deadlock detection and not DMDBX, your
DBXBEGIN call can use mode 1 instead of 3.
Chapter 5
Mode 9:
Enable the HWMPUT option of DBPUT for the current
DBOPEN. This causes DBPUT to try placing entries at the
high-water mark first instead of at the delete chain head
first.
Mode 10:
Disable the HWMPUT option of DBPUT for the current
DBOPEN. This causes DBPUT to try placing entries at the
delete chain head first. This is the default action if
DBCONTROL is not called.
Mode 13:
Allow a privileged mode caller to perform B-Tree related
tasks such as adding, dropping, rebuilding, releasing, or
securing a B-Tree index file. Exclusive database access is
required to add, drop, or rebuild a B-Tree index. Qualifier
has a structured record containing dataset information
and directives. Refer to chapter 11, "B-Tree Indices" for
the qualifier layout.
147
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCONTROL
Mode 14:
Allow a privileged mode caller to set BTREEMODE1 option
to ON or OFF and set wildcard character for the database
(permanent). Refer to chapter 11, "B-Tree Indices" for the
qualifier layout.
Mode 15:
Enable B-Tree wildcard search for DBFIND mode 1, X and
U types, for the master data set's key item and its
corresponding search items in details, if the key item has a
B-Tree index. In other words, turn on the BTREEMODE1
flag for the current database open. The first byte of the
qualifier is examined. If it is null or blank, then the
current wildcard character is not changed. If it is in the
ASCII range (33...126), then the wildcard character is
changed to that value for the current DBOPEN. If the
qualifier is any other value, DBCONTROL returns an error.
Affects only the current database open. It needs to be done
once per database and remains activated until the
database is closed or the application terminates. This
mode allows you to perform B-Tree searches on ASCII
types without making application changes.
Mode 16:
Disable B-Tree wildcard search for DBFIND mode 1
regardless of the existence of a B-Tree index. That is, turn
off the BTREEMODE1 flag for the current database open.
The qualifier is ignored, and BTREEMODE 1 is turned off.
Affects the current database open only. It needs to be done
once per database and remains activated until the
database is closed or the application terminates.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBCONTROL modes. The section on
DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the TPI option.
status
148
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information. If the procedure executes successfully, the status array
contents are as follows:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table 5-6.
describes the contents of element 1 when the procedure
does not succeed.
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCONTROL
Discussion
DBCONTROL can be called by a program for the following purposes:
• To enable or disable the AUTODEFER option for the current mode 3 DBOPEN.
• To enable or disable the critical item update option for the current process accessing the
database in mode 1, 3, or 4 depending on the CIUPDATE setting for the database.
• To enable or disable the HWMPUT for the current DBOPEN.
• To include a database in dynamic multiple database transaction.
• To activate deadlock detection for the database.
• To perform B-Tree index related tasks.
In TurboIMAGE/XL default mode, MPE/iX Transaction Management (XM) is used to log
database modifications (DBPUTs, DBDELETEs, DBUPDATEs) to the XM log file. With deferred
output, MPE/iX Transaction Management is not used. Instead, the MPE/iX file system
default mode is used. This mode keeps data pages in memory for as long as possible, either
until file close time or until no more memory is available.
Thus, with deferred output, database modifications caused by calls to DBPUT, DBUPDATE,
or DBDELETE cannot be written to the disk (or can only be partially written). Although
TurboIMAGE/XL generally operates more efficiently in this mode, a system failure while
the database is operating in this mode has a very high probability of causing internal
structural damage to the database.
A program that opens the database exclusively can call DBCONTROL mode 1 to enter the
deferred mode of operation, except when a dynamic transaction is active. In this case, all
database modifications will be kept in memory for as long as possible, either until the
database is closed or until no more memory is available.
A program that opens the database exclusively can call DBCONTROL mode 2 to turn off the
deferred mode of operation. In this case, all database modifications will be written to the
MPE/iX Transaction Management log file until the database is closed.
Programs that are designed to modify the values of detail data set search and sort items
can call DBCONTROL mode 5 if the CIUPDATE setting for a database equals ALLOWED. The
CIUPDATE option is available only in database access modes 1, 3, and 4. The mode 5 call
enables CIUPDATE for only this process until either a DBCONTROL mode 6 call disables the
option for the process or the database is closed. Other processes operating on the same
database are not impacted by these calls.
A program, which must ensure that the values of detail data set search and sort items
remain unchanged for the duration or a portion of the process, can call DBCONTROL mode 6
to disable CIUPDATE if this option has been set to ON for the database, or if the option is
ALLOWED (default or set by DBUTIL) and an earlier call to DBCONTROL mode 5 enabled the
option. CIUPDATE is available only in database access modes 1, 3, and 4. When DBCONTROL
mode 6 is used to disable CIUPDATE, the option is disabled for that process alone until a call
to DBCONTROL mode 5 enables the option for the process or the database is closed. Other
processes operating on the same database are not affected by these calls.
Chapter 5
149
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCONTROL
NOTE
If HWMPUT is enabled, DBPUT will not inform you when it has reached the end
of file and has started using the delete chain head. In general, it is not a good
practice to toggle HWMPUT.
If you plan to use roll-forward recovery, do not toggle HWMPUT after storing the
database.
By default, DBPUT first checks the delete chain head, then if it is empty, DBPUT places the
new entry at the high-water mark. If the high-water mark option (HWMPUT) is enabled,
DBPUT will place the entry at the high-water mark first; after the high-water mark reaches
the file limit, DBPUT will use the delete chain head. Use DBCONTROL mode 9 to enable or
mode 10 to disable this feature.
DBCONTROL allows DBUTIL and privileged callers to perform several B-Tree index file
related functions such as adding, deleting, or rebuilding of a B-Tree index file for a
specified master dataset. There are four new DBCONTROL modes pertaining to B-Tree
indices: modes 13, 14, 15, and 16. Refer to chapter 11, "B-Tree Indices," for more
information.
Consult appendix A for more information about the conditions for the return status values
shown in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7. DBCONTROL Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
150
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-179
Cannot begin MPE XL transaction for attach: XM error nn.
-189
Cannot begin MPE XL transaction for detach: XM error nn.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBCONTROL
Table 5-7. DBCONTROL Return Status Values
Calling Errors:
-11
Bad database reference.
-14
Illegal intrinsic in current access mode.
-31
Bad mode.
-80
Output deferred not allowed when ILR enabled.
-81
Output deferred not allowed with roll-back enabled.
-82
CIUPDATE is set to DISALLOWED; cannot use critical item
update.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction encounters
an error.
-224
DBCONTROL mode 1 not allowed inside a dynamic transaction.
-421
BTE: unknown qualifier value for DBCONTROL mode 13.
-422
BTE: data set# not in valid range.
-423
BTE: B-Tree already exists.
-424
BTE: Failed to create B-Tree.
-425
BTE: DB not opened exclusively.
-426
BTE: B-Tree doesn't exist.
-427
BTE: FCLOSE, purge failed.
-428
BTE: Rebuildindex failed.
-432
BTE: Bad wildcard character.
-434
BTE: Data set is detail and not master.
-436
BTE: Failed to extract data from root file.
-440
BTE: XM Attach of index file failed
-441
BTE: XM Detach of index file failed.
-442
BTE: RELEASE of index file failed.
-443
BTE: SECURE of index file failed.
-451
BTE: Root version less than "C"4.
-452
BTE: Key length greater than 252 bytes (maximum index key
size).
92
Need PM capability.
Communications
Errors:
-102
DSWRITE failure.
Exceptional
Conditions:
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Calling Errors
(cont):
Chapter 5
151
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBDELETE
DBDELETE
INTRINSIC NUMBER 408
Deletes the current entry from a manual master or detail data set. The database must be
opened in access mode 1, 3, or 4.
Syntax
DBDELETE,base,dset,mode,status
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
dset
is the name of an array containing the left-justified name of the data set
from which the entry is to be deleted, or is an integer referencing the data
set by number. The data set name can be up to 16 characters long. If
shorter, it must be terminated by a semicolon or a blank.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBDELETE mode information. The
section on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the
TPI option.
status
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table 5-8.
describes the contents of element 1 when the procedure
does not succeed.
2
Zero.
3-4
Unchanged current record number.
5-6
Number of entries in a chain.
If master data set, the number is zero unless the deleted
entry was a primary entry with synonyms. In this case,
the number is one less than its previous value.
If detail data set, the number is unchanged from the
preceding procedure call.
152
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBDELETE
7-10
Unchanged preceding and succeeding record numbers of a
chain. If master data set and the new synonym chain
count is greater than zero, the numbers reference the last
and first synonym chain entries, respectively.
Discussion
When deleting entries from detail data sets, and if the database is open in access mode 1,
you must establish a lock covering the data entry to be deleted, the data set, or the
database.
When deleting entries from master data sets, the following rules apply:
• All pointer information for chains indexed by the entry must indicate that the chains
are empty. In other words, there cannot be any detail entries on the paths defined by
the master which have the same search item value as the key item in the master entry
to be deleted.
• If the database is open in access mode 1, a lock must be in effect on the data set or the
whole database.
DBDELETE to an indexed master triggers a similar operation to the indexed master's B-Tree
file and is considered atomic with the DBDELETE intrinsic.
Because of the way TurboIMAGE/XL handles synonym chains, it is possible to write a
routine to read and delete all the entries in a master data set and still leave some entries
in the set. If the deleted entry is a primary with synonyms, TurboIMAGE/XL moves the
first synonym in the chain to the deleted primary's location. A subsequent DBGET mode 3
will read the next sequential entry, leaving an entry (the new primary) in the previous
location.
A solution to this problem is to check elements 5 and 6 of the status parameter following
each DBDELETE call. If the synonym count in these elements is not zero, reread the location
(using DBGET, mode 1) and call DBDELETE again. Repeat the reread and DBDELETE until the
count is zero, then continue reading and deleting in a serial manner. (Refer to chapter 4 for
a discussion of serial access and to chapter 10 for a discussion of synonym chains.)
TurboIMAGE/XL performs the required changes to chain linkages and other chain
information, including the chain heads in related master data sets. If the last member of
each detail chain linked to the same automatic master entry has been deleted, DBDELETE
also deletes the master entry containing the chain heads.
If a primary data entry with synonyms is deleted from a master data set and a secondary
migrates, the backward and forward pointers reflect the new primary. In all other cases,
the backward and forward pointers are unchanged when an entry is deleted.
The execution of a call to DBDELETE could require extensive resources depending on the
amount of chain maintenance required. For example, when an entry is deleted from a
detail data set, the links connecting that entry to all other related entries with the same
key values and to all other related master entries are eliminated. This operation could
involve many blocks of data. TurboIMAGE/XL prevents data block access conflicts with all
other users and ensures data integrity by applying a temporary lock against other
processes until the call to DBDELETE completes. The timing of this temporary lock can be
controlled with the PREFETCH option of DBUTIL. Refer to "Coordinating Deletions to a
Chapter 5
153
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBDELETE
Database" in chapter 4 for what to consider when enabling or disabling this option.
If the process is logging, a call to DBDELETE causes a log record to be written with such
information as the time, date, user identification number, and a copy of the record to be
deleted. In a dynamic transaction, DBDELETE causes a log record to be written after the
physical transaction has been successfully completed. If DBDELETE cannot complete within
a dynamic transaction, an error is returned. This error condition must be checked, and you
must decide to use DBXUNDO, DBXEND, or continue with the remainder of the dynamic
transaction. DBXUNDO will abort the entire transaction. DBXEND will terminate the dynamic
transaction; the modifications completed thus far within the transaction will remain in the
database.
Table 5-8. DBDELETE Return Status Values
File System, Memory
Management, and
Transaction Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
154
-1
FOPEN failure.
-3
FREADDIR failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-5
FWRITEDIR failure.
-6
FWRITELABEL failure.
-167
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction: XM error
nn.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error
nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system
error nn.
-199
Cannot end MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach options.
-11
Bad database reference.
-12
No lock covers the data entry to be deleted. (Occurs
only if database open in access mode 1.)
-14
Illegal intrinsic in current access mode.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-23
Data set not writable.
-24
DBDelete not allowed on Auto Master.
-31
Bad mode.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic
transaction encounters an error.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBDELETE
Table 5-8. DBDELETE Return Status Values
Communications Errors:
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
Logging System Failures:
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Exceptional Conditions:
-193
DBU control block is full.
-196
DBB control block is full.
-264
Error while writing to TPI files.
-3nn
Internal error.
-314
Error while obtaining patch information for set.
-322
Error while validating qualifier parameter.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operations.
17
No entry.
44
Can't delete master entry with non-empty detail
chains.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE
allowed.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
155
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEND
DBEND
INTRINSIC NUMBER 413
Designates the end of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls regarded as a static
or multiple database transaction (based on the mode) for the purposes of logging and
recovery. The text parameter can be used to log user information to the log file. DBEND is
used in conjunction with DBBEGIN to begin and end a static or multiple database
transaction.
Syntax
DBEND,{ base
baseidlist
transid
} ,text,mode,status,textlen
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.) Use
with DBEND mode 1 or 2.
baseidlist
is the name of an integer array containing the list of base IDs which are
involved in a multiple database transaction. Use with DBEND mode 3 or 4,
and set the first two halfwords to binary zeroes. The layout of this array is
shown here (each element is a halfword, or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1-2
Must be set to binary zeroes.
3
The number of base IDs involved in the multiple database
transaction. Must be a number between 1 and 15,
inclusive.
4-n
Base IDs of the databases involved in the transaction.
Base ID is the first halfword of the base parameter used
to call TurboIMAGE intrinsics.
transid
is the name of the integer array containing the two-halfword
transaction ID. The transaction ID was returned by DBBEGIN mode 3 or 4.
Use with DBEND mode 3 or 4, and do not set the first two halfwords to
binary zeroes.
text
is an array up to 256 halfwords long which contains user ASCII or binary
data to be written to the log file as part of the DBEND log record.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Mode 1:
156
End of static transaction.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEND
Mode 2:
Write contents of the logging buffer in memory to disk,
and end the static transaction.
Mode 3:
End of multiple database transaction. If user logging is
enabled for the databases, mode 3 generates multiple
entries in the log file in order to mark multiple database
transactions. For example, assume that base IDs 11, 12,
and 13 are involved in a multiple database transaction.
DBEND mode 3 (with base IDs 11, 12, and 13 specified in
the baseidlist parameter) generates the following log
record sequence:
DBBEGIN (11, 1/3)
DBBEGIN (12, 2/3)
DBBEGIN (13, 3/3)
.
.
.
database updates
.
.
.
DBEND (11, 1/3)
DBEND (12, 2/3)
DBEND (13, 3/3)
where the notations 1/3, 2/3, 3/3 in the log records indicate
"first of three," "second of three," and "third of three."
Refer to chapter 7 for more information about user
logging.
Mode 4:
Write contents of the logging buffer in memory to disk,
and end the multiple database transaction. If user logging
is enabled for the databases, mode 4 generates one entry
in the log file in order to mark multiple database
transactions. For example, assume that base IDs 11, 12,
and 13 are involved in a multiple database transaction.
DBEND mode 4 (with base IDs 11, 12, and 13 specified in
the baseidlist parameter) generates the following log
record sequence:
MDBXEND (11, 12, 13)
.
.
.
database updates
.
.
.
MDBXEND (11, 12, 13)
Refer to chapter 7 for more information about user logging.
status
Chapter 5
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are as follows:
157
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEND
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table 5-8.
describes the contents of element 1 when the procedure
does not succeed.
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
is an integer equal to the number of halfwords to be logged from the text
parameter, or is a negative integer equal to the number of bytes to be
logged. Length can be zero.
textlen
Discussion
DBEND is called to designate the end of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls
which are collectively considered a static or multiple database transaction. The beginning
of such a sequence is designated by a previous call to DBBEGIN.
NOTE
DBEND is not valid if a transaction was begun with DBXBEGIN. DBEND checks
for any active dynamic transactions before executing.
If the process is logging, DBEND causes a log record to be written to the log file which
includes such information as the time, date, and user text buffer. DBEND log records are
used by the database recovery program DBRECOV to identify the end of static and multiple
database transactions. However, if a program aborts, a static or multiple database
transaction that has not been completed by a call to DBEND will be recovered by default. For
additional information, refer to the discussion of the ABORTS and NOABORTS options
under the description of the DBRECOV >CONTROL command in chapter 8.
If you call DBEND with mode 2 or 4 and logging is enabled, DBEND forces the log buffer to be
written from memory to disk before returning to the calling process. This flush of the log
buffer occurs after the intrinsic has logged the end of the logical transaction. Use this
option only for critical transactions; too many mode 2 or mode 4 DBEND calls can degrade
performance by causing a disk access each time a static or multiple database transaction
ends.
NOTE
When you call DBEND with mode 2 or 4 to force writing a static or multiple
data base transaction to disk, logging must have been enabled prior to
executing the transaction.
DBEND returns an error condition if it is called without a prior matching call to DBBEGIN,
158
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEND
whether the process is actually logging or not.
Table 5-9. DBEND Return Status Values
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Logging System
Failures:
Exceptional
Conditions:
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-146
Invalid transaction ID.
-147
Mode doesn't match DBBEGIN mode.
-148
Base ID list doesn't match DBBEGIN base ID list.
-151
Text length greater than 512 bytes.
-153
No transaction in progress to end.
-216
Cannot end a dynamic transaction with a DBEND.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
-111
WRITELOG failure.
-113
FLUSHLOG returned error number to DBEND.
-193
DBU control block is full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
159
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
DBERROR
INTRINSIC NUMBER 419
Moves a message, as an ASCII character string, to a buffer specified by the calling
program. The message interprets the contents of the status array as set by a call to a
TurboIMAGE/XL procedure.
Syntax
DBERROR,status,buffer,length
Parameters
status
is the name of the array used as the status parameter in the
TurboIMAGE/XL procedure call about which information is requested.
buffer
is the name of an array in the calling program's data area, at least 36
halfwords long, in which the message is returned.
length
is a short, 16-bit integer variable which is set by DBERROR to the positive
byte length of the message placed in the buffer array. The length will never
exceed 72 characters.
NOTE
The call to DBERROR must be made immediately after receiving an error status
before any other intrinsics are executed to ensure the display of valid
messages.
Discussion
Like DBEXPLAIN, DBERROR messages are appropriate and helpful when debugging
application programs. The errors they describe are, for the most part, errors that do not
occur in a debugged and running program.
Some errors or exceptional conditions are expected to occur, even in a production
environment. For example, the MPE/iX intrinsic DBOPEN can fail due to concurrent
database access. In this case, printing the following DBERROR message:
DATABASE OPEN EXCLUSIVELY
can be perfectly acceptable, even to the person using the application program. However, in
many cases a specific message produced by the application program is preferable to the
one produced by DBERROR. A DBFIND error generated by the application program, such as:
THERE ARE NO ORDERS FOR THAT PART NUMBER
would be more meaningful to a user entering data at a terminal than the DBERROR
message:
THERE IS NO CHAIN FOR THE SPECIFIED SEARCH ITEM VALUE
160
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. lists all messages that can be returned by DBERROR with their corresponding
return status values. Variable information is represented by a lowercase word or phrase.
Several messages can correspond to one return status and the interpretation of the value
depends on the context in which it is returned; the message returned depends on
additional information returned by the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic.
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
0
SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION - NO ERROR
-1
NO SUCH DATABASE
DATABASE OPEN IN AN INCOMPATIBLE MODE
BAD ACCOUNT REFERENCE or BAD GROUP REFERENCE
BAD ROOT FILE REFERENCE
INSUFFICIENT DISC SPACE
VIRTUAL MEMORY NOT SUFFICIENT TO OPEN ROOT FILE
DATABASE ALREADY OPEN FOR MORE THAN READ
DATABASE IN USE
DATABASE OPEN EXCLUSIVELY
MPE SECURITY VIOLATION
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FOPEN
ON { ROOT FILE
DATA SET # decimal integer }
-2
EXCEEDS GROUP DISC SPACE
EXCEEDS ACCOUNT GROUP DISC SPACE
DUPLICATE FILE NAME
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FCLOSE
ON { ROOT FILE
DATA SET # decimal integer }
-3
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FREADDIR
ON { ROOT FILE
DATA SET # decimal integer }
-4
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FREADLABEL
ON { ROOT FILE
DATA SET # decimal integer }
-5
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FWRITEDIR
-6
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FWRITELABEL
-7
PREVIOUS MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer FOUND IN
DESIRED BUFFER
-8
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FUNLOCK
-9
CANNOT CREATE control block name: MPE ERROR nn
-10
MPE FILE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY FFILEINFO
Chapter 5
161
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
162
DBERROR Message
-11
BAD DATABASE NAME OR PRECEDING BLANKS MISSING
BAD DATABASE REFERENCE (FIRST 2 CHARACTERS)
-12
DATABASE MUST BE IN LOGON GROUP AND ACCOUNT
intrinsic name CALLED WITHOUT COVERING LOCK IN EFFECT
-13
NOT ALLOWED; MUST BE CREATOR OF ROOT FILE OR DATABASE
-14
CALLS TO intrinsic name NOT ALLOWED IN ACCESS MODE decimal
integer
-15
DSLINE OR REMOTE HELLO FAILURE: SETUP FOR RDBA FAILED
-21
BAD PASSWORD - GRANTS ACCESS TO NOTHING
DATA ITEM NONEXISTENT OR INACCESSIBLE
SPECIFIED INTRINSIC CANNOT ACCESS THE DATA SET
DATA SET NONEXISTENT OR INACCESSIBLE
BAD MAINTENANCE WORD (CONTAINS COMMA OR DOES NOT MATCH) ILLEGAL
NUMBER OF BUFFERS REQUESTED
-22
MAINTENANCE WORD REQUIRED
-23
USER (CLASS) LACKS WRITE ACCESS TO DATA SET
-24
OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ON AUTOMATIC MASTER DATA SET
-30
MPE V ILR ENABLED; ONLY DBOPEN (MODE 1-8) AND DBUTIL
DISABLE ILR ALLOWED
-31
DBGET MODE decimal integer ILLEGAL FOR DETAIL DATA SET
DBGET MODE decimal integer BAD--SPECIFIED DATA SET LACKS CHAINS
BAD (UNRECOGNIZED) intrinsic name MODE: decimal integer
-32
UNOBTAINABLE ACCESS MODE: AOPTIONS REQUESTED:%octal integer,
GRANTED:%octal integer
-33
MODE 7 DIAGNOSTICS NOT ALLOWED
-34
DATABASE MUST BE RECOVERED BEFORE ACCESS IS ALLOWED.
-51
LIST TOO LONG OR NOT PROPERLY TERMINATED
-52
ITEM SPECIFIED IS NOT AN ACCESSIBLE SEARCH ITEM IN THE
SPECIFIED SET
BAD LIST - CONTAINS ILLEGAL OR DUPLICATED DATA ITEM REFERENCE
-53
DBPUT LIST IS MISSING A SEARCH OR SORT ITEM
-60
ILLEGAL FILE EQUATION FOR ROOT FILE
-61
ERROR WHILE OBTAINING INFORMATION ABOUT FILE EQUATION.
-80
OUTPUT DEFERRED NOT ALLOWED WITH ILR ENABLED
-81
OUTPUT DEFERRED NOT ALLOWED WITH ROLLBACK ENABLED
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
-82
CIUPDATE IS SET TO DISALLOWED; CANNOT USE CRITICAL ITEM UPDATE
-88
DATABASE BAD: THIRD PARTY INDEXING WAS IN PROCESS (INDEX AGAIN)
-89
DATABASE BAD RESTRUCTURING WAS IN PROCESS (RESTORE DATABASE)
-90
ROOT FILE BAD: UNRECOGNIZED STATE: %octal integer
-91
ROOT FILE (DATABASE) NOT COMPATIBLE WITH CURRENT TURBOIMAGE
INTRINSICS
-92
DATABASE REQUIRES CREATION (VIRGIN ROOT FILE)
-93
DATABASE ALREADY EXISTS.
-94
DATABASE BAD: OUTPUT DEFERRED, MAY NOT BE ACCESSED IN MODE
decimal integer
-95
DATABASE BAD - CREATION WAS IN PROCESS (CREATE AGAIN)
-96
DATABASE BAD - ERASE WAS IN PROCESS (ERASE AGAIN)
-97
DATABASE BAD - ILR ENABLE IN PROGRESS (ENABLE AGAIN)
-98
DATABASE BAD - ILR DISABLE IN PROGRESS (DISABLE AGAIN)
-99
UNSUPPORTED FEATURE.
-100
MPE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY DSOPEN
-101
MPE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY DSCLOSE
-102
MPE ERROR decimal integer RETURNED BY DSWRITE
-103
REMOTE 3000 STACK SPACE INSUFFICIENT
-104
REMOTE 3000 DOES NOT HAVE TURBOIMAGE/XL.
-105
REMOTE 3000 CANNOT CREATE TURBOIMAGE CONTROL BLOCK
-106
REMOTE 3000 DATA INCONSISTENT
-107
NS/3000 OR DS/3000 SYSTEM ERROR
-108
HPUNLOADCMPROCEDURE CALL FAILED
(The bracketed numbers in the following messages −110 το − 112 refer to the value
in halfword 2 of the status array. For other error numbers, refer to WRITELOG in
the MPE/iX Intrinsics Manual.)
-109
ERROR RETURNED BY LOGINFO INTRINSIC.
Chapter 5
163
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
164
DBERROR Message
-110
OPENLOG RETURNED ERROR NUMBER nn TO DBOPEN
LOGGING ENABLED AND NO LOG PROCESS RUNNING [3]
DATABASE CONTAINS INVALID LOGID PASSWORD [8]
LOG FILE CAN'T OBTAIN NECESSARY DISC SPACE [12]
MAXIMUM USER COUNT PER LOG PROCESS REACHED [13]
END OF FILE ON LOGFILE [15]
DATABASE CONTAINS INVALID LOG IDENTIFIER [16]
-111
WRITELOG RETURNED ERROR NUMBER nn TO intrinsic name
LOG PROCESS TERMINATED [3]
LOG FILE CAN'T OBTAIN NECESSARY DISC SPACE [12]
END OF FILE ON LOGFILE [15]
-112
CLOSELOG RETURNED ERROR NUMBER nn TO intrinsic name
LOG PROCESS TERMINATED [3]
LOG FILE CAN'T OBTAIN NECESSARY DISC SPACE [12]
END OF FILE ON LOGFILE [15]
-113
FLUSHLOG RETURNED ERROR NUMBER nn TO DBEND
-114
ROLLBACK ENABLED WITHOUT ENABLING LOGGING
-120
OUT OF STACK SPACE TO PROCV.
-121
ILLEGAL LOCK DESCRIPTOR COUNT
-123
ILLEGAL RELATIONAL OPERATOR
-124
DESCRIPTOR LENGTH ERROR; MUST BE 9 OR MORE
-125
ILLEGAL SET NAME OR NUMBER IN DESCRIPTOR
-126
ILLEGAL ITEM NAME OR NUMBER IN DESCRIPTOR
-127
ILLEGAL ATTEMPT TO LOCK ON A COMPOUND ITEM
-128
VALUE FIELD TOO SHORT FOR THE ITEM SPECIFIED
-129
P28 IS LONGEST P-TYPE ITEM THAT CAN BE LOCKED
-130
ILLEGAL DECIMAL DIGIT IN TYPE 'P' DATA VALUE
-131
LOWERCASE CHARACTER IN TYPE 'U' DATA VALUE
-132
ILLEGAL DIGIT IN TYPE 'Z' DATA VALUE
-133
ILLEGAL SIGN CHARACTER IN TYPE 'Z' DATA VALUE
-134
TWO LOCK DESCRIPTORS CONFLICT IN SAME REQUEST
-135
DBLOCK CALLED WITH LOCKS ALREADY IN EFFECT IN THIS
JOB/SESSION
-136
DESCRIPTOR LIST LENGTH EXCEEDS 4094 BYTES
-137
USER ABOUT TO WAIT FOR SELF.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
-139
INVALID NUMBER OF BASE IDs.
-140
BAD BASE ID LIST.
-141
ALL MDBX DATABASES MUST BE ON THE SAME SYSTEM.
-142
ALL MDBX DATABASES LOG TO THE SAME LOG FILE.
-143
LOGGING MUST BE ENABLED OR DISABLED FOR ALL MDBX DATABASES.
-144
MUSTRECOVER MUST BE ENABLED OR DISABLED FOR ALL MDBX DATABASES.
-145
ROLL-BACK MUST BE ENABLED OR DISABLED FOR ALL MDBX DATABASES.
-146
INVALID TRANSACTION ID.
-147
MODE DOESN'T MATCH DBBEGIN MODE.
-148
BASE ID LIST DOESN'T MATCH DBBEGIN BASE ID LIST.
-151
TEXT LENGTH GREATER THAN 512 BYTES
-152
DBCLOSE CALLED WHILE A TRANSACTION IS IN PROGRESS
DBBEGIN CALLED WHILE A TRANSACTION IS IN PROGRESS
DBXBEGIN CALLED WHILE A TRANSACTION IS IN PROGRESS
-153
DBEND CALLED WHILE NO TRANSACTION IS IN PROGRESS
-160
FILE CONFLICT: A FILE ALREADY EXISTS WITH THE ILR LOG FILE NAME
-161
CANNOT CHECK FOR AN ILR LOG FILE CONFLICT: FILE SYSTEM ERROR nn
-166
CANNOT PURGE ILR LOG FILE: FILE SYSTEM ERROR nn
-167
CANNOT BEGIN MPE XL XM TRANSACTION: XM ERROR nn
-168
CANNOT ATTACH DATA SET # decimal integer ``to
MPE XL XM: FILE SYSTEM ERROR nn
-169
INVALID MODE FOR XM ATTACH OPTIONS
-170
CANNOT OPEN ILR LOG FILE: FILE SYSTEM ERROR nn
-172
CANNOT READ ILR LOG FILE: FILE SYSTEM ERROR nn
-173
UNABLE TO OBTAIN WRITE ACCESS TO THE DATABASE (NEEDED FOR ILR
RECOVERY)
-174
THE DATABASE MUST BE OPENED IN MODE 1 - 4 SINCE ILR RECOVERY IS
NECESSARY
-175
CANNOT ATTACH DATA SET # decimal integer TO MPE XL XM:
XM ERROR nn
-176
CANNOT DETACH DATA SET # decimal integer FROM MPE XL XM:
XM ERROR nn
Chapter 5
165
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
166
DBERROR Message
-177
USER LOG FILE IS NOT ON THE SAME VOLUME SET AS DATABASE
-178
CANNOT DETACH DATA SET # decimal integerFROM MPE XL XM:
FILE SYSTEM ERROR nn
-179
CANNOT BEGIN MPE XL XM TRANSACTION FOR ATTACH: XM ERROR nn
-180
ILR LOG INVALID - ILR INCOMPATIBLE IN MPE XL
-181
ILR LOG FILE INVALID - INTERNAL GROUP NAME DOES NOT MATCH ROOT
FILE
-182
ILR LOG FILE INVALID - INTERNAL ACCOUNT NAME DOES NOT MATCH ROOT
FILE
-183
ILR LOG FILE INVALID - INTERNAL CREATION DATE DOES NOT MATCH
ROOT FILE
-184
ILR LOG FILE INVALID - INTERNAL LAST ACCESS DATE DOES NOT
MATCH ROOT FILE
-187
ILR ALREADY ENABLED FOR THIS DATABASE
-188
ILR ALREADY DISABLED FOR THIS DATABASE
-189
CANNOT BEGIN MPE XL TRANSACTION FOR DETACH: XM ERROR nn
-190
BAD DATABASE REFERENCE OR INVALID SYSTEM DATABASE CONTROL
BLOCK
-191
SYSTEM DATABASE CONTROL BLOCK FULL
-192
INVALID DBU
-193
DBU CONTROL BLOCK IS FULL
-194
INVALID DBB
-195
INVALID DBG
-196
DBB CONTROL BLOCK IS FULL
-197
DBG CONTROL BLOCK IS FULL
-198
TOTAL DBOPEN COUNT PER USER EXCEEDS LIMIT
-199
CANNOT END MPE XL XM TRANSACTION: XM ERROR nn
-200
DATABASE LANGUAGE NOT SYSTEM SUPPORTED
-201
NATIVE LANGUAGE SUPPORT NOT INSTALLED
-202
MPE NATIVE LANGUAGE SUPPORT ERROR nn RETURNED BY NLINFO
-204
USER STACK IS TOO SMALL FOR RECOVERY IN DBOPEN.
-205
WRONG VERSION OF DS SUBSYSTEM.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
-206
REMOTE TURBOIMAGE DATABASE EXCEEDS IMAGE/3000 LIMITATION
-208
MPE ERROR nn RETURNED BY
FLABELINFO FOR MPE XL XM
-209
INVALID MODE FOR MPE XL XM DETACH
-210
MPE ERROR nn WHILE GETTING LOG FILE NAME
-211
INVALID OR NO USER LABEL.
-212
DATABASE CORRUPTION DETECTED
-213
DBXEND ENCOUNTERED XM ERROR nn WHEN ENDING DYNAMIC TRANSACTION
-214
CANNOT CALL DBXUNDO WHEN A TRANSACTION IS STARTED BY DBBEGIN.
-215
XM ERROR nn ENCOUNTERED WHEN ROLLING OUT DYNAMIC TRANSACTION
-216
CANNOT END A DYNAMIC TRANSACTION WITH A DBEND
-217
DBOPEN MODE n INCOMPATIBLE WITH DYNAMIC ROLLBACK
-218
OUTPUT DEFERRED IS INCOMPATIBLE WITH DYNAMIC ROLLBACK
-219
REMOTE DATABASE ACCESS IS INCOMPATIBLE WITH DYNAMIC ROLLBACK
-220
DATABASE AND USER LOG NOT ATTACHED TO THE SAME XM LOG SET
-221
CANNOT BEGIN A TRANSACTION WHEN A DYNAMIC TRANSACTION IS ACTIVE
-222
ONLY DBXUNDO ALLOWED WHEN A DYNAMIC TRANSACTION ENCOUNTERS AN
ERROR
-223
CANNOT DBXEND OR DBXUNDO A TRANSACTION WHICH WAS NOT ACTIVE
-224
DBCONTROL MODE 1 NOT ALLOWED INSIDE A DYNAMIC TRANSACTION
-225
RECORD TABLE FULL FOR DYNAMIC ROLLBACK
-226
ERROR OCCURRED WHEN CREATING THE 00 FILE
-227
ERROR OCCURRED IN 00 FILE RECOVERY
-228
DBXBEGIN ENCOUNTERED XM ERROR nn WHEN STARTING A DYNAMIC
TRANSACTION
-229
CANNOT DELETE MANUAL MASTER WITH EMPTY CHAINS.
-230
A DBUNLOCK INSIDE A DYNAMIC TRANSACTION IS NOT ALLOWED
-231
DURING DYNAMIC ROLLBACK RECOVERY, INTERNAL PROCEDURE FAILED;
ERROR nn
-232
ILLEGAL DBCLOSE MODE 2 USED DURING AN ACTIVE DYNAMIC
TRANSACTION
Chapter 5
167
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
168
DBERROR Message
-233
KEY DATA FOUND IN THE DATABSE DOES NOT MATCH THAT IN THE MEMO
RECORD
-234
CANNOT PURGE THE 00 FILE
-235
DYNAMIC TRANSACTION ABORTED DUE TO DBCLOSE MODE 1; DATABASE
CLOSED
-236
INTERNAL ERROR OCCURRED WHEN OPENING THE AUX FILE; ERROR nn
-237
CANNOT DBXEND OR DBXUNDO A DBBEGIN TRANSACTION
-238
MDBX, MODES OF DBXBEGIN/DBXEND DON'T MATCH.
-240
ERROR IN DYNAMIC ROLLBACK.
-241
BAD TAG FOR TURBOLKT TABLE.
-242
ERROR IN TURBOGTX FILE OPERATION.
-243
INVALID DYNAMIC ROLLBACK TRANSACTION ID.
-244
BASE COUNT OVER 15 FOR DMDBX.
-245
OUT OF SPACE FOR TURBOGTX FILE.
-246
ERROR IN TURBOGTX OPERATION RELATED TO ATC TRANSACTION.
-250
CBINIT FAILED ON nn
-251
DBS WAS OBTAINED BUT NOT RELEASED.
-253
DATABASE ENABLED FOR INDEXING, BUT THIRD-PARTY INDEXING IS NOT
CONFIGURED
-254
ROLLBACK OF THIRD-PARTY INDEX FAILED; INDEXING DISABLED FOR
DATA SET
-255
THIRD-PARTY INDEXING DISABLE FAILED; INDEXING DISABLED FOR
DATABASE
-256
THIRD-PARTY INDEX FOR PATH decimal integer: nn IS FULL
-257
THIRD-PARTY INDEX FOR PATH decimal integer: nn IS DAMAGED
-258
INVALID ARGUMENT FOR INDEX
-259
INVALID MODE FOR INDEX
-260
NO PREVIOUS LIST OF QUALIFIED DATA ENTRIES
-261
DYNAMIC PROCEDURE LOAD ERROR FOR INTRINSIC ROLLBACK.
-262
OLDER/INCOMPATIBLE VERSION OF IMAGE/SQL.
-263
INVALID PCODE RETURNED BY TPI.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
-264
WRITE ERROR FOR TPI FILES.
-265
ERROR IN THIRD-PARTY SHADOWING PACKAGE.
-266
ERROR WHILE DISABLING THIRD-PARTY SHADOWING.
-267
DAMAGED FILE ERROR RETURNED BY THIRD-PARTY SHADOWING.
-268
INVALID PCODE RETURNED BY TPS.
-269
WRITE ERROR FOR TPS FILES.
-3nn
INTERNAL TURBOIMAGE ERROR RETURNED (#n)
-305
INVALID DATA SET NUMBER.
-306
INVALID DATA SET TYPE.
-307
INVALID RECORD NUMBER FOUND.
-308
ERROR RELATED TO BEGINNING OF FILE.
-309
BUFFER IO NOT YET COMPLETE.
-310
ERROR RELATED TO END OF FILE.
-312
INTERNAL ERROR ENCOUNTERED WHILE READING DATABASE BLOCK.
-314
ERROR WHILE OBTAINING PATH INFORMATION FOR SET.
-322
INTERNAL TURBOIMAGE ERROR RETURNED nn
-323
UNEXPECTED EMPTY RECORD FOUND.
-331
DSET CAPACITY INFORMATION NOT CURRENT.
-332
ERROR IN QLOCK OPERATION.
-333
ERROR IN QOPEN OPERATION.
-420
FEATURE NOT IMPLEMENTED.
-421
BTE:UNKNOWN QUALIFIER VALUE FOR DBCONTROL MODE 13.
-422
BTE: DATA SET # NOT IN VALID RANGE.
-423
BTE: B-TREE ALREADY EXISTS.
-424
MESSAGE\BTE: FAILED TO CREATE B-TREE.
-425
MESSAGE\BTE: DB NOT OPENED EXCLUSIVELY.
-426
BTE: B-TREE DOESN'T EXIST.
-427
BTE: FCLOSE, PURGE FAILED.
-428
BTE: REBUILDINDEX FAILED.
Chapter 5
169
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
-429
BTE: DBFIND ARGUMENT VERSION IS BAD.
-430
BTE: DBFIND (mode 4/24) ARGUMENT TYPE IS BAD.
-431
BTE: DBFIND (mode 4/24) ARGUMENT #1 LENGTH IS BAD.
-432
BTE: WILDCARD NOT ASCII.
-433
BTE: DBFIND (MODE 4/24) ARGUMENT #2 LENGTH IS BAD.
-434
DATASET DETAIL INSTEAD OF MASTER.
-436
BTE: FAILED TO EXTRACT DATA FROM ROOT FILE.
-437
BTE: FAILED TO CONVERT @c TO [] DBFIND.
-438
BTE: BAD ITEM # IN INIT BTREE.
-439
BTE: CONVERSION OF KEY FROM EXTERNAL TO INTERNAL FORMAT FAILED.
-440
BTE: XM ATTACH OF INDEX FILE FAILED.
-441
BTE: XM DETACH OF INDEX FILE FAILED.
-442
BTE: RELEASE OF INDEX FILE FAILED.
-443
BTE: SECURE OF INDEX FILE FAILED.
-444
BTE: DBFIND ON NON-KEY FIELD OF MASTER.
-446
BTE: ARGUMENT 2 SPECIFIED FOR RELOP OF (</<=/=/>=/>).
-447
BTE: FAILED TO BUILD RECORD HOLDING ROOT DATA INFORMATION.
-448
BTE: FAILED TO SETUP INFORMATION FOR USERLABEL 0 OF DATASET.
-449
BTE: FAILED TO POSITION INDEX AT START OF KEY RANGE.
-451
BTE: ROOT VERSION LESS THAN "C4".
-452
BTE: KEY LENGTH GREATER THAN 252 BYTES (MAXIMUM INDEX KEY
SIZE).
-458
DBOPEN FAILED. OUT OF DISK SPACE
-1000
SWITCH TO NM FAILED ON intrinsic name, INFO nn SUBSYS nn
-1001
SWITCH TO CM FAILED ON CX'PCBXIMAGE
-1002
HPLOADCMPROCEDURE FAILED ON CX'PCBXIMAGE
-1003
SWITCH TO NM FAILED ON intrinsic name, INFO nn SUBSYS nn
-1004
HPLOADNMPROC FAILED ON CM intrinsic name
-3999 to
-3000
170
DBERROR Message
ERROR RETURNED BY THIRD-PARTY INDEXING PRODUCTS.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
10
BEGINNING OF FILE
11
END OF FILE
12
DIRECTED BEGINNING OF FILE
13
DIRECTED END OF FILE
14
BEGINNING OF CHAIN
15
END OF CHAIN
16
THE DATA SET IS FULL (The following messages are returned only if capacity
expansion is specified for the data set. Dataset# and FSERR # are replaced by the
actual number.)
DBPUT CANNOT EXPAND dataset#: DATA SET AT MAXIMUM CAPACITY
DBPUT dataset# INCOMPLETE EXPANSION: FILE SYSTEM ERROR #
DBPUT CANNOT EXPAND dataset#: OUT OF DISC SPACE (FSERR #)
17
THERE IS NO CHAIN FOR THE SPECIFIED SEARCH ITEM VALUE
THERE IS NO ENTRY WITH THE SPECIFIED KEY VALUE
THERE IS NO PRIMARY SYNONYM FOR THE SPECIFIED KEY VALUE
NO CURRENT RECORD OR THE CURRENT RECORD IS EMPTY (CONTAINS NO
ENTRY)
THE SELECTED RECORD IS EMPTY (CONTAINS NO ENTRY)
18
BROKEN CHAIN - FORWARD AND BACKWARD POINTERS NOT CONSISTENT
20
DATABASE CURRENTLY LOCKED SETS OR ENTRIES LOCKED WITHIN
DATABASE
22
DATA SET ALREADY LOCKED
23
CANNOT LOCK SET DUE TO LOCKED ENTRIES WITHIN IT (Conditional Locks
Only)
24
ENTRIES CURRENTLY LOCKED USING DIFFERENT ITEM (Conditional Locks
Only)
25
CONFLICTING DATA ENTRY LOCK ALREADY IN EFFECT
26
IMMINENT DEADLOCK.
Chapter 5
171
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
172
DBERROR Message
41
DBUPDATE ATTEMPTED TO MODIFY VALUE OF CRITICAL ITEM--KEY,
SEARCH OR SORT
(The following messages are returned only if the critical item update
(CIUPDATE) option is permitted for the database and the current process. The
bracketed numbers after the messages refer to the value in halfword 3 of the
status array. The nn in the value represents the path number returned.)
DBUPDATE: NO CHAIN HEAD (MASTER ENTRY) FOR
PATH decimal integer: nn [1nn]
DBUPDATE: FULL CHAIN FOR PATH decimal integer: nn
(CONTAINS 2,147,483,647 ENTRIES) [2nn]
DBUPDATE: FULL AUTOMATIC MASTER FOR PATH decimal integer: nn [3nn]
DBUPDATE: FULL AUTOMATIC MASTER SYNONYM CHAIN FOR
PATH decimal integer: nn [4nn]
42
DBUPDATE WILL NOT ALTER A READ-ONLY DATA ITEM
43
DUPLICATE KEY VALUE IN MASTER
44
CAN'T DELETE A MASTER ENTRY WITH NON-EMPTY DETAIL CHAINS
49
ILLEGAL BUFFER ADDRESS
50
USER'S BUFFER IS TOO SMALL FOR REQUESTED DATA (only returned if buffer
is too small and the data transfer would write over in the user's stack)
51
STACK OVERFLOW FOR BASIC - IMAGE INTERFACE.
52
INVALID PARAMETER FOR BASIC - IMAGE INTERFACE.
53
INVALID PARAMETER TYPE FOR BASIC - IMAGE INTERFACE.
60
DATABASE ACCESS DISABLED
61
PROCESS HAS THE DATABASE OPEN 63 TIMES; NO MORE ALLOWED
62
DBG CONTROL BLOCK FULL
63
DBG DISABLED; POTENTIAL DAMAGE; ONLY DBCLOSE ALLOWED
64
NO ROOM FOR DBG ENTRY IN PCBX (MPE PORTION OF STACK)
65
CAN'T GRANT BUFFER REQUEST.
66
DBG POINTED TO BY ROOT FILE DOES NOT MATCH
67
DBU DISABLED; POTENTIAL DAMAGE; ONLY DBCLOSE ALLOWED
68
DBB DISABLED; POTENTITIAL DAMAGE; ONLY DBCLOSE ALLOWED
69
BAD DATABASE (if database does not close normally and AUTODEFER is active)
71
LOGGING NOT ENABLED FOR USER.
72
TURBOLKT TABLE FULL.
73
ERROR IN TURBLKT TABLE OPERATION.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBERROR
Table 5-10. DBERROR Messages
Return Status
DBERROR Message
1nn
NO CHAIN HEAD (MASTER ENTRY) FOR PATH decimal integer: nn
2nn
FULL CHAIN FOR PATH decimal integer: nn (CONTAINS 2,147,483,647
ENTRIES)
3nn
FULL AUTOMATIC MASTER FOR PATH decimal integer: nn
4nn
FULL AUTOMATIC MASTER SYNONYM CHAIN FOR PATH decimal integer: nn
944
WARNING: ASSUMING NO MESSAGE CATALOG
3000—3999
Others
Chapter 5
ERRORS RETURNED BY THIRD-PARTY INDEXING PRODUCTS
UNRECOGNIZED RETURN STATUS: decimal integer
173
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEXPLAIN
DBEXPLAIN
INTRINSIC NUMBER 418
Prints a multiline message on the $STDLIST device which describes a TurboIMAGE/XL
procedure call and explains the call's results as recorded in the calling program's status
array.
Syntax
DBEXPLAIN,status
Parameters
status
NOTE
is the name of the array used as the status parameter in the
TurboIMAGE/XL procedure call about which information is requested.
The call to DBEXPLAIN must be made immediately after receiving an error
status before any other intrinsics are executed to ensure the display of valid
messages.
Discussion
Table 5-11. contains the general format for lines 2 through 6 of the message which is sent
to $STDLIST. Elements surrounded by brackets are sometimes omitted. Braces indicate
that only one of the choices shown will be printed. Lines 5 and 6 are printed only if, during
the preparation of lines 2, 3, and 4, TurboIMAGE/XL detects that the status array
contents are invalid, unrecognizable, or incomplete, or if a message must be truncated to
fit on a single line.
If the status array contents appear to be the result of something other than a
TurboIMAGE/XL procedure call or if the array is used by the called procedure for
information other than that discussed here, the second choice for line 3 is printed. This
would be the case for a successful call to DBGET which uses all 10 status elements to return
a return status, lengths, and record numbers.
If the status array contains an unrecognized error code, the second line 4 choice is printed.
If the return status is greater than or equal to zero, the word ERROR in line 2 is replaced
by RESULT because non-negative return statuses indicate success or exceptional
conditions, such as end-of-chain. Return status values are explained in appendix A.
You can use the offset information to locate the specific call statement that generated the
status array contents if the call is made with a programming language which enables you
to determine displacements of program statements or labels within the code. The identity
of the code segment is not printed because it cannot be determined by DBEXPLAIN.
Therefore, you need to be familiar with the program's functioning in order to locate the
correct call. The offset portion of line 2 is printed only if the status array appears to be set
by a TurboIMAGE/XL library procedure call and contains valid offset information.
174
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEXPLAIN
Table 5-11. DBEXPLAIN Message Format
Line
Format
1
(a blank line)
2
TurboIMAGE{ ERROR
RESULT } [AT offset] RETURN STATUS=retstat
3
{ intrinsicname,MODE x,ON [setname OF] basename
[ ;PASSWORD=password]
TurboIMAGE CALL INFORMATION NOT AVAILABLE }
4
{ message
UNRECOGNIZED RETURN STATUS: retstat }
5
[ HEX DUMP OF STATUS ARRAY FOLLOWS
OCTAL DUMP OF STATUS ARRAY FOLLOWS ]
6
[ hex display
octal display ]
7
(a blank line)
Parameter
Explanation
offset
The code offset of the TurboIMAGE/XL procedure call in a CM procedure. It is the
virtual memory address of the TurboIMAGE/XL procedure call in a NM procedure.
retstat
The return status (from the first element of status) printed as a decimal integer and
corresponding to the return statuses described in appendix A.
intrinsicname
The name of the TurboIMAGE/XL library procedure (intrinsic) which was called and
which sets the contents of the status array.
x
The value of the mode parameter as a decimal integer.
setname
The value of the second parameter, usually a data set name or number, as passed to
the procedure which set the status array contents. The second parameter can be a
data item name or number if the procedure in question is DBINFO. If the procedure is
DBOPEN, DBLOCK, DBUNLOCK, or certain modes of DBINFO or DBCLOSE, setname is
omitted.
password
The word printed at the end of line 3 only if the error relates to the password
parameter of DBOPEN.
basename
The database specified in the procedure which was called and set the status array
contents.
message
A description of the result based on the condition word and other status array
information. The message is generated by the DBERROR procedure which is also
described in this chapter. See Table 5-9 for all possible messages returned in line 4.
hex display
A listing of each halfword of status printed as a string of 4 hex digits. Adjacent status
elements are separated by a blank and the entire line is 49 characters long. The hex
display is generated for NM applications only.
octal display
A listing of each halfword of status printed as a string of 6 octal digits. Adjacent status
elements are separated by a blank and the entire line is 49 characters long. The octal
display is generated for CM applications only.
Figure 5-1. contains four examples of messages generated by DBEXPLAIN for a Native Mode
Chapter 5
175
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBEXPLAIN
application.
Figure 5-1. Sample DBEXPLAIN Messages
TURBOIMAGE RESULT AT $0001d76c: RETURN STATUS=0 DBOPEN=intrinsic name
DBOPEN,MODE1, ON ORDERS
ORDERS=database name
SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION - NO ERROR
NO ERROR=message
TURBOIMAGE ERROR AT $0001d76c: RETURN STATUS=-12
DBPUT,MODE1, ON DATE-MASTER OF ORDERS
DATE-MASTER=data set name
DBPUT CALLED WITHOUT COVERING LOCK IN EFFECT
TURBOIMAGE RESULT AT $0001d76c: RETURN STATUS=16
DBPUT,MODE1, ON #1 OF ORDERS
#1=data set number
THE DATA SET IS FULL
TURBOIMAGE RESULT: RETURN STATUS=4792
TURBOIMAGE CALL INFORMATION NOT AVAILABLE
UNRECOGNIZED RETURN STATUS: 4792
HEX DUMP OF STATUS ARRAY FOLLOWS:
12b8 0040 0c63 ff82 4d33 02a7 32e8 0000 0000 0000
...............hex display...................
Because the application is in Native Mode, the display is in hex. For Compatibility Mode
applications, the display is in octal.
176
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
DBFIND
INTRINSIC NUMBER 404
Can be used both when B-Tree index exists on a key item of the master and when B-Tree
index does not exist. For a detailed discussion on B-Trees, refer to chapter 11, "B-Tree
Indices."
In the absence of a B-Tree index, or when the B-Tree index exists but the BTREEMODE1 flag
is off, locates related master set key item entry that matches the specified search item
value and sets up pointers to the first and last entries of a detail data set chain in
preparation for chained access to the data entries which are members of the chain. The
path is determined and the chain pointers are located on the basis of a specified search
item and its value.
When a B-Tree index exists for the master (explicit), DBFIND can be used for B-Tree
searches both for the master data set as well as its corresponding detail data sets
(implicit). The dset parameter determines if the DBFIND is for the master or one of its
corresponding detail data sets. A B-Tree DBFIND using mode 1 on binary items (not X or U)
will be treated as non-B-Tree search regardless of the presence of a B-Tree index as well as
the BTREEMODE1 option. To do B-Tree index searches on binary items, use modes 4 or 24 in
conjunction with a structured argument.
Syntax
DBFIND,base,dset,mode,status,item,argument
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about base ID.)
dset
is the name of an array containing the left-justified name of the master or
the detail data set to be accessed, or is an integer referencing the data set
by number. The data set name can be up to 16 characters long. If shorter, it
must be terminated by a semicolon or a blank.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1, 4, 10, 21, or 24. If your database is enabled
for third-party indexing, refer to your vendor's documentation for
additional DBFIND modes.
Mode
Method
1
Used for both B-Tree or non-B-Tree DBFIND. Perform a
B-Tree DBFIND if ALL of the following conditions prevail:
• Item type is X or U (ASCII).
• DBFIND is for master and a B-Tree index exists on the
key item or DBFIND is for detail and B-Tree index exists
Chapter 5
177
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
on the key item of the master to which the search item
has a path.
• BTREEMODE1 flag is set ON by DBUTIL or DBCONTROL
mode 15.
• Argument contains a wildcard character.
The chain count is accurate in halfword 5-6, and status
halfwords 7-8 and 9-10 record the last entry in the last
chain, and the first entry in the first chain of the
super-chain for detail data sets. For master data sets, the
status halfwords 5-6 (chain-count for detail) reflect the
total number of entries qualified in the master data set.
All other fields of the status array return zeroes.
4
For B-Tree searches on numeric as well as ASCII types.
For detail data sets, returns accurate chain (super-chain)
counts and record numbers of last entry in last chain and
first entry in first chain. For masters, returns the total
number of qualified entries in status halfword 5-6. Other
fields return zeroes. Requires a structured argument
format described under argument.
10
Allows you to simulate the current DBFIND mode 1, as in
versions prior to B-Trees, as if there were no B-Tree index,
even when the item has B-Tree index, BTREEMODE1 is on,
and the argument contains a wildcard character. It
returns accurate chain count. This is the same as TPI
mode 10. Requires a simple argument.
21
Same as mode 1, except it is a faster version and does not
return accurate chain count or record numbers of first
entry and last entries. Requires a simple argument.
For details, the chain count and status halfwords 7-8 and
9-10 will have 231−1. For master data sets, the status
halfwords 5-6 (chain-count for detail) reflect the total
number of entries qualified in the master data set. All
other fields of the status array return zeroes. A DBFIND
mode 21 on a non-ASCII key returns an error.
24
Same as mode 4, except it is a faster version and does not
return accurate chain counts and record numbers of last
entry and first entry in super-chain. For detail data set,
the halfwords 5-6, 7-8, and 9-10 will have 231−1. For
master data set, the halfword 5-6 will have 231−1 and 7-8
and 9-10 will have zeroes. The argument is in structured
format described under argument.
The third-party indexing (TPI) modes of DBFIND which are NOT supported
for B-Trees are: 11, 12, and various TPI DBFIND modes 1nn, 2nn, 3nn, 4nn,
and 5nn. If your database is enabled for TPI, refer to your vendor
178
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
documentation for additional DBFIND modes. The section on DBUTIL in
chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the TPI option.
status
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-11. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
Zero.
3-4
Word current record number set to zero.
5-6
Word count of number of entries in chain or qualifier. For
modes 21 and 24, 231−1.
7-8
Word record number of last entry in chain. For modes 21
and 24, 231−1 for details. Always zeroes for masters.
9-10
Word record number of first entry in chain. For modes 21
and 24, 231−1 for details. Always zeroes for masters.
item
is the name of an array containing a left-justified name of the detail data
set search item or is an integer referencing the search item number that
defines the path containing the desired chain. The specified search item
defines the path to which the chain belongs. For a B-Tree DBFIND on a
master, it is the key item name or a number. The name can be up to 16
characters long. If shorter, it must be terminated by a semicolon or a
blank.
argument
contains a value for the key item to be used in calculated access to locate
the desired chain head in the master data set for non-B-Tree index
searches. This is referred to as a simple argument. For B-Tree index
searches, there are two formats. One is for mode 1 wildcard searches on X
and U types and allows a trailing wildcard character. The argument is
scanned for the first occurrence of the wildcard character, for example, an
@ character. Subsequent text in the item value is ignored.
Chapter 5
179
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
The other is for modes 4 and 24, which requires a structured format as
follows:
Bytes
Meaning
1-2
Type of generic search. An ASCII character pair is in this
field:
=
*
search for key values equal to argument1 (similar to a
DBFIND mode 1)
<
*
search for key values less than argument1
search for key values less than or equal to
argument1
<=
>
*
search for key values greater than argument1
>=
search for key values greater than or equal to
argument1
[]
search for key values greater than or equal to
argument1 AND less than or equal to argument2
@c
wildcard search when the wildcard character is c.
Scan argument for the first wildcard character c. If a
wildcard character is found in position n, 1-based,
search for keys that match first n−1 characters of
argument.
If c is non-blank and non-null, then it is the wildcard
character that will be used. Some examples are: @*
and @@.
If c is a blank or null, then the one set by DBCONTROL
mode 15, if any, is used. Otherwise, the current
default wildcard character (stored in the root file) is
used. The wildcard character is changeable via the
DBUTIL SET command or DBCONTROL mode 15.
PK
*
180
Partial Key search. Search for key values that
match n characters in argument1 (n is length of
argument1 provided in bytes 4 and 5 described
later). Argument1 need not contain a wildcard. If
it does within the n characters, it will be
considered as one character part of the search
value. For example, if n is 4, argument1 is
ABC@, and the wildcard to be used is @, DBFIND
will return records containing ABC@ as the first
four characters in the key value.
indicates a space character.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
3-4
version number. Must be numeric zero, or an error is
returned.
5-6
The size (in bytes) of argument1 (not including these two
bytes) for search types =, <, <=, >, >=, @c, PK.
7-8
The size (in bytes) of argument2 (not including these two
bytes) for the search type [ ]. Must be numeric zero for
other search types, or an error is returned.
9... 9+n-1
Argument1. The n bytes of argument data (for example,
for an X10 field, n = 10).
9+n... 9+n+m-1 Argument2. For search-type [ ] only. The m bytes of the
second argument's data (for example, for an X10 field, m =
10, n must match m).
If a wildcard character is present in the argument(s), the wildcard will be
considered as part of the value for these B-Tree search types: = , < , <=,
> , >=, [ ], or PK on ASCII types.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for information on DBFIND arguments. The section
on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the TPI
option.
Discussion
When the DBFIND is not for a B-Tree index, the current values of chain count, backward
pointer, and forward pointer for the detail data set referenced in dset are replaced by the
corresponding value from the chain head.
A current path number, which is maintained internally, is set to the new path number and
the current record number for the data set is set to zero. Refer to chapter 10 for further
information about chain heads and internally maintained data set information.
Although a master set entry with the specified key item value exists, the data set chain
may be empty.
For B-Tree DBFINDs, there could be multiple qualified chain heads. The chained access
could traverse multiple chains, referred to as super-chain. When using modes 1 or 4 for
B-Tree DBFINDs, the qualified chain heads are retrieved, and the chain count becomes a
cumulative chain count of the super-chain. The record number of last entry is obtained
from the last entry of the last chain and the record number of the first entry is obtained
from the first entry of the first chain. For modes 21 and 24, the qualified chain-heads are
retrieved only during DBGETs, and hence, inaccurate chain counts and record numbers of
last entry and first entry are returned for DBFIND.
For B-Tree DBFINDs:
• Can be used both for master data set and detail data sets.
• Allows wildcard search, relational operators, as well as range search.
• DBFIND mode 1 will result in a B-Tree wildcard search, if all of the following are true:
Chapter 5
181
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
— Item type is X or U (ASCII).
— DBFIND is for master and a B-Tree index exists on the key item or DBFIND is for
detail and B-Tree index exists on the key item of the master to which the search item
has a path.
— BTREEMDODE1 flag is set ON by DBUTIL or DBCONTROL mode 15.
— Argument contains a wildcard character.
• Status array reflects information based on set, mode, and search type. B-Tree searches
for modes 1 and 4 for details give super-chain (multiple detail chain) counts and record
numbers of the first entry in first detail chain and last entry in last detail chain. For
masters, modes 1 and 4 give a count of entries qualified in the master and zeroes for the
first and last qualified entries in the master.
NOTE
A call to DBOPEN does not open individual data sets. Thus, a call to DBFIND (or
DBGET) that accesses a data set for the first time (or after the data set has
been closed), must open the data set, as well as the B-Tree index file (if
applicable). This causes extra overhead not incurred by subsequent calls to
the same data set by DBFIND or DBGET.
Consult appendix A for more information about the conditions for the DBFIND return
status values shown in Table 5-12.
Table 5-12. DBFIND Return Status Values
File System, Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management Failures:
182
-1
FOPEN failure.
-3
FREADDIR failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach options.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBFIND
Table 5-12. DBFIND Return Status Values
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Exceptional
Conditions:
Chapter 5
-11
Bad database reference.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-51
Bad list length.
-52
Bad item.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction encounters an
error.
-258
Invalid argument for index.
-259
Invalid mode for index.
-260
No previous list of qualified data entries.
-426
BTE: B-Tree doesn't exist.
-429
BTE: DBFIND argument version is bad.
-430
BTE: DBFIND (mode 4/24) argument type is bad.
-431
BTE: DBFIND (mode 4/24) argument #1 length is bad.
-432
BTE: Bad wildcard character.
-433
BTE: DBFIND (mode 4/24) argument #2 length is bad.
-434
BTE: Data set detail instead of master.
-436
BTE: Failed to extract data from root file.
-437
BTE: Failed to convert @c to dbfind.
-438
BTE: Invalid item number.
-439
BTE: Conversion error.
-444
BTE: DBFIND on non-key field of master.
-446
BTE: Argument 2 specified for relop of (</<=/=/>=/>).
-449
BTE: Failed to position index at start of key range.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
-193
DBU control block is full.
-3nn
Internal error.
-314
Error in patch information for set.
17
No master entry.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
183
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBGET
DBGET
INTRINSIC NUMBER 405
Provides eight different methods for accessing the entries of a data set.
Syntax
DBGET,base,dset,mode,status,list,buffer,argument
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about base ID.)
dset
is the name of an array containing the left-justified name of the data set to
be read, or is an integer referencing the data set by number. The data set
name can be up to 16 characters long. If shorter, it must be terminated by
a semicolon or a blank.
mode
contains an integer between 1 and 8, inclusive, which indicates the
reading method. The methods are:
Mode
Method
1
Re-read. Read the entry at the internally maintained
current record number (argument parameter is ignored).
2
Serial Read. Read the first entry whose record number is
greater than the internally maintained current number
(argument parameter is ignored).
3
Backward Serial Read. Read the first entry whose
record number is less than the internally maintained
current number (argument parameter is ignored).
4
Directed Read. Read the entry, if it exists, at the record
number specified in the argument parameter (argument is
treated as a 32-bit record number).
5
Chained Read or Next Qualified Entry Read. Read
the next entry in the current chain, or read the next
qualified entry for a B-Tree DBFIND. This is the entry
referenced by the internally maintained forward pointer
(argument parameter is ignored). Super-chains are
traversed for detail data sets.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI),
refer to your vendor documentation for additional
information.
184
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBGET
6
Backward Chained Read.
Read the previous entry in the current chain, or the
previous qualified entry for a B-Tree DBFIND. This is the
entry referenced by the internally maintained backward
pointer (argument parameter is ignored). Super-chains are
traversed for detail data sets.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI),
refer to your vendor documentation for additional
information.
7
Calculated Read. (Master data sets only.) Read the entry
with a key item value that matches the value specified in
argument. The entry is in the master data set specified by
dset.
8
Primary Calculated Read. (Master data sets only.) Read
the entry occupying the primary address of a synonym
chain using the key item value specified in argument to
locate the entry. The key item value returned is always
that of the primary entry and might not match the value
specified in argument. (Refer to chapter 10 for synonym
chain description.)
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBGET modes. The section on DBUTIL
in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the TPI option.
status
Chapter 5
is the name of a 10-halfword array in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-12. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
Length of the logical entry read into the buffer array in
halfwords.
3-4
Word record number of the data entry read.
5-6
Word zero, unless the entry read is a primary entry in
which case it is the number of entries in the synonym
chain.
7-8
Word record number of the preceding entry in the chain of
the current path for the detail data sets. Zeroes for master
data sets.
9-10
Word record number of the next entry in the chain of the
current path for the detail data sets. Zeroes for master
data sets.
185
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBGET
list
is the name of an array containing an ordered set of data item identifiers,
either names or numbers. The values for these data items are placed in the
array specified by the buffer parameter in the same order as they appear
in the list array.
The list array can contain a left-justified set of data item names, separated
by commas and terminated by a semicolon or blank. No embedded blanks
are allowed and no name can appear more than once.
When referencing by number, the first element of the list array is an
integer n which is followed by n unique data item numbers (one-halfword
positive integers).
The list not only specifies the data items to be retrieved immediately but is
saved internally by TurboIMAGE/XL as the current list for this data set.
The current list is unchanged until a different list is specified in a
subsequent call to DBGET, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE for the same access path
and data set.
Some special list constructs are allowed. These are described in Table 5-20.
with the DBPUT procedure. List processing is a relatively high overhead
operation which can be shortened in subsequent calls by using the asterisk
construct to specify that the current list is to be used. Use of this
construct can save considerable processing time. However, be sure a
current list exists before using the asterisk or TurboIMAGE/XL will
assume a null list. If a DBCLOSE mode 2 is used after DBGET, using the
asterisk construct, TurboIMAGE/XL uses the previously defined item list.
buffer
is the name of the array to which the values of data items specified in the
list array are moved. The values are placed in the same order as specified
in the list array. The number of elements occupied by each value
corresponds to the number required for each data type multiplied by the
sub-item count.
argument
is ignored except when mode equals 4, 7, or 8.
If mode is 4, argument contains a word record number of the entry to be
read.
If mode is 7 or 8, argument contains a key item value for the master data
set referenced by dset.
Discussion
The internal backward and forward pointers for the data set are replaced by the current
path's chain pointers from the entry just read. If the data set is a master, and not a B-Tree
index, they are synonym chain pointers (refer to chapter 10). If it is a detail with at least
one path, the current path is the one established by the last successful call to DBFIND; or, if
no call has been made, it is the primary path. If there are no paths defined, the internal
pointers are set to zeros.
The location of the entry just read becomes the current record for the data set. DBGET mode
5 or 6 will reread the current record and will try to continue the chain read if it encounters
a broken chain.
186
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBGET
NOTE
A call to DBOPEN does not open individual data sets. Thus, a call to DBGET (or
DBFIND) that accesses a data set for the first time (or after the data set has
been closed), must open the data set as well as jumbo files and B-Tree index
files. This causes extra overhead not incurred by subsequent calls to the same
data set by DBFIND or DBGET.
Table 5-13. DBGET Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Chapter 5
-1
FOPEN failure.
-3
FREADDIR failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error
nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system
error nn.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach options.
-11
Bad database reference.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-51
Bad list length.
-52
Bad list or bad item.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic
transaction encounters an error.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
187
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBGET
Table 5-13. DBGET Return Status Values
Exceptional
Conditions:
DBGET
Modes
10
Beginning of file.
(3)
11
End of file.
(2)
12
Directed beginning of file.
(4)
13
Directed end of file.
(4)
14
Beginning of chain/qualifier entries.
(6)
15
End of chain/qualifier entries.
(5)
17
No entry.
(1,2,7,8)
18
Broken chain.
(5,6)
49
Illegal buffer address.
50
Buffer is too small (will only be returned if buffer is
too small and the data transfer would write over
stack markers in the user's stack).
62
DBG full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE
allowed.
-193
DBU control block is full.
-3nn
Internal error.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
-333
Error in QOPEN table operation.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
188
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
DBINFO
INTRINSIC NUMBER 402
Provides information about the database being accessed. The information returned is
restricted by the user class number established when the database is opened; any data
items, data sets, or paths of the database which are inaccessible to that user class are
considered to be non-existent.
Syntax
DBINFO,base,qualifier,mode,status,buffer
Parameters
base
is the array name used as the base parameter when opening the database;
must contain the base ID returned by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for
additional base ID information.)
qualifier
is the name of an array containing a data set/data item name or an integer
referencing a data item/data set, depending on the value of the mode
parameter (refer to "Discussion" for mode/qualifier relationship). This
parameter form is identical to the dset and item parameters for DBFIND,
and the dset and list parameters for DBPUT.
mode
is an integer indicating the type of information desired. Refer to
"Discussion" for mode integer information (data item modes 1nn; data set
modes 2nn; path modes 3nn; logging, dynamic roll-back recovery, and
multiple database transaction modes 4nn; subsystem and critical item
update modes 5nn; third-party indexing modes 8nn; and language modes
9nn.)
status
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
buffer
Chapter 5
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-14. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
Length of information in buffer array (in halfwords).
3-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Information about the procedure call and its results. Refer
to "Library Procedure Error Messages" in appendix A for a
description of this information.
is the name of an array in which the requested information is returned.
The contents of the buffer array vary according to the mode parameter
189
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
used. They are also described in "Discussion" on the following pages.
Table 5-14. DBINFO Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Exceptional
Conditions:
-1
FOPEN failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach options.
-11
Bad database reference.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction encounters an
error.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
-206
Remote TurboIMAGE/XL database exceeds IMAGE/3000 limits.
49
Illegal buffer address.
50
Buffer too small for requested data.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
Discussion
This section provides mode integer information for the following modes (note that the
mode/qualifier relationship is provided):
1nn – Data item modes
2nn – Data set modes
3nn – Path modes
4nn – Logging, dynamic roll-back recovery, and multiple database transaction modes
5nn – Subsystem and critical item update modes
8nn – Third-party indexing modes
9nn – Language modes
190
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 101: Item Number
Mode 101 defines the type of access available for a specific item.
Qualifier
identifies the data item name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1
Contents
+/− Data item number
If the data item number is positive, the user class has only read access to the data item. If
the number is negative, the data item can be updated or the entry containing it can be
added or deleted in at least one data set.
Mode 102: Item Name
Mode 102 describes a specific data item.
Qualifier
identifies the data item name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1–8
9
Contents
Data item name
One of the following data types followed
by a blank:
I, J, K, R, U, X, Z, P
10
Sub-item length
11
Sub-item count
12
0
13
0
The data item name is left-justified and will be padded with blanks if the name is shorter
than 16 characters.
Chapter 5
191
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 103: Items in Database
Mode 103 identifies data items available in the database and displays the type of access
allowed. This mode does not identify unreferenced data items, that is, those items that are
defined in the item section of the schema but are not referenced by at least one data set.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Item count x
2
+/− Data item number 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
n+1
+/− Data item number n
If the data item number is positive, the user class has only read access to the data item. If
the number is negative, the user class has both read and write access to the given data set.
The data items are listed in data item number order.
Mode 104: Items in Data Set
Mode 104 identifies data items available in a specific data set and the type of access
allowed.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Item count x
2
+/− Data item number 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
n+1
+/− Data item number n
If the data item number is positive, the user class has only read access to the data item. If
the number is negative, the user class has both read and write access in the given data set.
The data items are listed in order of occurrence in data entry.
192
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 113: BTREEMODE1 and Wildcard Character
Mode 113 gives the settings of BTREEMODE1 and wildcard character in the root file as well
as current DBOPEN (DBU).
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
must be at least 32 bytes and returns the following (each element is a
halfword or 2 bytes):
Element
1
Contents
0 if BTREEMODE1 is off in the root file
1 if BTREEMODE1 is on in the root file
2
The first byte (8 bits) is always 0. The second byte (8 bits) represents c, where c is the
current wildcard character. For example, if the current wildcard character is @, the
element's hex value will be $0040, or decimal 64. This is from the root file.
3
Highest B-Tree argument version supported (0 for the first B-Tree release version).
4
Number of sets with B-Trees indices attached.
5
0 if BTREEMODE1 is off for current DBOPEN
1 if BTREEMODE1 is on for current DBOPEN
6
7...16
The first byte (8 bits) is always 0. The second byte (8 bits) represents c, where c is the
current wildcard character. This is for the current DBOPEN.
(reserved)
Mode 201: Set Number
Mode 201 defines the type of access available for a specific data set.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1
Contents
+/− Data set number
If the data set number is positive, the user class has only read access. If the number is
negative, the user class has both read and write access.
Chapter 5
193
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 202: Set Name
Mode 202 describes a specific data set.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1–8
Contents
Data set name
9
One of the following set types followed by a blank:
M, A, D
10
Entry length
11
Blocking factor
12
0
13
0
14–15
Number of entries in set
16–17
Capacity of set. If data set is dynamically expandable, current capacity for detail, and initial
capacity (also primary capacity) for master. Note that for master, it is always primary capacity
regardless of expansion.
The data set name is left-justified and will be padded with blanks if the name is shorter
than 16 characters.
Mode 203: Sets in Database
Mode 203 identifies all data sets available in a database and the type of access allowed. If
you are using third-party indexing, this mode does not show third-party index files.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Set count x
2
+/− Data set number 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
n+1
+/− Data set number n
If the data set number is positive, the user class has only read access to the data set and
possibly is in the write class list of specific data item(s). If the number is negative, the user
class has both read and write access. The data sets are listed in data set number order.
194
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 204: Sets with Item
Mode 204 identifies all data sets available which contain a specified data item and
indicates the type of access allowed.
Qualifier
identifies the data item name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Set count x
2
+/− Data set number
.
.
.
.
.
.
n+1
+/− Data set number
If the data set number is positive, the user class has only read access to the data set and
possibly is in the write class list of specific data item(s). If the number is negative, the user
class has both read and write access. The data sets are listed in data set number order.
Mode 205: Set Capacity
Mode 205 is an extension of mode 202 with dynamic capacity expansion information.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1-8
9
Contents
Data set name
One of the following set types followed by a blank:
M, A, D
10
Entry length
11
Blocking factor
12
0
13
0
14-15
Number of entries in set
16-17
Current capacity of set, including expansions
18-19
High-water mark
20-21
Maximum capacity
22-23
Initial capacity (primary capacity for master)
Chapter 5
195
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Element
24-25
Contents
Incremental number of entries
26
Incremental percent
27
Dynamic capacity expansion flag (0 = off, 1 = on)
The data set name is left-justified and will be padded with blanks if the name is shorter
than 16 characters.
Mode 205 can be used for any master or detail data set with or without dynamic capacity
expansion capability.
Mode 205 allows users to obtain information on dynamic data set capacity expansion
programmatically. It is an extension of mode 202 to include dynamic capacity expansion
information such as maximum capacity, initial capacity, incremental number of entries,
incremental percent, and the dynamic capacity expansion flag (0 for off and 1 for on) for
the data set.
Mode 206: Number of Data Set Chunks
Mode 206 gives the number of chunks in a data set in short format.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1
Contents
# of chunks in a jumbo data set
If the data set is not a jumbo data set, zero is returned for the number of chunks.
Mode 207: Size of Data Set Chunks
Mode 207 identifies the size of each chunk in terms of IMAGE records in addition to
providing the number of chunks.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
196
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Element
Contents
1
# of chunks in a jumbo data set
2
0
3-4
Size of chunk 1 (# entries, not # of blocks!)
5-6
Size of chunk 2 (# entries, not # of blocks!)
7-8
.
.
.
2n + 3
Size of chunk n (# entries, not # of blocks!)
Total size: (n + 1) * 4 bytes.
If the data set is not a jumbo data set, then zero is returned for the number of chunks.
Mode 208: Primary and Actual Capacity
Mode 208 returns the primary and actual capacity.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
must be at least a 64-byte record and returns the following (each element
is a 32-bit Word):
Element
Contents
1
Primary (hashing) capacity for masters, 0 for details
2
Current capacity, including expansions
3
Maximum capacity
4
Expansion threshold:
-1...100
percentage
-1
this value means expansion is not triggered by percentage, or it
is a non-expandable set
5
Delete chain free head (0 for non-expanded masters)
6
high-water mark (0 for non-expanded masters)
7
Expansion threshold:
8...16
-1...2
billion blocks
-1
this value means expansion not triggered by traversing # blocks
without success, or it is a non-expandable set
Reserved; 0 is returned
DBINFO mode 208 does not return an expandable flag, while DBINFO 205 returns an
expandable flag. The flag can also be deduced by comparing the current and maximum
Chapter 5
197
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
capacities in DBINFO 208.
DBINFO mode 208 returns information about internals which will be meaningful to only a
few customers.
Mode 209: B-Tree Attachment
Mode 209 informs whether or not a B-Tree exists for a master.
Qualifier
is a master data set name or number.
Buffer
must be at least a 64-byte record and returns the following (each element
is a 32-bit Word):
Element
Contents
1
0 if no B-Tree index exists
1 if B-Tree index exists
2
0 if attached B-Tree not damaged or index does not exist
1 if the attached B-Tree index is damaged
3...32
For internal use
Mode 301: Paths
Mode 301 identifies the paths defined for a specified data set.
Qualifier
identifies the data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Path count x
2
Data set number of path 1
3
Search item number of path 1
4
Sort item number of path 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
3n–1
3n
3n+1
Data set number of path n
Search item number of path n
Sort item number of path n
Elements 2 to 4 are repeated for each path.
If qualifier specifies a master data set, the set number identifies the detail
data set.
198
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
If qualifier specifies a detail data set, the set number identifies the master
data set.
If qualifier specifies a master data set, the item numbers identify items in
the detail data sets. If you do not have access to a search item, it is not
included in the path count and the path information is not returned. If a
sort item does not exist or you do not have access to it, the sort item
number is zero.
Path designators are presented in the order in which they appear in the
schema.
Mode 302: Key or Search Item
Mode 302 identifies the key or search item for a specified data set. For this mode the two
qualifiers are shown separately.
Qualifier
identifies the master data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Key item number
2
0
If qualifier specifies a master data set, the key item number is the number
in the master set. The number is 0 if you do not have access to the key
item.
OR
Qualifier
identifies the detail data set name or number for which the information is
requested.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Search item number
2
Master data set number
If qualifier specifies a detail data set, the primary search item and the
related master data set number are returned. Both numbers are 0 if you
do not have access to the search item.
Chapter 5
199
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 401: Logging
Mode 401 obtains information related to logging.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1–4
Log identifier name
5
Database log flag
6
User log flag
7
Transaction flag
8–9
User transaction number
The log identifier name is left-justified and padded with blanks if shorter
than 8 characters.
If the database is enabled for logging, the database log flag is 1; otherwise
it is 0.
If you are logging, the user log flag is 1; otherwise it is 0.
If you have a transaction in progress, the transaction flag is 1; otherwise it
is 0.
The user transaction number is one word.
Mode 402: ILR
Mode 402 returns information about Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR).
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
ILR log flag
2
Calendar date (mmddyy)
3–4
5
Clock time (one word in format hhmmsstt)
0
6–14
15–16
Reserved
If the database is enabled for ILR, the ILR log flag is 1; otherwise it is 0.
The calendar date is the date ILR was enabled.
The clock time is the time ILR was enabled.
200
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Element 5 is always 0.
ß indicates blank. Elements 6 to 14 are always blank.
Elements 15 and 16 are reserved.
Mode 403: Dynamic Roll-Back
Mode 403 obtains information related to dynamic transaction activity on a given database.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1–4
Contents
Log identifier name
5
Database log flag
6
User log flag
7
Logical transaction flag
8–9
10–11
User transaction number
XM log set size (in megabytes)
12
XM log set type
13
Database attached flag
14
Dynamic transaction flag
15–26
XM log set name
The log identifier name is left-justified and padded with blanks if shorter
than 8 characters.
If the database is enabled for logging, the database log flag is 1; otherwise
it is 0.
If you are logging, the user log flag is 1; otherwise it is 0.
If no logical transaction is in progress, the transaction flag is 0. If a static
transaction is in progress, the flag is set to 1; if a multiple database
transaction is in progress, the flag is set to 2.
The user transaction number is one word.
The Transaction Management (XM) log set is measured in megabytes.
If the XM log set is circular, the log set type is CR; otherwise it is LN
indicating a linear log.
If the database is attached to XM, the database attached flag is 1;
otherwise it is 0.
If the user is processing a dynamic transaction, the dynamic transaction
flag is 1; otherwise it is 0.
Chapter 5
201
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
If the database is associated with the default XM user log set, the XM log
set name element contains blanks; otherwise it contains the name of the
XM log set.
Mode 404: Logging Subsystem Information
Mode 404 returns information about multiple database transactions.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Database log flag
2
User log flag
3
Roll-back log flag
4
ILR log flag
5
MUSTRECOVER flag
6
Database remote flag
7
Logical transaction flag
8–11
Log identifier name
12–13
Log index
14–15
Multiple database transaction ID
16
17–31
Number of databases involved in the multiple database transaction
Base IDs of the databases involved in the multiple database transaction
If the database is enabled for logging, the database log flag is 1; otherwise
it is 0.
If you are logging, the user log flag is set to 1; otherwise it is 0. If a user
accesses the database with a DBOPEN mode 5, this flag is set to 0.
If the database is enabled for roll-back logging, the roll-back log flag is set
to 1; otherwise it is 0.
If the database is enabled for ILR, the ILR log flag is set to 1; otherwise it
is 0.
If the database is enabled for MUSTRECOVER, the MUSTRECOVER flag is set to
1; otherwise it is 0.
If the database resides on a remote system, the database remote flag is set
to 1. If the database resides on the local system, the flag is set to 0.
If no logical transaction is in progress, the transaction flag is set to 0. If a
static transaction is in progress, the flag is set to 1. If a multiple database
transaction is in progress, the flag is set to 2.
202
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
The log index is used to call the WRITELOG intrinsic. It is set to 0 if logging
is not used.
The transaction ID represents a multiple or single database transaction.
Elements 16-31 are set when a multiple database transaction is in
progress.
Mode 406: Database Information
Mode 406 returns information about fully qualified database name and open mode.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1-14
Fully qualified database name, left justified, blank trailing.
15
Open mode for current DBOPEN.
16
Root file version of the database. In the form Cn where C is uppercase
ASCII and n is a number. For example, C2 or C3.
17-24
For internal use.
25-32
Reserved.
Mode 501: Subsystem Access
Mode 501 checks subsystem access to the database. Refer to the DBUTIL >>SHOW and >>SET
commands described in chapter 8 for more information.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Subsystem access
The following values are used for subsystem access:
Chapter 5
0
No access
1
Read access
3
Read/write access
203
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBINFO
Mode 502: Critical Item Update
Mode 502 checks the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option settings for the database and
the current DBOPEN. The CIUPDATE option is set for the database with the DBUTIL >>SET
command and then, depending on the setting, can be enabled or disabled with DBCONTROL
for the current DBOPEN. Refer to the discussion of DBCONTROL in this chapter and the
descriptions of the DBUTIL >>SHOW and >>SET commands in chapter 8 for more
information.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1
Critical item update flag
2
Current setting for accessor
For element 1, the following values are used for the CIUPDATE option
setting specified with DBUTIL for the database:
0
Critical item update is disallowed.
1
Critical item update is allowed (default).
2
Critical item update is on.
For element 2, the following values are used for the current DBOPEN setting
specified with DBCONTROL:
0
Critical item update is disabled for this accessor.
1
Critical item update is enabled for this accessor.
Modes 8nn: Third-Party Indexing
Modes 8nn are used to return information related to third-party indexing (TPI). If your
database is enabled for TPI, refer to your vendor documentation for additional DBINFO
mode information. The section on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of
the TPI option.
Mode 901: Language
Mode 901 obtains the Native Language attribute of the database. It returns the MPE/iX
code for the language attribute.
Qualifier
is ignored.
Buffer
returns the following (each element is a halfword or two bytes):
Element
1
204
Contents
Language ID
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
DBLOCK
INTRINSIC NUMBER 409
Applies a logical lock to a database, one or more data sets, or one or more data entries.
Syntax
DBLOCK,base,qualifier,mode,status
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used for the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about base ID.)
qualifier
Modes 1 and 2: Ignored.
Modes 3 and 4: An integer variable referencing the data set number or
the name of an array containing a data set name. Could also be "@", when
applying a database lock.
Modes 5 and 6: The name of the array containing the lock descriptors.
The format for lock descriptors is given in Figure 5-2.
Use care when changing modes. The qualifier parameter can also change.
mode
NOTE
contains an integer indicating the type of locking desired (refer to Table
5-15.).
If the database is open in user access mode 1, a lock must be in effect on
either the data set or the whole database when adding to or deleting from
master data sets. If a data entry level lock is specified, any subsequent
DBPUTs or DBDELETEs will fail with error number −12 and the following
message is returned:
intrinsic name CALLED WITHOUT COVERING LOCK IN EFFECT
Note, however, that a lock on either the entire database or data set can be
achieved with a data entry lock when an @ sign is used to specify either all
data sets or all data items.
status
Chapter 5
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-17. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
205
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
NOTE
2
The number of lock descriptors that were successfully
applied in the DBLOCK request. For successful locks in
modes 1 through 4 this will be 1.
3
If the return status is 20, this element contains 0 if the
database is locked, 1 if the data set or entries are locked.
4
Reserved: Contents undefined.
5-10
Information about the procedure call and its results. Refer
to "Library Procedure Error Messages" in appendix A for a
complete description of this information.
Concurrent processes running in a process-handling environment must have
MR capability if they call DBLOCK.
Discussion
The format of the array containing a list of lock descriptors is illustrated in Figure 5-2. and
applies only for locking modes 5 or 6. The number of lock descriptors (n) is a one-halfword
binary integer. Only the first n lock descriptors are processed. If n is zero, DBLOCK returns
without taking any action. The format of a lock descriptor is illustrated in Figure 5-3., and
the lock descriptor fields are described in Table 5-16.
The shortest possible descriptor is 9 halfwords long consisting of the length field and a dset
field containing @. Although the dset field only contains an at-sign, it must still be 8
halfwords long. The length of the entire descriptor array cannot exceed 4094 bytes.
Lock descriptors are sorted by data set number, then by value provided for the lock item.
TurboIMAGE/XL does not sort by item within the set, because more than one item per
data set constitutes a conflicting lock descriptor (TurboIMAGE/XL error −134).
206
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
Table 5-15. Locking Mode Options
Lock
Mode
Lock
Level
Locking Type
Description
1
Base
Unconditional
DBLOCK applies an unconditional lock to the whole
database, returning to the calling program only after the
lock is successful (or if an error occurs). The qualifier
parameter is ignored.
2
Base
Conditional
DBLOCK applies a conditional lock to the database and
returns immediately. A return status of zero indicates
success. A non-zero return status indicates the reason for
failure. (Refer to Table 5-17.)
3
Set
Unconditional
DBLOCK applies an unconditional lock to a data set. The
qualifier parameter must specify the name of an array
containing the left-justified name of the data set or the
name of an integer referencing the data set number. The
data set name can be 16 characters long or, if shorter,
terminated by a semicolon or blank.
The data set need not be accessible for read or write access
to the user requesting the lock.
4
Set
Conditional
DBLOCK applies a conditional lock of the same type as mode
3. It always returns to the calling program immediately. A
return status of zero indicates success and a non-zero
return status indicates a reason for failure. (Refer to Table
5-17.)
5
Entry
Unconditional
DBLOCK applies unconditional locks to the data entries
specified by lock descriptors. The qualifier parameter must
specify the name of an array containing the lock descriptors.
The format of the array is shown in Figure 5-2. It returns
only when all the locks have been acquired.
6
Entry
Conditional
DBLOCK applies conditional locks of the same type as mode
5. If multiple lock descriptors are specified and DBLOCK
encounters a lock descriptor that it cannot apply, it returns.
All locks that have been applied until that point are
retained.
Because the locks are not executed in the order supplied by
the user, it is not predictable which locks are held and
which are not after an unsuccessful mode 6 DBLOCK. Status
element 2 indicates how many lock descriptors were
actually successful. It is recommended that a DBUNLOCK be
issued after any unsuccessful mode 6 DBLOCK.
NOTE
Chapter 5
Be careful when changing modes. The qualifier parameter can change.
207
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
Figure 5-2. Qualifier Array Format for Locking Modes 5 and 6
Figure 5-3. Lock Descriptor Format
208
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
Table 5-16. Lock Descriptor Fields
Field Name
length
dset
Description
A halfword integer specifying the physical length in halfwords of the lock
descriptor, including the length field itself.
Describes the data set in which locks are placed. It is always 8 halfwords long and
can be one of the following:
• A data set name, left-justified, 16 characters long or, if shorter, terminated
with a blank or semicolon (for example, SALES;).
• A data set number, an integer in the range of 1 to 199 stored in the first
element.
• An at-sign (@) stored in the first byte of the dset and a lock descriptor length of
2 indicating that the whole database is to be locked. All unused bytes are
ignored. In this case, the ditem, relop, and value fields are ignored and can be
omitted if desired.
• A blank or semicolon (first byte) or binary zero (first halfword) indicating that
the whole lock descriptor is to be ignored. (It is counted as one of the n
descriptors.)
The data set, if specified, need not be accessible for read or write access to the user
requesting the lock.
ditem
Always 8 halfwords long unless an @ is stored in the first byte. It can be one of the
following:
• A data item name, left-justified, 16 characters long or, if shorter, terminated
with a blank or semicolon.
• A data item number stored as an integer in the first halfword. It can be in the
range of 1 to 1023.
• An at-sign (@) stored in the first byte of the ditem indicating that the whole
data set specified in dset is to be locked. All unused bytes are ignored and can
be omitted if desired.
The data item need not be a search item, nor does it have to be accessible to the
user requesting the lock. However, it cannot be a compound item or a P-type item
longer than P28.
relop
One halfword long, it contains one of the three relational operators represented as
two ASCII characters:
<= less than or equal
>= greater than or equal
=
value
Chapter 5
or
= equal (
indicates space character)
The value of the data item to be locked. It must be stored in exactly the same way
as it is stored in the database. TurboIMAGE/XL extracts as many halfwords as
required by the corresponding data item definition (in the schema). The rest (if
any) are ignored.
209
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
If you specify a data item of type P, U, or Z in a lock descriptor, TurboIMAGE/XL checks
that the value is valid for that data item type. The following checks are made:
• If the data item is type P, the right half of the right most byte must contain a sign and
all preceding nibbles must contain decimal digits represented in Binary Coded Decimal
(BCD) format. For example, if a data item is defined as type P with a length of 20, the
format must be as shown here:
Figure 5-4. Lock Descriptor Format
This would be declared in COBOL II as 19 digits plus a sign or 20 nibbles (P20 in the
schema):
S9(19)
COMP-3
Type P data item used in a lock descriptor cannot exceed 28 nibbles (7 halfwords) in
length. The locking system treats all sign digits other than 11012 as identical. 11012 is
assumed to be a negative sign.
• If the data item is type U, the value cannot contain any lowercase alphabetic characters
in the range of a through z (for non-native language use only).
• If the data item is type U or X, and a lock specifies an inequality, the language of the
database is used.
• If the data item is type Z, each byte preceding the last one must contain an 8-bit digit
represented in ASCII format and the last byte must contain a value representing a digit
and a sign.
• If the data item is type R, it is sorted based on the HP 3000 floating point number
format.
210
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
Table 5-17. DBLOCK Return Status Values
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Chapter 5
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad mode value.
-121
Descriptor count error.
-123
Illegal relop in a descriptor.
-124
Descriptor too short. Must be greater than or
equal to 9.
-125
Bad set name/number.
-126
Bad item name/number.
-127
Attempt to lock using a compound item.
-128
Value field too short in a descriptor.
-129
P-type item longer than P28 specified.
-130
Illegal digit in a P-type value.
-131
Lowercase character in type U value.
-132
Illegal digit in type Z value.
-133
Illegal sign in type Z value.
-134
Two descriptors conflict.
-135
DBLOCK called when locks already in effect.
-136
Descriptor list exceeds 4094 bytes.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic
transaction encounters an error.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-103
Remote 3000 stack too small.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
211
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBLOCK
Table 5-17. DBLOCK Return Status Values
Exceptional
Conditions:
Applicable
Modes
20
Database locked or contains locks.
(2,4,6)
(Status element 3: 0 = database locked 1 =
data set or entries locked)
22
Data set locked by another process.
(3,4,5,6)
23
Entries locked within set.
(4)
24
Item conflicts with current locks.
(6)
25
Entry or entries already locked.
(6)
26
Lock not performed since deadlock would
occur.
(1,2,3,4,5,6)
62
DBG full.
(5,6)
(If this error occurs when multiple lock
descriptors are specified, some of the
descriptors may have been successfully
completed. If so, they are not unlocked by
TurboIMAGE/XL before returning the error.
Therefore, issue a DBUNLOCK after any
positive-numbered error, unless you have
reason to do otherwise.)
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only
DBCLOSE allowed.
-192
Invalid DBU.
-241
Bad tag for TurboLKT table.
Appendix A contains more information about these conditions.
212
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBMEMO
DBMEMO
INTRINSIC NUMBER 414
Used to log user data (ASCII or binary) to the log file.
Syntax
DBMEMO,base,text,mode,status,textlen
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
text
is an array of up to 512 bytes that contains user data (ASCII or binary) to
be written to the log file as part of the DBMEMO log record.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1.
status
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information. If the procedure executes successfully, the status array
contents are:
textlen
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-18. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
is an integer equal to the number of halfwords to be logged from the text
parameter, or is a negative integer equal to the number of bytes. Length
can be zero.
Discussion
DBMEMO is used to log user data to the log file when the user process is logging. No
action occurs if the process is not logging. DBMEMO can be used to add additional auditing
information to the log file or to facilitate the identification of transactions in the event of a
failure and subsequent recovery.
Chapter 5
213
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBMEMO
Table 5-18. DBMEMO Return Status Values
Calling Errors:
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-151
Text length greater than 512 bytes.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
Logging System
Failures:
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Exceptional
Conditions:
-193
DBU control block is full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Communications
Errors:
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
214
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
DBOPEN
INTRINSIC NUMBER 401
Initiates access to the database and establishes the user class number and access mode for
all subsequent database access. DBOPEN is used in conjunction with DBCLOSE to establish
and terminate access to a database.
Syntax
DBOPEN,base,password,mode,status
Parameters
base
is the name of an integer array containing a string of ASCII characters.
The string must consist of two blanks followed by a left-justified database
name (maximum 6 characters) and terminated by a semicolon or blank
( ), for example, "
orders;". If the database is successfully opened,
TurboIMAGE/XL replaces the two blanks with a value called the base ID.
The base ID uniquely identifies this access path between the database and
the process calling DBOPEN. In all subsequent accesses to the database, the
first halfword of base must be this base ID; therefore, the array should not
be modified. The base ID contains a number that distinguishes between
the 63 access paths allowed for each process for accessing a given
database.
NOTE
The base ID cannot be passed between processes in an attempt to reduce the
number of required DBOPEN calls.
To access a database catalogued in a group other than the user's log-on
group, the database name must be followed by a period and the group
name, for example, ORDERS.GROUPX. If the database is in an account other
than the user's account, the group name must be followed by a period and
the account name, for example, ORDERS.GROUPX.ACCOUNT1.
You can use an MPE/iX FILE command before executing the application
program to equate the database name or the database-access file name to
another database or database-access file name. You can use only the
formal file designator, actual file designator, and the DEV= parameters. For
additional information on the database-access file, refer to chapter 9.
password
is the name of an integer array containing a left-justified string of ASCII
characters consisting of an optional password followed by an optional user
identifier.
The following constructs are valid for the password and user identifier (a
represents a blank):
Chapter 5
215
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
[/USERIDENT]
;[/USERIDENT]
password[/USERIDENT]
Access class zero (0).
Creator access.
Password access.
If either the password or the user identifier string is less than eight
characters long, it must be terminated with a semicolon or a blank.
The password establishes a user class number as described in chapter 2. A
semicolon supplied as the password implies creator class 64. The user
identifier is used by the program DBRECOV to distinguish between users
logged on under the same name and account.
The following are valid examples:
;
CLERK
CLERK;
CLERK;/JOE;
CLERK /JOE;
/DBA
is an integer between 1 and 8, inclusive, corresponding to the valid
TurboIMAGE/XL access modes described in chapter 4. Here is a brief
summary:
mode
Access Mode
216
Associated Capabilities
Concurrent Modes Allowed
1
Modify with enforced locking. Allow
concurrent modify.
1,5
2
Update, allow concurrent update.
2,6
3
Modify exclusive.
none
4
Modify, allow concurrent read.
6
5
Read, allow concurrent modify.
1,5
6
Read, allow concurrent modify.
6 and either 2, one 4, or 8
7
Read, exclusive.
none
8
Read, allow concurrent read.
6,8
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
NOTE
If the database is open in database access mode 1, a lock must be in effect on
either the data set or the whole database when adding to or deleting from
master data sets. If a data entry level lock is specified, any subsequent
DBPUTs or DBDELETEs will fail with error number −12 and the following
message is returned:
intrinsic name CALLED WITHOUT COVERING LOCK IN EFFECT
Lock either the entire database or data set with a data entry lock by using an
@ sign to specify all data sets or all data items.
The figure in appendix B summarizes the results of multiple access to the
same database. If a database cannot be opened successfully in a particular
mode, this information can be used to determine the problem and to select
an alternate mode.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBOPEN mode information. The
section on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the
TPI option.
status
Chapter 5
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-19. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
User class number, 0 to 63 (or a 64 if the database creator
enters a semicolon ";" in place of a password).
3
Current size of the DBG (in halfwords) or 32767,
whichever is smaller. If it is 32767, the DBG size exceeds
the maximum halfword value limit.
4
Size of the DBU (in halfwords) or 32767, whichever is
smaller. If it is 32767, the DBU size exceeds the maximum
half-word value limit.
5-10
Information about the current procedure call and its
results. This same information is returned for all
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures if an error occurs. It is
described in "Library Procedure Error Messages" in
appendix A.
217
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
Discussion
A process can concurrently use the database through independent, unique access paths by
issuing as many as 127 calls to DBOPEN (63 calls per database) and specifying a different
base array in each call. Subsequent calls to other TurboIMAGE/XL procedures must use
the appropriate base array so that the correct base ID is used.
CAUTION
Although a single process can call DBOPEN a maximum of 127 times (63 per
database), DBOPEN can encounter an MPE/iX system limit and fail. For
example, DBOPEN would fail if the limit was exceeded for mapped file space or
if the process attempted to open more than the allowable number of files.
The database activity controlled on one access path relates to that controlled on other
access paths in the same way the database activity of one process relates to that of
another. The access modes established by each DBOPEN call must be compatible, but
otherwise the activity controlled by each access path and the pointers maintained by it are
completely independent. The only exception to this access path independence relates to
locking. If a process makes a lock request on one access path, it cannot issue a lock on
another access path unless the program has multiple RIN capability (CAP=MR) or first
calls DBUNLOCK to release the locks on the first access path.
DBOPEN performs expansion recovery if necessary. During the first open of the database
using any open mode, DBOPEN automatically performs expansion recovery for any detail
data set with the "expansion in progress" flag turned on and a previous DBPUT capacity
expansion had not completed. Recovery correctly adjusts the data set free count and the
root file data set capacity fields using the actual data set file size. Use the SHOW CAPACITY
command in DBUTIL to detect if recovery is required for the data set. If the message,
"dynamic capacity expansion in progress flag is on," is displayed for the data set, and
asterisks are in the "no. of entries" and "%max cap" fields, then recovery is required for the
data set(s). QUERY or any application performing the first DBOPEN of the database can be
used to recover the detail data set capacity. Use DBChange Plus or a third-party
application to change an existing detail data set to have parameters for dynamic
expansion.
If the database is enabled for logging, and the program calls DBOPEN in one of modes 1-4,
then TurboIMAGE/XL attempts to access a log file using the MPE/iX OPENLOG intrinsic.
OPENLOG succeeds only if the following have been completed:
1. A valid log identifier and log password have been set into the database root file using
the DBUTIL >>SET command, and
2. A corresponding system log process has been initiated by the console operator to handle
any calls to the logging system.
If OPENLOG fails, DBOPEN also fails and returns an appropriate error condition. If OPENLOG
succeeds, DBOPEN causes a log record to be written which includes such information as
time, date, user name, user program, mode, and security class. (Refer to appendix E for a
full description of log record contents and formats.)
A process is logging if it successfully opens a database in one of modes 1-4, and the
database is enabled for logging. A program does not log if it opens in one of modes 5-8, or if
the database is not enabled for logging.
218
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
If DBRECOV roll-back recovery is enabled, the first DBOPEN checks if the user logging file and
the database are attached to the same Transaction Management (XM) user log set. The
database and the user logging file must be kept synchronized at the XM level in order for
DBRECOV roll-back recovery to work.
DBOPEN initiates recovery of the incomplete dynamic transactions, if necessary; then
DBRECOV rolls back the incomplete static transactions.
Dynamic transactions are not allowed with DBOPEN mode 2.
Table 5-19. DBOPEN Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management,
and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
Chapter 5
-1
HPFOPEN or FOPEN failure.
-2
FCLOSE failure.
-3
FREADDIR failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-5
FWRITEDIR error.
-6
FWRITELABEL error.
-8
FUNLOCK failure.
-9
Cannot create a control block.
-10
FFILEINFO failure.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-177
User log file is not in the same volume set as database.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-179
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction for attach.
-198
Total DBOPEN count/user exceeds limit.
-208
FLABELINFO failure.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach.
-210
MPE error decimal integer while getting log file name.
-211
Invalid or no userlabel.
219
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
Table 5-19. DBOPEN Return Status Values
Calling
Errors:
Communicati
ons Errors:
Logging
System
Failures:
220
-11
Bad database reference.
-13
Must be creator of root file or database.
-21
Bad password.
-22
Maintenance word required.
-31
Bad mode.
-32
Unobtainable mode.
-34
Database must be recovered before access is allowed.
-90
Root file bad: unrecognized state: % octal integer.
-91
Bad root modification level.
-92
Database not created.
-94
Database bad: Was being modified with output deferred, may not
be accessed in mode decimal integer.
-95
Database bad: Creation was in process (create again).
-96
Database bad: Erase was in process (erase again).
-220
Database and user log not attached to the same XM log set.
-15
DSLINE or remote HELLO failure; setup for RDBA failed.
-60
Illegal file equation on root file.
-61
Error while obtaining information about file equation.
-100
DSOPEN failure.
-101
DSCLOSE failure.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-103
Remote 3000 space insufficient.
-104
Remote system does not support TurboIMAGE/XL.
-105
Remote 3000 cannot create control block.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
-110
OPENLOG failure.
-111
WRITELOG failure.
-114
Roll-back enabled without logging.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBOPEN
Table 5-19. DBOPEN Return Status Values
Native
Language
Support
Errors:
-200
Database language not system supported.
-201
Native Language Support not installed.
-202
MPE Native Language Support error decimal integer
returned by NLINFO.
Exceptional
Conditions:
-167
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-191
DBS control block is full.
-199
Cannot end MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-220
User log and database not attached to same XM log.
-226
Error occurred when the 00 file was created.
-227
Error occurred in 00 file recovery.
-234
Cannot purge the 00 file.
-236
Internal error occurred when opening the AUX file: error nn.
-250
Failure in semaphore initialization.
-253
Database enabled for indexing, but third-party indexing is not
configured.
-331
Invalid DSET Capacity.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
-333
Error in QOPEN table operation.
60
Database access disabled.
61
This database opened more than 63 times by the same process.
62
DBG full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
64
PCBX full.
66
The current DBG for the database does not appear correct
(TurboIMAGE internal error).
68
DBB disabled by an abort.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions and appendix B for
results of multiple access.
Chapter 5
221
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBPUT
DBPUT
INTRINSIC NUMBER 407
Adds new entries to a manual master or detail data set. The database must be opened in
access mode 1, 3, or 4.
Syntax
DBPUT,base,dset,mode,status,list,buffer
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about base ID.)
dset
is the name of an array containing the left-justified name of the data set to
which the entry is to be added, or is an integer referencing the data set by
number. The data set name can be up to 16 characters long. If shorter, it
must be terminated by a semicolon or a blank.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBPUT mode information. The section
on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the TPI
option.
status
222
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-21. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
Length of logical entry in buffer array (in halfwords).
3-4
Word record number of new entry.
5-6
Word count of number of entries in chain. If master data
set, chain is synonym chain. If detail data set, chain is
current chain of new entry.
7-8
If master, word record address of predecessor on synonym
chain. If detail, word record number of predecessor on
current detail chain.
9-10
If detail, word record number of successor on current
chain. If master, word zero.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBPUT
list
is the name of an array containing an ordered set of data item identifiers;
names or numbers. The new entry contains values supplied in the buffer
array for data items in the list array. Search or sort items defined for the
entry must be included in the list array. Fields of unreferenced items are
filled with binary zeros.
The list array can contain a left-justified set of data item names,
separated by commas and terminated by a semicolon or blank; no
embedded blanks are allowed, and no name can appear more than once.
For example:
ACCOUNT,LAST-NAME,CITY,STATE;
When referencing by number, the first halfword of the list array is an
integer n that is followed by n single positive integers identifying unique
data item numbers. Example: 4 1 10 3 16 lists for the four data item
numbers 1, 10, 3, and 16.
The list specifies data items for which values are supplied in the buffer
array, and is saved internally by TurboIMAGE/XL as the current list for
the data set. The current list is unchanged until a different list is specified
in a subsequent call to DBGET, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE for the same access
path and data set.
Some special list constructs are allowed. These are described in Table 5-20.
and illustrated in the programs in chapter 6. List processing is a relatively
high overhead operation which can be shortened in subsequent calls by
using the asterisk construct to specify that the current list is to be used. Be
sure a current list exists before using the asterisk construct, or a null list
is assumed.
buffer
is the name of an array containing data item values to be added. The
values must be in the same order as their data item identifiers in the list
array. The number of halfwords for each value must correspond to the
number required by its type; for example, I2 values must be 2 halfwords
long.
Table 5-20. Special list Parameter Constructs
Construct
list Array Contents
Purpose
Empty
0; or 0
Empty
Numeric
0 (n, length of data item identifier list,
is zero)
Request no data transfer.
Asterisk
*; or *
Request procedure to use previous list
and apply it to same data set. This
construct saves TurboIMAGE/XL
processing time, especially if more than
one or two items are involved. If "*" is
used to define the list in the first call to
DBGET and DBPUT, TurboIMAGE/XL
treats it as a zero.
Chapter 5
or ; or
(0 must be ASCII.)
Request no data transfer.
223
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBPUT
Table 5-20. Special list Parameter Constructs
Construct
Commercial
At-Sign
NOTE:
list Array Contents
@; or @
Purpose
Request procedure to use all data items
of the data set in the order of their
occurrence in the entry.
indicates blank
Discussion for Master Data Sets
When adding entries to master data sets, the following rules apply:
• The data set must be a manual master.
• The key item must be referenced in the list array and its value in the buffer array must
be unique in relation to other entries in the master.
• Space must be available in the master set, or must be dynamically expandable to add
an entry.
• If dynamic capacity expansion parameters are specified for the master data, when the
master data set is almost full, expansion is done by the incremental amount. If the
expansion is successful, the new record is added to the database. If the expansion is not
successful, an error message is displayed, and the record is not added to the database. If
there is insufficient disc space to expand the data set to the full incremental amount,
DBPUT will perform a partial expansion up to the disc space available. DBPUT will
terminate if there is no available group or account disc space even if there is enough
system disc space. (The current capacity for a data set can be displayed by the SHOW
CAPACITY command in DBUTIL or the output buffer from DBINFO modes 202 and 205.)
• The order of data item values in the new entry is determined by the set definition in the
schema and not by the order of the items' occurrence in the list and buffer arrays.
• Values for data items not included in the list array are filled with binary zeros.
• The caller must have a lock on the data set or the database if the database is open in
access mode 1.
• DBPUT to an indexed master triggers a similar operation to indexed master's B-Tree
index file.
Discussion for Detail Data Sets
When adding entries to detail data sets, the following rules apply:
• The data set must have free space for the entry.
• If the database is opened in access mode 1, the caller must have a lock covering the
entry to be added.
• All search and sort items defined for the entry must be referenced in the list array.
• Each related manual master data set must contain a matching entry for the
corresponding search item value. If any automatic master does not have a matching
224
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBPUT
entry, it must have space to add one. This addition occurs automatically.
• The order of data item values in the new entry is determined by the set definition in the
schema and not by the order of the items' occurrence in the list and buffer arrays.
• Values for data items not included in the list array are filled with binary zeros.
• The new entry is linked into one chain for each search item, or path, defined according
to the search item value. It is linked to the end of chains having no sort items and into
its sorted position according to the collating sequence of the sort item values in the
chain. If two or more entries have the same sort item value, their position in the chain
is determined by the values of the items following the sort item in the entry. The
position of an entry on a sorted chain is determined by a backward search of the chain
beginning at the last entry. The position is maintained by logical pointers rather than
physical placement in the file.
• Proper Native Language collating sequence must be maintained for chain sorting.
• If dynamic capacity expansion is allowed for the detail data set, when the detail data
set reaches the end of the current allocation (that is, data set free count is zero),
expansion is requested by the incremental amount. If the expansion is successful, the
new record is added to the database. If the expansion is not successful, an error
message is displayed, and the record is not added to the database. If there is insufficient
disc space to expand the data set to the full incremental amount, DBPUT will perform a
partial expansion up to the disc space available. DBPUT will terminate if there is no
available group or account disc space even if there is enough system disc space. (The
current capacity for a data set can be displayed by the SHOW CAPACITY command in
DBUTIL or the output buffer from DBINFO modes 202 and 205.)
The record in which the new data entry is placed becomes the current record for the data
set. The forward and backward pointers reflect the new entry's position. Refer to the
description of status elements 7 through 10.
The record number of the new data entry is returned to status halfwords 3-4; and its
forward and backward pointers are returned in status halfwords 7-8 and 9-10, respectively.
If you intend to use these numbers for directed reads (see "Directed Access" in chapter 4),
save them because subsequent TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls can overwrite the status
area.
The execution of a call to DBPUT could require extensive resources depending on the
amount of chain maintenance required. For example, when an entry is added to a detail
data set, the new entry must be linked to all other related entries with the same key
values and to all of its related master entries. This operation could involve many blocks of
data. TurboIMAGE/XL prevents data block access conflicts with all other users and
ensures data integrity by applying a temporary lock on other processes until the call to
DBPUT completes. The timing of this temporary lock can be controlled with the PREFETCH
option of DBUTIL. Refer to "Coordinating Additions to a Database" in chapter 4 for
considerations when enabling or disabling this option.
Performance may be impacted by the number of entries incremented when DBPUT is used
to dynamically expand the detail data set. The number of disc extents used for the data set
file may also impact the performance of TurboIMAGE/XL.
If the process is logging, a call to DBPUT causes a log record to be written with such
Chapter 5
225
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBPUT
information as the time, date, user identification number, and a copy of the new record to
be added.
If DBPUT is called within a dynamic transaction, a log record is written after the physical
transaction has been successfully completed. If the intrinsic cannot be completed, an error
is returned. This error condition must be checked, and you must decide to use DBXUNDO,
DBXEND, or continue with the remainder of the dynamic transaction. DBXUNDO will abort the
entire dynamic transaction. DBXEND will terminate the dynamic transaction; the
modifications completed thus far within the transaction will remain in the database.
Table 5-21. DBPUT Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
226
-1
FOPEN failure.
-3
FREADDIR failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-5
FWRITEDIR failure.
-6
FWRITELABEL failure.
-167
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-199
Cannot end MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach options.
-11
Bad database reference.
-12
No lock covers the data entry to be added. (Occurs only if
database is open in access mode 1.)
-14
Illegal intrinsic in current access mode.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-23
Data set not writable.
-24
Operation not allowed on automatic master data set.
-31
Bad mode.
-51
Bad list length.
-52
Bad list or bad item.
-53
Missing search or sort item.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBPUT
Table 5-21. DBPUT Return Status Values
Communications
Errors:
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
Logging System
Failures:
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Exceptional
Conditions:
-193
DBU control block is full.
-196
DBB control block is full.
-212
Database corruption detected.
-264
XM write procedure returned 1030 or 1040.
-312
Internal error encountered while reading database block.
-314
Error while obtaining path information for set.
-322
Error returned by process list.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
16
Data set full.
(In the following messages, dataset# and FSERR # will be
replaced by the actual number.)
DBPUT cannot expand dataset#: dataset at maximum capacity.
DBPUT dataset# incomplete expansion: File system error #.
DBPUT cannot expand dataset#: Out of disc space (FSERR #).
18
Broken chain; forward and backward pointers not consistent.
43
Duplicate key item value.
62
DBG control block is full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
1nn
Missing chain head for path number nn.
2nn
Full chain for path number nn.
3nn
Internal error.
4nn
Full synonym chain.
Refer to appendix A for more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
227
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBUNLOCK
DBUNLOCK
INTRINSIC NUMBER 410
Relinquishes the locks acquired by all previous calls to DBLOCK. Redundant calls are
ignored. If the calling process has the same database opened multiple times, only those
locks put into effect for the specified access path are unlocked.
If DBUNLOCK is called when a dynamic transaction is active and a modify intrinsic (DBPUT,
DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE) has already been used in the dynamic transaction (that is, the
database is modified), the DBUNLOCK fails. You must check the error condition. You may use
DBERROR or DBEXPLAIN to display the error message. When a DBUNLOCK fails within the
dynamic transaction, dynamic intrinsic rollback allows the following choices:
• Use DBXEND to end the dynamic transaction.
• Continue with the remainder of the dynamic transaction taking into account that
DBUNLOCK failed and locks are still in place.
• Use DBXUNDO to rollback the entire dynamic transaction.
Syntax
DBUNLOCK,base,dset,mode,status
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used for the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN.
dset
is currently unused. Use the Not_Used_Parm or DUMMY variable as
recommended at the beginning of this chapter or any dset array used for
other procedures.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1.
status
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are:
228
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-22. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
Number of lock descriptors released by this call. Each data
set lock or database lock is counted as one descriptor.
3-4
Reserved for internal use.
5-10
Information about the procedure call and its results. Refer
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBUNLOCK
to "Library Procedure Error Messages" in appendix A for a
description of this information.
Table 5-22. DBUNLOCK Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Exceptional
Conditions:
-4
MPE file error nn returned by DBUNLOCK on FREADLABEL.
-6
MPE file error nn returned by DBUNLOCK on FWRITELABEL.
-167
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-199
Cannot end MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-215
XM error nn encountered when rolling out dynamic
transaction.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
-230
A DBUNLOCK inside a dynamic transaction is not allowed.
-231
During Dynamic Rollback recovery, internal procedure
failed; error nn.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Appendix A contains more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
229
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBUPDATE
DBUPDATE
INTRINSIC NUMBER 406
Modifies values of data items in the entry residing at the current record address of a
specified data set. To call DBUPDATE, you must open the database in access mode 1, 2, 3, or
4. The update is always carried out correctly against the latest version of the data,
regardless of modifications made by other users.
In database access mode 1, 3, or 4, you can use DBUPDATE to modify the values of detail
data set search and sort items if permitted by the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option
settings for the database and the current process. Master data set key item values cannot
be modified even if CIUPDATE is permitted.
Syntax
DBUPDATE,base,dset,mode,status,list,buffer
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about base ID.)
dset
is the name of an array containing the left-justified name of the data set to
be read, or is an integer referencing the data set by number. The data set
name can be up to 16 characters long. If shorter, it must be terminated by
a semicolon or a blank.
mode
must be an integer equal to 1.
If your database is enabled for third-party indexing (TPI), refer to your
vendor documentation for additional DBUPDATE mode information. The
section on DBUTIL in chapter 8 of this book has a brief description of the
TPI option.
status
230
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure operates
successfully, the status array contents are:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-23. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2
Length of the values in buffer (in halfwords).
3-10
Same word values set by preceding procedure call which
positioned the data set at the current entry. If critical item
update is permitted, the value contained in element 3
determines the message returned.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBUPDATE
list
is the name of an array containing an ordered set of data item identifiers,
either names or numbers. Values supplied in the buffer array replace the
values of data items occupying the same relative position in the list
array. The user class established when the database is opened must allow
at least read access to all the items included in the list array.
If the corresponding buffer array values are the same as the current data
item values, the list array can include data items to which the user has
read access only, such as, key, search and sort items. This feature permits
reading and updating with the same list array contents. Those items to
be updated must allow write access and cannot be key, search, or sort
items.
The list array can contain a left-justified set of data item names, separated
by commas and terminated by a semicolon or a blank. No embedded
blanks are allowed and no name can appear more than once.
When referencing by number, the first element of the list array is an
integer n followed by n unique data item numbers (one-halfword positive
integers).
The list not only specifies the data items to be updated immediately but
is saved internally by TurboIMAGE/XL as the current list for this data set.
The current list is unchanged until a different list is specified in a
subsequent call to DBGET, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE for the same access path
and data set.
Some special list constructs are allowed. These are described in Table 5-20.
with the DBPUT procedure. List processing is a relatively high overhead
operation that can be shortened substantially in subsequent calls by using
the asterisk construct to specify that the current list is to be used.
buffer
is the name of an array containing concatenated values to replace the
values of data items occupying the same relative position in the list array.
The number of halfwords for each value must correspond to the number of
halfwords required by its type multiplied by the sub-item count. Search
and sort item values can be included in this update list if their values will
not change.
Discussion
Before performing an update for a database opened in access mode 1, TurboIMAGE/XL
verifies that locks are in effect to cover the data entry both before and after it is modified.
The current record number, forward and backward pointers are unchanged. (Refer to the
description of status words 3 through 10.)
If the process is logging, a call to DBUPDATE causes a log record to be written with such
information as the time, date, user identification number, and a copy of both the old and
new data item values.
When DBUPDATE is called within a dynamic transaction, a log record is written after the
successful completion of the physical transaction. If the intrinsic cannot be completed, an
error is returned. This error condition must be checked, and you must decide to use
Chapter 5
231
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBUPDATE
DBXUNDO, DBXEND, or continue with the remainder of the dynamic transaction. DBXUNDO
will abort the entire transaction. DBXEND will terminate the dynamic transaction; the
modifications completed thus far within the transaction will remain in the database.
Table 5-23. DBUPDATE Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
Calling Errors:
Communications
Errors:
Logging System
Failures:
232
-1
FOPEN failure.
-3
FREADDIR failure.
-4
FREADLABEL failure.
-5
FWRITEDIR failure.
-167
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction: XM error.
-168
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-169
Invalid mode for XM attach options.
-175
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-176
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn.
-178
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: file system error nn.
-199
Cannot end MPE XL XM transaction: XM error nn.
-209
Invalid mode for XM detach options.
-11
Bad database reference.
-12
No locks cover the data entry to be updated. (Occurs only if
database is open in access mode 1.)
-14
Illegal intrinsic in current access mode.
-21
Bad data set reference.
-31
Bad mode.
-51
Bad list length.
-52
Bad list or bad item.
-82
CIUPDATE is set to DISALLOWED; cannot use critical item
update.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
-102
DSWRITE failure.
-106
Remote 3000 data inconsistent.
-107
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBUPDATE
Table 5-23. DBUPDATE Return Status Values
Exceptional
Conditions:
-193
DBU control block is full.
-264
Error while writing to TPI files.
-3nn
Internal error.
-312
Error while reading database file.
-314
Error while getting path information for set.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
17
No entry.
41
DBUPDATE attempted to modify value of critical item--key,
search or sort.
42
Read only item.
49
Illegal buffer address.
50
Buffer too small.
62
DBG full.
63
DBG disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
68
DBB disabled.
Appendix A contains more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
233
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXBEGIN
DBXBEGIN
INTRINSIC NUMBER 420
Designates the beginning of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls that are to be
regarded as a dynamic transaction of a single database or dynamic transaction spanning
multiple databases (DMDBX) for the purposes of logging and dynamic roll-back recovery. The
text parameter can be used to log user information to the log file. DBXBEGIN is used in
conjunction with DBXEND to begin and end a dynamic transaction.
Syntax
DBXBEGIN,{ base
baseidlist } ,te0xt,mode,status,textlen
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
baseidlist
is the name of the integer array containing the base IDs of the databases
which are involved in a DMDBX. Use baseidlist when calling DBXBEGIN
mode 3 (DMDBX). The layout of this array is shown here (each element is a
halfword or two bytes):
Element
Contents
1-2
Application program must set these two halfwords to
binary 0s before calling DBXBEGIN. After returning to the
calling program, these two halfwords contain the
transaction ID. Use this same baseidlist with the
corresponding DBXEND or DBXUNDO intrinsics.
3
Number of base IDs involved in the DMDBX. This must be a
number between 1 and 15 inclusive.
4-n
Base IDs of the databases involved in the DMDBX. Each
base ID occupies one half-word or 2 bytes and it is the first
halfword of the base parameter used to call
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics.
text
is the name of an array up to 256 halfwords long that contains user ASCII
or binary data to be written to the log file as part of the DBXBEGIN log
record. The text argument is used to assign each particular transaction a
distinct name. (Refer to "Discussion" below for more information.)
mode
is an integer indicating the transaction type:
Mode 1:
234
Indicates a dynamic transaction which spans only one
database.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXBEGIN
Mode 3:
Indicates a dynamic transaction spanning multiple
databases (DMDBX). If user logging is enabled for the
databases, mode 3 generates multiple entries in the log
file, one for each database.
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information. If the procedure executes successfully, the status array
contents are:
status
textlen
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-24. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
is an integer equal to the number of halfwords to be logged from the text
parameter, or is a negative integer equal to the number of bytes. Length
can be zero.
Discussion
DBXBEGIN is called to designate the beginning of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure
calls that are jointly considered a single dynamic transaction. The end of such a sequence
is designated by a matching call to DBXEND. DBXBEGIN cannot be called if another
transaction started by DBXBEGIN or DBBEGIN is active. The intrinsic does not begin a
dynamic transaction if AUTODEFER is enabled for the database.
Before including a database in a DMDBX, DBXBEGIN mode 3, DBCONTROL mode 7 needs to
have been done once for each of the databases in the DMDBX. DBCONTROL mode 7 remains
active until the database is closed or the application terminates. DBCONTROL mode 7 also
enables the database for deadlock detection. If deadlock is encountered, it returns an error
26, instead of triggering a process hang.
NOTE
DBXBEGIN is not allowed with DBOPEN mode 2 nor with AUTODEFER enabled.
Logging and DBRECOV are not needed with dynamic transactions, because the database can
be recovered dynamically. However, if the calling process is logging, DBXBEGIN causes a
record to be written to the log file to identify the beginning of a dynamic transaction.
Chapter 5
235
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXBEGIN
Table 5-24. DBXBEGIN Return Status Values
File System,
Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management
Failures:
-4
FREADLABEL error.
-228
DBXBEGIN encountered XM error nn when starting dynamic
transaction.
Calling Errors:
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad (unrecognized) DBXBEGIN mode: n.
-139
Invalid number of base IDs.
-140
Bad base ID list.
-151
Text length greater than 512 bytes.
-152
DBXBEGIN called while a transaction is in progress.
-217
DBOPEN mode n incompatible with Dynamic Rollback.
-218
Output deferred not compatible with DBX.
-219
Remote database access incompatible with Dynamic
Rollback.
-221
Cannot begin transaction when a dynamic transaction is
active.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
-242
Error in TurboGTX file operation.
Logging System
Failures:
-111
WRITELOG intrinsic failure.
Exceptional
Conditions:
67
DBU disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
236
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXEND
DBXEND
INTRINSIC NUMBER 421
Designates the end of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls regarded as a
dynamic transaction for the purposes of logging and dynamic roll-back recovery. The text
parameter can be used to log user information to the log file. DBXEND is used in conjunction
with DBXBEGIN to begin and end a dynamic transaction.
Syntax
DBXEND ,{ base
baseidlist } text,mode,status,textlen
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
baseidlist
is the name of the integer array containing the base IDs of the databases
which are involved in the DMDBX. Use the same baseidlist used with
DBXBEGIN when calling DBXEND mode 3 to end the DMDBX. The layout of
this array is same as in DBXBEGIN, except that the transaction ID is
already set in the first two halfwords by DBXBEGIN.
text
is an array up to 256 halfwords long that contains user ASCII or binary
data to be written to the log file as part of the DBXEND log record.
mode
must be a halfword equal to 1, 2 or 3.
status
Chapter 5
Mode 1:
End of dynamic transaction spanning one database.
Mode 2:
End of dynamic transaction spanning one database,
started with DBXBEGIN mode 1, and write contents of the
transaction management (XM) logging buffer in memory
to disk. If logging is enabled, the contents of the logging
buffer in memory will also be written to disk.
Mode 3:
Indicates the end of a DMDBX started with DBXBEGIN mode
3. If user logging is enabled for the databases, mode 3
generates multiple entries in the log file, one for each
database in the DMDBX, in order to mark the end of a
dynamic transaction.
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are as follows:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
237
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXEND
5-25. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
textlen
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
is an integer equal to the number of halfwords to be logged from the text
parameter, or is a negative integer equal to the number of bytes. Length
can be zero.
Discussion
DBXEND is called to designate the end of a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls
that are collectively considered a dynamic transaction. If an intrinsic fails within a
dynamic transaction, you may use DBXEND to end the dynamic transaction at that point.
The modifications completed until that point will remain in the database(s). The beginning
of such a sequence is designated by a previous call to DBXBEGIN. DBXEND cannot be called
to end a transaction started by DBBEGIN.
Logging and DBRECOV are not needed with dynamic transactions, because the database can
be recovered dynamically. However, if the calling process is logging, DBXEND causes a record
to be written to the log file to identify the end of a dynamic transaction.
If you call DBXEND with mode 2, DBXEND forces the XM log buffer (and user log buffer if the
process is logging) to be written from memory to disk before returning to the calling
process. Use this option only for critical transactions; too many mode 2 DBXEND calls can
degrade performance by causing a disk access each time a dynamic transaction ends.
DBXEND returns an error condition if it is called without a prior matching call to DBXBEGIN.
DBXEND is not necessary after a DBXUNDO.
238
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXEND
Table 5-25. DBXEND Return Status Values
File System, Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management Failures:
-213
DBXEND encountered XM error nn when ending
dynamic transaction.
Calling Errors:
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad (unrecognized) DBXEND mode: n.
-140
Bad baseid list.
-151
Text length greater than 512 bytes.
-219
Remote database access incompatible with Dynamic
Rollback.
-222
Only DBXUNDO allowed when a dynamic transaction
encounters an error.
-223
Cannot DBXEND or DBXUNDO a transaction which was
not active.
-237
Cannot DBXEND or DBXUNDO a DBBEGIN transaction.
-238
MDBX DBXBEGIN, DBXEND mode mismatch.
Logging System Failures:
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Exceptional Conditions:
67
DBU disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE
allowed.
-213
XM error on DBXEND.
-242
Error in TurboGTX file operation.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
Chapter 5
239
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXUNDO
DBXUNDO
INTRINSIC NUMBER 422
Rolls back the active sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls which are considered a
dynamic transaction.
Syntax
DBXUNDO ,{ base
baseidlist } ,text,mode,status,textlen
Parameters
base
is the name of the array used as the base parameter when opening the
database. The first element of the array must contain the base ID returned
by DBOPEN. (Refer to DBOPEN for more information about the base ID.)
baseidlist
Name of the integer array containing the base IDs of the databases which
are involved in the DMDBX. Use the same baseidlist parameter of
DBXBEGIN mode 3, when calling DBXUNDO to roll back a DMDBX.
text
is an array up to 256 halfwords long that contains user ASCII or binary
data to be written to the log file as part of the DBXUNDO log record.
mode
Must be a halfword equal to 1 when employing base as the base
parameter or 3 when using baseidlist with the matching DBXBEGIN
call.
status
240
Mode 1:
Dynamically roll back DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE
intrinsics which completed successfully since the matching
DBXBEGIN mode 1 call.
Mode 3:
Dynamically roll back DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE
intrinsics which completed successfully inside the DMDBX
to their respective databases since the matching
DBXBEGIN mode 3 call. If user logging is enabled for the
databases, mode 3 generates multiple entries in the log
file, one for each database, in order to mark the roll back of
the dynamic transaction.
is the name of an array of 10 halfwords in which TurboIMAGE/XL returns
status information about the procedure. If the procedure executes
successfully, the status array contents are as follows:
Element
Contents
1
If the procedure succeeds, the return status is 0. Table
5-26. describes the contents of element 1 when the
procedure does not succeed.
2-4
Unchanged from previous procedure call using this array.
Chapter 5
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXUNDO
5-10
Procedure call information. Refer to "Library Procedure
Error Messages" in appendix A for a description of this
information.
is an integer equal to the number of halfwords to be logged from the text
parameter, or is a negative integer equal to the number of bytes. Length
can be zero.
textlen
Discussion
DBXUNDO is called to dynamically roll back a sequence of TurboIMAGE/XL procedure
calls that completed successfully inside a dynamic transaction. The beginning of such a
sequence is designated by a previous call to DBXBEGIN. DBXUNDO cannot be called to roll
back a transaction started by DBBEGIN or if the database is enabled for AUTODEFER.
Logging and DBRECOV are not needed with dynamic transactions, because the database can
be recovered dynamically. However, if the calling process is logging, DBXUNDO causes a
record to be written to the log file to identify the transaction in the event it needs to be
recovered.
CAUTION
After DBXUNDO is called, the current record pointer, current path, current list,
and chronological order prior to the call to DBXBEGIN may not be restored.
DBXUNDO cannot be called to roll back a transaction started by DBBEGIN. DBXUNDO returns
an error condition if it is called without a prior matching call to DBXBEGIN. DBXEND is not
necessary after DBXUNDO. DBXUNDO rolls back the entire transaction, and then
transactions continue according to the logic of the program. In general, DBXUNDO or DBXEND
must be the last intrinsic for a dynamic transaction to be executed. It designates the end of
that dynamic transaction.
Chapter 5
241
TurboIMAGE/XL Library Procedures
DBXUNDO
Table 5-26. DBXUNDO Return Status Values
File System, Memory
Management, and
Transaction
Management Failures:
-215
XM error nn encountered when rolling out dynamic
transaction.
Calling Errors:
-11
Bad database reference.
-31
Bad (unrecognized) DBXUNDO mode n.
-140
Bad baseid list.
-151
Text length greater than 512 bytes.
-218
Output deferred is incompatible with Dynamic Rollback.
-219
Remote database access is incompatible with Dynamic
Rollback.
-223
Cannot DBXEND or DBXUNDO a transaction which was not
active.
-237
Cannot DBXEND or DBXUNDO a DBBEGIN transaction.
-238
MDBX DBXBEGIN, DBXEND mode mismatch.
-240
MDBX mode mismatch.
Logging System
Failures:
-111
WRITELOG failure.
Exceptional
Conditions:
-231
During DBX recovery, internal procedure failed; error nn.
-242
Error in TurboGTX file operation.
-332
Error in QLOCK table operation.
67
DBU disabled; potential damage; only DBCLOSE allowed.
Consult appendix A for more information about these conditions.
242
Chapter 5
Host Language Access
6 Host Language Access
You can access TurboIMAGE/XL from Compatibility Mode or Native Mode application
programs. Compilers are available on MPE/iX in one or both modes in BASIC, BBASIC, C,
COBOL, COBOL II, FORTRAN 66, FORTRAN 77, Pascal, RPG, and SPL. This chapter
focuses on specific programming languages for use with Native Mode only. For
Compatibility Mode examples, refer to the TurboIMAGE/V Database Management System
Reference Manual.
The first section of this chapter presents a model program written in pseudo code; the
subsequent sections discuss using TurboIMAGE/XL with specific programming languages.
NOTE
If you are an experienced TurboIMAGE/XL programmer, you can skip the
model program and go directly to the section containing the language in
which you write your application.
The following languages are presented in alphabetical order in this chapter:
• C
• COBOL II
• FORTRAN 77
• Pascal
• RPG
Each discussion includes:
• A presentation of any needed language-specific TurboIMAGE/XL information.
• An example showing some of the various model program routines written in the
particular language. Note that the COBOL II program example shows all of the
routines included in the model program.
The COBOL II program is a complete, executable program. The RPG program is also
executable, although it contains only a subset of the model program routines. The other
language examples show only portions of the model program but do demonstrate many of
the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures. All of the examples are designed to illustrate the most
simple and direct way TurboIMAGE/XL procedures are called. They are not intended as
examples of the best way to code the tasks that are illustrated; this will vary with the
application requirements and an individual programmer's coding methods.
A knowledge of the programming language is assumed. If you have questions about the
language itself, consult the appropriate language manual. For information on the
TurboIMAGE/XL data types to be used with these languages, refer to chapter 3.
NOTE
Chapter 6
In this manual a word is a 32-bit storage unit and a halfword is a 16-bit
storage unit. One byte is 8 bits.
243
Host Language Access
Model Program
Model Program
This section shows the model for the example programs that run against the ORDERS
database. You may wish to skip this section if you are an experienced TurboIMAGE/XL
programmer.
The main entry point for the application is a numbered list of functions that can be
performed by calling the various routines. Each routine is made up of one or more tasks
that are implemented through TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic calls. Each call contains one or
more parameters, some of which are used to pass their assigned values to
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics. These values determine the outcome of the intrinsic. Other
parameters are used to receive data and status information from TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics.
This model attempts to familiarize you with generic techniques for making
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic calls. Additionally, the model reiterates the importance of
defining TurboIMAGE/XL transactions for logging and recovery.
The conventions used throughout the model and the structure of the program are
explained immediately preceding the model program.
ORDERS Database Schema
Figure 6-1. contains the list file output printed when the schema of the sample ORDERS
database is processed. This schema is shown earlier in chapter 3, but is repeated here for
easy reference when reading through the model program. Use it to refer to the data set and
data item names used in the model program.
NOTE
Because the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this if the programming language you use does not
require uppercase characters.
Figure 6-1. ORDERS Database Schema Listing
PAGE 1
HEWLETT-PACKARD 30391C.05.00 TurboIMAGE/3000: DBSCHEMA TUE, JAN 11
$CONTROL LIST,LINES=46
$PAGE "SCHEMA FOR DATABASE ORDERS"
BEGIN DATABASE ORDERS;
PASSWORDS:
11 CREDIT;
12 BUYER;
13 SHIP-REC;
14 CLERK;
18 DO-ALL;
244
<<
<<
<<
<<
<<
CUSTOMER CREDIT OFFICE >>
BUYER - RESPONSIBLE FOR PARTS INVENTORY >>
WAREHOUSE - SHIPPING AND RECEIVING >>
SALES CLERK >>
FOR USE BY MGMT >>
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
Model Program
ITEMS:
ACCOUNT,
BINNUM,
CITY,
CREDIT-RATING,
DATE,
DELIV-DATE,
DESCRIPTION,
FIRST-NAME,
INITIAL,
LAST-NAME,
LASTSHIPDATE,
ONHANDQTY,
PRICE,
PURCH-DATE,
QUANTITY,
STATE,
STOCK#,
STREET-ADDRESS,
SUPPLIER,
TAX,
TOTAL,
UNIT-COST,
ZIP,
SETS:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
PAGE 2
ORDER FOR CONVENIENCE >>
<< CUSTOMER ACCOUNT NUMBER>>
<< STORAGE LOCATION OF PROD>>
<< CITY>>
<< CUSTOMER CREDIT RATING>>
<< DATE (YYMMDD)>>
<< DELIVERY DATE (YYMMDD)>>
<< PRODUCT DESCRIPTION>>
<< CUSTOMER GIVEN NAME>>
<< CUSTOMER MIDDLE INITIAL>>
<< CUSTOMER SURNAME>>
<< DATE LAST REC D(YYMMDD)>>
<< TOTAL PRODUCT INVENTORY>>
<< SELLING PRICE (PENNIES)>>
<< PURCHASE DATE (YYMMDD)>>
<< SALES PURCHASE QUANTITY>>
<< STATE -- 2 LETTER ABB>>
<< PRODUCT STOCK NUMBER>>
<< NUMBER AND STREET ADDRESS>>
<< SUPPLYING COMPANY NAME>>
<< SALES TAX (PENNIES)>>
<< TOTAL AMOUNT OF SALE (PENNIES)>>
<< UNIT COST OF PRODUCT>>
<< ZIP CODE>>
DATE-MASTER,AUTOMATIC,DISC1;
DATE(3);
365;
<<DATE MASTER>>
CUSTOMER,MANUAL(14/11,18),DISC1;
ACCOUNT(1),
LAST-NAME,
FIRST-NAME,
INITIAL,
STREET-ADDRESS,
CITY,
STATE,
ZIP,
CREDIT-RATING;
201;
<<CUSTOMER MASTER>>
SCHEMA FOR DATABASE ORDERS
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
Chapter 6
<< IN ALPHABETICAL
J2 ;
Z2 (/13);
X12 (12,13,14/11);
R2 (/14);
X6 ;
X6 (/14);
X20 ;
X10 (14/11);
U2 (14/11);
X16 (14/11);
X6 (12/ );
J2 (14/12);
J2 (14/);
X6 (11/14);
I (/14);
X2 (12,13,14/11);
U8 ;
X26 (12,13,14/11);
X16 (12,13/);
J2 (14/);
J2 (11,14/);
P8 (/12);
X6 (12,13,14/11);
PRODUCT,MANUAL(13,14/12,18),DISC1;<<PRODUCT MASTER>>
STOCK#(2),
DESCRIPTION;
300;
SUP-MASTER,MANUAL(13/12,18),DISC1; <<SUPPLIER MASTER>>
SUPPLIER(1),
STREET-ADDRESS,
CITY,
STATE,
ZIP;
201;
245
Host Language Access
Model Program
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
NAME:
ENTRY:
CAPACITY:
END.
DATA SET
NAME
DATE-MASTER
CUSTOMER
PRODUCT
SUP-MASTER
INVENTORY
SALES
INVENTORY,DETAIL(12,14/13,18),DISC2; <<INVENTORY DETAIL>>
STOCK#(PRODUCT),
ONHANDQTY,
SUPPLIER(!SUP-MASTER),
<<PRIMARY PATH>>
UNIT-COST,
LASTSHIPDATE(DATE-MASTER),
BINNUM;
1800, 450, 10%;
SALES,DETAIL(11/14,18),DISC2; <<SALES DETAIL>>
ACCOUNT(CUSTOMER(PURCH-DATE)),
STOCK#(PRODUCT),
QUANTITY,
PRICE,
TAX,
TOTAL,
PURCH-DATE(DATE-MASTER),
DELIV-DATE(DATE-MASTER);
1800, 504, 112;
TYPE
FLD
CNT
PT
CT
ENTR
LGTH
MED
REC
A 1
3
3
26
M 9
1
41
52
M 2
2
14
31
M 5
1
31
42
D 6
3
20
32
INITIAL CAPACITY: 450
D 8
4
19
35
INITIAL CAPACITY: 504
MAXIMUM
CAPACITY
BLK
FAC
BLK DISC
LGTH SPACE
365
19
496
201
7
365
300
16
497
201
12
505
1800
15
481
INCREMENT ENTRIES:
1008
14
491
INCREMENT ENTRIES:
TOTAL DISC SECTORS INCLUDING ROOT:
96
96
80
80
128
45
160
112
672
NUMBER OF ERROR MESSAGES: 0
ITEM NAME COUNT: 23
DATA SET COUNT: 6
ROOT LENGTH: 1176
BUFFER LENGTH: 505
TRAILER LENGTH: 256
ROOT FILE ORDERS CREATED.
Model Program Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout the model.
n
Refers to the option number assigned to each function
shown in the main body of the program.
Indicates an intentional blank.
ACCESS
246
Indicates the user access mode, or how the database was
opened for a particular routine. Note that for this model
the user access mode is always 1 (shared modify access).
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
Model Program
Buffer_Name is made up of
data item name
data item name
data item name
data item name
Indicates that a data structure is being used. Buffer_Name
is the name given to the structure, and data item name is
the name given to the individual parts of that record.
BEGIN MAIN LINE
Indicates the beginning of the main body of the program.
BEGIN ROUTINE
Indicates the beginning of a routine.
CALL procedure
Calls the specific TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic or internal
procedure to be used in this particular portion of the
routine, and specifies the values for each parameter.
CALLED BY
Refers to that portion of the program which called the
routine.
CALLS
Specifies the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic (library
procedure) or the internal program procedure called by the
routine. Note that the intrinsics are listed in the order in
which they are used in the routine; as a result, some may
be listed more than once. Note that the mode for each call
is also shown.
DISPLAY
Displays any specified data.
END LOOP
Indicates the end of an iterative block.
END MAIN LINE
Indicates the end of the main body of the program.
END ROUTINE
Indicates the end of a routine.
ERROR CHECKING
If error found, calls a routine that checks the contents of
the status array to determine what action to take.
EXIT LOOP condition
Indicates the condition which terminates an iteration.
Not_Used_Parm
Indicates a dummy parameter when a particular intrinsic
call does not use a specific parameter.
OBJECTIVE
States the purpose of each routine.
OBTAIN ←user input
Allows the user to enter the required information
interactively.
OBTAIN parameter←value
Indicates the assignment of a value to a parameter.
NOTE
For Pascal programmers only: Note that parameters cannot be
odd-byte aligned.
RETURN
Transfers control to the beginning of the iterative block in
which it is used.
START LOOP
Indicates the beginning of an iterative block.
Chapter 6
247
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
ORDERS Database Model Program
Main Body of Program
BEGIN MAIN LINE
*
OBJECTIVE: The main line contains the logic of this application.
*
It displays all functions, accepts a selection,
*
then calls the appropriate routines. The execution
*
of this program stops after the database is closed.
*
*
ACCESS:
Not applicable.
*
*
CALLED BY: Not applicable.
*
*
CALLS:
Open_The_Database
*
Get_Sales_For_Date
*
Get_A_Customer_Record
*
Get_A_Product_Record
*
List_All_Customers
*
Add_A_Product
*
Update_A_Customer
*
Delete_A_Product
*
Rewind_Customer_Set
*
Get_Data_Item_Info
*
Get_Error_And_Explain
*
Close_The_Database
START LOOP
DISPLAY the list of functions
The following illustration depicts one way of displaying the list of functions for this
program.
248
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
OBTAIN option
←
user input
If option = 1
Then CALL Open_The_Database
and RETURN
If option = 2
Then CALL Get_Sales_For_Date
and RETURN
If option = 3
Then CALL Get_A_Customer_Record
and RETURN
If option = 4
Then CALL Get_A_Product_Record
and RETURN
If option = 5
Then CALL List_All_Customers
and RETURN
If option = 6
Then CALL Add_A_Product
and RETURN
If option = 7
Then CALL Update_A_Customer
and RETURN
If option = 8
Then CALL Delete_A_Product
and RETURN
If option = 9
Then CALL Rewind_Customer_Set
and RETURN
If option = 10
Then CALL Get_Data_Item_Info
and RETURN
If option = 11
Then CALL Get_Error_And_Explain
and RETURN
If option = 12
Then CALL Close_The_Database
and RETURN
EXIT LOOP if option = 12
END LOOP
END MAIN LINE
Opening the Database
(USER SELECTS 1 TO OPEN THE DATABASE)
ROUTINE: Open_The_Database
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine opens the ORDERS database in mode 1
*
for this application.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access (SMA) with locking required
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBOPEN in mode 1 (SMA)
Chapter 6
249
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
BEGIN ROUTINE
OBTAIN DBname
← " ORDERS;"
OBTAIN Password
← "DO-ALL;"
CALL DBOPEN (DBname, Password, Mode1_SMA, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking)
(USER SELECTS 2 TO RETRIEVE SALES DATA)
ROUTINE: Get_Sales_For_Date
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine demonstrates chained access, forward chained
*
read, and data item locking.
*
*
The routine retrieves all sales records generated
*
on a particular purchase date. The value for date is
*
provided by the user and is used as the search item.
*
Due to concurrency issues, a data item lock is acquired
*
on all sales records identified by the date.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional)
*
DBFIND in mode 1 (chained access)
*
DBGET in mode 5 (forward chained read)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Sales_Buffer is made up of:
Account
Stock#
Quantity
Price
Tax
Total
Purch-Date
Deliv-Date
Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Type is made up of:
Length_Of_Descriptor
Data_Set_Of_Descriptor
Data_Item_Of_Descriptor
Relative_Operator_For_Data_Item
Value_For_Data_Item
Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Array_Type is made up of:
Number_Of_Elements
Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Type
The following illustration shows the layout for a lock descriptor array formats after the
actual values have been assigned. Note that the date is stored in YYMMDD format.
250
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
OBTAIN Number_Of_Elements
← 1
OBTAIN Length_Of_Descriptor
← 21
OBTAIN Data_Set_Of_Descriptor
← "SALES;"
OBTAIN Data_Item_Of_Descriptor
← "PURCH-DATE;"
OBTAIN Relative_Operator_For_Data_Item ← " ="
OBTAIN Value_For_Data_Item
← "881012"
OBTAIN List
← "@;"
OBTAIN Search_Item_Name
← "PURCH-DATE;"
OBTAIN Search_Item_Value
← "881012"
CALL DBLOCK (DBname, Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Array_Type,
Mode5_Unconditional, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBFIND (DBname, Sales_Detail, Mode1_Chained_Read,
Status, Search_Item_Name, Search_Item_Value)
ERROR CHECKING
START LOOP
CALL DBGET (DBname, Sales_Detail, Mode5_Forward, Status,
List, Sales_Buffer, Not_Used_Parm)
ERROR CHECKING
DISPLAY the Sales_Buffer
________________________________________________________________
Account Stock# Quantity Price Tax Total Purch-Date Deliv-Date
EXIT LOOP if end of chain
END LOOP
CALL DBUNLOCK (DBname, Lock_Desc_Array, Mode1_Unlock, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Chapter 6
251
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
Retrieving a Data Entry Using a Record Number
(USER SELECTS 3 TO RETRIEVE CUSTOMER DATA)
ROUTINE: Get_A_Customer_Record
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine demonstrates directed access by retrieving
*
a customer record with a known record number. Note
*
that the record number is first obtained using a DBGET
*
call, which in this case is a calculated mode 7.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBGET in mode 7 (calculated read)
*
DBGET in mode 4 (directed read)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Customer_Buffer is made up of:
Account
Last-Name
First-Name
Initial
Street-Address
City
State
Zip
Credit-Rating
OBTAIN List
← "@;"
OBTAIN Key_Item_Value ← 315578
CALL DBGET (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode7_Calculated, Status, List,
Customer_Buffer, Key_Item_Value)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN Record_Num ← Status [element 3]
CALL DBGET (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode4_Directed, Status, List,
Customer_Buffer, Record_Num)
ERROR CHECKING
DISPLAY the Customer_Buffer
____________________________________________________________________
Account Last-Name First-Name Initial Street-Address City. . .
END ROUTINE
Retrieving Master Data Using a Key Value
(USER SELECTS 4 TO RETRIEVE PRODUCT DATA)
ROUTINE:Get_A_Product_Record
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine demonstrates calculated access by
*
retrieving a product record from a master data
*
set based on a user-defined key item value.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
252
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
*
*
*
*
CALLED BY:
Main Line
CALLS:
DBGET in mode 7 (calculated read)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Product_Buffer is made up of:
Stock#
Description
OBTAIN List
← "@;"
OBTAIN Key_Item_Value ← "STK30040"
CALL DBGET (DBname, Product_Master, Mode7_Calculated, Status, List,
Product_Buffer, Key_Item_Value)
ERROR CHECKING
DISPLAY the Product_Buffer
____________________________________________________________________
Stock# Description
END ROUTINE
Retrieving Data Serially (with Set Level Locking)
(USER SELECTS 5 TO RETRIEVE CUSTOMER DATA)
ROUTINE: List_All_Customers
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine demonstrates serial access by listing
*
all customer records. For the sake of consistency,
*
the data set is locked for exclusive access,
*
then the data is read serially.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBLOCK in mode 3 (unconditional)
*
DBGET in mode 2 (forward read)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Customer_Buffer is made up of:
Account
Last-Name
First-Name
Initial
Street-Address
City
State
Zip
Credit-Rating
CALL DBLOCK (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode3_Unconditional, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN List ← "Account, Last-Name, First-Name, Initial;"
START LOOP<
CALL DBGET (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode2_Forward, Status, List,
Customer_Buffer, Not_Used_Parm)
Chapter 6
253
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
ERROR CHECKING
DISPLAY List
____________________________________________________________________
Account Last-Name First-Name Initial
EXIT LOOP if first word of Status buffer <gt; 0
END LOOP
CALL DBUNLOCK (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode1_Unlock, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Adding an Entry
(USER SELECTS 6 TO DO A PUT)
ROUTINE: Add_A_Product
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine adds one entry to the Product master data
*
set. After obtaining user input, the data set is locked
*
for exclusive access. A transaction starts, and
*
new values are added by a call to DBPUT. At the end
*
of the routine, the transaction is ended and locks
*
are released.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBLOCK in mode 3 (unconditional)
*
DBBEGIN in mode 1 (transaction begin)
*
DBPUT in mode 1 (put)
*
DBEND in mode 1 (transaction end)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Product_Buffer is made up of:
Stock#
Description
OBTAIN Stock#
← user input
OBTAIN Description ← user input
OBTAIN List
← "@;"
CALL DBLOCK (DBname, Product_Master, Mode3_Unconditional, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN Text
← "Add entry to Product set Begin
OBTAIN Textlen ← 16
"
CALL DBBEGIN (DBname, Text, Mode1_Xbegin, Status, TextLen)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBPUT (DBname, Product_Master, Mode1_Put, Status, List,
Product_Buffer)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN Text
← "Add entry to Product set End"
254
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
OBTAIN Textlen
← 14
CALL DBEND (DBname, Text, Mode1_Xend, Status, Textlen)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBUNLOCK (DBname, Product_Master, Mode1_Unlock, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Updating an Entry
(USER SELECTS 7 TO DO AN UPDATE)
ROUTINE: Update_A_Customer
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine updates a customer record interactively.
*
Updating is achieved by using the key item value to
*
locate the proper entry. It then displays the contents
*
to be updated.
*
*
To perform the actual update, a TurboIMAGE/XL
*
transaction is started. The entry is retrieved using
*
a re-read mode, and an item level lock is obtained using
*
the search value. A contents check of the new values
*
is done against the old values. If the contents have
*
changed, the user can choose to abort the process. Otherwise,
*
the transaction proceeds and the update takes place.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBGET in mode 7 (calculated)
*
DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional)
*
DBBEGIN in mode 1 (transaction begin)
*
DBGET in mode 1 (re-read)
*
DBUPDATE in mode 1 (update)
*
DBEND in mode 1 (transaction end)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Customer_Buffer,
Customer_Buffer_New, and
Customer_Buffer_Old are made up of:
Account
Last-Name
First-Name
Initial
Street-Address
City
State
Zip
Credit-Rating
Lock_Descriptor_Customer_Type is made up of:
Length_Of_Descriptor
Data_Set_Of_Descriptor
Data_Item_Of_Descriptor
Chapter 6
255
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
Relative_Operator_For_Data_Item
Value_For_Data_Item
Lock_Descriptor_Customer_Array_Type is made up of:
Number_Of_Elements
Lock_Descriptor_Customer_Type
OBTAIN List
← "@;"
OBTAIN Key_Item_Value ← user input
CALL DBGET (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode7_Calculated, Status, List,
Customer_Buffer, Key_Item_Value)
ERROR CHECKING
Customer_Buffer_Old ← Customer_Buffer
DISPLAY Customer_Buffer
OBTAIN Customer_Buffer_New
← user input
OBTAIN Number_Of_Elements
← 1
OBTAIN Length_Of_Descriptor
← 22
OBTAIN Data_Set_Of_Descriptor
← "CUSTOMER;"
OBTAIN Data_Item_Of_Descriptor
← "ACCOUNT;"
OBTAIN Relative_Operator_For_Data_Item
← " ="
OBTAIN Value_For_Data_Item
← Key_Item_Value
CALL DBLOCK (DBname, Lock_Descriptor_Customer_Array_Type,
Mode5_Unconditional, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN Text
← "Update entry on Customer set Begin
OBTAIN Textlen ← 18
"
CALL DBBEGIN (DBname, Text, Mode1_Xbegin, Status, Textlen)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBGET (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode1_Reread, Status, List,
Customer_Buffer, Not_Used_Parm)
ERROR CHECKING
If Customer_Buffer is the same as Customer_Buffer_Old
Then continue
Otherwise
Let the user know that the entry has been modified by
another user, end the transaction, and release the locks.
CALL DBUPDATE (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode1_Update, Status, List,
Customer_Buffer_New)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN Text
← "Update entry on Customer set End"
OBTAIN Textlen ← 16
CALL DBEND (DBname, Text, Mode1_Xend, Status, Textlen)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBUNLOCK (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode1_Unlock, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
256
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
Deleting an Entry
(USER SELECTS 8 TO DELETE AN ENTRY)
ROUTINE: Delete_A_Product
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine deletes an entry from the Product master
*
data set. The entry is specified by its key item value.
*
Identifying the entry and deleting it are preceded by
*
calls to DBLOCK and DBBEGIN to obtain locks and to start
*
a new transaction.
*
*
When the entry is located, the deletion of the record
*
at the current record pointer is done by a call to
*
DBDELETE.
*
*
The completion of a transaction is achieved by a call
*
to DBEND, and outstanding locks on this data set are
*
released by a call to DBUNLOCK.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBLOCK in mode 3 (unconditional)
*
DBBEGIN in mode 1 (transaction begin)
*
DBGET in mode 7 (calculated read)
*
DBDELETE in mode 1 (delete)
*
DBEND in mode 1 (transaction end)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
BEGIN ROUTINE
Product_Buffer is made up of:
Stock#
Description
CALL DBLOCK (DBname, Product_Master, Mode3_Unconditional, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN List
OBTAIN Text
OBTAIN Textlen
OBTAIN Key_Item_Value
CALL DBBEGIN (DBname, Text,
← "@;"
← "Delete entry from Product set Begin "
← 18
← "STK30040"
Mode1_Xbegin, Status, Textlen)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBGET (DBname, Product_Master, Mode7_Calculated, Status, List,
Product_Buffer, Key_Item_Value)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBDELETE (DBname, Product_Master, Mode1_Delete, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
OBTAIN Text
← "Delete entry from Product set End
OBTAIN Textlen ← 18
"
CALL DBEND (DBname, Text, Mode1_Xend, Status, Textlen)
ERROR CHECKING
CALL DBUNLOCK (DBname, Product_Master, Mode1_Unlock, Status)
Chapter 6
257
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Rewinding a Data Set
(USER SELECTS 9 TO REWIND A DATA SET)
ROUTINE: Rewind_Customer_Set
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine rewinds the customer data set by calling
*
DBCLOSE in mode 2.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBCLOSE in mode 2 (rewind)
BEGIN ROUTINE
CALL DBCLOSE (DBname, Customer_Master, Mode2_Rewind, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Obtaining Database Information
(USER SELECTS 10 TO OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT A DATA ITEM)
ROUTINE: Get_Data_Item_Info
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine obtains information about a data item
*
by calling DBINFO in mode 102.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBINFO in mode 102 (item access)
BEGIN ROUTINE
DBINFO_Buffer is made up of:
Data_Item_Name
Data_Type
Sub_Item_Length
Sub_Item_Count
OBTAIN Data_Item_Name ← "PURCH-DATE;"
CALL DBINFO (DBname, Data_Item_Name, Mode102_Item, Status, DBINFO_Buffer)
ERROR CHECKING
DISPLAY the DBINFO_Buffer
____________________________________________________________________
Data_Item_Name Data_Type Sub_Item_Length Sub_Item_Count
END ROUTINE
258
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
ORDERS Database Model Program
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations
(USER SELECTS 11 TO OBTAIN ERROR MESSAGES AND ADDITIONAL
ERROR-RELATED INFORMATION)
ROUTINE:Get_Error_And_Explain
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine generates an error message, corresponding
*
to the existing value in the first word of the status
*
parameter, by calling the DBERROR intrinsic.
*
Additionally, the routine generates a description
*
regarding the outstanding error message by calling the
*
DBEXPLAIN intrinsic.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBERROR
*
DBEXPLAIN
BEGIN ROUTINE
Error_Buffer is made up of:
Error_Message
CALL DBERROR (Status, Error_Buffer, Error_Length)
DISPLAY the Error_Buffer
____________________________________________________________________
Error_Message
CALL DBEXPLAIN (Status)
END ROUTINE
Closing the Database
(USER SELECTS 12 TO CLOSE THE DATABASE)
ROUTINE: Close_The_Database
*
OBJECTIVE: This routine closes the ORDERS database by calling
*
the DBCLOSE intrinsic.
*
*
ACCESS:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
*
CALLED BY: Main Line
*
*
CALLS:
DBCLOSE in mode 1 (close)
BEGIN ROUTINE
CALL DBCLOSE (DBname, Not_Used_Parm, Mode1_Close, Status)
ERROR CHECKING
END ROUTINE
Chapter 6
259
Host Language Access
C
C
This section shows, in C, portions of the model program presented at the beginning of this
chapter. The examples perform specific tasks to illustrate the use of TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics. The C example does not illustrate everything in the COBOL example. Some
blocks of code may be appropriate only if expanded to a full program.
Data items are defined at the beginning of the sample program. TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics must be declared for C as external procedures. The procedure name is identified
by the word "Intrinsic."
Type declarations declare names for data structure forms that will be used in allocating
variables. Variable declarations allocate the variables of the program. Variables are
defined with precise types or forms. C string literals are delimited with double quotation
marks (" "). Field and record names are separated with a dot (.) when referenced (for
example, base_name.baseid).
NOTE
Because the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this because C does not require that you use
uppercase characters.
For information on TurboIMAGE/XL data item lengths and type designators, refer to
chapter 3. Tables 3-2 and 3-3 show the TurboIMAGE/XL type designators, sub-item
lengths, and data types typically used to process them in C.
NOTE
All parameters must be on halfword boundaries.
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics
The following is part of the C example program; it defines type declarations, variable
declarations, and TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics.
#pragma list off
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#pragma list on
/*
Define all TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls that
*/
/*
will be used in your application program
*/
#pragma intrinsic DBBEGIN, DBEND, DBOPEN, DBCLOSE, DBGET, DBPUT,DBFIND, DBINFO
#pragma intrinsic DBEXPLAIN, DBERROR, DBDELETE, DBUPDATE, DBLOCK,DBUNLOCK
/*
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
260
Define all your TurboIMAGE/XL constants
End_Of_Chain 15
/* For DBGET Mode 5 */
End_Of_Data_Set 11
/* For DBGET Mode 2 */
No_Chain_Head 17
/* For DBFIND */
No_Such_Entry 17
/* For DBGET Mode 7 */
Entry_Has_No_Data 17 /* For DBGET Mode 4 */
*/
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
C
short
DBname[6]
Password[4]
Sales_D_Set[4];
char
*Purch_Date
*Equal_Op
*Item_List
= "PURCH-DATE;",
= " =",
="ACCOUNT,STOCK#,PRICE,TAX,TOTAL,PURCH-DATE;";
/*
Define all your global variables.
*/
struct
Database_Status_Type
{ short Condition;
short Length;
int
Record_Number;
int
Chain_Count;
int
Back_Pointer;
int
Forward_Pointer;
} Status;
struct
Sales_Data_Set_Type
{int
Account_Number;
char Stock_Number[8];
int
Price;
int
Tax;
int
Total;
char Purch_Date[6];
};
struct
Lock_Descriptor_Type
{short Num_Of_Elements;
short Length_Of_Descriptor;
char Data_Set_Of_Descriptor[16];
char Data_Item_Of_Descriptor[16];
char Relop_For_Data_Item[2];
char Value_For_Data_Item[6];
};
short Mode;
Main Body of Program
/*
Beginning of the main program
main()
{
/*
Initialize the database and set information
strcpy ((char *)DBname," ORDERS; ");
strcpy ((char *)Password,"DO-ALL;");
strcpy ((char *)Sales_D_Set,"SALES;");
*/
*/
Open_The_Database();
Get_Sales_For_Date();
exit (0);
}
Chapter 6
261
Host Language Access
C
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations
The following paragraph implements the GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN routine of the sample
program. This routine calls DBEXPLAIN and DBERROR. DBEXPLAIN interprets the contents
of the status parameter and prints a message on $STDLIST. DBERROR returns a message
in the ERROR-BUFFER, explaining the condition code returned by TurboIMAGE/XL. At
the end the routine, users can choose to abort or continue the execution of this program.
/*
Beginning of subroutines
*/
Get_Error_And_Explain()
{
/*
Access
:
Mode 1 - Shared Modified Access
The Orders database was opened in mode 1
Called by:
Calls
*/
short
short
int
:
Open_The_Database
Get_Sales_For_Date
Get_A_Product_Record
List_All_Customers
Add_A_Product
Update_A_Customer
Delete_A_Product
Rewind_Customer_Set
Get_Data_Item_Info
Close_The_Database
DBERROR
DBEXPLAIN
Error_Buffer[80];
Error_Length;
Answer;
DBERROR(&Status,Error_Buffer,&Error_Length);
printf("-------------------------------------------\n");
printf("%.*s\n",Error_Length, (char *)Error_Buffer);
printf("-------------------------------------------\n");
DBEXPLAIN(&Status);
Answer=0;
printf("---Enter, <1> to ABORT..., <2> to Continue >\n");
scanf("%d",&Answer);
if (Answer != 1)
printf(" Continuing .........\n");
else
exit(0);
}
262
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
C
Opening the Database
This paragraph implements the OPEN-THE-DATABASE routine of the sample program in C.
All required values, such as the password, are defined in the "static char" section of the
program. Note that the password DO-ALL establishes user class number 18. The password
DO-ALL is followed by a semicolon because it is less than eight characters long; a blank
can be substituted for the semicolon. OPEN-THE-DATABASE uses open mode 1, which is the
shared modify access mode. Error trapping is done by referring all non-zero conditions to
the GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN procedure.
Open_The_Database()
{
/*
ACCESS
:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access (SMA) with locking required
Called By:
Main Line
Calls
DBOPEN in mode 1 (SMA)
Get_Error_And_Explain
:
*/
Mode =1;
DBOPEN(DBname,Password,&Mode,&Status);
if (Status.Condition != 0)
Get_Error_And_Explain();
}
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking)
This paragraph implements the GET-SALES-FOR-DATE routine of the sample program.
Chain access is achieved using a call to DBFIND to determine the location of the first and
last entries in the chain. The search item used for this call is PURCH-DATE. An item level
lock is obtained on the value of the search item before the DBFIND call. After that,
individual chain items are retrieved, until the end of the chain is encountered. This is done
using multiple calls to the DBGET procedure.
The routine traps two exceptional conditions:
1. Status condition 17 from the DBFIND call, indicating that the chain head cannot be
located.
2. Status 15 from the DBGET call, indicating the end of the chain.
The status interpretation routine permits you to either abort or continue with the
execution after viewing all error messages.
Get_Sales_For_Date()
/*
ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
The Orders database was opened in mode 1
Called By: Main Line
Calls : DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional item level locking)
Chapter 6
263
Host Language Access
C
DBFIND in mode 1 (chained access)
DBGET in mode 5 (forward chained read)
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
Get_Error_And_Explain
*/
{
struct
struct
short
short
short
short
size_t
/*
Lock_Descriptor_Type
Sales_Data_Set_Type
Lock_Descriptor;
Sales_Buffer;
Search_Item_Value[3];
Search_Item_Name[8];
List[40];
Dummy;
srch_len = 6;
Prepare the lock descriptor buffer for obtaining item
level locks on the Sales data set.
*/
Lock_Descriptor.Num_Of_Elements
= 1;
Lock_Descriptor.Length_Of_Descriptor
= 21;
strcpy(Lock_Descriptor.Data_Set_Of_Descriptor,(char *)Sales_D_Set);
strcpy(Lock_Descriptor.Data_Item_Of_Descriptor,(char *)Purch_Date);
Lock_Descriptor.Relop_For_Data_Item[0] = Equal_Op[0];
Lock_Descriptor.Relop_For_Data_Item[1] = Equal_Op[1];
printf("Enter The Date of Purchase as (YYMMDD) >>> \n");
scanf("%6c", (char *)Search_Item_Value);
/* Request item level locks (mode 5) */
Mode = 5;
/* Append the user's input to the lock descriptor buffer */
strncpy(Lock_Descriptor.Value_For_Data_Item,
(char *)Search_Item_Value,srch_len);
/* Place item level locks on all entries identified by
the value in the Search_Item_Value
*/
DBLOCK(DBname,&Lock_Descriptor,&Mode,&Status);
if (Status.Condition != 0)
Get_Error_And_Explain();
Mode = 1;
strcpy((char *)Search_Item_Name, Purch_Date);
/* Locate the chain identified by the value in the
Search_Item_Value
*/
DBFIND(DBname,Sales_D_Set,&Mode,&Status,
Search_Item_Name, Search_Item_Value);
if (Status.Condition != 0)
{
if (Status.Condition == No_Chain_Head)
{
printf("***************************************\n");
printf("* No Such Entry in the Sales Dataset *\n");
printf("* Please Try Again.
*\n");
printf("***************************************\n");
}
else
Get_Error_And_Explain();
264
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
C
}
else
{
/* Start retrieving all records in the current chain */
printf("\n");
printf("Acct-Number Stock_Number
Price
Tax Total Purch-Date \n");
printf("---------------------------------------------------------\n");
Mode = 5;
strcpy((char *)List,Item_List);
while (Status.Condition != End_Of_Chain)
{
DBGET(DBname,Sales_D_Set,&Mode,&Status,List,&Sales_Buffer,
&Dummy);
if (Status.Condition == 0)
{
printf("\n");
printf("%11d",Sales_Buffer.Account_Number);
printf("%13.8s",Sales_Buffer.Stock_Number);
printf("%8d",Sales_Buffer.Price);
printf("%6d",Sales_Buffer.Tax);
printf("%7d",Sales_Buffer.Total);
printf("%12.6s",Sales_Buffer.Purch_Date);
}
else
{
if (Status.Condition == End_Of_Chain)
{
printf("\n\n\n");
printf ("----> End Of Chain.\n");
}
else
Get_Error_And_Explain();
}
} /* while */
} /* else */
/* Release all locks acquired at the beginning of the process */
Mode = 1;
= 1;
DBUNLOCK (DBname,Sales_D_Set,&Mode,&Status);
if (Status.Condition != 0)
Get_Error_And_Explain();
}
Chapter 6
265
Host Language Access
COBOL II
COBOL II
The model program presented at the beginning of this chapter is now shown here in
COBOL II. The program performs specific tasks to illustrate the use of TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics. Note that the code, although broken out by task, can be combined to make up a
complete, executable program.
Data items are defined at the beginning of the sample program. The parameters for the
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics are defined in the data division, and their values are defined
when the procedure is called or, in some cases, after it is executed.
The database identifier is described as follows:
01
DBNAME.
05 BASEID
05 BASENAME
05 TERMINATOR
PIC
PIC
PIC
X(02).
X(06).
X(02).
To access a database catalogued in a group other than the user's log-on group, the
database name must be followed by a period and the group name, for example,
ORDERS.GROUPX. If the database is in an account other than the user's account, the group
name must be followed by a period and the account name, for example,
ORDERS.GROUPX.ACCOUNT1.
Once the database has been opened and the database identifier has been moved to the first
halfword of the element (as shown in "Opening the Database"), it remains the same for all
subsequent calls illustrated.
The status record is defined in the same way for all tasks but its content varies depending
upon which procedure is called and the results of that procedure. The status record is
defined as follows:
01
STATUS1.
05 CONDITION
05 LENGTH1
05 RECORD-NUMBER
05 CHAIN-COUNT
05 BACK-POINTER
05 FORWARD-POINTER
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
COMP.
COMP.
COMP.
COMP.
COMP.
COMP.
NOT-USED-PARM appears as a reminder when a parameter is not used by a procedure
performing the task being illustrated. NOT-USED-PARM is defined in this program as
follows:
01
01
NOTE
NOT-USED-PARM-16
NOT-USED-PARM-32
PIC S9(4)
PIC S9(9)
COMP.
COMP.
Because the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this because COBOL II does not require that you use
uppercase characters.
For information on TurboIMAGE/XL data item lengths and type designators, refer to
266
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
chapter 3. Tables 3-2 and 3-3 show the TurboIMAGE/XL type designators, sub-item
lengths, and data types typically used to process them in COBOL II.
NOTE
All parameters must be on halfword boundaries.
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics
The following is part of the COBOL II program; it defines all the data items and records.
IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
PROGRAM-ID. RECEIVE.
DATE-COMPILED.
ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
CONFIGURATION SECTION.
SPECIAL-NAMES.
SYMBOLIC CHARACTERS CLEAR, SCREEN IS 28, 86.
DATA DIVISION.
WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
01 END-OF-CHAIN
PIC S9(4) COMP VALUE
01 END-OF-DATA-SET
PIC S9(4) COMP VALUE
01 NO-CHAIN-HEAD
PIC S9(4) COMP VALUE
01 NO-SUCH-ENTRY
PIC S9(4) COMP VALUE
01 ENTRY-HAS-NO-DATA
PIC S9(4) COMP VALUE
01 DBNAME.
05 BASEID
PIC X(02).
05 BASENAME
PIC X(06).
05 TERMINATOR
PIC X(02).
01 PASSWORD
PIC X(10).
01 STATUS1.
05 CONDITION
PIC S9(4) COMP.
05 LENGTH1
PIC S9(4) COMP.
05 RECORD-NUMBER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 CHAIN-COUNT
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 BACK-POINTER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 FORWARD-POINTER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
01 OPTION
PIC S9(4) COMP.
01 DB-MODE
PIC S9(4) COMP.
01 LIST
PIC X(80).
01 ERROR-BUFFER
PIC X(80).
01 ERROR-LENGTH
PIC S9(9) COMP.
01 ANSWER
PIC S9(4) COMP.
01 LOCK-DESCRIPTOR-ARRAY.
05 NUM-OF-ELEMENTS
PIC S9(4) COMP.
05 LOCK-DESCRIPTOR-SALES.
10 LENGTH-OF-DESCRIPTOR
PIC S9(4) COMP.
10 DATA-SET-OF-DESCRIPTOR
PIC X(16).
10 DATA-ITEM-OF-DESCRIPTOR
PIC X(16).
10 RELOP-FOR-DATA-ITEM
PIC X(02).
10 VALUE-FOR-DATA-ITEM
PIC X(6).
10 NUM-VALUE-FOR-DATA-ITEM REDEFINES
VALUE-FOR-DATA-ITEM
PIC S9(9) COMP.
01 SALES-DETAIL
PIC X(16).
01 SEARCH-ITEM-NAME
PIC X(16).
01 SEARCH-ITEM-VALUE
PIC X(6).
01 SALES-BUFFER.
Chapter 6
15.
11.
17.
17.
17.
267
Host Language Access
COBOL II
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
268
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 STOCK-NUMBER
PIC X(8).
05 QUANTITY
PIC S9(4) COMP.
05 PRICE
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 TAX
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 TOTAL
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 PURCH-DATE
PIC X(6).
05 DELIV-DATE
PIC X(6).
SALES-BUFFER-OUT.
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER-OUT
PIC Z(9)9.
05 STOCK-NUMBER-OUT
PIC B(7)X(8).
05 QUANTITY-OUT
PIC Z(5)9.
05 PRICE-OUT
PIC Z(6)9.
05 TAX-OUT
PIC Z(4)9.
05 TOTAL-OUT
PIC Z(6)9.
05 PURCH-DATE-OUT
PIC B(6)X(6).
05 DELIV-DATE-OUT
PIC B(6)X(6).
SALES-BUFFER-HEADER.
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER-HEAD
PIC X(13)
VALUE "Acct-Number ".
05 STOCK-NUMBER-HEAD
PIC X(15)
VALUE "Stock-Number
".
05 QUANTITY-HEAD
PIC X(05)
VALUE "QTY ".
05 PRICE-HEAD
PIC X(07)
VALUE "Price ".
05 TAX-HEAD
PIC X(06)
VALUE "Tax
".
05 TOTAL-HEAD
PIC X(07)
VALUE "Total ".
05 PURCH-DATE-HEAD
PIC X(13)
VALUE "Purch-Date
".
05 DELIV-DATE-HEAD
PIC X(14)
VALUE "Delive-Date
".
LINE-HEADER.
05
PIC X(40)
VALUE "----------------------------------------".
05
PIC X(38)
VALUE "--------------------------------------".
NOT-USED-PARM-16
PIC S9(4) COMP.
NOT-USED-PARM-32
PIC S9(9) COMP.
FOUND-VALUE
PIC S9(4) COMP.
88 NOT-FOUND
VALUE 0.
88 FOUND
VALUE 1.
CUSTOMER-MASTER
PIC X(16).
CUSTOMER-BUFFER.
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 LAST-NAME
PIC X(16).
05 FIRST-NAME
PIC X(10).
05 INITIAL1
PIC X(02).
05 STREET-ADDRESS
PIC X(26).
05 CITY
PIC X(12).
05 STATE
PIC X(02).
05 ZIP
PIC X(06).
05 CREDIT-RATING
PIC X(08).
CUSTOMER-BUFFER-OUT.
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER-CUST-OUT
PIC 9(6).
05 FIRST-NAME-CUST-OUT
PIC X(15) JUST RIGHT.
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
01
01
01
01
01
01
05
05 INITIAL1-CUST-OUT
05 LAST-NAME-CUST-OUT
KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT
KEY-ITEM-VALUE
LIST-NO-ITEM
SAVED-RECORD-NUMBER
PRODUCT-MASTER
PRODUCT-BUFFER.
05 STOCK-NUMBER
05 DESCRIPTION
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
PIC
X.
X(02).
X(16) JUST RIGHT.
X(08).
S9(9) COMP.
S9(9) COMP.
S9(9) COMP.
X(16).
PIC
PIC
X(08).
X(20).
01
DONE-VALUE
PIC S9(4) COMP.
88 NOT-DONE
VALUE 0.
88 DONE
VALUE 1.
01 TEXT1
PIC X(80).
01 TEXTLEN
PIC S9(9) COMP.
01 CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW.
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 LAST-NAME
PIC X(16).
05 FIRST-NAME
PIC X(10).
05 INITIAL1
PIC X(02).
05 STREET-ADDRESS
PIC X(26).
05 CITY
PIC X(12).
05 STATE
PIC X(02).
05 ZIP
PIC X(06).
05 CREDIT-RATING
PIC X(08).
01 CUSTOMER-BUFFER-OLD.
05 ACCOUNT-NUMBER
PIC S9(9) COMP.
05 LAST-NAME
PIC X(16).
05 FIRST-NAME
PIC X(10).
05 INITIAL1
PIC X(02).
05 STREET-ADDRESS
PIC X(26).
05 CITY
PIC X(12).
05 STATE
PIC X(02).
05 ZIP
PIC X(06).
05 CREDIT-RATING
PIC X(08).
01 DATA-ITEM-NAME-IN
PIC X(16).
01 M-102-BUFFER.
05 DATA-ITEM-NAME
PIC X(16).
05 DATA-ITEM-TYPE
PIC X(02).
05 DATA-ITEM-LENGTH
PIC S9(4) COMP.
05 DATA-ITEM-COUNT
PIC S9(4) COMP.
05 NOT-USED-ITEM
PIC S9(4) COMP.
01 MENU.
05 MENU-LINE-1
PIC X(62) VALUE
"--------------------------------------------------------------".
05 MENU-LINE-2
PIC X(62) VALUE
"|
|".
05 MENU-LINE-3
PIC X(62) VALUE
"|
Entry Point
|".
05 MENU-LINE-4
PIC X(62) VALUE
"|
O R D E R S
D A T A B A S E
|".
05 MENU-LINE-5
PIC X(62) VALUE
"|------------------------------------------------------------|".
05 MENU-LINE-6
PIC X(62) VALUE
"| 1)OPEN DATABASE
2)GET SALES RECORD FOR DATE
|".
05 MENU-LINE-7
PIC X(62) VALUE
Chapter 6
269
Host Language Access
COBOL II
"| 3)GET A CUSTOMER RECORD
4)GET A PRODUCT RECORD
|".
05 MENU-LINE-8
PIC X(62) VALUE
"| 5)LIST ALL CUSTOMERS
6)ADD A PRODUCT
|".
05 MENU-LINE-9
PIC X(62) VALUE
"| 7)UPDATE CUSTOMER RECORD
8)DELETE A PRODUCT
|".
05 MENU-LINE-10
PIC X(62) VALUE
"| 9)REWIND/RESET CUSTOMER SET 10)OBTAIN DATA ITEM INFORMATION|".
05 MENU-LINE-11
PIC X(62) VALUE
"| 11)GENERATE ERROR MESSAGES 12)CLOSE DATABASE
|".
Main Body of Program
PROCEDURE DIVISION.
10-MAIN-LINE.
PERFORM WITH TEST AFTER UNTIL OPTION = 12
PERFORM 20-DISPLAY-MENU
PERFORM 30-DO-ACTION
END-PERFORM
STOP RUN.
20-DISPLAY-MENU.
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-1
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-2
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-3
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-4
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-5
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-2
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-6
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-7
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-8
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-9
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-10
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-11
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-2
DISPLAY MENU-LINE-1
DISPLAY SPACE.
30-DO-ACTION.
DISPLAY "
Enter your option : "
WITH NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
EVALUATE OPTION
WHEN 1 PERFORM 100-OPEN-THE-DATABASE
WHEN 2 PERFORM 200-GET-SALES-FOR-DATE
WHEN 3 PERFORM 300-GET-A-CUSTOMER-RECORD
WHEN 4 PERFORM 400-GET-A-PRODUCT-RECORD
WHEN 5 PERFORM 500-LIST-ALL-CUSTOMERS
WHEN 6 PERFORM 600-ADD-A-PRODUCT
WHEN 7 PERFORM 700-UPDATE-A-CUSTOMER
WHEN 8 PERFORM 800-DELETE-A-PRODUCT
WHEN 9 PERFORM 900-REWIND-CUSTOMER-SET
WHEN 10 PERFORM 1000-GET-DATA-ITEM-INFO
WHEN 11 PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
WHEN 12 PERFORM 1200-CLOSE-THE-DATABASE
WHEN OTHER
DISPLAY "-----------------------------------"
DISPLAY "| Please enter an option between |"
DISPLAY "|
1 and 12.
|"
270
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
DISPLAY "-----------------------------------"
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue... "
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
END-EVALUATE.
Opening the Database
This paragraph implements the OPEN-THE-DATABASE routine of the sample program in
COBOL II. All required values, such as the password, are provided by the routine. Note
that the password DO-ALL establishes user class number 18. The password DO-ALL is
followed by a semicolon because it is less than eight characters long; a blank can be
substituted for the semicolon. OPEN-THE-DATABASE uses open mode 1, which is the shared
modify access mode. Error trapping is done by referring all non-zero conditions to
paragraph 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access (SMA) with locking required
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBOPEN in mode 1 (SMA)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
100-OPEN-THE-DATABASE.
MOVE SPACES TO BASEID
MOVE "ORDERS" TO BASENAME
MOVE ";" TO TERMINATOR
MOVE "DO-ALL;" TO PASSWORD
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBOPEN" USING DBNAME, PASSWORD, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF.
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking)
This paragraph implements the GET-SALES-FOR-DATE routine of the sample program.
Chain access is achieved using a call to DBFIND to determine the location of the first and
last entries in the chain. The search item used for this call is PURCH-DATE. An item level
lock is obtained on the value of the search item before the DBFIND call. After that,
individual chain items are retrieved, until the end of the chain is encountered. This is done
using multiple calls to the DBGET procedure.
The routine traps two exceptional conditions:
1. Status condition 17 from the DBFIND call, indicating that the chain head cannot be
located.
2. Status 15 from the DBGET call, indicating the end of the chain.
The status interpretation routine permits you to either abort or continue with the
execution after viewing all error messages.
Chapter 6
271
Host Language Access
COBOL II
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional item level locking)
*
DBFIND in mode 1 (chained access)
*
DBGET in mode 5 (forward chained read)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
200-GET-SALES-FOR-DATE.
MOVE 1 TO NUM-OF-ELEMENTS
MOVE 21 TO LENGTH-OF-DESCRIPTOR
MOVE "SALES;" TO DATA-SET-OF-DESCRIPTOR
MOVE "PURCH-DATE;" TO DATA-ITEM-OF-DESCRIPTOR
MOVE " =" TO RELOP-FOR-DATA-ITEM
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "
Enter The Date of Purchase as (YYMMDD) >>> "
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT SEARCH-ITEM-VALUE FREE
MOVE 5 TO DB-MODE
MOVE SEARCH-ITEM-VALUE TO VALUE-FOR-DATA-ITEM
CALL "DBLOCK" USING DBNAME, LOCK-DESCRIPTOR-ARRAY, DB-MODE,
STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE "SALES;" TO SALES-DETAIL
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "PURCH-DATE;" TO SEARCH-ITEM-NAME
CALL "DBFIND" USING DBNAME, SALES-DETAIL, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
SEARCH-ITEM-NAME, SEARCH-ITEM-VALUE
IF CONDITION = 0 THEN
SET FOUND TO TRUE
ELSE
SET NOT-FOUND TO TRUE
IF CONDITION = NO-CHAIN-HEAD THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY "* No Such Entry in the Sales Data Set. *"
DISPLAY "* Please Try Again.
*"
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue -------------->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
END-IF
IF FOUND THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY SALES-BUFFER-HEADER
DISPLAY LINE-HEADER
PERFORM WITH TEST BEFORE UNTIL CONDITION = END-OF-CHAIN
MOVE 5 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, SALES-DETAIL, DB-MODE,
STATUS1, LIST, SALES-BUFFER,
272
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
NOT-USED-PARM-16
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
IF CONDITION = END-OF-CHAIN THEN
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "-----> End of Chain, " NO ADVANCING
DISPLAY "Hit Enter to Continue" NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
END-IF
MOVE ACCOUNT-NUMBER OF SALES-BUFFER
TO ACCOUNT-NUMBER-OUT
MOVE STOCK-NUMBER OF SALES-BUFFER
TO STOCK-NUMBER-OUT
MOVE QUANTITY OF SALES-BUFFER TO QUANTITY-OUT
MOVE PRICE OF SALES-BUFFER TO PRICE-OUT
MOVE TAX OF SALES-BUFFER TO TAX-OUT
MOVE TOTAL OF SALES-BUFFER TO TOTAL-OUT
MOVE PURCH-DATE OF SALES-BUFFER TO PURCH-DATE-OUT
MOVE DELIV-DATE OF SALES-BUFFER TO DELIV-DATE-OUT
DISPLAY SALES-BUFFER-OUT
END-PERFORM
END-IF
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBUNLOCK" USING DBNAME, SALES-DETAIL, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF.
Retrieving a Data Entry Using a Record Number
This paragraph implements the GET-A-CUSTOMER-RECORD routine of the sample program.
The record number for the directed read is obtained by calling DBGET in mode 7. The saved
record number is then used as the argument value for a call to DBGET in mode 4. Status 17
indicates two different conditions for DBGET in modes 4 and 7, as follows:
1. For mode 7, this value means that no entry exists with the specified search value.
2. For mode 4, this value means that the entry at the specified record number is empty.
Note that for increased performance, the calculated access call is made with a list
parameter equal to zero.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBGET in mode 7 (calculated read)
*
DBGET in mode 4 (directed read)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
300-GET-A-CUSTOMER-RECORD.
SET NOT-FOUND TO TRUE
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "Enter the Account # For The Customer Master"
Chapter 6
273
Host Language Access
COBOL II
NO ADVANCING
DISPLAY "------------> " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT KEY-ITEM-VALUE FREE
MOVE 7 TO DB-MODE
MOVE ZERO TO LIST-NO-ITEM
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
MOVE "CUSTOMER;" TO CUSTOMER-MASTER
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
LIST-NO-ITEM, CUSTOMER-BUFFER,
KEY-ITEM-VALUE
IF CONDITION = 0 THEN
SET FOUND TO TRUE
MOVE RECORD-NUMBER TO SAVED-RECORD-NUMBER
ELSE
IF CONDITION = NO-SUCH-ENTRY THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
DISPLAY "* No Such Entry in the Customer Data Set."
DISPLAY "* Please Try Again.
"
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue ------------>"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
END-IF
IF FOUND THEN
MOVE 4 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
MOVE "CUSTOMER;" TO CUSTOMER-MASTER
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE,
STATUS1, LIST, CUSTOMER-BUFFER,
SAVED-RECORD-NUMBER
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
IF CONDITION = ENTRY-HAS-NO-DATA THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "***************************************"
DISPLAY "* Entry At The Specified Record Number "
DISPLAY "* Has Been Deleted.
"
DISPLAY "***************************************"
DISPLAY "Press Enter To Continue ------------->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
ELSE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
MOVE KEY-ITEM-VALUE TO ACCOUNT-NUMBER-CUST-OUT
DISPLAY "Data On Account# = ",
ACCOUNT-NUMBER-CUST-OUT
DISPLAY "****************************************"
274
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
DISPLAY "*
*"
MOVE ACCOUNT-NUMBER OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER TO
ACCOUNT-NUMBER-CUST-OUT
DISPLAY "* Account # = ", ACCOUNT-NUMBER-CUST-OUT
DISPLAY "* Last Name = ", LAST-NAME
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* First Name = ", FIRST-NAME
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Initial
= ", INITIAL1
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Address
= ", STREET-ADDRESS
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* City
= ", CITY OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* State
= ", STATE OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Zip
= ", ZIP OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue ------------------>"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
END-IF
END-IF.
Retrieving Master Data Using a Key Value
This paragraph implements the GET-PRODUCT-RECORD routine of the sample program. The
calculated access is achieved by a call to DBGET in mode 7. The exceptional condition in this
routine is indicated by status 17 for search values which do not have any corresponding
entries. Error trapping calls 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN upon detection of a
non-exceptional condition.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBGET in mode 7 (calculated read)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
400-GET-PRODUCT-RECORD.
SET NOT-FOUND TO TRUE
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "Enter the Stock # in the Product Master ----->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT FREE
MOVE 7 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
MOVE "PRODUCT;" TO PRODUCT-MASTER
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
LIST, PRODUCT-BUFFER,
KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT
IF CONDITION = 0 THEN
SET FOUND TO TRUE
ELSE
SET NOT-FOUND TO TRUE
IF CONDITION = NO-CHAIN-HEAD THEN
Chapter 6
275
Host Language Access
COBOL II
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
CLEAR SCREEN
"****************************************"
"* No Such Entry in the Product Data Set."
"* Please Try Again.
"
"****************************************"
"Press Enter To Continue ------------->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
END-IF
IF FOUND THEN
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Data On Stock # = ", KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT
DISPLAY "**********************************************"
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "* Stock # = ", STOCK-NUMBER OF PRODUCT-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Product = ", DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT-BUFFER
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "**********************************************"
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Press Enter To Continue ------------->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
END-IF.
Retrieving Data Serially (with Set Level Locking)
This paragraph implements the LIST-ALL-CUSTOMERS routine of the sample program.
Serial read of the Customer data set is achieved using multiple calls to the DBGET
procedure in mode 2. Using the list parameter the routine requests only the ACCOUNT,
FIRST-NAME, LAST-NAME, and INITIAL data items.
This procedure locks the Customer data set exclusively using a call to the DBLOCK
procedure in mode 3. The subsequent DBUNLOCK releases this lock. This is done when the
exceptional condition, end of data set, is encountered. Locking in a shared modify access
environment guarantees that no other user is modifying the data that you are reading.
Error trapping calls 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN for any non-exceptional condition
codes.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBLOCK in mode 3 (unconditional)
*
DBGET in mode 2 (forward read)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
500-LIST-ALL-CUSTOMERS.
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Acct-Number
N A M E"
DISPLAY "-------------------------------------------"
276
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
SET NOT-DONE TO TRUE
MOVE 3 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
MOVE "CUSTOMER;" TO CUSTOMER-MASTER
CALL "DBLOCK" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE 2 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "ACCOUNT,LAST-NAME,FIRST-NAME,INITIAL;" TO LIST
PERFORM WITH TEST AFTER UNTIL DONE
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE,
STATUS1, LIST, CUSTOMER-BUFFER,
NOT-USED-PARM-32
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
IF CONDITION = END-OF-DATA-SET THEN
SET DONE TO TRUE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "*End of Data Set"
DISPLAY "* Press Enter to Continue ------->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
ELSE
MOVE ACCOUNT-NUMBER OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER TO
ACCOUNT-NUMBER-CUST-OUT
MOVE FIRST-NAME OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER TO
FIRST-NAME-CUST-OUT
MOVE INITIAL1 OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER TO
INITIAL1-CUST-OUT
MOVE LAST-NAME OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER TO
LAST-NAME-CUST-OUT
DISPLAY CUSTOMER-BUFFER-OUT
END-IF
END-PERFORM
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBUNLOCK" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE,
STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF.
Adding an Entry
This paragraph implements the ADD-A-PRODUCT routine of the sample program to add a
data entry to the Product manual master data set. The add entry operation is achieved
using a call to DBPUT. Before this call, the paragraph initiates a TurboIMAGE/XL
transaction and locks the product master data set. The beginning and end of the
transaction are indicated by calls to DBBEGIN and DBEND. Locking is done exclusively at the
set level. For error trapping, 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN is called when any status
code is not equal to zero.
Note that the list contains an at-sign (@) which requests TurboIMAGE/XL to return all
fields of the data set in the order defined in the schema. Other valid lists are the null list
Chapter 6
277
Host Language Access
COBOL II
('0;') which returns no data, and same list ('*;') which returns the same fields listed in the
previous call.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBLOCK in mode 3 (unconditional)
*
DBBEGIN in mode 1 (transaction begin)
*
DBPUT in mode 1 (put)
*
DBEND in mode 1 (transaction end)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
600-ADD-A-PRODUCT.
MOVE 0 TO ANSWER
PERFORM WITH TEST BEFORE UNTIL ANSWER = 1
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "
Please Provide the Following Values "
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "* Stock # = " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT STOCK-NUMBER OF PRODUCT-BUFFER FREE
DISPLAY "* Product = " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT-BUFFER FREE
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Enter, <1> to Continue, <2> to Retry >"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT ANSWER FREE
END-PERFORM
MOVE "PRODUCT;" TO PRODUCT-MASTER
MOVE 3 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBLOCK" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE "Add Entry to Product Set Begin" TO TEXT1
MOVE 16 TO TEXTLEN
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBBEGIN" USING DBNAME, TEXT1, DB-MODE, STATUS1, TEXTLEN
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
CALL "DBPUT" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
LIST, PRODUCT-BUFFER
IF CONDITION = 0 THEN
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "*************************************"
DISPLAY "Stock ", STOCK-NUMBER OF PRODUCT-BUFFER,
"Was Successfully Added to the Product Set"
DISPLAY "*************************************"
DISPLAY "Enter to Continue ..............<>"
278
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE "Add Entry to Product Set End" TO TEXT1
MOVE 14 TO TEXTLEN
CALL "DBEND" USING DBNAME, TEXT1, DB-MODE, STATUS1, TEXTLEN
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
CALL "DBUNLOCK" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF.
Updating an Entry
This paragraph implements the UPDATE-A-CUSTOMER routine of the sample program. The
update process takes place in two phases.
In the first phase, the requested entry is located and retrieved. This is achieved by a call to
DBGET in mode 7. Then, the user provides the new values.
In the second phase, the recently modified values replace the existing entry. This is
implemented using a call to DBUPDATE. Before this call, the paragraph starts a
TurboIMAGE/XL transaction bracketed by calls for locking the volatile item. To retrieve
the entry, DBGET is called in mode 1. This call retrieves the entry located in the previous
stage.
The paragraph must confirm that values retrieved in the first stage are still residing in the
same entry. This should be done before the actual update. If the contents of the buffers are
the same, the paragraph can continue with the operation. Otherwise, it should end the
transaction and release the locks.
The exceptional condition for this paragraph is status 17. This indicates that the requested
entry does not exist or is empty.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBGET in mode 7 (calculated)
*
DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional)
*
DBBEGIN in mode 1 (transaction begin)
*
DBGET in mode 1 (re-read)
*
DBUPDATE in mode 1 (update)
*
DBEND in mode 1 (transaction end)
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
700-UPDATE-A-CUSTOMER.
SET NOT-FOUND TO TRUE
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "Enter the Account # for The Customer Master"
NO ADVANCING
DISPLAY "---------> " NO ADVANCING
Chapter 6
279
Host Language Access
COBOL II
ACCEPT KEY-ITEM-VALUE FREE
MOVE 7 TO DB-MODE
MOVE 0 TO LIST-NO-ITEM
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
MOVE "CUSTOMER;" TO CUSTOMER-MASTER
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
LIST, CUSTOMER-BUFFER, KEY-ITEM-VALUE
IF CONDITION = 0 THEN
SET FOUND TO TRUE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Data On Account # = ", KEY-ITEM-VALUE
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "* Account # = ", ACCOUNT-NUMBER
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Last Name = ", LAST-NAME
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* First Name = ", FIRST-NAME
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Initial
= ", INITIAL1
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Address
= ", STREET-ADDRESS
OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* City
= ", CITY OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* State
= ", STATE OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "* Zip
= ", ZIP OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue ------------------>"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
ELSE
IF CONDITION = NO-SUCH-ENTRY THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
DISPLAY "* No Such Entry in the Customer Data Set."
DISPLAY "* Please Try Again.
"
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
DISPLAY "Enter to Continue --------->" NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT ANSWER FREE
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
END-IF
IF FOUND THEN
MOVE CORRESPONDING CUSTOMER-BUFFER TO CUSTOMER-BUFFER-OLD
MOVE 0 TO ANSWER
PERFORM WITH TEST BEFORE UNTIL ANSWER = 1
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Provide New Values For the Following"
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY "*
*"
280
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
DISPLAY "* Account #
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT ACCOUNT-NUMBER OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* Last Name
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT LAST-NAME OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* First Name = " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT FIRST-NAME OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* Initial
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT INITIAL1 OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* Address
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT STREET-ADDRESS OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* City
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT CITY OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* State
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT STATE OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "* Zip
= " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT ZIP OF CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW FREE
DISPLAY "*
*"
DISPLAY "****************************************"
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "Enter <1> to Continue, <2> to Retry >"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT ANSWER FREE
IF ANSWER = 2 THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
END-IF
END-PERFORM
MOVE 1 TO NUM-OF-ELEMENTS
MOVE 22 TO LENGTH-OF-DESCRIPTOR
MOVE "CUSTOMER;" TO DATA-SET-OF-DESCRIPTOR
MOVE "ACCOUNT;" TO DATA-ITEM-OF-DESCRIPTOR
MOVE " =" TO RELOP-FOR-DATA-ITEM
MOVE KEY-ITEM-VALUE TO NUM-VALUE-FOR-DATA-ITEM
MOVE 5 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBLOCK" USING DBNAME, LOCK-DESCRIPTOR-ARRAY, DB-MODE,
STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE "Update Entry In Customer Set Begin" TO TEXT1
MOVE 17 TO TEXTLEN
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBBEGIN" USING DBNAME, TEXT1, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
TEXTLEN
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE,
STATUS1, LIST, CUSTOMER-BUFFER,
NOT-USED-PARM-32
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
ELSE
IF CUSTOMER-BUFFER = CUSTOMER-BUFFER-OLD THEN
CALL "DBUPDATE" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER,
DB-MODE, STATUS1, LIST,
CUSTOMER-BUFFER-NEW
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
Chapter 6
281
Host Language Access
COBOL II
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
ELSE
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "***************************************"
DISPLAY "**
During Terminal Interaction
*"
DISPLAY "** Data On Account Number ",
KEY-ITEM-VALUE
DISPLAY "**
Has Been Modified."
DISPLAY "**
*"
DISPLAY "**
Please Try Again.
*"
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue ---------->"
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE
END-IF
END-IF
MOVE "Update Entry On Customer Set End" TO TEXT1
MOVE 16 TO TEXTLEN
CALL "DBEND" USING DBNAME, TEXT1, DB-MODE, STATUS1, TEXTLEN
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
CALL "DBUNLOCK" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE,
STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
END-IF.
Deleting an Entry
This paragraph implements the DELETE-A-PRODUCT routine of the sample program. The
delete operation is achieved by a call to DBDELETE. This call is preceded by a call to DBGET
in mode 7, which locates the entry for the delete operation. These calls are bracketed by
calls to DBBEGIN and DBEND, which designate the beginning and the end of a
TurboIMAGE/XL transaction.
Using calls to DBLOCK and DBUNLOCK in mode 3, the required resources are locked before
the start of the transaction and released after its end.
Exceptional condition code 17 is trapped after the DBGET call. This indicates that the
requested entry does not exist in the Product data set.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBLOCK in mode 3 (unconditional)
*
DBBEGIN in mode 1 (transaction begin)
*
DBGET in mode 7 (calculated read)
*
DBDELETE in mode 1 (delete)
*
DBEND in mode 1 (transaction end)
282
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
*
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
800-DELETE-A-PRODUCT.
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "Enter the stock # in the Product Master ----> "
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT FREE
MOVE 3 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "@;" TO LIST
MOVE "PRODUCT;" TO PRODUCT-MASTER
CALL "DBLOCK" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "Delete Entry From The Product Set Begin " TO TEXT1
MOVE 18 TO TEXTLEN
CALL "DBBEGIN" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
TEXTLEN
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE 7 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBGET" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
LIST, PRODUCT-BUFFER,
KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
IF CONDITION = NO-CHAIN-HEAD THEN
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
DISPLAY "* No Such Entry in the Product Data Set. *"
DISPLAY "* Please Try Again.
*"
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
ELSE
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
ELSE
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBDELETE" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE,
STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
ELSE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
DISPLAY "Product Record ", KEY-ITEM-VALUE-PRODUCT
NO ADVANCING
DISPLAY "Was Successfully Deleted."
DISPLAY "*****************************************"
END-IF
END-IF
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
MOVE "Delete Entry From the Product Set End" TO TEXT1
MOVE 18 TO TEXTLEN
CALL "DBEND" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
Chapter 6
283
Host Language Access
COBOL II
TEXTLEN
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBUNLOCK" USING DBNAME, PRODUCT-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue -----------> " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE.
Rewinding a Data Set
This paragraph implements the REWIND-CUSTOMER-SET routine of the sample program.
Resetting the data set pointer is achieved by a call to DBCLOSE in mode 2. No special
condition is trapped.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBCLOSE in mode 2 (rewind)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
900-REWIND-CUSTOMER-SET.
MOVE "CUSTOMER;" TO CUSTOMER-MASTER
MOVE 2 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBCLOSE" USING DBNAME, CUSTOMER-MASTER, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF.
Obtaining Database Information
This paragraph implements the GET-DATA-ITEM-INFO routine of the sample program. This
information is obtained using a call to DBINFO in mode 102. The data item name passed
through the DBINFO buffer identifies the data item under inquiry.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBINFO in mode 102 (item access)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
1000-GET-DATA-ITEM-INFO.
DISPLAY CLEAR SCREEN
DISPLAY "Enter your data item name------> " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT DATA-ITEM-NAME-IN FREE
MOVE 102 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBINFO" USING DBNAME, DATA-ITEM-NAME-IN, DB-MODE, STATUS1,
M-102-BUFFER
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF
DISPLAY SPACE
284
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
COBOL II
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY SPACE
DISPLAY DATA-ITEM-NAME-IN, " Data Item"
DISPLAY "----------------------------------------"
DISPLAY "Data Item Name = ", DATA-ITEM-NAME
DISPLAY "Data Item Type = ", DATA-ITEM-TYPE
DISPLAY "Data Item Length = ", DATA-ITEM-LENGTH
DISPLAY "Data Item Count = ", DATA-ITEM-COUNT
DISPLAY "----------------------------------------"
DISPLAY "Press Enter to Continue... " NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT OPTION FREE.
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations
The following paragraph implements the GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN routine of the sample
program. This paragraph calls DBEXPLAIN and DBERROR. DBEXPLAIN interprets the
contents of the Status parameter and prints a message on $STDLIST. DBERROR returns a
message in the ERROR-BUFFER, explaining the condition code returned by
TurboIMAGE/XL. At the end the paragraph, users can choose to abort or continue the
execution of this program.
******************************************************************
* Access
:
Mode 1 - Shared Modified Access
*
* Called by:
100-OPEN-THE-DATABASE
*
200-GET-SALES-FOR-DATE
*
300-GET-A-CUSTOMER-RECORD
*
400-GET-PRODUCT-RECORD
*
500-LIST-ALL-CUSTOMERS
*
600-ADD-A-PROUDCT
*
700-UPDATE-A-CUSTOMER
*
800-DELETE-A-PRODUCT
*
900-REWIND-CUSTOMER-SET
*
1000-GET-DATA-ITEM-INFO
*
1200-CLOSE-THE-DATABASE
*
* Calls
:
DBERROR
*
DBEXPLAIN
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN.
MOVE SPACES TO ERROR-BUFFER
CALL "DBERROR" USING STATUS1, ERROR-BUFFER, ERROR-LENGTH
DISPLAY "---------------------------------------------------"
DISPLAY ERROR-BUFFER
DISPLAY "---------------------------------------------------"
DISPLAY SPACE
CALL "DBEXPLAIN" USING STATUS1
MOVE ZERO TO ANSWER
DISPLAY "---Enter, >1< to Abort..., <2> to Continue > "
NO ADVANCING
ACCEPT ANSWER FREE
IF ANSWER NOT = 1 THEN
DISPLAY "Continuing....."
ELSE
STOP RUN
END-IF.
Chapter 6
285
Host Language Access
COBOL II
Closing the Database
This paragraph implements the CLOSE-THE-DATABASE routine of the sample program.
Closing the database is achieved by a call to DBCLOSE in mode 1. Error handling is done by
referring all non-zero returned conditions to the 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
paragraph.
******************************************************************
* ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
*
* Called By: 30-DO-ACTION
*
* Calls
: DBCLOSE in mode 1 (close)
*
1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
1200-CLOSE-THE-DATABASE.
MOVE 1 TO DB-MODE
CALL "DBCLOSE" USING DBNAME, PASSWORD, DB-MODE, STATUS1
IF CONDITION NOT = 0 THEN
PERFORM 1100-GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN
END-IF.
286
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
FORTRAN 77
Portions of the model program presented at the beginning of this chapter are now shown
here in FORTRAN 77. The examples perform specific tasks to illustrate the use of
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics.
Data items are defined at the beginning of the sample program. Explicit declaration of
intrinsics is not required. Other global variables in this program are placed in a COMMON
file.
NOTE
Because the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this if FORTRAN 77 does not require that you use
uppercase characters.
For information on TurboIMAGE/XL data item lengths and type designators, refer to
chapter 3. Tables 3-2 and 3-3 show the TurboIMAGE/XL type designators, sub-item
lengths, and data types typically used to process them in Pascal.
NOTE
All parameters must be on halfword boundaries.
Because FORTRAN 77 requires that the parameters be on halfword boundaries, they must
be integer arrays equivalent to character strings if necessary.
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics
The following declarations are placed in a FORTRAN 77 COMMON file. This file enables
different subroutines to import all necessary declarations. In this program, the COMMON
file is called comon1 and is included with the directive $Include 'comon1'.
C**** TurboIMAGE/XL's Global Declaration
C**** Set up for the Database name parameter.
Integer*2 DBname(10)
Character BaseName*16
Equivalence(DBname(1),BaseName)
Common /Database_Name_Type / DBname
C**** Set up for the Password parameter.
Character Pass_Word*10
Integer*2 Password(5)
Equivalence (Password(1),Pass_Word)
Common /Database_password_type/ password
C**** Set up for the Mode parameter.
Integer In,Out,Not_Used_Parm
Integer*2 Mode
Integer*2 Mode1_SMA, Mode5_Unconditional, Mode1_Chained_Read
Chapter 6
287
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
Integer*2 Mode5_Forward, Mode1_Unlock
C**** Set up for the Status parameter.
Integer*2 Status(10)
Integer*2 Condition
Integer*2 Length
Integer*4 Record_Number
Integer*4 Chain_Count
Integer*4 Back_Pointer
Integer*4 Forward_Pointer
Equivalence(Status(1),Condition),(Status(2),Length)
Equivalence(Status(3),Record_Number),(Status(5),Chain_Count)
Equivalence(Status(7),Back_Pointer),(Status(9),Forward_Pointer)
Common /Database_Status_Type/ Status
C**** Set up for the Lock_Descriptor_Array of the Sales data set.
Integer*2 Lock_Descriptor_Array(22)
Integer*2 Length_Of_Descriptor, Num_Of_Elements
Character Data_Set_Of_Descriptor*16
Character Data_Item_Of_Descriptor*16
Character Relative_Operator*2
Character Value_For_Data_Item*6
Equivalence (Lock_Descriptor_Array(1), Num_Of_Elements)
Equivalence (Lock_Descriptor_Array(2), Length_Of_Descriptor)
Equivalence (Lock_Descriptor_Array(3), Data_Set_Of_Descriptor)
Equivalence (Lock_Descriptor_Array(11),Data_Item_Of_Descriptor)
Equivalence (Lock_Descriptor_Array(19),Relative_Operator)
Equivalence (Lock_Descriptor_Array(20),Value_For_Data_Item)
C**** Set up for the Sales_Buffer of the Sales data set.
Integer*2
Integer*4
Character
Integer*2
Integer*4
Integer*4
Integer*4
Character
Character
Sales_Buffer(19)
Account_Number
Stock_Number*8
Quantity
Price
Tax
Total
Purch_Date*6
Deliv_Date*6
Equivalence
Equivalence
Equivalence
Equivalence
Equivalence
Equivalence
Equivalence
Equivalence
288
(Sales_Buffer(1), Account_Number)
(Sales_Buffer(3), Stock_Number)
(Sales_Buffer(7), Quantity)
(Sales_Buffer(8), Price)
(Sales_Buffer(10),Tax)
(Sales_Buffer(12),Total)
(Sales_Buffer(14),Purch_Date)
(Sales_Buffer(17),Deliv_Date)
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
Main Body of Program
In the following portion of the program, the $hp3000_16$ compiler directive allows the
FORTRAN 77 compiler to change the data alignment from a four-byte limit to a two-byte
limit. For example, the non-alignment caused by the Quantity field in the Sales data set
can be resolved using this directive.
$hp3000_16$
Program Fortran_For_TurboIMAGEXL
C
C
This area will contain the main line for the
C
FORTRAN 77 example.
C
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations
The following procedure implements the Get_Error_And_Explain routine of the sample
program. In this procedure, DBEXPLAIN and DBERROR are called using FORTRAN 77.
DBEXPLAIN interprets the contents of the status parameter and prints a message on
$STDLIST. DBERROR returns a message in ERROR_Buffer, explaining the condition code
returned by TurboIMAGE/XL. At the end of the procedure, users can choose to abort or
continue the execution of this program. Note that aborting a process from within a
transaction would result in an incomplete transaction. It is good programming practice to
end your transaction, release your locks, and close any open database(s) before aborting
your process.
C***********************************************************************
Subroutine Get_Error_And_Explain
C
Access
: Mode 1 - Shared Modified Access
C
C
C
Called By : Open_The_Database
C
Get_Sales_For_Date
C
Get_A_Customer_Record
C
Get_A_Product_Record
C
List_All_Customers
C
Add_A_Product
C
Update_A_Customer
C
Delete_A_Product
C
Rewind_Customer_Set
C
Get_Data_Item_Info
C
Close_The_Database
C
C
C
Calls
: DBERROR
C
DBEXPLAIN
C
$list Off
$Include 'comon1'
$list On
C
Prepare the error buffer for calls to DBERROR
C
Character Error_Buffer_Text*80
Chapter 6
289
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
Integer*2 Error_Buffer(40)
Equivalence (Error_Buffer(1),Error_Buffer_Text)
Integer*4 Error_Length
Integer*2 Answer
Parameter (In=5,Out=6)
Call DBERROR (Status,Error_Buffer,Error_Length)
10
Write(Out,*)'--------------------------------------'
Write(Out,10)Error_Buffer_Text
Format(A60)
Write(Out,*)'--------------------------------------------'
Call DBEXPLAIN (Status)
20
Answer=0
Write(Out,*)'---Enter, <1> to ABORT..., <2> to Continue >'
Read (In,20) Answer
Format(I2)
If (Answer.NE.1) Then
Write(Out,*)' Continuing......'
Else
Stop
Endif
Return
End
Opening the Database
This procedure implements the Open_The_Database procedure of the sample program. All
required values, such as, the password, are provided by the routine. Note that the
password DO-ALL is followed by a semicolon because it is less that eight characters long; a
blank can be substituted for the semicolon. Open_The_Database uses open mode 1, which
is the shared modify access mode. Error trapping is done by referring all non-zero
conditions to the Get_Error_And_Explain procedure.
C*****************************************************************
Subroutine Open_The_Database
C
C
ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access (SMA) with locking required
C
C
CALLED BY : Main Line
C
C
CALLS
: DBOPEN in mode 1 (SMA)
C
Get_Error_And_Explain
C
$List Off
$Include 'comon1'
$List On
C**** Prepare the Base parameter of the DBOPEN.
C
Mode1_SMA = 1
BaseName=' ORDERS; '
290
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
Pass_Word='DO-ALL;'
Call DBOPEN (DBname,Password,Mode1_SMA,Status)
If (Condition.NE.0) Then
Call Get_Error_And_Explain
EndIf
Return
End
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking)
This procedure implements the Get_Sales_For_Date routine of the sample program.
Chained access is achieved using a call to DBFIND. The search item used for this call is
Purch-Date. An item level lock is obtained on the value of the search item before the
DBFIND call. After that, individual chain items are retrieved, until the end of chain is
encountered. This is done using multiple calls to the DBGET procedure.
This routine traps two exceptional conditions:
1. Status condition from the DBFIND call, indicating that the chain head cannot be located.
2. Status 15 from DBGET, indicating the end of the chain.
The status interpretation routine permits you to either abort or continue with the
execution after viewing all error messages.
C***************************************************************
Subroutine Get_Sales_For_Date
C
ACCESS
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
C
C
CALLED BY : Main Line
C
C
CALLS
: DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional item level locking)
C
DBFIND in mode 1 (chained access)
C
DBGET in mode 5 (forward chain read)
C
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
C*****
Get_Error_And_Explain (chained access)
$list off
$include 'comon1'
$list on
C**
C**
The Input/Output indicator values
Parameter
(In=5,Out=6)
Integer*4
End_Of_Chain,No_Chain_Head
Set up for the data set parameter.
Character
Data_Set_Name_Is*16
Integer*2
Sales_Detail(8)
Equivalence (Sales_Detail(1),Data_Set_Name_Is)
C**
Set up for the search item parameter.
Character
Search_Item_Name_Is*16
Integer*2
Search_Item_Name(8)
Equivalence (Search_Item_Name(1),Search_Item_Name_Is)
C**
Set up for the search value/argument parameter.
Character
Search_Item_Value_Is*6
Integer*2
Search_Item_Value(3)
Chapter 6
291
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
Equivalence
Parameter
(Search_Item_Value(1),Search_Item_Value_Is)
(End_Of_Chain=15,No_Chain_Head=17)
C**
Set up for the predicate buffer used in item level locking.
Num_Of_Elements
= 1
Length_Of_Descriptor
= 21
Data_Set_Of_Descriptor ='SALES;'
Data_Item_Of_Descriptor='PURCH-DATE;'
Relative_Operator
=' ='
C**
Accept the search value.
Print*,' Enter The Date of Purchase as (YYMMDD) >>> '
Read (5,10) Search_Item_Value_Is
Format(A6)
10
C**
C**
C**
Request item level locks on all items identified by the search
value. A mode value of 5 indicates an item level lock request.
Mode5_Unconditional =5
Value_For_Data_Item = Search_Item_Value_Is
Call DBLOCK (DBname,Lock_Descriptor_Array,Mode5_Unconditional,
&
Status)
If (Condition.NE.0) then
Call Get_Error_And_Explain
EndIf
Locate all entries identified by the search value.
Data_Set_Name_Is
= 'SALES;'
Mode1_Chained_Read = 1
Search_Item_Name_Is = 'PURCH-DATE;'
Call DBFIND (DBname,Sales_Detail,Mode1_Chained_Read,Status,
&
Search_Item_Name,Search_Item_Value)
If (Condition.NE.0) Then
If (Condition.EQ.No_Chain_Head) Then
Print*,'_____________________________________________'
Print*,'|
|'
Print*,'|
No Such Entry In the Sales Data Set
|'
Print*,'|
|'
Print*,'|___________________________________________|'
Print*,'Hit Enter to Continue .................... '
Read(5,*)
Else
Call Get_Error_And_Explain
EndIf
Else
20
30
Write(6,20)
Write(6,30)
Format (' Acct-Number
Stock-Number Qty Price Tax Total ',
&'Purch-Date
Deliv-Date ')
Format (' --------------------------------------------------- ',
&'------------------------ ')
Mode5_Forward = 5
List
= '@;'
Do While (Condition.NE.End_Of_Chain)
Call DBGET (DBname,Sales_Detail,Mode5_Forward, Status,
292
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
FORTRAN 77
&
&
&
&
List, Sales_Buffer, Not_Used_Parm)
If (Condition.NE.0) Then
If (Condition.EQ.End_Of_Chain) Then
Print *,'-->End Of Chain, Hit Enter to Continue'
Read (5,*)
Else
Call Get_Error_And_Explain
EndIf
Else
Print*
Print*,Account_Number,'
',
Stock_Number,'
',
Quantity,' ',Price,' ',Tax,'
',Total,' ',
Purch_Date,'
',Deliv_Date
EndIf
End Do
EndIf
Mode1_Unlock
=1
Call DBUNLOCK (DBname,Sales_Detail,Mode1_Unlock,Status)
If (Condition.NE.0) Then
Call Get_Error_And_Explain
EndIf
Return
End
Chapter 6
293
Host Language Access
Pascal
Pascal
Portions of the model program presented at the beginning of this chapter are now shown
here in Pascal. The examples perform specific tasks to illustrate the use of
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics.
Data items are defined at the beginning of the sample program. TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics must be declared for Pascal as external procedures. The procedure name is
followed by the word "Intrinsic."
Type declarations declare names for data structure forms that will be used in allocating
variables. Variable declarations allocate the variables of the program. Variables are
defined with precise types or forms. Pascal string literals are delimited with single quotes
(' '). Field and record names are separated with a dot (.), when referenced (for example,
"base_name.baseid").
NOTE
Because the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this because Pascal does not require that you use
uppercase characters.
For information on TurboIMAGE/XL data item lengths and type designators, refer to
chapter 3. Tables 3-2 and 3-3 show the TurboIMAGE/XL type designators, sub-item
lengths, and data types typically used to process them in Pascal.
NOTE
All parameters must be on halfword boundaries and cannot be odd-byte
aligned.
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics
The following is part of the Pascal example program; it defines type declarations, variable
declarations, and TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics.
$Standard_Level 'HP_MODCAL'$
$hp3000_16$
Program Pascal_For_TurboIMAGEXL
Label 100;
(Input,Output);
(* Define all your TurboIMAGE/XL constants. *)
Const
End_Of_Chain
=15;
(* For DBGET Mode
End_Of_Data_Set
=11;
(* For DBGET Mode
No_Chain_Head
=17;
(* For DBFIND
No_Such_Entry
=17;
(* For DBGET Mode
Entry_Has_No_Data
=17;
(* For DBGET Mode
5 *)
2 *)
*)
7 *)
4 *)
(* Define all your TurboIMAGE/XL record structures. *)
Type
Database_Name_Type
294
(* for the base parameter *)
= Packed Record
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
Pascal
BaseId
: Packed Array [1..2] of Char;
BaseName
: Packed Array [1..16] of Char;
End;
(* for the password parameter *)
Database_Password_Type = Packed Array [1..10] of Char;
Data_Set_Name_Type
(* for the status parameter *)
= Packed Record
Condition
: ShortInt;
Length
: ShortInt;
Record_Number
: Integer;
Chain_Count
: Integer;
Back_Pointer
: Integer;
Forward_Pointer
: Integer;
End;
(* for the data set name parameter *)
= Packed Array [1..16] of Char;
Data_Item_Name_Type
(* for data item names *)
= Packed Array [1..16] of Char;
Data_Item_List_Type
(* for the list parameter *)
= Packed Array [1..80] of Char;
Key_Item_Type
(* for key items in manual masters *)
= Packed Array [1..40] of Char;
Database_Status_Type
(* for the Sales data set of Orders DB *)
= Packed Record
Account_Number: Integer;
Stock_Number : Packed Array [1..8] of Char;
Quantity
: ShortInt;
Price
: Integer;
Tax
: Integer;
Total
: Integer;
Purch_Date
: Packed Array [1..6]of Char;
Deliv_Date
: Packed Array [1..6]of Char;
End;
(* for item level locks in the Sales set *)
Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Type
= Packed Record
Length_Of_Descriptor
: ShortInt;
Data_Set_Of_Descriptor
: Data_Set_Name_Type;
Data_Item_Of_Descriptor
: Data_Item_Name_Type;
Relative_Operator
: Packed Array [1..2]Of Char;
Value_For_Data_Item
: Packed Array [1..6]Of Char;
End;
Sales_Data_Set_Type
(* for the lock buffer for the Sales set *)
Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Array_Type
= Packed Record
Num_Of_Elements
: ShortInt;
Lock_Descriptor_Sales
: Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Type;
End;
Var
(*
Define all your global variables.
DBname
Password
Chapter 6
:
:
*)
Database_Name_Type;
Database_Password_Type;
295
Host Language Access
Pascal
Status
Option
Mode
List
(*
(*
:
:
:
:
Database_Status_Type;
ShortInt;
ShortInt;
Data_Item_List_Type;
Define all TurboIMAGE/XL procedure calls that *)
will be used in your application program.
*)
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
DBBEGIN
DBEND
DBOPEN
DBCLOSE
DBGET
DBPUT
DBFIND
DBEXPLAIN
DBERROR
DBDELETE
DBUPDATE
DBLOCK
DBUNLOCK
DBINFO
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Intrinsic;
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations
The following procedure implements the Get_Error_And_Explain routine of the sample
program. In this procedure, DBEXPLAIN and DBERROR are called using Pascal. DBEXPLAIN
interprets the contents of the Status parameter and prints a message on $STDLIST.
DBERROR returns a message in Error_Buffer, explaining the condition code returned by
TurboIMAGE/XL. At the end of the procedure, users can choose to abort or continue the
execution of this program. Note that aborting a process from within a transaction would
result in an incomplete transaction. It is good programming practice to end your
transaction, release your locks, and close any open database(s) before aborting your
process.
$Page$
Procedure Get_Error_And_Explain;
(*
Access
:
Mode 1 - Shared Modified Access
The Orders database was opened in mode 1
Called by:
Calls
:
Open_The_Database
Get_Sales_For_Date
Get_A_Customer_Record
Get_A_Product_Record
List_All_Customers
Add_A_Product
Update_A_Customer
Delete_A_Product
Rewind_Customer_Set
Get_Data_Item_Info
Close_The_Database
DBERROR
DBEXPLAIN
*)
296
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
Pascal
Var
Error_Buffer
Error_Length
Answer
:
:
:
Packed Array [1..80] of Char;
Integer;
ShortInt;
Begin
DBERROR (Status,Error_Buffer,Error_Length);
Writeln('-------------------------------------------');
Writeln(Error_Buffer);
Writeln('-------------------------------------------');
Writeln;
DBEXPLAIN (Status);
Answer:=0;
Prompt( '---Enter, <1> to ABORT..., <2> to Continue >');
Readln(Answer);
If Answer <> 1 Then Writeln(' Continuing .........')
Else Halt;
End;
Opening the Database
This procedure implements the Open_The_Database procedure of the sample program. All
required values, such as the password, are provided by the routine. Note that the password
DO-ALL is followed by a semicolon because it is less than eight characters long; a blank
can be substituted for the semicolon. Open_The_Database uses open mode 1, which is the
shared modify access mode. Error trapping is done by referring all non-zero conditions to
the Get_Error_And_Explain procedure.
$Page$
Procedure Open_The_Database;
(*
Access
: Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access (SMA) with locking required
Called By: Main Line
Calls
: DBOPEN in mode 1 (SMA)
Get_Error_And_Explain
*)
Begin
Mode1_SMA
: Integer;
DBname.BaseID
DBname.BaseName
Password
Mode1_SMA
:=' ';
:='ORDERS; ';
:='DO-ALL;';
:=1;
DBOPEN (DBname,Password,Mode1_SMA,Status);
If Status.Condition <> 0 Then
Get_Error_And_Explain;
End;
Chapter 6
297
Host Language Access
Pascal
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking)
This procedure implements the Get_Sales_For_Date routine of the sample program.
Chained access is achieved using a call to DBFIND. The search item used for this call is
Purch-Date. An item level lock is obtained on the value of the search item before the
DBFIND call. After that, individual chain items are retrieved, until the end of chain is
encountered. This is done using multiple calls to the DBGET procedure.
The routine traps two exceptional conditions:
1. Status condition 17 from the DBFIND call, indicating that the chain head cannot be
located.
2. Status 15 from the DBGET call, indicating the end of chain.
The status interpretation routine permits you to either abort or continue with the
execution of the program after viewing all error messages.
$Page$
Procedure Get_Sales_For_Date;
(*
Access
:
Called By:
Calls
:
Mode 1 - Shared Modify Access
The Orders database was opened in mode 1.
Main Line
DBLOCK in mode 5 (unconditional item level locking)
DBFIND in mode 1 (chained access)
DBGET in mode 5 (forward chained read)
DBUNLOCK in mode 1 (unlock)
Get_Error_And_Explain
*)
Var
Lock_Descriptor_Array
Sales_Detail
Search_Item_Name
Search_Item_Value
Sales_Buffer
Not_Used_Parm
Mode1_Chained_Read
Mode5_Unconditional
Mode5_Forward
Mode1_Unlock
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Lock_Descriptor_Sales_Array_Type;
Data_Set_Name_Type;
Data_Item_Name_Type;
Packed Array [1..6]of Char;
Sales_Data_Set_Type;
Shortint;
Shortint;
Shortint;
Shortint;
Shortint;
Begin
(* Prepare the lock descriptor buffer for obtaining item level
(* locks on the Sales data set.
With Lock_Descriptor_Array Do
Begin
Num_Of_Elements
:= 1;
With Lock_Descriptor_Sales Do
Begin
Length_Of_Descriptor
:= 21;
Data_Set_Of_Descriptor
:='SALES;';
Data_Item_Of_Descriptor
:='PURCH-DATE;';
Relative_Operator
:=' =';
End;
End;
Prompt ('
298
Enter The Date of Purchase as (YYMMDD) >>>
*)
*)
');
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
Pascal
Readln (Search_Item_Value);
Mode5_Unconditional
:=5; (* Request item level locks. *)
(* Append the user's input to the lock descriptor buffer. *)
Lock_Descriptor_Array. Lock_Descriptor_Sales.Value_For_Data_Item
:=Search_Item_Value;
(* Place item level locks on all entries identified by *)
(* the value in the Search_Item_Value.
*)
DBLOCK (DBname,Lock_Descriptor_Array,Mode5_Unconditional,Status);
If Status.Condition <> 0 then
Get_Error_And_Explain;
Sales_Detail
Search_Item_Name
Mode1_Chained_Read
:='SALES;';
:='PURCH-DATE;';
:=1;
(* Locate the chain identified by the value in the
*)
(* Search_Item_Value.
*)
DBFIND (DBname,Sales_Detail,Mode1_Chained_Read,Status,
Search_Item_Name,Search_Item_Value);
If Status.Condition <>0 Then
Begin
If Status.Condition = No_Chain_Head Then
Begin
Writeln('***************************************');
Writeln('* No Such Entry in the Sales Dataset *');
Writeln('* Please Try Again.
*');
Writeln('***************************************');
Prompt ('Hit Enter To Continue ---------------->');
Readln;
End
Else Get_Error_And_Explain;
End
Else
Begin
Write('Acct-Number');
Write('Stock-Number':14);
Write('Qty':6);
Write('Price':7 );
Write('Tax':5);
Write('Total':8);
Write('Purch-Date':12);
Write('Delive-Date':14);
Write('---------------------------------------------------);
Write('---------------------------');
Writeln;
(* Start retrieving all records in the current chain.
Mode5_Forward
:=5;
List
:='@;';
*)
While Status.Condition <> End_Of_Chain Do
Begin
(* Retrieve the contents of the entry which is at the
(* current record pointer.
Chapter 6
*)
*)
299
Host Language Access
Pascal
DBGET
(DBname,Sales_Detail,Mode5_Forward,Status,List,Sales_Buffer,
Not_Used_Parm);
If Status.Condition= 0 Then
Begin
With Sales_Buffer Do
Begin
Writeln;
Write(Account_Number:10);
Write(Stock_Number:15);
Write(Quantity:6);
Write(Price:7 );
Write(Tax:5 );
Write(Total:7);
Write(Purch_Date:12);
Write(Deliv_Date:12);
End;
End
(* Check the status buffer for any condition *)
Else
(* codes not equal to zero.
*)
Begin
If Status.Condition= End_Of_Chain Then
Begin
Writeln;
Writeln;
Writeln;
Prompt ('----> End Of Chain, Hit Enter to Continue');
Readln;
End
Else Get_Error_And_Explain;
End;
End;
End;
(* Release all locks acquired at the beginning of the process. *)
Mode1_Unlock
:=1;
DBUNLOCK (DBname,Sales_Detail,Mode1_Unlock,Status);
If Status.Condition<>0 Then
Get_Error_And_Explain
End;
$Page$
300
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
RPG
RPG
RPG contains language constructs that make calls to TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics, rather
than having the user code do the intrinsic calls directly. For example, RPG opens all files at
the beginning of program execution, thereby calling DBOPEN for any databases named on
File Description specifications. Likewise, DBCLOSE is automatically called for databases at
the end of program execution. Another example is the RPG CHAIN operation which calls
DBFIND and/or DBGET, depending on its usage.
A small set of TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics have no RPG language equivalent and so cannot
be accessed at the present time. These include DBERROR, DBEXPLAIN, DBBEGIN, DBEND,
and DBMEMO. Because the sample program on which this RPG program is based contains
calls to DBERROR and DBEXPLAIN, the RPG version cannot exactly match the functionality
of the sample program. Instead, it displays the status value returned by TurboIMAGE/XL
when an error occurs.
NOTE
Because the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA, upshifts alphabetic characters,
programs must specify data set and data item names in all uppercase
characters. Take note of this as RPG does not require that you use uppercase
characters.
For information of TurboIMAGE/XL data item lengths and type designators, refer to
chapter 3. Tables 3-2 and 3-3 show the TurboIMAGE/XL type designators, sub-item
lengths, and data types typically used to process them in RPG.
Defining Data Types, Variables, and Intrinsics
The first five F-specs implement the OPEN-THE-DATABASE routine of the sample program in
RPG. RPG automatically opens all databases (by calling DBOPEN) at the beginning of
program execution. F-specs are used to declare how each database/set is to be opened and
accessed.
In this program, the database is opened with mode 1 (shared modify access) by entry of L
in column 66 on the KIMAGE line. This entry also allows user-controlled locking of the
database/set/item to occur.
The data set is opened for chained sequential read accesses by entry of C in column 67 of
the KIMAGE line. If an error occurs during opening of the database, the program will
abort.
Note that RPG also closes all databases (by calling DBCLOSE) at the end of program
execution, so there is no need for the user to call a separate routine to do this.
$CONTROL NOINFO,MAP,NAME=RTURBO
H
L
1
****************************************************************
*
Program name:
RTURBO
*
*
Description :
Example of RPG access to TurboIMAGE/XL
*
****************************************************************
FSALES
Chapter 6
IC
F
38R 6AI
27 DISC
301
Host Language Access
RPG
F
KIMAGE ORDERSLC
F
KITEM PURCH-DATE
F
KLEVEL DO-ALL
F
KSTATUSSTAT
FTERMIN ID F
79
$STDIN
FTERMOUT O
V
79
$STDLST
****************************************************************
*
TABLE/ARRAY DECLARATIONS
*
****************************************************************
E
ESC
1
1 1
Escape = 27
****************************************************************
*
INPUT RECORD LAYOUTS
*
****************************************************************
ISALES
NS
I
B
1
40ACCT#
I
5 12 STOCK#
I
6 13 140QTY
I
7 15 180$PRICE
I
5 19 220$TAX
I
8 23 260$TOTAL
I
27 320PDATE
I
33 380DDATE
ITERMIN NS
I
1
8 OPTION
Main Body of Program
****************************************************************
*
CALCULATIONS MAINLINE
*
****************************************************************
C*
Execute GETSAL subroutine, then end program.
C*
C
EXSR GETSAL
C
SETON
LR
Retrieving All the Records on a Chain (with Item Level Locking)
This subroutine implements the GET-SALES-FOR-DATE routine of the sample program.
Chained access is achieved using the CHAIN operation which performs a DBFIND call and
a DBGET call on the first execution, and then DBGET calls on subsequent executions for the
same search value. Thus a loop is done on the CHAIN operation in order to retrieve all the
entries in the data item chain. The routine traps two exceptional conditions: failure to find
a chain head, and reaching end-of-chain.
****************************************************************
*
G E T S A L
S U B R O U T I N E
*
****************************************************************
C
GETSAL
BEGSR
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Display prompt for date and read user input from screen.
C*
C
EXCPT
CLEAR
C
EXCPT
GETDAT
C
READ TERMIN
H0
302
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
RPG
C
MOVELOPTION
DATE
6
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Do unconditional data item lock on DATE.
C*
C
DATE
LOCK SALES
21
C
21
EXSR GETERR
C
LR
GOTO END1
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Loop on CHAIN operation to get all entries in chain. On
C*
first occurrence of CHAIN for a unique value of DATE, RPG
C*
calls DBFIND, followed by DBGET. On subsequent uses of
C*
CHAIN with the same value for DATE, only DBGET is called.
C*
C
SETOF
202122
C
LOOP1
TAG
C
DATE
CHAINSALES
2122
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
No chain head found.
C*
C
21
EXCPT
CLEAR
C
21
EXCPT
NOHEAD
C
21
READ TERMIN
H0
C
21
GOTO SKIP
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
End-of-chain found.
C*
C
22
EXCPT
EOC
C
22
READ TERMIN
H0
C
22
GOTO SKIP
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Any other error.
C*
C
STAT,1
IFGT 0
C
EXSR GETERR
C
LR
GOTO END1
C
END
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Print headings and data record.
C*
C N20
EXCPT
CLEAR
C N20
EXCPT
SALHDR
C N20
EXCPT
LINHDR
C N20
SETON
20
C
EXCPT
SALREC
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Loop back to do another CHAIN operation (DBGET).
C*
C
GOTO LOOP1
C
SKIP
TAG
C*-------------------------------------------------------------C*
Unlock the data item.
C*
C
DATE
UNLCKSALES
24
C N24
EXSR GETERR
C*
C
END1
ENDSR
Chapter 6
303
Host Language Access
RPG
Obtaining Error Messages and Explanations
The following subroutine implements the GET-ERROR-AND-EXPLAIN routine of the sample
program. Because RPG as yet does not have access to DBEXPLAIN and DBERROR, this
subroutine simply displays the TurboIMAGE/XL error number from the status array and
then allows the user to either abort the program or continue its execution. If the user
elects to abort, the LR indicator is set ON and the code which called this subroutine must
test for LR and exit immediately to its caller, which in turn must exit to its caller, and so
on.
****************************************************************
*
G E T E R R
S U B R O U T I N E
*
****************************************************************
C
GETERR
BEGSR
C
EXCPT
ERRBUF
C
GETOPT
TAG
C
READ TERMIN
H0
C
OPTION
IFEQ "1"
C
SETON
LR
C
ELSE
C
OPTION
IFEQ "2"
C
EXCPT
ERRCON
C
ELSE
C
EXCPT
BADOPT
C
GOTO GETOPT
C
END
C
END
C*
C
ENDSR
Defining Output
****************************************************************
*
OUTPUT RECORD LAYOUTS
*
****************************************************************
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display message for entry of invalid option.
O*
OTERMOUT E 1
BADOPT
O
23 "Invalid option - please"
O
33 " re-enter."
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Send 'Home' (Escape h) and 'Clear' (Escape J) to screen.
O*
O
E 1
CLEAR
O
ESC
1
O
2 "h"
O
ESC
3
O
4 "J"
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display message for IMAGE End-Of-Chain condition.
O*
O
E 31
EOC
O
21 "-----> End of Chain, "
O
42 "Hit Enter to Continue"
O*--------------------------------------------------------------
304
Chapter 6
Host Language Access
RPG
O*
Display error message.
O*
O
E 1
ERRBUF
O
23 "-----------------------"
O
30 "-------"
O
E 1
ERRBUF
O
11 "IMAGE ERROR"
O
STAT,1
21 "
*"
O
35 " HAS OCCURRED."
O
E 2
ERRBUF
O
23 "-----------------------"
O
30 "-------"
O
E 1
ERRBUF
O
23 "---Enter, <1> to Abort."
O
43 ".., <2> TO Continue"
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display message for continuing execution after error.
O*
O
E 1
ERRCON
O
15 "Continuing....."
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display prompt for input of DATE.
O*
O
E 1
GETDAT
O
23 "Enter The DATE of Purch"
O
38 "ase as (YYMMDD)"
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display Line Header (dashes).
O*
O
E 1
LINHDR
O
23 "-----------------------"
O
*PLACE
46
O
*PLACE
69
O
76 "-------"
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display message that no IMAGE chain head was found.
O*
O
E 1
NOHEAD
O
23 "***********************"
O
39 "****************"
O
E 1
NOHEAD
O
23 "* No Such Entry in the "
O
39 "Sales Dataset *"
O
E 1
NOHEAD
O
23 "* Please Try Again.
"
O
39 "
*"
O
E 1
NOHEAD
O
23 "***********************"
O
39 "****************"
O
E 1
NOHEAD
O
23 "Press Enter To Continue"
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display Header line for listing of Sales records.
O*
O
E 1
SALHDR
O
13 "Acct-Number "
O
28 "Stock-Number
"
O
33 "QTY "
Chapter 6
305
Host Language Access
RPG
O
40 "Price "
O
46 "Tax
"
O
53 "Total "
O
66 "Purch-Date
"
O
79 "Deliv-Date
"
O*-------------------------------------------------------------O*
Display Sales record line.
O*
O
E 1
SALREC
O
ACCT#
10 "
0 "
O
STOCK#
25
O
QTY
31 "
0 "
O
$PRICE
38 "
0 "
O
$TAX
43 "
0 "
O
$TOTAL
51 "
0 "
O
PDATE Y
62
O
DDATE Y
75
** Following record contains Escape character (ASCII 27) in column 1
<--- ASCII 27
306
Chapter 6
Logging and Recovery
7 Logging and Recovery
This chapter discusses how to maintain database consistency; that is, how to log logical
transactions and recover a TurboIMAGE/XL database from a system failure or program
abort. This chapter is divided into the following major sections:
• Recovery Options
• Logical Transactions
• Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery
• Intrinsic Level Recovery
• Logging Preparation
• Logging Status
• Logging Maintenance
• TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
• Roll-Forward Recovery
• Roll-Back Recovery
• DBRECOV Commands Used With Roll-Forward and Roll-Back Recovery
• Record Tables
• Post-Recovery Options
• The Mirror Database
A quick guide to recovery and logging options is found in appendix G, "Recovery and
Logging Quick Reference."
Chapter 7
307
Logging and Recovery
Database Utilities Used in Logging and Recovery
Database Utilities Used in Logging and Recovery
The TurboIMAGE/XL database is maintained using various TurboIMAGE/XL database
utilities which are fully described in chapter 8. Because the following database utilities are
used in logging and recovery, they are also referred to in this chapter:
DBUTIL
Creates and maintains the database.
DBUNLOAD Copies data to specially formatted tape volumes.
DBLOAD
Loads data from backup volumes (DBUNLOAD tape) into the database.
DBSTORE
Stores a database to tape. You may also use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24
True-Online Backup with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option.
DBRESTOR
Restores a database from backup volumes (DBSTORE tape) to disk.
If you use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option to store your database, you can
use the MPE RESTORE command which invokes TurboSTORE/iX 7x24
True-Online Backup to restore the database.
DBRECOV
Recovers a database from a log file, even when you used TurboSTORE/iX
7x24 True-Online Backup with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END
option to store the database. The DBRECOV utility allows you to set control
commands and create individual user recovery files. The information from
these files enables you to inform each user where to resume transactions
within the database.
Database utilities can be run in either job or session mode. With the exception of the
DBUTIL >>SHOW command, the utilities DBUTIL, DBSTORE, DBRESTOR, DBUNLOAD, and
DBLOAD all require a logon in the group and account that contains the database root file.
Consequently, these utilities cannot be used with a remote database unless you initiate a
remote session and run the utility as part of that session. The DBUTIL, DBSTORE, and
DBRESTOR utilities do not allow you to use the MPE/iX FILE command to equate a
database or database-access file.
CAUTION
DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD do allow MPE/iX FILE commands to equate a database
and can redirect the database to a different file. Except in a controlled
environment, you should not use the MPE/iX FILE command to redirect a
database or database-access file to a different file because that file can be
purged easily.
The DBRECOV utility is not included in the discussion above because it is an exception. With
DBRECOV, MPE/iX FILE commands are permissible and do not require a logon to the same
group and account as the log file. However, DBRECOV must be invoked on the system where
the database resides.
You can operate the database utilities if you are the database creator or if you know the
maintenance word. If no maintenance word is defined, only the database creator can
execute the database utilities. The exception to this rule is that a user with system
308
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Database Utilities Used in Logging and Recovery
manager (SM) capability can use the DBUTIL >>SHOW command on any database without
having to supply the maintenance word.
Use this chapter together with chapter 8 which gives the syntax of the database utilities
and commands.
Chapter 7
309
Logging and Recovery
Recovery Options
Recovery Options
The logging and recovery system is used to bring databases back to the same state at the
time of a system failure; this state does not include incomplete transactions.
TurboIMAGE/XL provides several types of recovery options:
• Default recovery mode
• Dynamic roll-back recovery
• Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR)
• Roll-forward recovery
• Roll-back recovery
• Mirror database
The recovery options are described briefly below. Dynamic roll-back recovery, ILR,
roll-forward recovery, roll-back recovery, and the mirror database are discussed in detail
later in this chapter. A brief description of these recovery and logging options is found in
appendix G, "Recovery and Logging Quick Reference." Use the information in this chapter
and in appendix G to determine which recovery and logging options to choose. The
recovery option is based on available database backup, logging resources, and performance
requirements.
Default Recovery Mode. In default recovery mode, TurboIMAGE/XL uses an MPE/iX
file system service, Transaction Management (XM), to ensure the structural integrity of
the database following a system failure. All modifications to the database (DBPUTs,
DBDELETEs, and DBUPDATEs) are automatically logged to an MPE/iX XM log file. However,
this XM log file is only written to disk when one of the following situations is true:
• A system-specified time has elapsed.
• A request is made by a process to flush the log file to disk, for example, a call to DBEND
mode 2 or 4.
• The XM buffer is full.
XM ensures that the TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics are applied to the log file in a serial
manner. If a system failure occurs, those completed intrinsics that have not been written to
disk are not recovered. Thus, one or more completed DBPUTs, DBDELETEs, and DBUPDATEs
can be lost, but the internal structure of the database remains consistent. Recovery with
DBRECOV must be performed at system startup time before anyone modifies the database.
Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery. Dynamic roll-back recovery is a method of recovery that
uses XM. XM ensures the physical and logical integrity of the databases. Dynamic
roll-back allows a more timely recovery of databases than is possible with DBRECOV.
Dynamic roll-back eliminates the overhead incurred when a database is enabled for user
logging and permits database access to continue, even when recovering a database. It
provides the most thorough protection for logical database transactions. Dynamic
transaction can span one or more databases. The dynamic transaction spanning multiple
databases is termed dynamic multiple database transaction, or DMDBX. Dynamic
roll-back handles both program aborts and system failures without downtime for recovery,
310
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Recovery Options
and your database will not be left with an incomplete transaction. Dynamic roll-back also
allows programs to selectively abort any ongoing transaction.
TurboIMAGE/XL uses XM to dynamically roll back uncommitted dynamic transactions.
Dynamic roll-back requires using the three intrinsics: DBXBEGIN, DBXEND, and DBXUNDO.
Dynamic roll-back recovery can be used with roll-forward recovery to handle disk media
failures.
Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR). Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR) is a recovery method
provided within TurboIMAGE/XL. ILR ensures that all completed DBPUTs and DBDELETEs
are recovered. On TurboIMAGE/XL, ILR is equivalent to calling DBEND mode 2 after every
intrinsic. It is recommended that ILR not be used. It is not required for the DBRECOV
roll-back recovery. See "Intrinsic Level Recovery" in this chapter for more information.
Roll-Forward Recovery. Roll-forward recovery is another method of recovery provided
within TurboIMAGE/XL. It is used to ensure the structural and logical integrity of the
database. Roll-forward recovery is used after a hard system failure such as a disk head
crash or after problems occurring while roll-back recovery is in process.
Roll-forward recovery requires user logging and a backup copy of the database. The
recovery time needed is generally more than roll-back recovery. The database backup may
have been done using DBSTORE, TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option), or other similar programs and must be synchronized with the
current log file.
If DBSTORE was used for storing the database, DBRESTORE needs to be used to restore the
database. The correct log file is the first log file and recovery commences from the
beginning of the log file.
If TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup was used (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option) to back up the database, the RESTORE command of MPE is used to
restore the database. The recovery may even commence from the middle of a log file in use
when backup was initiated. To find out the logfile from which recovery will start, use the
SHOW databasename ALL command of DBUTIL. Refer to the TurboSTORE/iX True-Online
Backup discussion later in this chapter.
Roll-Back Recovery. Roll-back recovery is another method of recovery provided within
TurboIMAGE/XL. It is used to ensure the structural and logical integrity of the database.
Roll-back recovery is used after a "soft" system crash such as a system failure or loss of
working memory.
Roll-back recovery requires user logging. A backup copy of the database is recommended
(for protection in the event of a hard disk failure), but not required. The time taken to
perform roll-back is generally much less than roll-forward recovery.
Mirror Database. In addition to the recovery methods mentioned previously, roll-forward
recovery can be used to mirror a database for constant access or "high availability" while
providing controlled maintenance using a DBRECOV feature called STOP-RESTART.
Backups and down-time can be regulated with this maintenance method which consists of
two identical databases on two separate computer systems. The mirror database resides on
the secondary system and is maintained with user logging, DBRECOV, and periodic
DBSTOREs.
Chapter 7
311
Logging and Recovery
Recovery Options
Logging and Recovery Considerations
To ensure database integrity, the following responsibilities need to be assigned to specific
individuals:
• Enabling and disabling the logging and recovery processes.
• Creating database backup copies and synchronizing with log files.
• Performing actual recoveries when required.
NOTE
In the event of a system failure and subsequent recovery operation when
using private volumes, logging will not resume until these private volumes
have been mounted. Enter the MPE/iX VMOUNT command into the SYSSTART
file to resume logging.
The overhead required by the logging process depends on the number and type of
modifications that are logged and the database structure. Both overhead and recovery time
also depend on the type of recovery being used. For roll-forward recovery, the time needed
for recovery depends on the number of transactions that were written to the log file
following the last backup of the database. For roll-back recovery, the time needed to roll
back the last incomplete transaction is generally much less than roll-forward recovery.
Dynamic roll-back recovery can process program aborts. This is significant because the
TurboIMAGE/XL logging and recovery system is not intended to be a solution for
transactions that fail to complete in real time due to a program abort. Because subsequent
transactions may be dependent on a transaction interrupted by a program abort, the
recovery system does not suppress transactions that fail for this reason. Instead,
TurboIMAGE/XL logs an abnormal DBEND to the log file so that the transaction can be
recovered.
NOTE
Transactions that fail due to program aborts can be suppressed with the
NOABORTS control option in DBRECOV as long as all processes are stopped
immediately after a program abort and the database is recovered. Any delay
in executing recovery with the NOABORTS option could result in erroneous
data or recovery failure due to transaction interdependence.
Alternatively, when using roll-forward recovery, the STOPTIME option could be used to
recover transactions that logged up to a time preceding the program abort. See the
discussion on DBRECOV in chapter 8.
As a secondary function, the transaction logging system can be a useful tool for auditing.
The log file is actually a programmatically accessible journal of all modifications to items
in the database. The log file provides information about previous entries as well as the
current state of the database. The DBMEMO logging intrinsic, containing user text, provides
a method of accessing and interpreting the log files.
312
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logical Transactions
Logical Transactions
A Definition
TurboIMAGE/XL logging and recovery (via DBRECOV) provide the ability to restore the
database to a consistent state after a system failure. To understand how this is done, it is
important to understand the concept of a logical transaction. A logical transaction is a
sequence of one or more procedure calls that are considered one logical unit of work. Table
7-1. describes the types of logical transactions: static, multiple database, dynamic, and
dynamic multiple database.
Table 7-1. Types of Logical Transactions
Transaction
Definition
Static
A logical transaction that begins with a DBBEGIN call and ends with a DBEND call.
A static transaction spans only one database and uses DBBEGIN mode 1 and
DBEND mode 1 or 2.
Multiple
database
A logical transaction that begins with a DBBEGIN mode 3 or 4 call and ends with a
DBEND mode 3 or 4 call. A multiple database transaction (MDBX) spans more
than one database and can be recovered with roll-back or roll-forward recovery.
Programmers may be tempted to call DBBEGIN twice (once for each database),
update both databases, and then call DBEND twice in an attempt to implement
this capability. However, a system failure during the "window" between the two
final calls to DBEND will result in the recovery of the transaction for the first
database and its suppression on the second. To perform a transaction accessing
multiple databases, use a multiple database transaction.
Dynamic
A logical transaction that begins with a DBXBEGIN mode 1 call and ends with a
DBXEND mode 1 or 2 call. A dynamic transaction spans only one database. A call
to DBXUNDO or a program abort will cause a dynamic transaction to be rolled back
dynamically. If a system failure occurs, the dynamic transaction will be rolled
back at the first call to DBOPEN for the database after the system is restarted.
However, in the event of a media failure, DBRECOV roll-forward recovery can be
used on dynamic transactions as long as user logging has first been enabled.
Dynamic
multiple
database
A dynamic transaction that spans multiple databases and begins with a
DBXBEGIN mode 3 call and ends with a DBXEND mode 3 call. The total number of
databases then can be included in a dynamic multiple database transaction is 15.
The baseid parameter of DBXBEGIN mode 3 includes the number of databases and
their respective base-ids. A call to DBXUNDO or a program abort will cause a DMDBX
to be rolled back dynamically. In essence, modifications to all databases involved
in DMDBX will be rolled back. If a system failure occurs, the dynamic transaction
will be rolled back at the first call to DBOPEN for the databases after the system is
restarted. However, in the event of a media failure, DBRECOV roll-forward recovery
can be used on dynamic transactions as long as user logging has first been
enabled.
Chapter 7
313
Logging and Recovery
Logical Transactions
Table 7-1. Types of Logical Transactions
Transaction
Definition
Unlike a dynamic transaction for one database, DMDBX requires that a DBCONTROL
mode 7 be done once for every database you want to include in a DMDBX, after
DBOPEN of that database and before using it in the DBXBEGIN intrinsic. DBCONTROL
mode 7 enables the database for deadlock detection, which when encountered,
returns an error 26 instead of triggering a process hang.
If the calling process is logging, DBXBEGIN, DBXEND, and DBXUNDO cause a log
record to be written to the log file to identify the beginning, end, and roll-back,
respectively, of a dynamic transaction. For DMDBX, logging should be either
disabled or enabled for all databases involved in the DMDBX. In addition, if logging
is enabled, the same logid needs to be used for all databases in the DMDBX as well.
In case of DMDBX when logging is enabled, multiple log records, one for each
database, will be written to the log file.
If logging is specified and DBBEGIN/DBEND (static transactions) or DBXBEGIN/DBXEND
(dynamic transactions) are not used, TurboIMAGE/XL considers each DBPUT, DBDELETE,
and DBUPDATE to be a single logical transaction. While a transaction is executing, the
database is considered to be in an inconsistent state. Thus, each transaction takes the
database from one consistent state to another.
For example, consider the manual master data set CUSTOMER in the ORDERS database,
with the addition of a new field, YTDSALES, indicating the total value of the year-to-date
sales for each customer. A one-step transaction might involve updating a particular
customer's address. Adding a new sales item is a two-step transaction: adding an entry to
the SALES detail data set and updating the YTDSALES item in the CUSTOMER master
set. The database is consistent before the transaction begins because the YTDSALES
value corresponds exactly with the sum of the TOTAL values in the SALES detail set that
are chained to that particular customer's account number. However, after the first
modification, which might be adding the new SALES entry, this correspondence no longer
holds, so the database is said to be inconsistent. After the second step, modifying the
YTDSALES item in the CUSTOMER data set, the database is returned to a consistent
state.
If the system fails while the database is being modified, database integrity could be
affected. Logical inconsistency could result if the failure occurs between modifications of a
multiple- step transaction, as illustrated by the example in the preceding paragraph.
Secondly, if AUTODEFER is enabled, structural damage (such as, broken chains) can result if
the failure occurs during the execution of a TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsic.
Because the recovery system is designed to restore the database to a consistent state, those
modifications belonging to transactions that failed to complete due to a system failure are
suppressed by the recovery system. Consequently, although one or more database
modifications may be lost upon recovery, the resulting database will be consistent. To this
end, each user application should indicate the beginning and end of each transaction by
using a DBBEGIN and DBEND pair or a DBXBEGIN and DBXEND pair. (Refer to chapter 4 for
more information on transactions.)
314
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logical Transactions
Figure 7-1. illustrates the concept of a logical transaction using a static and a dynamic
transaction. Note that a transaction block is also illustrated. A transaction block
consists of all transactions between a call to DBOPEN and a call to DBCLOSE. For further
information about transaction blocks, refer to "FILE Command" later in this chapter.
Figure 7-1. Transactions and Transaction Blocks
Locking Requirements for Logical Transactions
DBRECOV requires that all multiple-intrinsic database transactions execute independently
of all other transactions. Transaction independence within the database can be ensured in
a user program by locking data before a transaction and then releasing locks after a DBEND
or DBXEND is called, thus eliminating the possibility of another user modifying the same
data at the same time. The following example may clarify the need for locking data to be
modified.
Suppose transaction A consists of adding two records to the database that are later
modified by transaction B. Transaction B is dependent upon transaction A, because the
records must exist before they can be modified. Recall that a transaction is defined as a
sequence of one or more modifications that transfer the database from one consistent state
to another. A database may be in an inconsistent state during a transaction. Therefore, if
transactions A and B are executing concurrently without locking, transaction B may be
viewing the database in an inconsistent state and consequently could be generating
invalid results. However, if transaction A locks the data and completes properly, this
problem is avoided because transaction B cannot access the data until transaction A has
released its locks.
A second problem due to inadequate locking affects suppression of transactions by the
recovery system (see Figure 7-2.) Suppose transaction A intends to add six records to the
database, and after adding three records, transaction B is executed by another process.
Transaction B concurrently modifies one of the records added by transaction A and then
completes. Suppose that at this time, the system fails and recovery is executed. Because
Chapter 7
315
Logging and Recovery
Logical Transactions
transaction A failed to complete, all of its record additions are suppressed. Because
transaction B is dependent upon the suppressed transaction A, it cannot be recovered.
DBRECOV is forced to suppress transaction B, even though it successfully completed during
real-time processing. This potential problem could be avoided if transactions modifying the
database employ locking correctly. Transactions attempting to access the same data
concurrently are serialized by the locking mechanism.
Locking and Transaction Interdependence
To maximize the extent of recovery, locking should be used with logging to eliminate
interdependence of concurrent static and multiple database transactions. Locking by
logical transaction (that is, DBBEGIN and DBEND or DBXBEGIN and DBXEND) guarantees the
logical consistency of the database. For roll-back recovery, locking by logical transaction
ensures that all incomplete transactions are backed out of the database. For roll-forward
recovery, transaction locking is recommended.
Figure 7-2. Suppression of Transactions Due to Inadequate Locking
316
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logical Transactions
Locking Examples
Examples of the two recommended locking schemes follow:
Single Lock Strategy
DBLOCK for account 2,18,34
DBBEGIN
DBGET data for account 2
DBPUT data for account 34
DBGET data for account 18
DBDELETE data for account 18
DBEND
DBUNLOCK for all accounts
Lock should precede DBBEGIN call.
DBUNLOCK must be last call.
Multiple Lock Strategy
DBLOCK account 2,34
DBBEGIN
DBGET data for account 2
DBUPDATE data for account 2
DBPUT data for account 34
DBLOCK for account 18
DBGET data account 18
DBDELETE data account 18
DBEND
DBUNLOCK for all accounts
CAUTION
DBUNLOCK must be last call.
Use caution when employing a multiple lock strategy requiring Multiple RIN
(Resource Identification Number) capability, also known as MR capability;
refer to appendix D for information. Hewlett-Packard does not accept
responsibility for possible deadlocks or system lockouts that could result from
improper use of the MR capability.
In the first example above, calling DBLOCK before DBBEGIN makes the transaction shorter in
duration. The recommendation is to call DBLOCK first, because there is no way of knowing
how long DBLOCK will have to wait to acquire the lock after the transaction has begun. For
additional locking information, refer to "Using the Locking Facility" in chapter 4.
Locking and Dynamic Transactions
Because dynamic transactions can be rolled back by calling DBXUNDO and are automatically
rolled back in case of a system failure or program abort, TurboIMAGE/XL requires that a
dynamic transaction be independent of all other transactions. When the database is
opened in access mode 3 or 4, transaction independence is guaranteed because the
program is the only modifier of the database.
When the database is opened in access mode 1, dynamic transactions require the
programmer to use strong locking. A call to DBUNLOCK must occur after the call to DBXEND.
Failure to follow this sequence after a call to DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE will cause an
error. Intrinsic calls within the dynamic transaction must have covering locks. If an error
Chapter 7
317
Logging and Recovery
Logical Transactions
is returned indicating the failure of the intrinsic, the status condition must be checked
before proceeding further or rolling back the entire transaction.
As with nondynamic transactions, the placement of DBLOCK calls either before or after
DBXBEGIN is up to the programmer. A program with Multiple RIN (MR) capability can
apply multiple locks with a dynamic transaction. MR capability is described in appendix D.
Dynamic transactions are not allowed when a database is opened in mode 2, because mode
2 does not enforce locking or guarantee transaction independence.
An example of strong locking follows:
DBLOCK for account 2,18,34
DBXBEGIN
DBGET data for account 2
DBPUT data for account 34
DBGET data for account 18
DBDELETE data for account 18
DBXEND
DBUNLOCK for all accounts
318
Lock should precede DBXBEGIN call.
DBUNLOCK must follow DBXEND
call.
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery
Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery
Dynamic roll-back allows a more timely recovery of databases than is possible with
DBRECOV. Dynamic roll-back eliminates the overhead incurred when a database is enabled
for user logging and permits database access to continue, even while other users are
accessing a database.
Using XM, uncommitted logical transactions can be rolled back dynamically (online) while
other database activity is occurring. This is accomplished through the use of three
intrinsics: DBXBEGIN, DBXEND, and DBXUNDO.
DBXBEGIN and DBXEND mark the beginning and end of the dynamic transaction which can
be for one or multiple databases. The dynamic transaction can be rolled back in the
following ways:
• Programmatically with a call to DBXUNDO.
• Automatically when the application aborts or a system failure occurs within the
transaction.
In any case, those transactions begun after the call to DBXBEGIN that do not have a
corresponding call to DBXEND will be rolled back. When you use DBXUNDO, your program
logic must ensure that it does not call DBXEND subsequently; otherwise, you will get an
error.
Use the following sequence of operations when modifying a database with dynamic
transactions:
1. Call DBLOCK for each database to be included in the dynamic transaction to lock all data
that must not be changed by other processes during the transaction. This includes data
to be read and data to be modified.
2. If you wish, read data using DBFIND and DBGET to determine the necessary
modifications.
3. If this is a multiple database transaction, ensure that DBCONTROL mode 7 is done at
least once for each of the databases before including in the dynamic transaction.
4. Call DBXBEGIN to declare the beginning of modifications.
5. Make modifications using DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE.
For every DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE, the status must be checked before
proceeding further. If an error is returned indicating the failure of the intrinsic, the
choices are:
a. Call DBXEND. The successful modifications completed within this dynamic
transaction will not be rolled back.
b. Call DBXUNDO to roll back the entire transaction. Even successful modifications
completed within one or more databases included in this dynamic transaction will be
rolled back. That is, for DMDBX, DBXUNDO affects all databases included in the
DBXBEGIN call.
c. Continue with the remainder of the dynamic transaction even though this intrinsic
Chapter 7
319
Logging and Recovery
Dynamic Roll-Back Recovery
failed. As the application designer, you should be very cautious when taking this
option as the modification to the database in this intrinsic did not take place.
6. Call DBXEND to declare the end of the modifications. If DBXUNDO was used in step 4 to
roll back a transaction, your program logic should ensure that the subsequent call to
DBXEND is not processed.
7. Call DBUNLOCK to release all of the locks.
Dynamic roll-back requires strong locking as discussed previously under "Locking and
Dynamic Transactions." Calling DBUNLOCK after a call to DBPUT, DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE
within a dynamic transaction will return an error because the call to DBUNLOCK must occur
after the call to DBXEND. If necessary locks are not acquired before calling DBXBEGIN,
covering locks must be used on the intrinsic calls within the dynamic transaction,
otherwise an error will be returned.
It is essential that you check the status after each intrinsic. If a database intrinsic fails,
you may end the transaction by calling DBXEND or roll back the entire transaction by
calling DBXUNDO. You may be able to continue with the transaction despite the intrinsic
failure, however, you must account for the intrinsic failure. The outcome varies based on
your application design.
Do not use DBCLOSE mode 1 (close the database) inside an active dynamic transaction. This
use of DBCLOSE will cause your dynamic transaction to be rolled back, the locks will be
released, the database will be closed, and subsequent use of DBXEND or DBXUNDO will return
an error.
If your dynamic transaction is very long causing XM to reach its limit of the log buffer
space allowed per process, it will become a stalled transaction, and you cannot continue
any further. This stalled transaction will be rolled back and the process is terminated.
If the system aborts or TurboIMAGE/XL encounters an internal error, the active memo
records are saved in a file. All of the unrecovered memo records for a particular database
are held in the dbname00 file. It resides in the same group and account as the database,
and each database has only one dbname00 file. The first DBOPEN of an unrecovered database
initiates the recovery using the dbname00 file.
User logging (discussed later in this chapter) is not required for dynamic roll-back
recovery, but it is recommended to guard against a media failure.
320
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Intrinsic Level Recovery
Intrinsic Level Recovery
Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR), one of the TurboIMAGE/XL recovery options, closely
resembles default mode recovery. The distinction that ILR provides is an enforced flushing
of the Transaction Management (XM) log file after every intrinsic. This enforced flushing
emulates the immediate posting of intrinsics by TurboIMAGE/V and should only be used if
immediate posting is required and DBEND mode 2 cannot be used to provide the immediate
posting.
NOTE
Intrinsic Level Recovery is not recommended. This feature is included for
compatibility with MPE V programs only.
To enable a database for ILR, run DBUTIL and use the >>ENABLE command. For example:
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
>>ENABLE database name FOR ILR
ILR is enabled
When the database is enabled for ILR, TurboIMAGE/XL sets a flag in the database root
file. To determine if ILR has been enabled for a database, either use the DBUTIL >>SHOW
command or programmatically call DBINFO with mode 402. Note that ILR is not required
for roll-back recovery.
To discontinue using ILR on a database, use the DBUTIL >>DISABLE command. When ILR
is disabled by the user, TurboIMAGE/XL clears the flag in the database root file.
NOTE
If you have enabled the AUTODEFER option in DBUTIL, ILR cannot be used as
the database recovery method. The following message is printed at the
terminal if the user attempts to enable ILR when AUTODEFER is already
enabled for the database:
AUTODEFER MUST BE DISABLED BEFORE ILR CAN BE ENABLED
The user should disable AUTODEFER and enable ILR using the DBUTIL
>>ENABLE command. For more information on AUTODEFER, refer to chapter 8.
Chapter 7
321
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
Logging Preparation
User logging is required for roll-forward recovery, roll-back recovery, and to maintain a
mirror database. It is not required for dynamic roll-back recovery, but is recommended to
protect against a hard disk failure. To prepare a database for user logging, you must set a
log identifier (logid) into the database root file. The log identifier can be associated with an
existing log file, in which case you can begin with step 6 below if you know the log
identifier and password. Note that to recover a database using a log file, you must either be
the creator of the logid, or supply the maintenance word and have system manager (SM) or
operator (OP) capability.
Assuming you intend to create a new log identifier, you should take the following steps:
1. Check MPE/iX logging configuration.
2. Acquire logging capability.
3. Determine whether the log file will reside on tape or disk.
4. If logging to disk, build the log file.
5. Create the log identifier.
6. Set the log identifier into the database.
7. Set flags for the database backup copy.
8. Make a backup copy of the database. This step is required when using roll-forward
recovery and recommended (for protection in the event of a hard disk failure), but not
required, when using roll-back recovery.
This is a one-time procedure. The logging maintenance operations are performed on a
regular basis, perhaps daily (refer to "Logging Maintenance" later in this chapter).
Step 1--Checking MPE/iX Logging Configuration
It is recommended that you check the logging configuration for adequate capacity before
using the MPE/iX LOG command described later in this section. This precautionary step
can prevent the downtime required to reconfigure the logging capacity. You need to check
the number of user logging processes allowed on the system and the number of users that
can access a single user logging process. For information on setting up these numbers at
system startup time, refer to the System Operation and Resource Management Reference
Manual.
Step 2--Acquiring Logging Capability
You must have MPE/iX logging (LG) or operator (OP) capability to use the following
MPE/iX commands: GETLOG, RELLOG, ALTLOG, CHANGELOG, and LISTLOG. You must have
LG or OP capability also if you intend to open a database with logging enabled. Logging
capability is acquired through the MPE/iX system manager and account manager
commands.
First, the system manager provides the account logging capability by using the MPE/iX
322
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
NEWACCT command for a new account, or the ALTACCT command for an existing account,
as follows:
:NEWACCT acctname,mgrname;CAP=capability list
:ALTACCT acctname;CAP=capability list
(include LG)
(include LG)
Next, the account manager can provide logging capability to individual users by using the
NEWUSER command for new users, or the ALTUSER command for an existing user, as
follows:
:NEWUSER username;CAP=capability list
:ALTUSER username;CAP=capability list
(include LG)
(include LG)
For example:
:NEWACCT CAPE,RICK;CAP=LG,AM,AL,GL,SF,ND,IA,BA
:NEWUSER ILSA;CAP=LG,AL,GL,SF,ND,IA,BA
Refer to the MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual for information on other MPE/iX user
logging commands, including these listed here:
RELLOG
Removes a log identifier.
ALTLOG
Alters an existing log identifier.
LISTLOG
Lists the current log identifiers.
Any messages that are followed by (ULOGERR#) or (ULOGMSG#) are MPE/iX errors or
system messages.
Step 3--Logging to Tape or Disk
You must choose whether to log to tape or disk. The overhead required by the logging
operation is comparable on disk or tape. However, other factors should be considered.
For roll-back recovery when logging to tape, the database must be in the system volume
set. For roll-back recovery when logging to disk, the database and the log file must be in
the same volume set. Logging to tape is the more secure option, because a log file residing
on tape is less susceptible to damage from possible system failure than a disk log file. Refer
to appendix G for more information on considerations when logging to disk and tape.
For allocating resources, logging to tape requires that the system be able to make a tape
drive available as long as the database is accessible for modification. If the decision is
made to log to disk, you must use the MPE/iX BUILD command to create a new file and
allocate space on disk, as described in step 4. This allocation must be generous enough to
avoid any possibility of filling the log file to capacity.
Chapter 7
323
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
Step 4--Building a Log File for Logging to Disk
This step is required only when logging to disk. You must build the new file and allocate
space for it on disk by using the MPE/iX BUILD command below.
Syntax
:BUILD logfile;CODE=LOG;DISC= [numrec] [, [numextents] [,initial loc]]
[;DEV= [device]]
Parameters
logfile
NOTE
is the name of the log file being built, as specified in the MPE/iX GETLOG
command. If you specify the AUTO option with the GETLOG command, the
log file name must end with 001 to designate the first file in the log file set.
If you are using roll-back recovery, the log file and the database must be in
the same volume set. To accomplish this, use the device parameter of the
MPE/iX BUILD command and then create the log file in the appropriate group
and account.
numrec
is the maximum number of logical records. Maximum value allowed is
2,147,483,647. Default is 1023.
numextents
is the maximum number of disk extents (from 1 to 32, inclusive). Default is
8.
initialloc
is the number of extents to be initially allocated to the file at the time it is
opened. Default is 1.
device
is the class of the device on which the log file and database are to reside.
This parameter puts the log file and database in the same volume set.
Required for roll-back recovery; is not used for roll-forward recovery.
If the default NOAUTO option is used in the GETLOG command, disk log files must be of
sufficient size to prevent the end-of-file from being reached, because MPE/iX causes the
associated log process to terminate when the log file is filled to capacity. Therefore,
subsequent calls to TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics that require log records to be written to the
log file will fail. If this occurs in the middle of a transaction, the database is left in an
inconsistent state. It then becomes necessary to recover transactions with roll-forward or
roll-back recovery. Because reaching the end of a disk log file is similar in effect to a system
failure, disk log files should be built with a total capacity far exceeding their required size
and consisting of as many extents of contiguous disk sectors as needed to meet the capacity
requirements of the file, subject to the constraints of the MPE/iX file system; of these
extents only enough to satisfy the expected capacity should be allocated initially.
NOTE
324
When the NOAUTO option is used, the MPE/iX SHOWLOGSTATUS command
can be used to determine the space usage of the existing log file and when to
create a new log file using an MPE/iX CHANGELOG command.
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
Example
:BUILD ORDER001;CODE=LOG;DISC=200000,20,7
Step 5--Creating the Log Identifier
You create the log identifier on MPE/iX by using the GETLOG command shown in this
section. A log identifier (logid) is a unique logical name that identifies a system logging
process to which log records are passed. Before using the GETLOG command, use the
MPE/iX LISTLOG command to check if the logid already exists on MPE/iX. The LISTLOG
command lists all logging identifiers, including creator names, log file names, and whether
or not the AUTO option is used.
If the logid exists and was created by someone else, you must specify a different logid. If
the logid exists and was created by you, check the parameters to verify that they are the
ones you want. If you find, for example, that you used the default NOAUTO option and you
want to change it to AUTO, you can either change it with the MPE/iX ALTLOG command, or
you can release the logid with the MPE/iX RELLOG command and then re-create it with the
GETLOG command. You can release a logid only if you are the creator of that logid.
The logid has a maximum of eight characters. Other users can access the log file and
records in the same log file by using the logid you acquire and its password. To access the
logging system directly through MPE/iX, you must have logging (LG) or operator (OP)
capability and supply the identifier and password on the OPENLOG intrinsic.
If you use logging and create a backup copy using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online
Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END), you can use either the default
NOAUTO option or use the AUTO option. At database backup time, using TurboSTORE/iX
7X24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END), the necessary
information (such as the DBSTORE flag, name of the log file in use, the log record number,
date, and time stamps) is recorded in the database root file before backup. At roll-forward
recovery time using DBRECOV, this information is used to determine the log file to be used
and the position in the log file from where roll-forward recovery must begin. With the
NOAUTO option, there is only one log file. When using the AUTO option, the log file next
in sequence in a round-robin fashion is automatically created. Hence there can be more
than one log file needed for roll-forward recovery. In this case, it is very important to
maintain a process of synchronizing the log files with the backup copy. It is required that
the AUTO/NOAUTO option be not changed after backup and while the log process is
active. You can change it only when starting a new log cycle. Refer to step 8 later in this
chapter.
Syntax
:GETLOG logid;LOG=logfile, {DISC/TAPE} [;PASS=password] [;{AUTO/NOAUTO}]
Parameters
logid
Chapter 7
is the logging identifier to be established on the system. It consists of a
string of up to eight characters that is meaningful to the user application.
325
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
NOTE
Do not give the logid and the log file the same name, because the logid is used
to name the RESTART file (used for DBRECOV STOP/RESTART recovery
explained later in this chapter).
logfile
is an MPE/iX file reference that identifies the actual file to which the log
records are written. If the AUTO option is specified, the last three digits
are numeric (001-999). The first log file specified with the MPE/iX GETLOG
command must end with the last three digits equal to 001 if the AUTO
option is used. (A warning message is issued if the log file does not end in
001.) When the AUTO option is used, the next log file will be opened
automatically when the current one is full. The new log file is numbered
consecutively. When the AUTO option is not used, the next log file needs to
be built manually using the CHANGELOG command, when the current log
file is almost full.
DISC
is the class of the device on which the log file is to reside. For roll-back
recovery, the log file and the database must be in the same volume set. If
the log file specified for the logid is a serial file, the AUTO/NOAUTO
option is ignored.
TAPE
is the class of the device on which the log file is to reside.
password
is the password to be associated with the logging identifier. This
parameter protects the log file from unauthorized access. Up to eight
characters are allowed.
AUTO
performs an automatic CHANGELOG command when the disk log file
becomes full. A new log file is automatically created with the same log file
name incremented by one in the digit portion; for example, if the current
log file is ORDER001, the next file will be ORDER002. This enables
logging to continue uninterrupted, also creating a sequence of log files or a
log file set.
If you use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END) to back up your database and plan
on using DBRECOV for roll-forward recovery, you must properly synchronize
the log files with the backup copy because the log files are automatically
created in a round-robin fashion. The SHOW database ALL command of
DBUTIL for the restored backup copy gives you the name of the logfile to
begin roll-forward recovery.
NOAUTO
is the default. No CHANGELOG command is performed when the disk log file
becomes full.
Example
In the following example, the logid is created with the default NOAUTO option and then
changed to specify the AUTO option. The log file name follows the naming convention
required by the CHANGELOG command. The LISTLOG command is used to check if the logid
exists. The ALTLOG command is used to change the AUTO/NOAUTO option.
326
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
:LISTLOG
NO LOGGING IDENTIFIERS ASSIGNED (CIWARN 1231)
:GETLOG ORDERLOG;LOG=ORDER001,DISC;PASS=PASSLOG
:LISTLOG
LOGID
CREATOR
CHANGE
AUTO
CURRENT LOG FILE
ORDERLOG
BEA.MKTG
YES
NO
ORDER001.MKTG.SYS
:ALTLOG ORDERLOG;AUTO
:LISTLOG
LOGID
CREATOR
CHANGE
AUTO
CURRENT LOG FILE
ORDERLOG
BEA.MKTG
YES
YES
ORDER001.MKTG.SYS
Because NOAUTO is assumed by default in the GETLOG command, the disk log file is closed
when it becomes full and logging is shut down unless you manually issue a CHANGELOG
command. When the NOAUTO default is used, you need to verify the capacity of the log
file on a regular basis and issue a CHANGELOG command when necessary. When the AUTO
option is specified as in the ALTLOG command above, logging automatically initiates a
CHANGELOG command when the current log file becomes full.
In the example above, the AUTO option has been specified. Here is what happens when log
file ORDER001 becomes full. Logging initiates a CHANGELOG command causing the log
records to be written to ORDER002, the next log file in the sequence. As each log file
becomes full, logging initiates additional CHANGELOG commands creating log files
automatically until log file ORDER999 becomes full. At this point, the log file name is reset
to ORDER001 and logging continues automatically.
If you use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END) to backup your database and DBRECOV to perform roll-forward recovery,
you must take precautions to synchronize the proper log files with the stored database.
Refer to step 8 for more information.
If you specified the AUTO option as in the preceding example, and you need to restart
logging at logfile001, you can issue an ALTLOG command as shown in the following
example:
:LISTLOG
LOGID
CREATOR
CHANGE
AUTO
CURRENT LOG FILE
ORDERLOG
BEA.MKTG
YES
YES
ORDER026.MKTG.SYS
:ALTLOG ORDERLOG;LOG=ORDER001,DISC
Step 6--Setting the Log Identifier
The two previous steps were executed using MPE/iX commands. At this point, you must
notify the MPE/iX user logging system of the TurboIMAGE/XL logging intention by setting
the log identifier and logid password into the database root file, using the DBUTIL >>SET
command, as shown in the example below:
Chapter 7
327
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
>>SET ORDERS LOGID = ORDERLOG
PASSWORD:? PASSLOG
If no logid password was previously specified
in the GETLOG command, you would press Return
at the prompt.
DBUTIL checks the validity of the logid with MPE/iX, and reports a warning as follows if
the log identifier is not valid or if its password is incorrect:
WARNING:
non-existent LOGID
Once the log identifier has been set into the database, the log identifier parameters cannot
be altered for the logging and recovery system to function correctly.
Step 7--Setting Flags for the Database Backup Copy
In addition to setting the log identifier, certain flags need to be set for the database before
creating the backup. Some flags such as LOGGING, ROLLBACK, and MUSTRECOVER need to be
set only once and can remain enabled unless you change your recovery plan. However, the
database access flag is disabled before the backup and enabled (access allowed) after the
backup. On the contrary, the recovery flag is enabled before the backup and disabled after
the database is recovered. This is done before someone starts accessing the database to
facilitate the recovery of the database after it is restored from the backup copy. If you plan
on using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END) option to back up the database, when it is open for access, you will not be
able to disable the database access flag and enable the recovery flag. If recovery becomes
necessary, you can set these two flags immediately after restoring from the backup and
before starting the recovery process. Use DBUTIL to set the following flags in the root file
before making the backup copy of the database:
• Enable Logging Flag. This flag ensures that all database modifications are logged
and available for later use by the recovery system, if necessary. When you enable the
database for logging, DBUTIL checks whether a database backup copy has been stored
with DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END). If not, DBUTIL issues a warning message. Because the database is
stored after logging has been first enabled, the DBUTIL warning message can be
interpreted as a prompt to store the database. If you plan to use roll-forward recovery,
use the following command to enable logging (implies roll-forward logging):
>>ENABLE database name FOR LOGGING
WARNING: database modified and not DBSTOREd
If you plan to use roll-back recovery, enabling the roll-back flag will automatically
enable the logging flag.
Remember that, if logging to disk, the log identifier must be created before the
preceding command can execute successfully (refer to "Step 5--Creating the Log
Identifier").
328
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
• Enable Rollback Flag. If you plan to use roll-back recovery, use the following
command to enable roll-back recovery:
>>ENABLE database name FOR ROLLBACK
After the logid is set and the log file has been built, the >>ENABLE command for
roll-back recovery shown above automatically enables logging for the database.
However, the >>DISABLE database name FOR ROLLBACK command will not
automatically disable logging.
• Enable MUSTRECOVER Flag. When the MUSTRECOVER flag is enabled, only readers
can access the database after a system failure until the database is recovered. This
prevents modifications to a potentially inconsistent database.
>>ENABLE database name FOR MUSTRECOVER
After the logid is set and the log file has been built, logging is automatically enabled
when the ENABLE command is used to enable MUSTRECOVER. However, the >>DISABLE
database name FOR MUSTRECOVER command will not automatically disable logging.
• Disable Access Flag. By disabling the database for user access, you ensure that
modifications cannot be made to the database after restoring it. Any attempt to open
the database with a call to DBOPEN returns an error message. Access to the database
should be disabled before storing the backup copy, so that in the event of a system
failure the database is restored with access disabled. This prevents users from opening
the database and making modifications before recovery is executed. Disabling access to
the database is also useful as a general security measure to prevent database access at
unauthorized times. (Read the note below.) The DBUTIL command for disabling access is
shown below:
>>DISABLE database name FOR ACCESS
• Enable Recovery Flag. Enabling the database for recovery allows the
TurboIMAGE/XL recovery system to access the database. The database is stored with
recovery enabled so that when it is restored, it is ready for recovery. (Read the note
below.) The DBUTIL command for enabling roll-forward recovery is shown below:
>>ENABLE database name FOR RECOVERY
NOTE
If you plan on using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END) when the database is open for access,
you will not be able to set the DISABLE FOR ACCESS or ENABLE FOR
RECOVERY flags for the backup copy. In the event recovery becomes
necessary, set these flags immediately after restoring the database from
backup.
The database can be stored with DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
Chapter 7
329
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END)—after the preceding flags have been set in the
database. Logging status can be checked by referring to the procedure in "Logging Status"
later in this chapter.
Step 8--Making a Database Backup Copy
This step is required for roll-forward recovery. It is recommended (for protection in the
event of a hard disk failure), but not required, for roll-back recovery. There are two ways to
make a database backup copy:
• use DBSTORE
• use TurboSTORE/iX 7X24 True-Online Backup with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option
Using DBSTORE
This explains the backup process using DBSTORE. See the section after this for information
on using TurboSTORE/iX 7X24 True-Online Backup.
Make a database backup copy using DBSTORE to store a copy of the database with flags
(access disabled, recovery enabled, logging enabled) set as specified in step 7. Because the
correspondence between log files and database backup copies is crucial, DBSTORE sets a
DBSTORE flag in the database root file, along with a time stamp designating the date and
time of the DBSTORE operation, before storing the database. DBSTORE can only store one
database at a time and requires that the database be closed during backup. Also, it does
not store all external files, such as third-party index files, along with the database.
NOTE
The DBSTORE flag is cleared by the first modification to the database (DBPUT,
DBDELETE, or DBUPDATE) indicating that the database no longer corresponds to
the stored copy.
Before logging is enabled, DBUTIL checks the DBSTORE flag to ensure that the working
database is the same as the database backup copy. For example, suppose a database is
stored and some modifications to the database are made before logging is enabled. If you
then try to enable logging, DBUTIL, determining that the DBSTORE flag has been cleared,
prints a message indicating that the present state of the (modified) database does not
correspond to the stored version. If the message is ignored, the resulting log file will not
contain all of the transactions that actually occurred against the working database.
Consequently, a recovery using the stored copy and the incomplete log file may fail or yield
erroneous results.
The following is an example of how to run DBSTORE:
:RUN DBSTORE.PUB.SYS
WHICH DATABASE? ORDERS
DATABASE STORED
END OF PROGRAM
330
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
NOTE
If you plan to restore the TurboIMAGE/XL database on an MPE V system,
use the TRANSPORT option of the DBSTORE or STORE command. Chapter 8
contains detailed information about the DBSTORE command. Refer to the
MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual for more information about STORE
options.
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
This section describes the use of TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup with the
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option.
When multiple databases and related files are involved, you may use the MPE/iX STORE
command (with or without the ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) to collectively
copy them to tape or other storage media and, if necessary, collectively restore them by
using the MPE/iX RESTORE command. You need to have either SM or OP capability to do
this and should have an understanding of the standard rules and features associated with
STORE and RESTORE. Note that when using the STORE command without the
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option, neither the DBSTORE flag nor the time stamp
(signifying the date and time the backup copy was made) is set in the database root file.
When you use MPE/iX STORE command (with the option ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END), you are using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup which does the
following:
1. Backs up multiple databases along with their related files including the TC file,
third-party index files, jumbo data set files, and B-Tree index files.
2. Sets DBSTORE flag in the root file(s)
3. Sets the time stamp designating the date and time of the backup operation before
storing the database.
4. Quiesces the database if it is open for write access. The database is quiesced at a point
when no active transaction is in progress.
5. Posts log records if enabled for logging, designating the beginning and end of quiesce.
DBRECOV uses these records to determine the starting point of the roll-forward recovery.
The most significant advantage is that your database can even be open for access when you
start the backup process and can continue to remain open for access. The backup becomes
a True-Online Backup.
When performing a True-Online backup, there is a point in time when the backup
occurred, especially when the database is open for modification. This is helpful when
performing a roll-forward recovery to ensure that all files are in a logically consistent state
at the same time for backup and later a subsequent restore for recovery. This point is
called the sync point, where all data set files are synchronized. Also, it means this is the
point when the TurboIMAGE/XL database is quiesced for a short duration, that is, it is in
a logically consistent state and there is no active transaction in progress. All ongoing
transactions, if any, are allowed to be completed before the sync point.
The ONLINE=START option allows the sync point at the beginning of a True-Online
Chapter 7
331
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
backup, and the ONLINE=END option permits the sync point at the end of a
True-Online backup. The ONLINE=START option has the following advantages over
ONLINE=END:
• Allows the database to be restored on an earlier version of MPE/iX.
• Allows faster partial (selective, not @.@.@) restores, since sync point at end requires
RESTORE to read the log files (used for backup) from the end of the last piece of media.
• Spreads log data throughout the backup media, and hence, is less vulnerable to media
errors.
NOTE
All True-Online backups created with the sync point at the beginning
(ONLINE=START) can be restored on any MPE/iX system. However, backups
created with the sync point at the end (ONLINE=END) can only be restored
on MPE/iX Release 5.5 or later. If you know at the time of performing the
backup that the database(s) must be restored onto an earlier system, create
the backup with the sync point at the beginning. This is independent of using
user logging and DBRECOV.
To perform roll-forward recovery of your database stored using True-Online backup, the
following requirements must be adhered to:
• Your system must be on MPE/iX Release 5.5 or later.
• If you used the AUTO option with the GETLOG command, ensure that the log files
following the backup are properly synchronized with the backup, especially in a
situation when the last log file number, 999, switches to 001. It is recommended that
you remove (STORE and PURGE) all log files preceding (but not including) this backup.
The SHOW database ALL command gives the name of the log file from which the
recovery will begin.
• LOG process must remain active when storing the database even when the database is
not open. That is, LOG logid,STOP must not be issued before storing the database.
This is because the logging information which is dynamic in nature, is incorporated in
the root file when the database is stored. This dynamic logging information can only be
obtained when the log process is active. It is used later when performing roll-forward
recovery.
• One of the new options, ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END of TurboSTORE/iX, must
be employed when performing the backup.
:FILE musicbk;dev=tape
:STORE music; musicbk;ONLINE=START
• After the backup is completed, purge all log files preceding the one in use when the
backup was initiated. It is essential that you retain the one used when backup was
initiated and the ones following that. These are the log files that will be needed later to
perform roll-forward recovery.
To find out the log file used by True-Online backup, employ the SHOW database ALL
command of DBUTIL, which displays the time, date, and the log file name used for the
332
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
True-online backup. An example is given below:
Access is enabled.
.
.
.
Logging is enabled.
.
.
.
Database last stored using True-Online Backup and
log file NLOG007 on THU, JAN 18, 1996, 6:06 PM.
If you used the AUTO option with GETLOG command, you may purge log files NLOG001
up to NLOG006. When you continue updating the database, log files up to NLOG999
will be automatically created when needed. After that, the log file NLOG001 is
automatically created and used as is done today. If the log file, next in sequence to be
automatically created, already exists, an error will be generated. As the log files are
automatically created in a round-robin fashion as done today for the AUTO option, you
will have to take extra measures to ensure that the log files, logically related to your
database for recovery, are properly maintained. One way is to always start a new log
cycle beginning with the first log file, NLOG001, of the log file set. If you did not use the
AUTO option, you do not need to purge any files.
Example
Following is an example of how to store your database using this method:
:BUILD DBUSASF;DISC=5000
:STORE DBUSA;*DBUSASF;ONLINE=START
>>
TURBO-STORE/RESTORE VERSION C.55.07 B5152AA
(C) 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.
STORE dbusa;*dbusasf;ONLINE=START
SUN, MAR 23, 1997,
<<
4:05 PM
ONLINE BACKUP UTILIZED DISC SPACE FOR LOG ON THE FOLLOWING VOLSETS:
MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET :
0 KB
DATABASE INFORMATION:
TURBOIMAGE DATABASE: DBUSA
FILES STORED :
.RECTOL
.QALANG
4
FILES STORED :
4
TOTAL MEDIA WRITTEN :
1
Chapter 7
333
Logging and Recovery
Logging Preparation
Benefits of TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
The benefits of using True-Online backup to store TurboIMAGE/XL databases regardless
of logging enabled are as follows:
• Stores the database when it is open for read/write access, or closed.
• Stores one or more TurboIMAGE/XL databases, along with their related files including
the TC file, third-party index files, jumbo data sets, and B-Tree index files, if any.
• Stores the database after setting DBSTORE flag, time stamp, and other necessary
information in the root file.
• Store without the need to stop the user log process before backup, if logging is enabled.
Also, you do not need to start a new log cycle after the backup. Therefore, the
roll-forward recovery, if enabled for roll-forward, need not commence from the
beginning of the first log file.
NOTE
If your database is opened exclusively, such as with mode 3 or 7, True-Online
backup does not store your database, and reports an error:
DATABASE NOT STORED: UNABLE TO STORE SOME DATABASE FILES
BASED ON THE SELECTION CRITERIA, NO FILES WERE STORED. (S/R
1713)
Unlike DBSTORE, STORE with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option allows your
database(s) to be open for access when you perform the backup.
334
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Status
Logging Status
The DBUTIL >>SHOW command can be used to display the log identifier and the status of
the flags for access, recovery, and logging. If TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) is used to back up the database, it can
also display the date, time, and the logfile used during backup. The following example
illustrates roll-forward recovery and the commands used to set the logid and flags into the
database, as presented in this chapter. If the steps discussed earlier in this chapter have
been followed, the database can be stored. The password (denoted by *******) does not
appear on the screen.
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>SET ORDERS LOGID=ORDERLOG
PASSWORD *******
LOGID: ORDERLOG IS VALID
PASSWORD IS CORRECT
>>DISABLE ORDERS FOR ACCESS
Access is disabled
>>ENABLE ORDERS FOR RECOVERY, LOGGING, MUSTRECOVER
WARNING: Database modified and not DBSTOREd
Recovery is enabled
Logging is enabled
Mustrecover is enabled
>>SHOW ORDERS ALL
For database ORDERS
Maintenance word is not present.
Access is disabled.
Autodefer is disabled.
Dumping is disabled.
Rollback recovery is disabled.
Recovery is enabled.
ILR is disabled.
Mustrecover is enabled.
Logging is enabled.
Prefetch is disabled.
Indexing is disabled.
HWMPUT is disabled.
Restart is disabled.
Database last stored using True-Online Backup and
Thu, JAN 18, 1996, 3:39 PM
Database has been modified since last store date.
Shadowing is disabled.
Subsystem access is READ/WRITE.
CIUPDATE is allowed.
Dynamic capacity expansion is not used.
Chapter 7
335
Logging and Recovery
Logging Status
Database has at least one indexed dataset.
BTREEMODE1 is off, wildcard = "@".
Logid:
ORDERLOG is valid.
password is correct.
XM log set
:
XM log set type :
XM log set size :
The language is
default XM user log set
for volume set MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET
circular
32 megabytes
0 - NATIVE-3000.
Buffer specifications:
8(1/2),9(3/4),10(5/6),11(7/8),12(9/10),13(11/12),14(13/14),
15(15/16),16(17/18),17(19/120)
No other users are accessing the database.
NOTE
336
The displayed buffer specifications are the default TurboIMAGE/V values.
These specifications or any new ones that you set are displayed for MPE V
compatibility, but they are not used by TurboIMAGE/XL which uses a large
default value. See chapter 8 or appendix H for more information.
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
Logging Maintenance
You should determine a log maintenance cycle for the database. For example, suppose the
database is maintained on a daily cycle. This means that, at the beginning of each day, the
log process is initiated from the console with the LOG command and the flags are set (see
the following discussion). At the end of the day, the log process is stopped from the console
and the flags are reset for storage of the database backup copy. If you use TurboSTORE/iX
7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) to back up
the database, the log process must remain active; you will not need to start and stop the
log process every day.
The duration of this maintenance cycle depends on at least two considerations:
• The amount of time needed to store the database periodically, and
• The amount of time required to recover the database from the log file using DBRECOV if
the system fails.
The more often the database backup copy is stored, the smaller the log file and the shorter
recovery time will be. Regular backup of the database is recommended, though not
required when using roll-back recovery. Refer to appendix G for a brief overview of the
disadvantages and benefits of logging to disk and logging to tape. This appendix also
includes sample job streams for the logging cycle.
Starting the Logging Process
After a database backup copy has been stored as described earlier in "Logging
Preparation," a logging process must be allocated to the log identifier so that it can be
activated. A log process is an MPE/iX system process responsible for buffering log records
in memory. If the log file is on tape, the log process also buffers the log records on disk
before writing them to the log file. This process is initiated from the console using the
MPE/iX LOG command. To issue the LOG command, you must have logging (LG) or operator
(OP) capability. The ALLOW command can be used to transfer permission to enter this
console command.
Syntax
:LOG logid, { START
RESTART
STOP
}
Parameters
logid
is the name of the logid to be activated; the logid must have been set
previously into the database root file.
START
initiates a log process for the first time.
RESTART
initiates a log process when appending new log records to an old log file.
STOP
terminates a log process. Termination does not take effect until all current
users have closed the log file by calling the CLOSELOG intrinsic.
Chapter 7
337
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
Example
LOG ORDERLOG, START
If the log process is stopped using the LOG command, but a database backup copy is not
generated at that time, the RESTART option must be used to resume logging to the same log
file.
To determine whether or not a log process is running, use the MPE/iX SHOWLOGSTATUS
command to determine the log identifiers of active log processes. SHOWLOGSTATUS displays
the percentage of records in the log file if the logid output is to disk. This information may
be helpful in determining when to perform a CHANGELOG command (see "CHANGELOG
Capability" in this section). The following sample listing was produced by a
SHOWLOGSTATUS command:
:SHOWLOGSTATUS
LOGID
MYLOG
TAPELOG
ORDERLOG
CHANGE
AUTO
USERS
NO
YES
YES
NO
4
1
2
YES
STATE
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
CUR-RECS
100
5738
500
MAX-REC
%USED
CUR-SET
1000
10%
1000
50%
1
1
2
Re-enabling Logging
In the event that logging for roll-forward recovery is disabled and needs to be re-enabled,
the database should be stored with DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) before logging is re-enabled. This
ensures that the DBSTORE flag and time stamp set when logging was first enabled are not
reset when logging is re-enabled.
Setting Database Flags
After logging is initiated, you can allow users to modify the database by running DBUTIL
and enabling the database for access. You should also disable recovery at this time. This
provides a safeguard against unintended recovery if DBRECOV is executed from a stream file
against several databases simultaneously. For example:
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>ENABLE ORDERS FOR ACCESS
Access is Enabled
>>DISABLE ORDERS FOR RECOVERY
Recovery is Disabled
338
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
CHANGELOG Capability
The MPE/iX CHANGELOG feature provides a continuous MPE/iX user logging process, with
the ability to change tape or disk log files when they reach capacity without stopping the
user logging process. User logging also keeps track of the order of the files in the log file
set. Parts of the CHANGELOG record contain the file set number (001-999) and the device
type of the file names in the record. In addition, there are records for the previous file in a
set, first file in a set, and current file in a set. This format allows recovery to always start
at the beginning of the file set (or at any point within the file set if the sequence number is
used), and reopen the log files on the same device type that they were created.
The user issuing the CHANGELOG command must be the creator of the logid. If the user
issuing CHANGELOG is not the creator of the logid, either LG or OP capability is required. If
the mirror database method (DBRECOV STOP/RESTART) is being used, CHANGELOG makes
logging without interruption on the primary system possible.
NOTE
If the database needs to be recovered when you are using the MPE/iX
CHANGELOG feature, the DBRECOV recovery facility may start at the first log file
in the logging cycle (for example, LOGF001), or at a different point (for
example, LOGF013) if you used TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup.
Keep this in mind when determining the length of your logging cycle. See
"Recovering the Database" later in this section for a sample scenario.
Syntax
:CHANGELOG logid [;DEV=device]
Parameters
logid
is the name of the currently active logging process.
device
is the class of the device of the new log file (DISC, TAPE). If the device
class specified is DISC, the file is created in the logid creator's logon group
and account.
Example
:CHANGELOG ORDERLOG; DEV=DISC
Note that the logid specified must be that of the currently active logging process. If the log
file is changed using ALTLOG, no linkage of the log file set is provided. A CHANGELOG
command can only be used on a logid set up with the GETLOG command. The CHANGELOG
command terminates if the logging process state is INACTIVE, INITIALIZING, or
RECOVERING. The command will also terminate if a CHANGELOG command is already
pending. The following message is displayed on $STDLIST:
INVALID STATE OF PROCESS
After issuing the CHANGELOG command, if the logid is valid, CHANGELOG records are posted
Chapter 7
339
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
to the current log file. The current log file is closed and the new log file is opened. A
message similar to the following message is displayed on $STDLIST and the console to
confirm the change:
Log file for logid ORDERLOG has been changed from ORDER001 to ORDER002
If the new log file is a serial file on tape, the following message appears on the console
requesting the mounting of a new log file (in this case the logid is ORDERLOG):
Mount new tape for logid ORDERLOG
If a LISTLOG command is executed while the logging process is performing a CHANGELOG
command, the file name displayed is that of the current log file. The log file name is not
updated until the CHANGELOG sequence successfully completes. The SHOWLOGSTATUS
command may be used to display the current status of a logging process to determine if a
CHANGELOG is taking place.
The following example shows a LISTLOG display. A CHANGELOG is currently taking place on
log file ORDER001; and, because the CHANGELOG to ORDER002 is not yet successfully
completed, ORDER001 is displayed:
:LISTLOG
LOGID
CREATOR
CHANGE
AUTO
CURRENT LOG FILE
MYLOG
TAPELOG
ORDERLOG
DATA.SYS
DATA.SYS
TST.MKTG
NO
YES
YES
NO
MY.PUB.SYS
TAPE001
ORDER001.MKTG.SYS
YES
Recovering the Database
When a database needs to be recovered, DBRECOV starts with the first log file written to in
a given logging cycle, or it may start with the log file in use when backup was done using
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END
option). If you used True-Online Backup, the SHOW database ALL command of DBUTIL
displays the name of the logfile for starting recovery.
To illustrate this concept, consider the following scenario when logging cycle began with a
logfile LOGF001 and DBSTORE was used for backup.
The MPE/iX CHANGELOG command or the GETLOG AUTO feature is being used to log
transactions to a log file called LOGF001. When LOGF001 fills up, user logging
automatically appends LOGF001 with a CHANGELOG record indicating that
TurboIMAGE/XL is now logging to file LOGF002. This process can continue until either
LOGF999 is reached or another file is encountered that has the same name as the one
being created by user logging.
Now, assume that the database needs to be recovered and the logging cycle is currently
writing to LOGF020. Note that DBRECOV will begin recovery at LOGF001, even if you know
or want to recover only the transactions from, for example, log file LOGF013.
340
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
To illustrate another example when TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) was used to back up the database, assume
that the log file in use during backup was LOGF041. If a database needs to be recovered
and the logging cycle is currently writing to LOGF065, DBRECOV will begin recovery with
LOGF041 (following the backup) and will continue until LOGF065.
The resulting impact on recovery time is why serious consideration should be given to the
logging cycle. The shorter the logging cycle is, the shorter the recovery time.
Ending the Logging Maintenance Cycle
At the end of the specified maintenance cycle (for example, the end of day) do the following:
1. If you plan on using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START
or ONLINE=END option), omit this step. Otherwise, stop the logging process at the
console with the LOG command.
2. If you plan on using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START
or ONLINE=END option) when the database is open for access, you must omit this
step. In other cases, including when using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) when the database is closed,
run DBUTIL and do the following tasks:
• Disable access to the database.
• Enable recovery of the database.
3. Store a database backup copy (required for roll-forward recovery) with DBSTORE or
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END
option).
Example
Example when using DBSTORE:
:LOG ORDERLOG,STOP
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>DISABLE ORDERS FOR ACCESS
Access is Disabled
>>ENABLE ORDERS FOR RECOVERY
Recovery is Enabled
>>EXIT
END OF PROGRAM
:RUN DBSTORE.PUB.SYS
WHICH DATA BASE? ORDERS
DATA BASE STORED
END OF PROGRAM
Example when using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START
or ONLINE=END option) and database is open for access:
Chapter 7
341
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
:file orderssf;dev=disc
:store orders;*orderssf;online=start
>>TURBO-STORE/RESTORE VERSION C.55.07 B5152AA <<
(C) 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.
STORE
orders;*orderssf;ONLINE=START
FRI, APR 18, 1997, 12:01 PM
ONLINE BACKUP UTILIZED DISC SPACE FOR LOG ON THE FOLLOWING VOLSETS:
MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET :
0 KB
DATABASE INFORMATION:
TURBOIMAGE DATABASE: ORDERS
FILES STORED :
.RECTOL
.QALANG
7
FILES STORED :
7
TOTAL MEDIA WRITTEN :
1
Logging Results
All database modifications (DBPUTs, DBUPDATEs, and DBDELETEs) are logged; and in modes 1
through 4 calls to DBOPEN, DBCLOSE, DBBEGIN, DBXBEGIN, DBEND, DBXEND, and DBMEMO
are logged to the log file. Each DBBEGIN, DBXBEGIN, DBEND, and DBXEND causes a log
record to be written to the log file that includes such information as time, date, and user
buffer. These log records are used by DBRECOV to identify logical transactions.
When using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option), log records designating the beginning and end of a quiesce point
triggered by True-Online backup are also written to the current log file. DBRECOV uses
these log records to determine the starting point of recovery of the database. Transactions
following the quiesce point will be used to recover the database.
Log Records
DBOPEN log records contain a time stamp recorded in the database root file, indicating the
date and the time of the last backup using DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online
Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) (this time stamp is referenced
by DBRECOV roll-forward recovery). DBOPEN log records also include the user identifier, log
identifier, and the name, group, and account of the user, database, and program.
DBUPDATE log records include both the new and the old data (before and after images);
DBDELETE includes a copy of the deleted data (before image); DBPUT includes the record
being added (after image).
342
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Logging Maintenance
Log File Time Stamps
The two log file time stamps are as follows:
• The DBSTORE time stamp set at the time the last database backup copy was made using
DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option). This time stamp is used by roll-forward recovery. The DBSTORE
time stamp is fixed and does not change once the database backup copy has been made.
• The roll-back time stamp created at the time the first DBOPEN is executed against the
database. The roll-back time stamp is updated to the real time of the first DBOPEN
following each close of the database, providing a roll-back termination point should a
roll-back recovery be required.
Chapter 7
343
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
Roll-forward recovery can be executed to bring databases back to a likeness of their state
at the time of a hard system failure (for example, a disk head crash or a system failure
while the database is enabled for AUTODEFER). Roll-forward recovery requires a
synchronized backup copy of the database and the log file. (Refer to "Logging Preparation"
earlier in this chapter for roll-forward logging information.)
When executing roll-forward recovery following a system failure, the TurboIMAGE/XL
utility DBRECOV recovers the database physical and logical integrity by re-applying (to a
backup copy of the database) all the completed transactions that were written to the log
file. It does not re-apply incomplete transactions.
Recovery of the database requires restoring the backup copy and running the recovery
system to re-execute the database modifications from the log file. In addition, the >FILE
command of the DBRECOV utility can be used to create individual user recovery files and to
return information regarding the successful recovery or suppression of transactions. The
information from these files lets each user know where to resume transactions within the
database following recovery. Refer to the discussion of the DBRECOV >FILE command in
chapter 8.
Although the logging and recovery system is designed to successfully re-execute
transactions that completed before the system failure, some transactions may not be
recovered. The possible causes of this situation include the following:
• One or more records could be lost in the log system buffers if the system fails before
they are written to the log file.
• A transaction may have originally failed to complete due to the failure, and is therefore
suppressed.
• A transaction may depend upon some database modification that was suppressed. This
condition indicates inadequate locking between processes.
• An incorrect version of the database was restored. Recovery will yield invalid and
erroneous results if this occurs.
If any transaction fails to be recovered, all subsequent calls within the same transaction
block are suppressed as well. For information about transaction blocks, refer to "FILE
Command" later in this chapter.
CAUTION
344
In the event of a system failure, do not restart logging before running
DBRECOV. Log records may have been lost due to the system failure. If logging
is resumed without a recovery, the resulting discontinuous log file would
cause invalid results in the event of a subsequent recovery. The same is true
for making modifications to the database. The database should be disabled for
user access until recovery has completed. To prevent access to the database
after a system failure without recovery, enable the MUSTRECOVER feature
when you enable recovery.
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
Enabling the Roll-Forward Feature
To enable the roll-forward feature, complete the following sequence:
1. Set the logid and build a log file (if logging to disk) as shown in steps 2 through 6 of
"Logging Preparation" earlier in this chapter.
2. For each particular database, disable access and enable the logging and roll-forward
features by entering the following DBUTIL commands. You can also enable the
MUSTRECOVER option if you wish to use it.
>>DISABLE database name FOR ACCESS
>>ENABLE database name FOR LOGGING,RECOVERY
>>ENABLE database name FOR MUSTRECOVER
Enable any other appropriate flags as discussed in step 7 under "Logging Preparation."
If you plan on using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup, your database must be
closed so that you can set these flags to enable the roll-forward feature. For subsequent
true-online backups, you have an option to set the ACCESS and RECOVERY flags.
Remember that before you start the roll-forward recovery, the RECOVER flag must be
enabled and ACCESS flag be disabled.
3. Make a backup copy of the database as discussed in step 8 under "Logging
Preparation."
4. Start the logging process and enable user access to the appropriate databases as shown
in "Logging Maintenance," earlier in this chapter.
Restoring the Database Backup Copy
After a hard system failure, and before roll-forward recovery can begin, you must restore
the database to the state it was in when backup was done. This is done by running the
DBRESTOR program (if DBSTORE was used for backup, as shown below) or by using the
MPE/iX RESTORE facility after purging the damaged database. All databases and files must
be restored to their original group and account, and you must have privileged mode (PM)
capability. Ensure that recovery is enabled and access disabled to prevent user
modifications before the recovery system executes.
If you restored a database backed up with TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option), you may need to enable recovery and
disable access. Refer to the DBUTIL >>SHOW command and the following example. If the
flags were set as recommended prior to making the backup copy, no changes are needed.
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>PURGE ORDERS
Database ORDERS has been PURGED
>>EXIT
Chapter 7
Note: this is damaged database.
345
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
END OF PROGRAM
:RUN DBRESTOR.PUB.SYS
WHICH DATABASE? ORDERS
DATABASE RESTORED
END OF PROGRAM
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
>>SHOW ORDERS FLAGS
For database ORDERS
Access is disabled.
Autodefer is disabled.
Dumping is disabled.
Rollback recovery is disabled.
Recovery is enabled.
ILR is disabled.
Mustrecover is enabled.
Logging is enabled.
Prefetch is disabled.
Indexing is disabled.
HWMPUT is disabled.
Restart is disabled.
>>EXIT
END OF PROGRAM
In the above example, recovery is enabled and access is disabled. You do not need to
change flags.
If you used TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option), you would use RESTORE command as follows:
:restore *orderssf;orders;show
>> TURBO-STORE/RESTORE VERSION C.55.07 B5152AA
(C) 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.
RESTORE
<<
*orderssf;orders;SHOW
FRI, APR 18, 1997, 12:03 PM
WILL RESTORE
FILENAME GROUP
ORDERS .RECTOL
ORDERS01.RECTOL
ORDERS02.RECTOL
ORDERS03.RECTOL
ORDERS04.RECTOL
ORDERS05.RECTOL
ORDERS06.RECTOL
7 FILES
ACCOUNT
.QALANG
.QALANG
.QALANG
.QALANG
.QALANG
.QALANG
.QALANG
; NUMBER OF FILES ON MEDIA
VOLUME RESTRICTIONS
DISC
DISC
DISC
DISC
DISC
DISC
DISC
:C
:C
:C
:C
:C
:C
:C
SECTORS
16
96
96
1584
80
128
160
7
CODE
PRIV
PRIV
PRIV
PRIV
PRIV
PRIV
PRIV
MEDIA
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DATABASE INFORMATION:
TURBOIMAGE DATABASE: ORDERS
346
.RECTOL
.QALANG
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
FILES RESTORED :
FILES RESTORED :
7
7
:
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
HP30391C.07.00 TurboIMAGE/XL: DBUTIL (C) COPYRIGHT HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 1987
>>show orders flags
For database ORDERS
Maintenance word is not present.
Access is enabled.
Autodefer is disabled.
Dumping is disabled.
Rollback recovery is disabled.
Recovery is disabled.
ILR is disabled.
Mustrecover is enabled.
Logging is enabled.
Prefetch is disabled.
Indexing is disabled.
HWMPUT is disabled.
Restart is disabled.
>>exit
In the above example, you will need to disable the access flag and enable the recovery flag.
Several databases can log to the same log file simultaneously because each call to DBOPEN
specifies the fully qualified name of the database. If all databases that logged to the same
log file are to be recovered simultaneously, then the appropriate backup copy of each
database must be restored prior to running the recovery system. However, if the recovery
system begins execution before a database has been restored, accidental recovery is
prevented if recovery has been disabled on the working database, as specified earlier in
"Logging Maintenance."
The TurboIMAGE/XL logging and recovery systems depend upon the exact correspondence
between the stored database backup copy and the working database on disk at the time
logging was initiated. The DBSTORE flag and time stamp, properly used, enforce this
condition. Therefore, it is recommended that you use DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24
True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) to generate backup
copies.
For flexibility, in the event that you might use the STORE command without
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option to store the backup, the capability exists to
defeat the time stamp and DBSTORE flag mechanism, by using the NOSTAMP and
NOSTORE options of the >CONTROL command of DBRECOV. In this case, you must assume
responsibility for maintaining the correspondence between the backup copy and the log
file. Note that a database recovered with the wrong log file causes DBRECOV to generate
erroneous data in the database and that this condition cannot always be detected.
Modifications to the database before the database is recovered and with logging disabled
also cause the recovered database to be incorrect.
Chapter 7
347
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
Performing Roll-Forward Recovery
To complete the transaction roll-forward process following a hard system failure, perform
the following steps:
1. Following a start recovery operation to bring up the system, locate the applicable log
file medium to be used for roll-forward recovery.
If logging to tape, the correct tape needs to be mounted. If using the MPE/iX CHANGELOG
feature and there are multiple log file tapes, this will be the first tape in the series if
DBSTORE was used. If TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) was used to backup the database and
AUTO option is used, this may not be the first file in the series. If logging to disk,
TurboIMAGE/XL automatically locates the first log file in the given logging cycle after
checking for the logid in the root file. When TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) is used, necessary information such
as the log file name in use, log file record numbers, date, and time of backup is recorded
in the root file before backup. When the database is restored from this backup, the SHOW
database ALL command of DBUTIL displays this information.
Note that the system boot-up process writes a crash record to the last volume of the
user log set. If a start recovery operation is not performed, this will not occur, causing
DBRECOV to issue a warning.
2. Check your backup listings to see when your database was last stored. If time permits,
store your damaged database with DBSTORE. Having a current backup of your damaged
database is an extra measure to protect against lost data due to a damaged log file.
3. Restore the backup of the database; this backup was created at the beginning of the
current logging maintenance cycle. Use the SHOW database command of DBUTIL to
find out which log file will be used to start recovery. If the TurboSTORE/iX 7x24
True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) was used for
backup, the log file name is displayed. Otherwise, it will be the first log file in this
logging cycle.
4. Enter the following MPE/iX command:
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
5. If you used the MPE/iX STORE command without ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END
option to store the database when you started your logging cycle, enter the >CONTROL
NOSTORE command of DBRECOV.
6. Enter the DBRECOV >RECOVER command below (where database name is the name of
the individual database to be recovered):
>RECOVER database name [,database name2,...,database nameN]
7. Enter all other desired DBRECOV commands (>FILE, >CONTROL with other options
except NOSTORE shown above, and >PRINT.) Refer to chapter 8 for more information.
8. If you want to recover the database(s), enter the DBRECOV >RUN command. Otherwise,
348
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
enter the >EXIT command; DBRECOV terminates, and no recovery takes place.
>RUN
After the >RUN command is given, DBRECOV recovers the specified databases, creates
user recovery files, and terminates. After entering the >RUN command, DBRECOV asks
you to mount the log tape (if the log file medium is tape). Continue the roll-forward
process as directed by messages returned to both the console and the terminal screens.
9. If the CHANGELOG command or the GETLOG AUTO option was used during logging and
the logging file medium is tape or the next disk file in the log set is missing, the
following message appears on the terminal screen and the console:
Reply CONtinue on console when logfile is ready
When the required log file is available, enter the response CON to the console request
from DBRECOV.
Note that the response is in a form similar to REPLY for a tape mount used when storing or
restoring tapes; that is, you need to supply the Process Identification Number (PIN). For
recovery to succeed, you must have access to the log file. This implies either knowing the
logging identifier password and having system manager (SM) or operator (OP) capability,
or being the creator of the log identifier with read access to the log file if it resides in a
different logon group and account. If the log file is on tape, the operator must reply with
the proper volume identifier.
NOTE
If the operator is unsure of the volume identifier, it is displayed on the console
when the tape is mounted.
If the database creator and the creator of the log identifier are not the same, and if the disk
log file and the database are in two separate accounts, follow the steps listed below for
recovery to proceed:
1. Assign a maintenance word to the database.
2. Log on as the creator of the log identifier.
3. Fully qualify the database name when issuing the >RECOVER command.
4. Specify the maintenance word.
If you want to use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option) for roll-forward recovery, follow the steps below. For this
illustration, it is assumed that you are starting with the first log cycle with the AUTO
option, and recovery is needed after two backups.
1. Create a logid with the AUTO option.
2. Build a logfile, LOGF001.
3. Use DBUTIL to set the logid and enable the logging flag. You may optionally set the
MUSTRECOVER flag as well.
Chapter 7
349
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
4. Start the log process:
:LOG logid,START
5. Back up the database using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) and logfile LOGF001. Let this be backup
number 1.
6. Access the database for modifications. The current log file is LOGF005.
7. Back up the database, while open for access, using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online
Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option). Let this be backup
number 2.
Note that LOGF005 was in use. At this point, you have an option to store log files
LOGF001 to LOGF004 to another storage media for added protection. You can then
purge them from the system if you want to continue the log process beyond logfile
LOGF999.
8. Continue accessing the database until there is an interruption (for example, a system
failure). The current log file is LOG009.
9. Reboot the system using the START RECOVERY option.
10.Optionally store the damaged database. Purge database using DBUTIL.
11.Restore the database from backup number 2.
12.Use DBUTIL to disable access and enable recovery. You may use SHOW database ALL
to get backup information.
13.Use DBRECOV for roll-forward recovery. The root file contains information about the
starting point for recovery. The recovery will start with the logfile LOGF005, following
the backup (DBQUIESCE log records).
14.You can back up the recovered database using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online
Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) to keep recovery time short.
Remember the access flag is disabled and recovery is enabled. When you restore from
this backup for roll-forward recovery, you will not need to execute step 12 above.
15.At this point, you can either restart the logging process (continue with LOGF009) or
start a new log process with LOGF001. If you want to start a new log process, you will
need to stop the log process and remove (optionally store and purge) the log files used so
far, LOGF005 through LOGF009 (or LOGF001 through LOGF009, if you did not purge
in step 7).
Note that if you plan on using TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with
ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) for an existing database and logging is
already enabled, you will not need to execute steps 1 through 4.
Recovery from a Stream File
A stream file may specify all of the databases logging to one log file for roll-forward
recovery. If one of the databases has not been restored at the time the stream file is run,
recovery for that database is prevented because recovery for that database is disabled if
350
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Forward Recovery
the recommended procedures have been followed. Recovery can be completed for all of the
other specified databases that have been restored from a backup copy and the recovery flag
is enabled, as long as >CONTROL ERRORS is set appropriately (see "DBRECOV >CONTROL" in
chapter 8). This means that ERRORS must be increased by one for each database disabled
for recovery, because an error message occurs each time a database specified in the
>RECOVER command is not enabled for recovery.
MPE/iX Cleanup Mode and Roll-Forward Recovery
In the event of a system failure and subsequent start recovery operation, MPE/iX attempts
to clean up any user log files that were open at the time of the failure. The cleanup
procedure involves writing any records left in the system log file disk buffer to the user log
file. When using roll-forward recovery without this cleanup, records left in memory will
still be lost. You have the option to cancel (from the console) this cleanup procedure if the
log file is on tape.
The advantage of the cleanup procedure is that fewer user log records written just prior to
the failure are lost. For tape files, the disadvantage is the time it takes for the tape to be
rewound and sequentially scanned until the end-of-file is detected so that the remaining
records can be appended to the end.
The TurboIMAGE/XL recovery program DBRECOV does not require the cleanup to be
performed. If it is not performed, however, DBRECOV most likely will report a sequence or
checksum error when the discrepancy caused by the failure is encountered. This would
cause DBRECOV to assume the end-of-file has been reached.
DBRECOV Abort Message
If DBRECOV aborts before recovery completes, the following information is printed:
Abort occurred on database: dbname dbgroup dbaccount
Total database open count: #open
Current open count: #open
Process user is: dbuser dbgroup dbaccount
Running program: progname
Log file name: logfilename
Logging ID: logid
Log file record number: nnnnnnnn
Transaction type: xx
Transaction date/time from log record: day, month, dd, year, time
Last successful transaction #: nn
First log record # of last successful transaction: nn
Record the information, set the log file, locate the database store, and contact your HP
support representative.
Chapter 7
351
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Back Recovery
Roll-Back Recovery
Roll-back recovery is another TurboIMAGE/XL recovery option. Roll-back recovery
provides rapid recovery of database data integrity following a "soft" system crash (that is,
system failure or loss of working memory). The roll-back feature is invoked through the
DBRECOV utility and requires only the current database log files to restore data integrity.
Note that ILR is not needed for roll-back recovery.
NOTE
For roll-back recovery, the user log file and the database must be on the same
volume set when logging to disk. When logging to tape, the database and the
log file must be on the system volume set.
A database backup copy is not required for roll-back recovery. Regular backup of the
database is recommended, however, and is always required for roll-forward recovery in the
event of a more serious problem (for example, a disk head failure, or problems occurring
while roll-back recovery is in progress).
With roll-back enabled prior to a system failure, a record of each user transaction in the
sequence of occurrence is available to determine which transactions were incomplete at
the time of failure. When invoked, the roll-back recovery feature will "roll back," or undo,
any incomplete database transactions in the log file following a soft system crash.
NOTE
A database must be enabled for roll-back before roll-back recovery can be
performed.
The following diagram illustrates the transactions of three different users at the time of a
system failure:
In the above illustration, the first user has completed one transaction (T1) and aborted
another (T4) prior to the system failure. Users two and three have each completed two
transactions, and each has one incomplete transaction at the time of failure. Individual
database transactions T1, T2, T3, T5, and T6 were completed and are properly reflected in
the database following system failure. Transactions T7 and T8, however, were incomplete
at the time of system failure, causing an incomplete modification of data to be reflected in
the database. These incomplete transactions (T7 and T8) are then rolled back (undone) to
their beginning, returning all affected data in the database to their original state before T7
and T8 began execution.
352
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Back Recovery
When transaction T4 is aborted, TurboIMAGE/XL completes the transaction by issuing an
abnormal end (DBABEND). This transaction is then seen as completed by the roll-back
feature and is not normally rolled back. If the aborted transaction is also to be rolled back,
the following DBRECOV command must be issued before issuing the DBRECOV >RUN
command (refer to the discussion of DBRECOV in chapter 8):
>CONTROL NOABORTS
The above command string causes the aborted transaction to be treated as an incomplete
transaction during roll-back recovery. When >CONTROL NOABORTS is used, recovery must be
performed at system startup time before anyone modifies the database. Refer to "Record
Numbers" under the DBRECOV >CONTROL discussion in chapter 8 for considerations when
using the >CONTROL command.
Enabling the Roll-Back Feature
To enable the roll-back feature complete the following sequence:
1. Set the logid and build a log file (if logging to disk) as shown in steps 2 through 6 of
"Logging Preparation" earlier in this chapter.
2. For each particular database, disable access and enable the roll-back and recovery
features by entering the following DBUTIL commands. You can also enable the
MUSTRECOVER option if you wish to use it.
>>DISABLE database name FOR ACCESS
>>ENABLE database name FOR ROLLBACK,RECOVERY
>>ENABLE database name FOR MUSTRECOVER
Enable any other appropriate flags as discussed in step 7 under "Logging Preparation."
If the logid was not set and/or the log file was not built before the >>ENABLE command is
issued for roll-back recovery, a warning message that the logid or the log file is
non-existent is displayed on the screen. Enable any other appropriate flags as discussed
in step 7 under "Logging Preparation." Enabling for roll-back or MUSTRECOVER
automatically enables the database for logging.
3. Make a backup copy of the database as discussed in step 8 under "Logging
Preparation." You may use DBSTORE or TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
(with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option) regardless of the database being
open or closed with roll-back recovery.
4. Start the logging process and enable user access to the appropriate databases as shown
in "Logging Maintenance," earlier in this chapter. After the logid has been set and the
log file built, DBUTIL automatically enables logging when roll-back is enabled. Note
that ILR is not needed for roll-back recovery; however, if ILR is enabled together with
roll-back recovery, logging and ILR must be disabled separately.
When roll-back recovery is enabled, DBUTIL sets a roll-back flag in the root file to indicate
that roll-back recovery is enabled for the database. DBUTIL also reserves six words in the
root file for the roll-back time stamp (three words for the previous time stamp and three
Chapter 7
353
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Back Recovery
words for the current time stamp). The roll-back time stamp is updated and logged in the
log file and in the root file when the database is first opened. Roll-back recovery then uses
the time stamp during recovery to verify the correct log file for each database.
Note that if the database and the log file are not on the same volume set, an error is issued.
CAUTION
In the event of a system failure, do not restart user logging before running
DBRECOV. Log records may have been lost due to the system failure. If user
logging is resumed without a recovery, the resulting discontinuous log file
would cause invalid results in the event of a subsequent recovery. To prevent
access to the database after a system failure without recovery, enable the
MUSTRECOVER feature when you enable the roll-back feature.
Disabling the Roll-Back Feature
To disable the roll-back feature, make sure that no users are accessing the database
involved. Disable the roll-back feature by entering the following DBUTIL command string:
>>DISABLE database name FOR ROLLBACK
When roll-back is disabled, DBUTIL resets the roll-back flag and roll-back time stamp, but
not the logging flag; therefore, logging is still enabled.
CAUTION
DO NOT DISABLE ROLL-BACK IF ROLL-BACK RECOVERY MUST BE
USED LATER. Disabling roll-back resets the logging time stamp. After the
logging time stamp is reset, roll-back recovery cannot be performed with the
current log file on the named database. The data in the database is
considered correct and therefore cannot be rolled back.
When the >>DISABLE command is issued, DBUTIL prompts a warning to remind you that
the time stamp will be erased and prompts for a response as follows:
WARNING: ROLLBACK time stamp will be erased.
Please type Y to confirm your disable command>>
If you enter Y, DBUTIL continues to disable roll-back. If Y is not entered, the >>DISABLE
command is not performed.
Performing Roll-Back Recovery
To complete the transaction roll-back process following a system failure, perform the
following steps:
1. Following a start recovery operation to bring up the system, locate the applicable log
file media to be used for transaction roll-back. If logging to tape, the correct tape needs
to be mounted. If using the MPE/iX CHANGELOG feature and there are multiple log file
tapes, this will be the first tape of the series. If logging to disk, TurboIMAGE/XL
354
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Back Recovery
automatically locates the first log file in the given logging cycle by checking the
beginning of the root file for the logid.
Note that the system boot-up process writes a crash record to the last volume of the
user log set. If a start recovery operation is not performed, this will not occur, causing
DBRECOV to issue a warning.
2. Make a database backup copy in case a system failure occurs during the roll-back
recovery process.
3. Enter the following MPE/iX command string:
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
4. Enter the >CONTROL NOSTORE command of DBRECOV to allow recovery to proceed
whether or not the DBSTORE flag is set.
5. Enter the following DBRECOV command (where database name is the name of individual
databases to be rolled back):
>ROLLBACK database name [,database name2,....,database nameN]
6. Enter all other desired DBRECOV commands (>FILE, >CONTROL with other options
except NOSTORE shown above, and >PRINT). Note that the >FILE command's optional
parameter rmode is not used with the roll-back feature. Refer to chapter 8 for more
information.
7. If you want to recover the databases, enter the DBRECOV >RUN command. Otherwise,
enter the >EXIT command, and DBRECOV terminates, and no recovery takes place.
>RUN
After the >RUN command is given, DBRECOV asks you to mount the log tape (if the log file
medium is tape). Continue the roll-back process as directed by messages returned to
both the console and the terminal screen.
8. If the CHANGELOG command or GETLOG AUTO option was used during logging and the
logging file medium is tape, the following message appears on the terminal screen and
the console:
Reply CONtinue on console when logfile is ready
When the required log file is available, enter the response CON to the console request
from DBRECOV.
Note that the response is in a form similar to REPLY for a tape mount used when storing
or restoring tapes; that is, you need to enter the Process Identification Number (PIN).
After the >RUN command is given, the DBRECOV program recovers the specified databases,
creates specified user-recovery files, and terminates. The DBRECOV program could be
terminated alternatively without any recovery taking place with an >EXIT command.
Chapter 7
355
Logging and Recovery
Roll-Back Recovery
For recovery to succeed, you must have access to the log file. This implies either knowing
the maintenance word and having system manager (SM) or operator (OP) capability, or
being the creator of the log identifier with read access to the log file if it resides in a
different logon group and account. If the log file is on tape, you must know the volume
identifier.
NOTE
If the operator is unsure of the volume identifier, it is displayed on the console
when the tape is mounted.
If the database creator and the creator of the log identifier are not the same, and if the disk
log file and the database are in two separate accounts, follow the steps listed below for
recovery to proceed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assign a maintenance word to the database.
Logon as the creator of the log identifier.
Fully qualify the database name when issuing the >ROLLBACK command.
Specify the maintenance word.
MPE/iX Cleanup Mode and Roll-Back Recovery
In the event of a system failure and subsequent start recovery operation, MPE/iX attempts
to clean up any user log files that were open at the time of the failure. The cleanup
procedure involves writing any records left in the system log file disk buffer to the user log
file. Note that for roll-back recovery without this cleanup, transactions are not lost during
a start recovery operation because they are not held in the memory buffer. You should not
cancel (from the console) this cleanup procedure if the log file is on tape. Canceling the
start recovery operation for tape log files will cause rollback recovery to fail.
The advantage of the cleanup procedure is that fewer user log records written just prior to
the failure are lost. For tape files, the disadvantage is the time it takes for the tape to be
rewound and sequentially scanned until the end-of-file is detected so that the remaining
records can be appended to the end.
The TurboIMAGE/XL recovery program DBRECOV does not require the cleanup to be
performed. If it is not performed, however, DBRECOV most likely will report a sequence or
checksum error when the discrepancy caused by the failure is encountered. This would
cause DBRECOV to assume the end-of-file has been reached.
DBRECOV Abort Message
If DBRECOV aborts before recovery completes, the following information is printed:
Abort occurred on database: dbname dbgroup dbaccount
Total database open count: #open
Current open count: #open
Process user is: dbuser dbgroup dbaccount
Running program: progname
Log file name: logfilename
Logging ID: logid
Log file record number: nnnnnnnn
Transaction type: xx
Transaction date/time from log record: day, month, dd, year, time
Last successful transaction #: nn
First log record # of last successful transaction: nn
Record the information, set the log file, locate the database store, and contact your HP
support representative.
356
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
DBRECOV Commands Used with Roll-Forward and Roll-Back Recovery
DBRECOV Commands Used with Roll-Forward and
Roll-Back Recovery
The following DBRECOV commands are used for either roll-forward or roll-back recovery:
CONTROL
Specifies the conditions for recovery.
FILE
Sorts the log file by individual users and/or user identifiers, and designates
an MPE/iX file as the destination for each user's log records.
PRINT
Displays information before you actually initiate recovery with the >RUN
command.
RECOVER
Designates the name of a database to be recovered using roll-forward
recovery.
ROLLBACK
Designates the name of a database to be rolled back.
RUN
Initiates recovery of the specified database.
These commands are discussed below; refer to chapter 8 for more detailed information.
CONTROL Command
The >CONTROL command is used to specify the conditions for recovery. If the >CONTROL
command is not issued, these four default conditions must be met for recovery to succeed:
• The database time stamp in the root file must correspond with the time stamp in each
DBOPEN log file record.
• The DBSTORE flag must be set in the database root file.
• No errors are allowed in job (batch) execution.
• Transactions that are incomplete due to program aborts are recovered.
The >CONTROL command can be used to override these conditions. Each override option can
be negated by specifying its default option, and vice versa, as follows:
Option
Default Option
NOMDBX
MDBX
NOSTAMP
STAMP
NOSTORE
STORE
NOABORTS
ABORTS
MODE4
MODEX
STATS
NOSTATS
ERRORS=nnnn
ERRORS=0 (job) or ERRORS=30,000 (session)
STOPTIME=dateX timeX
STOPTIME=dateY timeY
EOF=pppp
EOF=qqqq
Chapter 7
357
Logging and Recovery
DBRECOV Commands Used with Roll-Forward and Roll-Back Recovery
The initial default condition for stop time and end-of-file is that none is imposed on
recovery. When a particular date or record number has been specified by STOPTIME or
EOF, it can be changed by specifying a new date or record number.
The following provides an example of the override:
>CONTROL NOSTAMP,STAMP
Because STAMP was entered after NOSTAMP, STAMP negates NOSTAMP, so that
recovery proceeds with the time-stamp check intact.
For the options and form of the >CONTROL command, refer to the discussion of the
>CONTROL command of the DBRECOV utility in chapter 8. Note that the >CONTROL command
does not specify a database. Therefore, all >CONTROL options (except NOSTORE which
must be issued before recovery on a specified database is performed) apply to all databases
being recovered.
FILE Command
The recovery file facility is an interface between the recovery system and the application
program. With the >FILE command, you sort the log file by individual users and/or user
identifiers, and designate an MPE/iX file as the destination for each user's log records.
The recovery file facility is based on the concept of transactions within transaction blocks.
A transaction block consists of all transactions between a call to DBOPEN and a call to
DBCLOSE (see Figure 7-1. earlier in this chapter). Within each transaction block, a
transaction is defined as one of the following:
1. A single call to DBPUT, DBUPDATE, or DBDELETE if not preceded by a call to DBBEGIN (or
DBXBEGIN if logging is enabled), or
2. A sequence of calls beginning with a call to DBBEGIN or DBXBEGIN, followed by any
number of calls to DBPUT, DBUPDATE, or DBDELETE and ending with a call to DBEND or
DBXEND respectively.
For each transaction block, the >FILE command returns the initial DBOPEN log record to the
user recovery file. The DBCLOSE record is returned as well, unless one of the following
occurs:
1. All of the transactions within the block could not be recovered, or
2. There was no DBCLOSE log record for this block on the log file. This happens when the
system fails while the database is open.
Consequently, an application can determine the outcome of recovery to some extent by
examining the number of DBOPENs and DBCLOSEs or pairs of DBBEGIN and DBEND or
DBXBEGIN and DBXEND log records returned to the user recovery file. If there are as many
calls to DBCLOSE as to DBOPEN, it is likely that all transactions were successfully recovered.
However, the possibility exists that an entire transaction block was lost due to the system
failure if the block was very short. Fewer calls to DBCLOSE indicate the possibility that
some transactions were lost and need to be re-entered. More information about recovery
can be inferred from the recovery file by using the optional rmode and fmode parameters.
These parameters return transaction information to the user recovery files in addition to
358
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
DBRECOV Commands Used with Roll-Forward and Roll-Back Recovery
the intrinsics DBOPEN and DBCLOSE. Rmode refers to transactions that recovered
successfully; fmode refers to transactions that failed to be recovered. Refer to the DBRECOV
>FILE command for details of operation.
PRINT Command
The >PRINT command is an option used to display information before actually initiating
recovery with the >RUN command. If DBTABLE is specified in the >PRINT command, the
names of the databases specified for recovery by >RECOVER commands are returned. Note
that no statistics are returned with the >PRINT DBTABLE command, because none exist
before the log file is read. If you need these statistics without actually performing the
recovery, use >CONTROL STATS to display this information. If FILETABLE is specified in the
>PRINT command, file references, user references, fmodes and rmodes specified by >FILE
commands are returned. These tables, along with statistics, are also printed when
recovery is complete.
RECOVER Command
The >RECOVER command designates the name of a database to be recovered using
roll-forward recovery. If more than one database has logged to the same log file, they can be
recovered concurrently by entering the database names separated by a comma.
If the database copy was stored with a program other than DBSTORE or True-Online
Backup (for example, MPE/iX STORE without ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option),
the DBSTORE flag will not have been set in the database root file.
If you are sure you have restored the correct, unmodified version of the database, and wish
to use it for recovery, the >CONTROL NOSTORE option must be entered before the >RECOVER
command can succeed (refer to the discussion of >CONTROL in chapter 8).
Other conditions necessary for the success of the >RECOVER command include:
• The database must be accessible to you from your logon group and account.
• The log identifier must not have been altered since the log file was generated (see "Step
6--Setting the Log Identifier," earlier in this chapter).
• The database must be enabled for recovery.
• All databases specified for recovery must contain the same log identifier.
• You must be the database creator, or know the database maintenance word.
• You must either be the creator of the log identifier, or have system manager (SM) or
operator (OP) capability.
• No other users are accessing the database. The database may be concurrently accessed
by users when the >CONTROL command is specified with the MODE4 option. Refer to
the >CONTROL MODE4 command discussed with DBRECOV in the next chapter.
If the >RECOVER command succeeds, recovery can be initiated by typing the >RUN
command.
Chapter 7
359
Logging and Recovery
DBRECOV Commands Used with Roll-Forward and Roll-Back Recovery
ROLLBACK Command
The >ROLLBACK command is used for roll-back recovery. It designates the name of a
database to be rolled back. Any incomplete transactions at the time of the system failure
are rolled out. Multiple databases may be roll-back recovered by entering more than one
database name after the command.
Conditions necessary for the success of the >ROLLBACK command include the following:
• The database must be accessible to you when running DBRECOV. If the database resides
in a group or account different from the your logon, the MPE/iX file security must
permit the user read and write access to the database files.
• The log identifier characteristics (name, password, log file name, and device type) must
not have been altered since the log file was generated.
• The database must be enabled for recovery and roll-back.
• All databases specified for roll-back recovery must contain the same log identifier.
• You must be the database creator, or know the database maintenance word.
• You must either be the creator of the log identifier, or have system manager (SM) or
operator (OP) capability.
• No other users can be accessing the database when >ROLLBACK is called. The database
may be concurrently accessed by users when the >CONTROL command is specified with
the MODE4 option.
Note that the >ROLLBACK command itself does not initiate recovery, but makes several
preparatory checks. The recovery system is actually initiated by the >RUN command.
RUN Command
After the >RUN command is given, the DBRECOV program recovers the specified databases,
creates specified user recovery files, and terminates. The DBRECOV program could be
terminated alternatively without any recovery taking place with an >EXIT command.
For recovery to succeed, the person running DBRECOV (usually the database administrator)
must have access to the log file. This implies either knowing the maintenance word and
having system manager (SM) or operator (OP) capability or being the creator of the log
identifier with read access to the log file if it resides on disk in a different logon group and
account. If the log file is on tape, the user must be able to provide the volume identifier to
the operator mounting the tape.
360
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Recovery Tables
Recovery Tables
The first three of the following four tables are displayed, along with statistics, by every
execution of the recovery system. The last table is displayed only if the user recovery file
feature is used.
LOGFILE PROCESS STARTED ON MON, AUG 14, 1989, 5:48 PM
LOGFILE PROCESS TERMINATED ON MON, AUG 14, 1989, 5:49 PM
************************************************************************
* 1
PROCESS STATISTICS
*
*
*
*LOG# TIME
NAME ACCOUNT PROGRAM DATABASE TRANS PUTS DELS UPS
*
*---- ----- ---- ------- ------- --------- ----- ---- ---- --*
* 1.1 15.45
TST
MKTG INVENTRY
ORDERS
145
145
0 0
*
* 2.1 15.47
TST
MKTG ORDENTRY
ORDERS
431
431
0 0
*
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
* 2
DATABASE STATISTICS
*
*
*
* NAME
GROUP
ACCOUNT
OPENS
TRANS
PUTS
DELETES UPDATES
*
* ------ ---------------------------- ------*
* ORDERS
TST
MKTG
2
576
576
0
0
*
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
* 3
LOGGING SYSTEM
*
*
*
*
---CREATOR---RECORDS
DEV
--------LOGFILE-------- *
* LOGID
NAME
ACCOUNT
PROCESSED TYPE
NAME
GROUP ACCOUNT *
* ---------------------- ----------- ------- *
* ORDERLOG
TST
MKTG
640 DISC
ORDER001
TST
MKTG *
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
* 4
RECOVERY SYSTEM
*
*
*
*
FILE REFERENCE
USER
IDENT
RMODE
FMODE *
* -------------------------------------------- *
* PART1
SYS
MKTG
TST
MKTG
P1D1
1
1 *
* PART2
SYS
MKTG
TST
MKTG
P1D2
1
1 *
* PART3
SYS
MKTG
TST
MKTG
P1D3
1
1 *
************************************************************************
END OF PROGRAM
The tables provide the following information:
1
Chapter 7
The PROCESS STATISTICS table lists the logging user process number
assigned to each process by the OPENLOG intrinsic, the logon name and
361
Logging and Recovery
Recovery Tables
account, program name, and transaction statistics. This table contains one
entry for each process that logged transactions to the log file. An asterisk
appears for any process that issued a DBOPEN without a corresponding
DBCLOSE before the system failure. In roll-forward recovery, the columns
"TRANS, PUTS, DELS, UPS" indicate the number of transactions
recovered. In roll-back recovery, these columns and numbers indicate the
number of transactions rolled out.
2
NOTE
In the DATABASE STATISTICS table, the total number of transactions is
given for each database recovered. The columns "TRANS, PUTS,
DELETES, UPDATES" indicate the number of transactions recovered in
roll-forward recovery, or rolled back if using roll-back recovery.
If you need this table, along with statistics, without actually performing the
recovery, use >CONTROL STATS to display this information. The >PRINT
DBTABLE command also displays this table, but does not include the statistics;
use this command if you only need to list the names of the databases specified
with >RECOVER commands.
3
The LOGGING SYSTEM table should have only one entry, the log
identifier for the log file that was accessed by the recovery system. The
creator is the user who created the log identifier with the MPE/iX GETLOG
command. The number of records processed is usually greater than the
number of transactions given in the other tables because some
transactions require more than one log record, and each log file contains
header and trailer records.
4
The RECOVERY SYSTEM table references the file to which the records
were returned, the user name and identifier, and the rmode and fmode
parameters specified in the MPE/iX FILE commands. Note that all of these
tables can be returned without recovering a database by using the
>CONTROL STATS option when running the recovery program. Roll-back
recovery ignores the rmode parameter.
362
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
Post-Recovery Options
Post-Recovery Options
After a recovery has completed, there are three procedural options. The option chosen
determines the recovery procedure in the event of a subsequent system failure. Together,
the database administrator and system manager or console operator should agree upon
the best post-recovery procedure to avoid confusion at recovery time. The options available
after recovery include:
1. Making a new database backup copy and starting a new log file from the console with
the CHANGELOG command.
If you use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or
ONLINE=END option), you can start a new log cycle, or restart with the same log file.
In the event of a subsequent system failure, the new database backup copy is restored
and recovered against the new log file. This option allows for a straightforward recovery
procedure but delays users from accessing the database until the new backup copy has
been generated.
2. Resuming transaction logging to the same log file using the RESTART option without
creating a new backup copy.
In the event of a subsequent system failure, the old database copy is restored and
recovered against the log file. This procedure is the same as the original recovery, but
takes longer due to the additional log file records. Users can access the database after
the first system failure without waiting for it to be stored.
3. Initiating logging to a new log file without creating a new backup copy.
In the event of a system failure, the old database copy is restored and two recoveries are
executed: the first using the old log file and the second using the new log file. This
procedure is not recommended if option 2 is available.
Until a new database backup copy is generated, if you consistently start logging to a
new log file after a system failure, a total recovery preceded by n failures requires n
executions of the recovery system.
The second and subsequent recoveries of a database against more than one log file are
not permitted unless the DBSTORE flag is disabled. This is because the first modification
executed again from the first log file clears the DBSTORE flag from the database root file.
Subsequent calls to DBRECOV can only succeed by specifying the >CONTROL NOSTORE
option. Ensure that the log files are recovered in the proper consecutive order.
NOTE
For options 2 and 3, do not restart a log file before the database has been
recovered after a system failure because of the following reasons:
• Some log records could have been lost in the system failure, and
• The log file may not be consistent with the true state of the database.
A recovery is necessary to bring the database and log file into agreement
before restarting the log process.
Chapter 7
363
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
The Mirror Database
Transaction logging and regular backups are good maintenance. However, if databases
must be accessible at all times and cannot be down even for maintenance, then a different
maintenance method is needed. A system can be set up for constant access or "high
availability," and still have controlled maintenance.
The mirror database is the fundamental element in creating a high availability database
system. This system consists of two identical databases on two separate computer systems.
One database is housed on a primary system and is constantly accessible to users and
application programs. The other "mirror" database resides on the secondary system and is
used for maintenance.
To establish a mirror database, the following requirements are necessary:
• Two systems--one primary, one secondary.
• Two identical copies of the database(s) are needed, one copy on the primary system, one
on the secondary system.
• All transactions on the primary system must be logged to a permanent file.
• Periodically, the log file containing the transactions must be moved or copied to the
secondary system, and used to update the database(s) on the secondary system. It is
recommended that the log file be kept on a private volume separate from the database or
on magnetic tape.
After the secondary system is established, it can be used to make backups of the database.
The primary system never has to be brought down for maintenance.
Transferring Log Files
The GETLOG command with the AUTO option and the CHANGELOG command provide the
capability to schedule secondary system backups through various methods of logging.
Listed below are four ways of copying log files from the primary to the secondary system.
The method chosen should depend on the maintenance needs.
1. Copying files over a direct DSLINE from the primary to the secondary system.
2. Logging to a private volume, entering the CHANGELOG command to start a new log file,
copying the closed log file to another private volume, and physically transporting that
second private volume to the secondary system.
3. Logging to disk, entering the CHANGELOG command to start a new log file, copying the
closed log file from disk to tape, and restoring the log file from tape to a disk on the
secondary system.
4. Logging directly to tape and mounting the tape on the secondary system.
Figure 7-3. illustrates the four methods of copying log files as listed above.
364
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
Figure 7-3. Transferring Log Files to the Secondary System
Chapter 7
365
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
Maintaining the Mirror Database
After the mirror database system is set up, the DBRECOV STOP-RESTART feature is used
to maintain the secondary database. To start the initial DBRECOV procedure, the user must
make sure logging is enabled on the primary system and that either the MPE/iX GETLOG
AUTO option or CHANGELOG is being used. These MPE/iX options make logging without
interruption on the primary system possible, thus increasing the availability of the
databases. For more information on logging options refer to "Logging Preparation" and
"Logging Maintenance" earlier in this chapter. Appendix G provides a brief outline of
logging to disk and logging to tape.
After the log files are transferred to the secondary system (the mirror database system),
they are applied to the mirror database using the DBRECOV roll-forward recovery process.
The STOP-RESTART feature of DBRECOV is the key to making the mirror database system
a workable maintenance method; for a detailed discussion of this feature, refer to the next
section entitled "Performing DBRECOV STOP-RESTART." This feature adds the capability
to CON[TINUE] or STOP the recovery process on the secondary system if DBRECOV cannot
find the next log file in the log set. Whenever DBRECOV cannot find the next log file in a log
set, the recovery process on the secondary system can be stopped, the databases can be
backed up, and recovery can then be restarted from the point it was stopped. The primary
system never has to be brought down for backups.
DBRECOV applies the chained log files starting with the first log file created when logging
was enabled. It continues to process each log file in the log set consecutively until it cannot
find the next log file in the set. It then prompts the user at the console to CON[TINUE] or
STOP the recovery process.
If the reply is CON[TINUE], DBRECOV keeps searching for the next log file. When the next
log file is found, DBRECOV resumes roll-forward recovery on the mirror database. The
CON[TINUE] or STOP prompt appears as long as DBRECOV cannot find the next log file in
the log set. DBRECOV is stopped if the STOP reply is entered and a RESTART file
containing all the necessary information to restart recovery is created.
After the DBRECOV process is stopped, backup of the database in a consistent state can be
done and limited database maintenance on the secondary system can be performed. Some
DBUTIL functions cannot be performed while the DBRECOV process is stopped. If the
database is in RESTART mode, the following DBUTIL processes cannot be performed:
• Access is not allowed in order to keep the database logically consistent.
• Resetting the maintenance word is not allowed. If the maintenance word were to be
reset, RESTART would be impossible.
• Purging or erasing the database is not allowed. If either of these options were used in
DBUTIL, the recovery process would be invalidated. (The user must run
DBRECOV,ABORT or DBRECOV,PURGE before purging or erasing the database.)
DBRECOV,RESTART restarts the roll-forward recovery process from the point it was stopped.
DBRECOV uses the information in the RESTART file to restart recovery. DBRECOV continues
until, once again, it cannot find the next log file in the log set. The prompt to CON[TINUE]
or STOP is displayed and backup of the database can again be done.
If RESTART recovery from the current STOP point cannot be done, DBRECOV,ABORT can be
used. Recovery can no longer be restarted from the same point that it was stopped once
366
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
aborted because the RESTART file is purged. The database flags are returned to the same
settings as before the recovery process was started.
If ABORT fails to abort recovery because of an inconsistent RESTART file, DBRECOV,PURGE
can be used to delete the current RESTART file before beginning the mirror database
process again.
Performing DBRECOV STOP-RESTART
The processes involved in using the STOP-RESTART feature of DBRECOV are discussed
here. They are broken down as follows:
• Stopping DBRECOV
• Storing the Databases
• Restarting DBRECOV
The following sections are included if problems are encountered while performing
STOP-RESTART:
• Aborting DBRECOV
• Purging a RESTART file
Stopping DBRECOV
DBRECOV rolls forward all log files in the log set on the secondary system, one at a time.
When DBRECOV cannot find the next log file in a log set, it prints the following message on
the console:
DBRECOV - Reply CON or STOP when filexxx is ready.
A message for the user is displayed in the $STDLIST file:
UNABLE TO OPEN LOG FILE filexxx
REPLY 'CONTINUE' OR 'STOP' ON CONSOLE.
The filexxx is the log file that DBRECOV is trying to find. If that log file has been closed on
the primary system and is ready to be moved over to the secondary system, transfer it to
the secondary system and reply CON or CON[TINUE] on the console. DBRECOV will look for
filexxx again. The roll-forward process continues as long as the next log file has been copied
over correctly and is available to DBRECOV.
The next log file may not be ready yet. For example, the primary system might still be
logging transactions, or the log file might have been renamed or be on a tape that was not
mounted. This provides an opportunity to STOP recovery and perform maintenance on the
database. Refer to "Storing the Databases" next in this chapter. To stop recovery, simply
reply STOP at the console. A list of the databases involved in recovery are displayed in the
$STDLIST file. At this point, DBRECOV creates a RESTART file containing all the necessary
information to continue the recovery process when the RESTART option is requested; it also
enables the RESTART flags and disables the access flags of the databases that are
Chapter 7
367
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
recorded in the RESTART file.
DATABASE(S) WITH RECOVERY SUSPENDED:
base1.group.acct
base2.group.acct
.
.
.
This is a list of the databases that are in the RESTART file. These database names are
specified later when either the RESTART or ABORT options are used. The RESTART file
name is the same as the logid name used in the GETLOG and the LOG,START commands
when logging was enabled on the primary system.
DBRECOV then prints the name of the log file it needs to restart recovery, the record number
beginning an internal structure, the number of records currently in the staging file, and
the actual file name of the RESTART file for that recovery process:
RESTART RECOVERY WITH LOG FILE: filexxx
QUIET BLOCK BEGINS AT RECORD recordnumber
NUMBER OF RECORDS IN STAGING FILE numrecs
RESTART FILE NAME: filename
The user is returned to MPE/iX, where the command DBUTIL >>SHOW database name
FLAGS can be used to display the recovery state, that is, whether the database in recovery
has been set for RESTART.
When running multiple recovery processes from the same log file, the user needs to equate
the logid, that is the formal file designator for the RESTART file, to a unique file name for
each recovery process. The new file name is the RESTART FILE NAME for that specific
recovery process.
Storing the Databases
The databases can be backed up at this time. It is important to store all files involved in
recovery since the last successful RESTART. In other words, the database administrator
should store the databases, the current RESTART file, and all log files that were processed
since the last successful DBRECOV,RESTART. If the RESTART file is not stored with the
database backups, it is modified when recovery is restarted. Without the previous RESTART
file or the log files, the database backup copies cannot be used to RESTART recovery in case
the current RESTART fails.
The RESTART file and the databases have associated time stamps telling DBRECOV which
RESTART file goes with which databases. When DBRECOV is restarted, the time stamp in the
RESTART file is changed. If the RESTART file is not stored, the time stamps will not match,
and the RESTART will not succeed.
The method used to store the databases, RESTART file, and log files depends on the medium
used for user logging, as follows:
• If logging to tape, the log files are already stored on a transportable medium and
backing them up is not necessary. However, the log files must be grouped with the
database and RESTART file backups. If the user does not keep track of which log files go
368
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
with which databases, the RESTART of recovery from a backup is not possible. To restart
recovery from a backup, the user needs to restore the tapes containing the following:
• The databases.
• The RESTART file.
• All log files processed since the last successful RESTART. When running DBRECOV,
the tapes containing the log files must be mounted in the correct sequence according
to the tape volume labels.
• If logging to disk, remember to store the log files that were rolled forward since the last
successful RESTART along with the RESTART file and the databases. Logging to disk
makes it easier to keep the log files grouped with the databases and RESTART file
because all the log files can be stored at the same time when recovery is stopped. Use an
MPE/iX STORE command with the "@" option (rather than a DBSTORE) to backup all the
files on a minimum number of tapes. If it is necessary to restart from a backup, all the
necessary files will be together.
Using naming conventions makes storing the files to tape much easier. The logging naming
conventions should be used. For example, if the database is ORDERS, name the logid
ORDERRS (where RS represents RESTART), and the log file ORDER001. The user can store
all the files with one MPE/iX command as follows:
:STORE ORDER@
NOTE
To avoid incompatible time stamps, it is important to store the RESTART file at
the same time that the databases are stored. If logging to disk, also make
sure to store all log files processed since the last successful restart.
Restarting DBRECOV
To restart the recovery process after the next log file in the set is transferred, or the
database maintenance is completed, enter the following RUN command:
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS,RESTART
DBRECOV requests the name of one of the databases in the RESTART file:
WHICH DATABASE?
If the user types in the name of a nonexistent database, another prompt for the database
recorded in the RESTART file appears. Once again enter the name of a database in the
RESTART file. From the database name that is entered, DBRECOV determines the name of
the RESTART file, tries to open it, and restarts the recovery process. If the RESTART file is
successfully opened but is not a RESTART file, the following error message is printed:
filename is not a DBRECOV RESTART file
Chapter 7
369
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
and the user is returned to the MPE/iX prompt. This error usually occurs when another
file with the same name as the RESTART file has been created on the system. Make sure the
file is a RESTART file, and try RESTART again. If the RESTART file cannot be located, go back
to the previous tape, restore the databases which should have their own RESTART file and
log files stored with them, and run DBRECOV,RESTART from that point. The log files
between the previous and the current STOP point are reprocessed, and the roll-forward
process continues with the current log file.
When the correct RESTART file is opened, DBRECOV looks at the file to make sure that the
version numbers are compatible with the version of DBRECOV being run. If the version
numbers do not match, DBRECOV prints the following error message:
RESTART FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS VERSION OF DBRECOV
and the user is returned to the MPE/iX prompt. This message means that another version
of DBRECOV is running other than the version that created the current RESTART file. Install
the correct version of TurboIMAGE/XL and run DBRECOV,RESTART again.
If the user logon is not the same as the logon when DBRECOV was suspended, the following
message is printed:
must be logged on as same user and account where DBRECOV was
suspended
Log on using the same user and account names that were used when DBRECOV was
originally suspended, and run DBRECOV again.
When the RESTART file is opened, DBRECOV tries to open all databases identified in the
RESTART file. For each database that cannot be opened, DBRECOV displays the following
message:
Can't re-open DATABASE basename
RESTART is terminated and the user is returned to the MPE/iX prompt. Make sure the
correct databases are on the system. If the databases are the correct ones, but they still
cannot be opened, use the DBRECOV,ABORT command (discussed in the next section) and
RESTART recovery from the previous STOP point.
When all the databases have been opened, DBRECOV checks to make sure all the databases
in the RESTART file are set for RESTART. When DBRECOV encounters a database not in
RESTART mode, it displays the message:
DATABASE basename IS NOT IN RESTART MODE
RESTART TERMINATED
RESTART is terminated and the user is returned to the MPE/iX prompt. Make sure the
correct databases are loaded on the system. If the databases are the correct ones and
RESTART is still not accepted, use the DBRECOV,ABORT (discussed in the next section)
370
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
command and RESTART from the previous STOP point.
To start the recovery process again, find out why the databases are not in RESTART mode
and try to correct the problem. If the problem cannot be corrected, take either of the
following steps:
• Go to the previous STOP point and use the databases and RESTART file stored to restart
roll-forward recovery, or
• ABORT the current RESTART process. Disable user access on the primary databases and
make a copy for the secondary system. Begin a new logging process on the primary
system and a new recovery process on the secondary system.
If all databases are found, and they are in RESTART mode, then the time stamps in the
database root file are compared to the time stamp in the RESTART file. If they do not agree,
the following DBRECOV error message is printed:
RESTART TIME STAMPS DON'T AGREE WITH DATABASE TIME STAMPS
This indicates incompatibility of the RESTART file and the databases. The user is returned
to the MPE/iX prompt. Use the same steps given above to recover from a time stamp error.
After all the compatibility checks have passed, DBRECOV prints a table of the databases to
be recovered:
DATABASE(S) TO BE RESTARTED:
base1.group.acct
base2.group.acct
.
.
.
The user is then prompted to confirm the restart:
CONTINUE WITH RECOVERY (N/Y)?
Respond Y or YES to continue, or type N or NO (or press carriage return) to return to the
STOP point. If any of the databases cannot be opened during recovery, an MPE/iX file error
is returned and DBRECOV RESTART is terminated. When this happens, go back to the
previous STOP point and use the databases, log files, and the RESTART file to RESTART
recovery. If a log file in the log set has been damaged or the user cannot RESTART recovery
for any reason, ABORT the current recovery process and begin the mirror database process
again. When the recovery process terminates, the user is returned to the MPE/iX prompt.
Two ways of continuing to mirror the databases are listed here:
• Go to the previous STOP point and use the databases, log files, and RESTART file stored
to restart roll-forward recovery. This option is not valid if there is a missing or damaged
log file.
• Disable user access on the primary databases and make a copy for the secondary
system. Begin a new logging process on the primary system and a new recovery process
Chapter 7
371
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
on the secondary system.
CAUTION
When recovery is aborted (refer to the following discussion), the current
RESTART file is purged and RESTART must be done from the previous STOP
point.
Aborting DBRECOV
To run the ABORT option:
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS,ABORT
Just like the RESTART option the prompt for a database in the RESTART file appears:
WHICH DATABASE?
If a nonexistent database name is entered, an error message is printed and the user is
prompted once again to enter the name of a database in the RESTART file. Using the
database name entered, DBRECOV determines the name of the RESTART file and tries to
open it. If the file is opened and is not a RESTART file, the following DBRECOV error message
is printed:
filename is not a DBRECOV RESTART file.
and the user is returned to the MPE/iX prompt. This error usually occurs when another
file with the same name as the RESTART file has been created on the system. Make sure the
file is a RESTART file and try running DBRECOV,ABORT again.
When the correct RESTART file is opened, DBRECOV looks at the file to make sure that it has
the same version numbers as the version of DBRECOV being run. If the version numbers do
not match, DBRECOV prints the following error message:
RESTART FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS VERSION OF DBRECOV
and the MPE/iX prompt is returned. This message means the version of DBRECOV is not the
same as the version that created the current RESTART file. Install the correct version of
TurboIMAGE/XL and run DBRECOV,ABORT again.
If the user logon is not the same as the logon when DBRECOV was suspended, the following
message is printed:
must be logged on as same user and account where DBRECOV was
suspended
Log on using the same user and account names that were used when DBRECOV was
originally suspended, and run DBRECOV again.
372
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
When the RESTART file is successfully opened, DBRECOV identifies all the databases in the
RESTART file, and verifies that they are in RESTART mode. DBRECOV then checks the time
stamps in the RESTART file and the databases to make sure they match. If the time stamps
do not match, the following message is printed:
RESTART TIME STAMPS DON'T AGREE WITH DATABASE TIME STAMPS
This indicates incompatibility of the RESTART file with the data bases. The MPE/iX prompt
is returned. Locate the correct RESTART file, and run DBRECOV,ABORT again.
After the RESTART file is opened, DBRECOV tries to open all databases identified in the
RESTART file. For each database that cannot be opened, DBRECOV displays the following
message:
Can't re-open DATABASE basename
CONTINUE WITH ABORT (N/Y)?
DBRECOV then allows the user to make sure that the ABORT is desired. If not all databases
are in the RESTART file, it may mean that this a different set of databases. Respond Y or
YES to continue the ABORT, and N, NO (or press carriage return) to stop the ABORT.
DBRECOV then checks to make sure all the databases in the RESTART file are set for
RESTART. When DBRECOV encounters a database not in RESTART mode, it prompts:
DATABASE basename IS NOT IN RESTART MODE
CONTINUE (N/Y)?
Respond Y or YES to continue the ABORT, and N, NO (or press carriage return) to stop the
ABORT.
When all compatibility checks have passed, DBRECOV displays all databases in the RESTART
file:
DATABASE(S) WITH RECOVERY TO BE ABORTED:
base1.group.acct
base2.group.acct
.
.
If not all of the databases can be opened, DBRECOV prints an MPE/iX file error and prompts
the user to continue with the ABORT:
CONTINUE WITH ABORT (N/Y)?
Respond Y or YES to continue the ABORT, and N, NO (or press carriage return) to stop the
ABORT.
After ABORT is successfully completed, the current RESTART file is purged, the MPE/iX
prompt is returned, and the user can issue a DBUTIL >>SHOW command. The RESTART flag
Chapter 7
373
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
is disabled, and the database access flag is reset to the state it was in before DBRECOV was
run.
Purging a RESTART File
If the RESTART option fails at the current STOP point, the user can ABORT the current
recovery process and RESTART the databases from the previous STOP point. However, if
the ABORT option fails, the DBRECOV,PURGE command can be used as a last resort to delete
the useless RESTART file before restarting with a backup of the databases and RESTART file
of a previous STOP point.
CAUTION
When using PURGE on a RESTART file, RESTART must be done from the
previous STOP point.
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS,PURGE
DBRECOV prompts for the name of the RESTART file:
ENTER RESTART FILENAME?
Enter the filename displayed when DBRECOV was stopped. DBRECOV opens the file and
verifies that it is actually a RESTART file. If DBRECOV is unable to open the RESTART file, an
error message is printed and DBRECOV is terminated. The user can either determine that
the file is not a RESTART file and delete it, or can RESTART recovery from a previous STOP
point. When a RESTART file is restored from a backup, the previous RESTART file writes over
the current RESTART file.
If the RESTART file is successfully opened, DBRECOV displays the table of databases in the
RESTART file:
RESTART FILE CONTAINS FOLLOWING DATABASE(S):
base1.group.acct
base2.group.acct
.
.
.
All the databases will be opened, and DBRECOV checks if they are all enabled for RESTART. If
they are all in RESTART mode, the following message is printed and DBRECOV is terminated:
DATABASE base1.group.acct IS IN RESTART MODE.
DATABASE base2.group.acct IS IN RESTART MODE.
RECOVERY SUSPENDED - USE DBRECOV,ABORT TO ABORT RECOVERY.
Run DBRECOV,ABORT to purge the RESTART file.
If none of the databases in the RESTART file are set for RESTART, the RESTART file is purged
with no further confirmation.
374
Chapter 7
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
If some of the databases are not found, DBRECOV prompts for confirmation to purge the
RESTART file:
Can't re-open DATABASE basename.
CONTINUE WITH PURGE (N/Y)?
DBRECOV allows you to make sure that you wish to purge this recovery process. If not all
databases are in the RESTART file, this could be a different set of databases. Respond Y or
YES to purge the RESTART file, or N, NO, (or press carriage return) to stop.
Occasionally, DBRECOV can terminate abnormally due to a bad log file in the log set or a
system failure. If the user cannot RESTART recovery from the previous STOP point because
of a damaged or missing log file, PURGE the current RESTART file and begin the mirror
recovery process again. Listed below are the four basic steps used to reestablish the mirror
database system after an abnormal termination of DBRECOV:
1. Disable user access on the primary system and store the databases from the primary
system.
2. Purge the databases on the secondary system.
3. Restore the databases from the primary system onto the secondary system.
4. Start a new log set, enable user access on the primary system and start roll-forward
recovery on the secondary system.
Controlling the Logging Process
Backups on the secondary system are made more efficient by controlling the logging
processes on the primary system. Some important factors to consider before enabling
logging on the primary system follow:
• When logging to tape and to allow roll-back recovery, the database must be on the
system volume set. Logging to tape eliminates the step of storing log files with the
databases once they are rolled forward on the secondary system. However, keep track of
log file tapes that correspond with each database and RESTART file backup tapes.
Logging to tape requires a dedicated tape drive.
• When logging to disk and to allow roll-back recovery, the database and the user log file
must be on the same volume set. Logging to disk enables storing log files and the
databases on a single tape using an MPE/iX STORE command rather than a DBSTORE
command. When logging to disk, remember to backup all log files that were processed
after the last DBRECOV,RESTART along with the databases and RESTART file.
• When naming data sets, follow proper naming conventions. This will make storing the
databases, log files, and RESTART file much easier and eliminate the use of several
different tapes for the log files. If naming conventions are followed, an MPE/iX STORE
command using the "@" sign followed by the database name can be used to store the log
files, database, and RESTART file.
• When changing log files, either let the GETLOG AUTO option switch to the next log file
automatically and/or manually issue a CHANGELOG command to close the current log file
and open the next file in the log set.
Chapter 7
375
Logging and Recovery
The Mirror Database
• When using the STOP-RESTART option, the log file name and the logid must be
different.
Log File Size
Determine the size of the log files, based on how far behind the secondary system will be,
and how often backups will be done. To keep the secondary system as close to a mirror
image of the primary database as possible, log files should be made small so that they will
be filled quickly and can be sent to the secondary system frequently. Of course, making the
log files small means spending more time transferring log files from the primary to the
secondary system. It also means that the CHANGELOG maximum file limit of 999 will be
exhausted quickly. In the event that this limit is exhausted, stop, backup the database, and
reinitiate logging on the primary system.
One disadvantage of having several small log files is in the application of STOP-RESTART.
DBRECOV prompts to CON[TINUE] or STOP recovery if it is between log files in a log set,
and it cannot find the next log file. Therefore, the prompts to CON[TINUE] or STOP are
more frequent when there are several small log files.
An alternate logging option would be to set the log file size very large and just manually
change to the next log file by issuing the CHANGELOG command. The idea is to continually
fill the log file with transactions. When you are ready to copy the log file over to the
secondary system, change to the next log file on the primary system, copy the current one
to the secondary system, and start recovery. This method requires someone at the system
console to monitor the logging and database maintenance processes. If you want to
schedule backups on the secondary system around certain times of the day, for example, at
the beginning and end of a work day, use this logging procedure on the mirror database.
You can log a full shift's transactions and then manually issue a CHANGELOG command at
the system console to create a new log file in the log set. Even if the GETLOG command
AUTO option was specified when logging was enabled, a manual CHANGELOG command can
also be issued at any time. The closed log file is transferred to the secondary system, and
the DBRECOV roll-forward recovery process can be continued on the secondary databases.
After the log file has been processed, DBRECOV looks for the next log file in the log set on the
secondary system. If the next log file on the primary system is in use, the user is prompted
to CON[TINUE] or STOP. At this point, recovery can be stopped and the secondary
database can be stored and await the arrival of the next log file at the end of the shift.
Remember to store the RESTART file and the current, unprocessed log files with the
databases.
376
Chapter 7
Using the Database Utilities
8 Using the Database Utilities
The TurboIMAGE/XL utilities create and initialize the database files and perform various
maintenance functions, such as restructuring a database. This chapter discusses these
utilities and the syntax of each utility.
You must be the database creator to execute the >>CREATE command of the DBUTIL utility
program or to change or remove the maintenance word with the DBUTIL >>SET command.
The database creator is defined by the logon group and account that was used when the
Schema Processor created the root file. To operate the other utilities or to enter other
DBUTIL commands (with the exception of the >>SHOW command), you need not be the
database creator provided you know the maintenance word. If no maintenance word is
defined, only the database creator can execute the other utilities and the DBUTIL
commands that require a maintenance word. The exception to this rule is that a user with
system manager (SM) capability can execute the DBUTIL >>SHOW command on any
database without having to supply the maintenance word.
Chapter 8
377
Using the Database Utilities
Restructuring the Database with TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities
Restructuring the Database with TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities
Using the utilities DBUNLOAD, DBUTIL, DBSCHEMA, and DBLOAD, certain changes to the
structure of an existing database, such as capacity changes, adding additional items and
sets, and repacking data sets, can be made without having to write special programs to
transfer data from the old database to the new one. The general sequence of operations to
do this is as follows:
1. Run DBUNLOAD on the old database, copying all the data entries to tape.
2. Purge the old database using the DBUTIL >>PURGE command.
3. Redefine the database using the same database name by modifying the schema file, and
create a new root file with the Schema Processor, DBSCHEMA.
4. Use the DBUTIL >>CREATE command to create and initialize the data sets of the new
database.
5. Run DBLOAD on the new database using the tape created in step 1 to put the data into
the new database.
The above procedure allows only the supported structural changes to the schema listed
below. DBLOAD does not prohibit other changes; however, the data is not guaranteed to be
consistent. Supported schema changes yield structurally intact databases and always
result in a good transformation. Commercial software packages are available that can
perform other structural changes without doing a DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD operation.
Supported Structural Changes Using DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD
Any of the following schema changes, alone or combined, always result in a successfully
transformed database:
• Adding, changing, or deleting passwords and user class numbers.
• Changing a data item or data set name and all references to it.
• Changing data item or data set read and write class lists.
• Adding new data item definitions.
• Removing or changing definitions of unreferenced data items.
• Increasing data set capacities.
• Adding, deleting, or changing sort item designators.
• Adding and deleting automatic master paths.
Unsupported Structural Changes Using DBUNLOAD and LOAD
The following structural changes are legitimate only in certain circumstances and can
result in data set discrepancies or lost data:
• Changing primary paths.
• Adding new data items to the original end of a data entry definition.
378
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
Restructuring the Database with TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities
• Removing data items from the original end of a data entry definition.
• Changing an automatic master to a manual master or vice versa.
• Adding or deleting a data set at the end of a schema.
• Changing the native language definition for the database.
These are unsupported schema changes. DBLOAD does not prohibit these changes; however,
the data is not guaranteed to be consistent. A change must be judged in light of the
particular database and the functioning of DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD, described later in this
chapter.
Basically, all entries from an old data set are put into the corresponding new data set,
except that no entries are directly put into automatic masters. The entries are truncated or
padded with binary zeros as necessary to fit the entry length of the new data set. DBUNLOAD
and DBLOAD always handle full entries, without regard to item positions or lengths. If the
new data set entry is defined with the items in a different order than the old data set,
DBLOAD may not fail but the data set entries, nevertheless, will be invalid. For example,
data of type real may now occupy the position of a character type item.
The number of the data set is determined by the order in which the data sets we re entered
in the schema file. Therefore, because data sets are loaded by number, additions and
deletions should be made at the end of the schema. Data set one would correspond with the
first data set appearing in the schema. DBLOAD always returns a warning if it detects a
discrepancy between the number of data sets defined in the schema and the number of
data sets on the DBLOAD media, but you can allow DBLOAD to continue after the warning if
you are confident that the database will not be corrupted.
In some circumstances, the load completes, but data is lost. For example, data is lost if the
capacity of a data set is reduced in the new database to less than the number of data set
entries on the tape. If this is not desired, increase the capacity of the data base and restart
the DBLOAD process (refer to "Restructuring the Database with TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities"
earlier in this chapter.)
Chapter 8
379
Using the Database Utilities
Summary of Utility Routines
Summary of Utility Routines
Here is a brief summary of the utilities, their commands, and their functions.
Table 8-1. TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities
Program
Commands
Function
DBLOAD
Loads data entries, which were copied to tape by DBUNLOAD,
back into the data sets.
DBRECOV
Performs database recovery from log files.
CONTROL
Controls various options that affect the execution of
DBRECOV. Refer to the discussion of DBRECOV in this
chapter for valid options when executing.
EXIT
Terminates DBRECOV without re-executing any transactions.
FILE
Routes log records to individual user files and returns
information about recovery.
PRINT
Prints information about databases or user files specified for
recovery.
RECOVER
Designates name of database(s) to be roll-forward recovered.
ROLLBACK
Defines name of database(s) to be roll-back recovered.
RUN
Initiates recovery process.
DBRESTOR
Copies the database to disk from magnetic tape volumes
created by DBSTORE, or by the MPE/iX STORE or SYSGEN
command.
DBSTORE
Copies entire database including root file to magnetic tape
volumes.
DBUNLOAD
Copies data entries to specially formatted magnetic tape
volumes; arranges entries in each data set via the primary
path if the chained entry point is used.
DBUTIL
Allows you to perform several database functions, such as
setting database flags, changing database security, creating
or purging a database, and determining current users and
the status of locks.
380
ACTIVATE
Prepares a database-access file which is used to access a
remote database.
ADDINDEX
Adds the associated B-Tree index.
CREATE
Creates and initializes a database file for each data set.
DEACTIVATE
Deactivates a database-access file which is used to access a
remote database.
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
Summary of Utility Routines
Table 8-1. TurboIMAGE/XL Utilities
Program
Chapter 8
Commands
Function
DETACH
Detaches the database from the attached DBEnvironment(s).
DISABLE
Disables logging, roll-back recovery, ILR, AUTODEFER,
HWMPUT, MUSTRECOVER, PREFETCH, access,
third-party indexing, and dumping options.
DROPINDEX
Drops the associated B-Tree index.
ENABLE
Enables logging, roll-back recovery, ILR, AUTODEFER,
HWMPUT, MUSTRECOVER, PREFETCH, access,
third-party indexing, and dumping options.
ERASE
Erases existing data entries from all data sets. Used before
loading stored data entries back into the database. Also
disables options, such as logging, ILR, roll-back recovery, and
third-party indexing.
EXIT
Terminates DBUTIL program execution.
HELP
Lists all DBUTIL commands.
MOVE
Moves TurboIMAGE/XL files across devices.
PURGE
Purges entire database including root file, data sets, and any
third-party indexes. Used before restoring a stored database
and before creating a new, restructured database.
REBUILDINDEX
Rebuilds the B-Tree index file for a specified dataset that
should have an index file.
REDO
Same as MPE/iX REDO command.
RELEASE
Suspends MPE/iX security provisions for the root file, data
sets, and any third-party indexes.
SECURE
Restores MPE/iX security provisions suspended by
RELEASE.
SET
Changes or removes the maintenance word or password,
stores log identifier and password into root file, specifies the
setting for the critical item update (CIUPDATE) option, and
changes the native language of the database. For databases
that will be migrated to MPE V, specifies the number of
buffers to be used.
SHOW
Used to display information about a database, such as flags,
users, the status of locks, DBEnvironments to which the
database is attached, and if third-party indices are
registered.
VERIFY
Used to determine whether a database-access file is activated
or deactivated.
381
Using the Database Utilities
Utility Program Operation
Utility Program Operation
Database utilities can be run in either job or session mode. With the exception of DBUTIL's
>>SHOW command, DBUTIL, DBSTORE, DBRESTOR, DBUNLOAD, and DBLOAD all require you
to be logged on in the group and account that contains the database root file. Consequently,
these utilities cannot be used with a remote database unless you initiate a remote session
and run the utility as part of that session. The DBUTIL, DBSTORE and DBRESTOR utilities do
not allow you to use the MPE/iX FILE command to equate a database or database-access
file.
CAUTION
DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD do allow MPE/iX FILE commands to equate a database
and can redirect the database to a different file. Except in a controlled
environment, you should not use the MPE/iX FILE command to redirect a
database or database-access file to a different file, because that file can be
purged easily.
The DBRECOV utility is not included in the discussion above because it is an exception. With
DBRECOV, MPE/iX FILE commands are permissible and you need not be logged on to the
same group and account as the log file. However, DBRECOV must be invoked on the system
where the database resides.
To execute the DBUTIL >>CREATE command or to change or remove the maintenance word
with the DBUTIL >>SET command, you must log on with the same user name (including
account name) that was used when the Schema Processor created the root file; this verifies
to TurboIMAGE/XL that you are the database creator. To operate the other database
utilities or enter other DBUTIL commands, you need not be the database creator provided
you know the maintenance word. If no maintenance word is defined, only the database
creator can execute the other utilities and the DBUTIL commands that require a
maintenance word. The exception to this rule is that a user with system manager (SM)
capability can use the DBUTIL >>SHOW command on any database without having to supply
the maintenance word.
NOTE
To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of DBUTIL, the >>CREATE,
>>ERASE, and >>PURGE commands can also be executed by specifying them as
DBUTIL entry points.
Backup Files
The backup files created by DBSTORE and DBUNLOAD can be written only to magnetic tape
volumes. In the discussion of the utilities that follows, the term volume refers to a
magnetic reel.
Error Messages
Some of the error messages are described with the operating instructions for the utilities.
Appendix A contains a complete listing of the error messages issued by these programs.
382
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBLOAD
DBLOAD
Loads data entries from the backup volume(s) created by the DBUNLOAD utility into data
sets of the database.
Operation
1
[:FILE DBLOAD[=filename] [;DEV=device] ]
2
:RUN DBLOAD.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
3
WHICH DATABASE? database name [/maint word]
WARNING: The LANGUAGE of the database is DIFFERENT from
the
language found on the DBLOAD MEDIA. Continue DBLOAD operation?
(Y/N):
4
DATA SET m: x ENTRIES
.
.
.
5
END OF VOLUME n, y READ ERRORS RECOVERED
6
DBLOAD OPERATION COMPLETED
END OF PROGRAM
(Refer to "Operation Discussion" later in this section.)
The volume(s) must have been produced by the DBUNLOAD program, and the database name
on the volume must be exactly the same as the database name, or root file name, in the
current session or in the group and account of the job. DBLOAD issues an error message if
the database name or maintenance word specified is different from the DBUNLOAD file. In
addition, DBLOAD checks that the group and account specified is the same as that in the
DBUNLOAD file. To reload the identical data into the database, the DBUTIL ERASE command
must be used prior to DBLOAD unless the database has been purged and re-created.
Executing the >>ERASE command reinitializes the data sets to an empty state while
keeping the root file and data sets as catalogued MPE/iX files on the disk.
DBLOAD reads each entry from the backup volume and puts it into the respective data set
from which it was read by DBUNLOAD. If a data set in the receiving database is an automatic
master, no entries are directly put into it by DBLOAD, even though there are entries on the
volume associated with the data set's number. Automatic master entries are created as
needed in the normal fashion when entries are put into the detail data sets related to the
automatic master.
Chapter 8
383
Using the Database Utilities
DBLOAD
DBLOAD calls the DBPUT procedure to put the entries read from the backup volume into the
appropriate data sets. In every case, the DBPUT dset parameter is a data set number and
the list parameter is an at-sign followed by a semicolon (@;). Prior to calling DBPUT, DBLOAD
moves each entry from the backup volume into a buffer. The length of the entry is
determined by the definition of entries in the target data set. When DBLOAD is calling
DBPUT, this length is less than, equal to, or greater than the length of an entry on the
backup volume. If the data set entry is larger than the backup entry, the data is
left-justified and is padded out to the maximum entry length with binary zeros. If the data
entry is smaller than the backup entry, the backup volume record is truncated on the right
and the truncated data is lost.
The location of master set entries is based on their key item value which is hashed to an
internal location. The detail data set entries are put into consecutive data set records with
the appropriate new chain pointer information.
DBLOAD requires exclusive access to the database. If the database is already open to any
other process, DBLOAD terminates and prints the message:
DATABASE IN USE
Parameters
filename
is the name (up to 8 characters) that replaces DBLOAD in the mount
request at the operator's console.
device
is the device class name of the device from which the data entries are to be
loaded. Tape is the only supported device class.
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database root file created in the
current session or job's account and logon group.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator. This word must
be supplied by anyone other than the database creator.
Message Variables
m
is the number of the last data set loaded from the backup volume.
x
is the number of entries loaded into the specified data set. x is zero if the
data set is an automatic master. Note: This number may not represent the
total number of records in the data set if entries existed prior to DBLOAD
execution.
n
is the volume number.
y
is the number of read errors from which DBLOAD recovered.
Operation Discussion
1
384
Is an optional file equation that specifies the device class name for the
device from which the data entries are to be loaded. The default is device
class TAPE.
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBLOAD
2
Initiates execution of the DBLOAD program in the PUB group and SYS
account.
3
In session mode, DBLOAD prompts for the database name and maintenance
word. In job mode, the database name and maintenance word, if any, must
be in the record immediately following the RUN command.
The language ID of the database is stored along with data when DBUNLOAD
has been used to copy the database to tape. If the database native
language (on disk) is not consistent with the system level native language
(on tape), the following message will appear (refer to appendix A for more
information):
WARNING: The LANGUAGE of the database is DIFFERENT from
the language found on the DBLOAD MEDIA.
Continue DBLOAD operation? (Y/N):
NOTE
When using DBLOAD, the database language must match the language ID
stored in the backup media. If they do not match, DBLOAD will give you a
warning messages in a session, and if you reply Y, the DBLOAD will continue.
However, in a job, DBLOAD does not load the database.
4
After each data set is copied, DBLOAD prints a message on the list file
device which includes the data set number and the number of entries
copied.
5
When the end of a volume is encountered, DBLOAD prints a message
(where z is the logical device number of the unit, XXXX is the database
name, and n is the volume number). DBLOAD also instructs the operator to
mount a new tape with the following message on the system console:
MOUNT DBLOAD VOLUME XXXXn ON LOGICAL DEVICE z
If the operator mounts the wrong volume, DBLOAD informs the operator
with the following message (where z is the logical device number):
WRONG VOLUME MOUNTED ON LOGICAL DEVICE z
DBLOAD then terminates and you must begin loading the database again.
This requires executing the DBUTIL >>ERASE command again if any
entries have already been loaded.
6
After the data entries have been successfully loaded, DBLOAD prints a
completion message.
Console Messages
After you supply the database name and DBLOAD opens the input file, a message is
displayed on the system console. A tape must be mounted on the appropriate unit and
identified through an operator reply. Refer to the Volume Management Reference Manual
Chapter 8
385
Using the Database Utilities
DBLOAD
for instructions about console interaction.
Using ControlY
When executing DBLOAD in session mode, ControlY can be pressed to request the
approximate number of entries in the current data set that have already been copied.
DBLOAD prints the following message on $STDLIST:
<CONTROL Y> DATA SET m:x ENTRIES HAVE BEEN PROCESSED
Example
:RUN DBLOAD.PUB.SYS
WHICH DATABASE? ORDERS/SELL
DATA SET 1:
AUTOMATIC MASTER
DATA SET 2:
19 ENTRIES
DATA SET 3:
25 ENTRIES
DATA SET 4:
12 ENTRIES
DATA SET 5:
32 ENTRIES
DATA SET 6: 258 ENTRIES
END OF VOLUME 1, 0 READ ERRORS RECOVERED
DATABASE LOADED
END OF PROGRAM
Initiate execution of DBLOAD. Supply the database name and maintenance word. DBLOAD
indicates the number of entries copied. Data set 1 is an automatic master so 0 entries are
copied; the entries are created as related detail entries are copied to the database.
One volume was copied with no read errors.
NOTE
For optimum performance, DBLOAD uses deferred output when it adds entries
to a database. With deferred output, data and structural information cannot
be written back to disk each time DBPUT returns to the DBLOAD program. As a
result, the database is not considered to be logically or structurally complete
on disk until the DBLOAD is complete. During DBLOAD the database being
loaded is considered inconsistent ("bad") and only at the completion of a
DBLOAD run is the database considered consistent ("good") again.
During a load if an MPE/iX or hardware failure occurs, the database is
definitely not structurally intact, and it returns its "bad" flag. After the
system is brought back up, TurboIMAGE/XL does not allow the database to
be opened for normal access. If you get a "bad database" error in such a
situation, erase the database with DBUTIL and then perform the load again.
(For more information on the error message "Bad Database" refer to appendix
A). Alternatively, the database can be purged with DBUTIL and then restored
from a backup copy.
386
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBRECOV
DBRECOV
The DBRECOV program usually is executed after a backup database copy has been restored
by running DBRESTOR in the event of a system failure. DBRECOV reads the log file containing
records of all database modifications and re-executes the transactions against the restored
database(s). The DBRECOV >FILE command enables individual users to be informed of the
extent of recovery. For more information on roll-forward recovery, roll-back recovery, and
the DBRECOV STOP-RESTART feature, refer to chapter 7.
DBRECOV also uses a mirror database on a secondary system as a workable maintenance
method. The options used with DBRECOV for this type of recovery and maintenance method
are RESTART, ABORT and PURGE. Example 4 shows a step-by-step mirror database
maintenance.
DBRECOV can perform rollforward recovery of TurboIMAGE/XL databases stored using the
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup. No new option for DBRECOV is needed.
The commands associated with DBRECOV are >CONTROL, >EXIT, >FILE, >PRINT,
>RECOVER, >ROLLBACK and >RUN. Each command is discussed separately.
Operation
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS [,option]
Options
RESTART
restarts the roll-forward recovery process. Information in the RESTART file
is used by DBRECOV to restart recovery from the point it was stopped.
ABORT
purges the RESTART file and returns the flags to the same settings as
before the recovery process was started.
PURGE
deletes the current RESTART file before beginning the mirror database
process again. PURGE can also be used if ABORT fails to abort recovery
(possibly due to an inconsistent RESTART file).
Initiates execution of the DBRECOV program in the PUB group and SYS account. The
recovery system prints a banner indicating the version, date, and time. It then prompts for
a command input.
Example 1
Roll-forward recovery of database ORDERS.
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
>RECOVER ORDERS
DATABASE ORDERS LAST DBSTORED THURS, SEP 21, 1989, 8:30 AM
>RUN
Chapter 8
387
Using the Database Utilities
DBRECOV
Example 2
Roll-forward recovery of multiple databases ORDERS and RETAIL. PART and SALES are
filenames, ADMIN and MKTG are accounts in the FILE commands. The 0 is the rmode
and the 3 is the fmode.
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
>RECOVER ORDERS
DATABASE ORDERS LAST DBSTORED MON, SEP 25, 1989, 6:40 PM
>CONTROL NOSTORE
>RECOVER RETAIL
>FILE PART,JOHN.ADMIN
>FILE SALES,MARY.MKTG,0,3
>RUN
Example 3
Roll-back recovery of multiple databases ORDERS and RETAIL.
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
>CONTROL NOABORTS
>ROLLBACK ORDERS,RETAIL
DATABASE ORDERS LAST USED THURS, SEP 21, 1989, 6:00 PM
DATABASE RETAIL LAST USED FRI, SEP 22, 1989, 8:00 AM
>RUN
Example 4
DBRECOV STOP-RESTART recovery on database ORDERS. The recovery process is done on
a secondary system with the mirror database maintenance and recovery process. The
following example begins with a prompt for the user to continue or stop the roll-forward
recovery process on the secondary system. When DBRECOV cannot find the next log file in a
log set, the user can stop the recovery process and back up the secondary system. In the
example, note that the restart file ORDERLOG is named after the database logid.
UNABLE TO OPEN LOG FILE ORDER005
REPLY `CONTINUE' OR `STOP' ON CONSOLE.
STOP
DATABASE(S) WITH RECOVERY SUSPENDED:
ORDERS.DATAMGT.ADMIN
RESTART RECOVERY WITH LOG FILE:
QUIET BLOCK BEGINS AT RECORD
NUMBER OF RECORDS IN STAGING DISC
RESTART FILE NAME:
:FILE L;DEV=TAPE
:STORE ORDERS@;*L
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS,RESTART
388
ORDER005
1005
1810
ORDERLOG
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBRECOV
WHICH DATABASE?
ORDERS
DATABASE(S) TO BE RESTARTED:
ORDERS.DATAMGT.ADMIN
CONTINUE WITH RECOVERY (N/Y)?
Y
Text Reference
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
389
Using the Database Utilities
>CONTROL
>CONTROL
Used to control various options that affect the execution of DBRECOV. The options are
STAMP, NOSTAMP, STORE, NOSTORE, ABORTS, NOABORTS, UNEND, NOUNEND,
STOPTIME, ERRORS, STATS, NOSTATS, MODEX, MODE 4, EOF, MDBX, and NOMDBX.
Syntax
>CONTROL parameters [,parameters...]
Discussion
The >CONTROL options are described in detail on the next page. If the >CONTROL command
is not used, the following default conditions apply:
STAMP
is the database time stamp and must correspond with the one written to
the log file.
STORE
is the DBSTORE flag set in the database root file.
ABORTS
causes transactions which failed to complete due to a program abort to be
recovered.
NOUNEND
suppresses the posting of transactions which did not complete or were
aborted prior to a system failure.
ERRORS=
during job (batch) execution allows zero errors (DBRECOV terminates), and
during interactive sessions allows 30,000 errors.
MODEX
DBRECOV proceeds with exclusive access to the database, using deferred
output (see discussion under DBCONTROL in chapter 5).
NOSTATS
if the database is not recovered, no tabulated information will be printed.
STOPTIME=
DBRECOV will recover all log records, regardless of the time stamp.
EOF=
DBRECOV will recover all log records in the log file.
MDBX
DBRECOV treats multiple database transactions contained in the log file as
separate transactions.
The >CONTROL command is used to override the default conditions.
If a particular parameter is not specified within a >CONTROL command, the default
condition remains in effect. Any number of parameters can be named in any order, but if
more than one condition is specified for one parameter, the last condition entered applies.
For example:
>CONTROL NOSTAMP, STAMP
or
390
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>CONTROL
>CONTROL NOSTAMP
>CONTROL STAMP
In both cases, the STAMP condition cancels the previous NOSTAMP. Recovery proceeds
with the time stamp check intact.
If additional databases are specified for simultaneous recovery, they are all governed by
the same >CONTROL options.
In the specifications below, default options are shown in brackets [ ]. The default conditions
for STOPTIME, ERRORS, and EOF are included with their descriptions.
Parameters
[STAMP]
is the time stamp in the database root file. It is compared with the time
stamp in each DBOPEN log record in the log file. If the time stamps do not
match, DBRECOV returns an error message, and terminates recovery for
the offending database.
NOSTAMP
disables the check of the database and log file time stamps. Allows
recovery to proceed regardless of the database and log file time stamps.
[STORE]
is the DBSTORE flag in the database root file and is checked to ensure that
the database has not been modified between restoration and recovery. If
the flag has been cleared, the >RECOVER command fails. The DBSTORE flag
is set only when the database is stored using DBSTORE. It is cleared when
the database is accessed by DBDELETE, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE.
NOSTORE
disables the check of the DBSTORE flag. Allows recovery to proceed whether
or not the DBSTORE flag is set. Useful when the database has been stored
by the MPE/iX STORE command rather than DBSTORE. Storing the
database using the STORE command does not set the DBSTORE flag, and is
not recommended.
[ABORTS]
when transactions do not complete due to a program abort,
TurboIMAGE/XL appends an abnormal DBEND (DBABEND) to the log file
and considers the transactions completed. This enables DBRECOV to
recover these transactions and thereby avoids suppressing all subsequent
dependent transactions.
NOABORTS
causes DBRECOV to suppress transactions not originally completed by user
programs. This option tells TurboIMAGE/XL a user or program abort is
abnormal, or incomplete. NOABORTS should only be used if all database
modifications were stopped immediately after the abort and recovery was
initiated. Otherwise, recovery can fail due to record file overflow (see
below). For more information on both ABORTS and NOABORTS refer to
chapter 7.
[NOUNEND]
causes DBRECOV to suppress incomplete transactions. Recovery can fail
due to a record file overflow (see "Record Numbers" later in this section).
UNEND
prevents DBRECOV from suppressing incomplete transactions.
Chapter 8
391
Using the Database Utilities
>CONTROL
STOPTIME= mm/dd/yy hh:mm causes DBRECOV to impose an artificial end-of-file when the
specified log record time stamp (supplied by MPE/iX) is encountered. All
log records with subsequent time stamps will not be recovered. This
feature is useful in the event of a user program failure; the database can
be recovered to a point in time before the suspect program began
execution.
Default condition: Log record time stamps are not checked by DBRECOV.
ERRORS=nnnn controls the maximum number of non-fatal errors allowed during a job
(batch) execution. Should nnnn be exceeded, DBRECOV terminates and sets
the job control word to −1 to indicate an error. However, this check does not
take effect until all commands have been parsed and processed.
Default condition: ERRORS=0 for batch jobs and ERRORS=30,000 for
interactive sessions. The number of errors allowed can be altered by
entering a revised ERRORS parameter.
STATS
is used to obtain information from the log file without actually recovering a
database. Requires use of a file equation to specify the log file. For
example:
:FILE LOGFILE=ORDER001;DEV=TAPE;LABEL=LOG001
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
>CONTROL STATS
>RUN
This example shows the log file ORDER001 residing on tape and belonging
to an expandable file set (refer to the GETLOG command with AUTO option
in the MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual. The recovery system
responds by printing tabulated information from log files, similar to tables
printed after a database recovery. However, no databases are actually
opened or recovered.
[NOSTATS]
negates the STATS option; tabulated information is not printed unless a
database is recovered.
[MODEX]
causes recovery to execute in exclusive (deferred) mode. No other users can
access the database concurrent with recovery.
MODE4
recovery proceeds in DBOPEN mode 4, allowing users in mode 6 to access
(read) the database while recovery is in process.
EOF=nnnn
causes DBRECOV to impose an artificial end-of-log file when the specified
log record number is encountered. All log records with subsequent
numbers will not be recovered. This feature is useful in the event of a user
program failure; the database can be recovered up to a record number
preceding the suspect records. While logging is in progress, the MPE/iX
SHOWLOGSTATUS command can be used to determine the current number
of records logged before initiating a questionable program.
Default condition: All log records are recovered by DBRECOV.
[MDBX]
392
causes DBRECOV to treat multiple database transactions contained in the
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>CONTROL
log file as separate transactions. If all of the databases involved in the
multiple database transaction are not specified in the >RECOVER or
>ROLLBACK command, DBRECOV will abort. It does not allow partial
recovery of multiple data base transactions. If a multiple database
transaction is dependent on any transaction that was not recovered, the
multiple database transaction will be rolled out.
NOMDBX
causes DBRECOV to treat multiple database transactions contained in the
log file as single transactions. Therefore, each database can be recovered
separately. This option is useful if only part of a multiple database
transaction is to be recovered.
Record Numbers
DBRECOV identifies detail records by their record number. Suppressing aborted or unended
transactions during recovery with the NOUNEND or NOABORTS options can cause
subsequent detail calls to DBPUT to use different record numbers. In order to change old
record numbers into new ones, DBRECOV uses an internal record table. The record table
provides a "before" and "after" location of the record numbers for DBPUT calls.
Text Reference
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
393
Using the Database Utilities
>EXIT
>EXIT
Used to terminate DBRECOV without recovering any databases.
Syntax
>EXIT
Text Reference
Chapter 7
394
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>FILE
>FILE
Routes log records to individual user files, providing the application program with
information about the outcome of recovery; provides a useful tool for auditing previous
entries. One file for each user can be opened simultaneously by re-entering the >FILE
command once for each user, or all users can be directed to a single file.
Syntax
>FILE fileref,userref [,rmode,fmode]
Parameters
fileref
is an MPE/iX file reference: filename [/lockword]
[.group[.account``]]. This is the destination file for each user's log
records.
userref
is a user reference, specifying which user's log records to copy to this user
recovery file. The format is: username [/ident].account.
The optional identifier, which also must be passed to DBOPEN as part of the
password parameter, uniquely identifies persons using the same logon.
rmode
fmode
CAUTION
Chapter 8
is for roll-forward recovery only. Directs recovery system to copy log
records associated with transactions successfully recovered. rmode can
take one of the following values:
0
No records associated with recovered transactions are
copied to the user file. (Default value.)
1
Log records corresponding to the last successfully
recovered call to DBEND of each transaction block are
copied.
2
The sequence of log records associated with the last
successfully recovered transaction of each transaction
block are copied. In addition, all DBMEMO log records which
immediately follow this transaction are copied.
3
All log records associated with successfully recovered
transactions for each transaction block are copied.
directs recovery system to copy log records associated with transactions
that failed to recover. Used with both roll-forward and roll-back recovery.
The (roll-forward) recovery system cannot guarantee that all records
associated with unsuccessfully recovered transactions can be copied, because
log records which reside in the log system's memory buffers are lost in the
event of a system failure. When accessing the database for critical
395
Using the Database Utilities
>FILE
transactions, use DBEND mode 2 for immediate posting of the log system's
memory buffer.
fmode can take one of the following values:
0
No records associated with failed transactions are copied.
(Default value.)
1
Log records corresponding to the first unsuccessfully
recovered call to DBBEGIN of each transaction block are
copied.
2
The sequence of log records associated with the first
unsuccessfully recovered transaction of each transaction
block are copied.
3
All log records that could not be recovered are copied.
Discussion
The >FILE command copies qualified DBOPEN and DBCLOSE log records to each user's
recovery file. See "File Command" in chapter 7 for a full discussion qualifying the return of
log records. The optional rmode and fmode parameters specify the copies of additional log
records.
Once the >FILE command is entered, the user recovery file is opened and any existing
records are deleted. If the specified user file does not exist, an error is reported unless the
file references the logon group and account, in which case the file is automatically created.
The state of a log record (either recovered or not) is indicated by a flag set by DBRECOV in
the record itself. MPE/iX WRITELOG records returned by DBRECOV are variable length,
because DBRECOV eliminates the continuation records by appending their data to the
original WRITELOG record. Consequently, DBRECOV will create recovery files with a variable
length record format. However, fixed length records are permitted if the file already exists
or an MPE/iX FILE command is in effect. If a log record exceeds the record size of a user
file with fixed length records, the log record is truncated and an error message is printed.
Example
>FILE PART/MGR,MARY/RYAN.MKTG,0,3
PART is the filename. MGR is the lockword. MARY is the username and RYAN is the
identifier. MKTG is the account. The 0 is the rmode, and the 3 is the fmode.
The >FILE command is repeated for each recovery file to be created and for each user
whose records will be copied to a user recovery file.
Text Reference
Chapter 7
396
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>PRINT
>PRINT
Prints the names of databases specified for recovery (DBTABLE option) or recovery files
specified (FILETABLE option). Can be used as a check before actually initiating recovery
with the >RUN command.
NOTE
The >PRINT DBTABLE command produces the DATABASE STATISTICS table,
but does not include statistics. The table, along with statistics, is
automatically displayed by every execution of the recovery system. If you
need this table, along with statistics, without actually performing the
recovery, use the >CONTROL STATS command instead.
Syntax
>PRINT { DBTABLE FILETABLE }
Parameters
DBTABLE
displays names of databases specified for recovery
FILETABLE
displays file references, user references, rmodes and fmodes specified in
>FILE commands.
Example
>PRINT DBTABLE
****************************************************************
*
DATABASE STATISTICS
*
*
*
* NAME GROUP ACCOUNT OPENS TRANS PUTS DELETES UPDATES *
* ---- ----- ------- ----- ----- ---- ------- ------- *
* ORDERS TST MKG
0
0
0
0
0 *
****************************************************************
Text Reference
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
397
Using the Database Utilities
>RECOVER
>RECOVER
Used to designate the name of a database to be roll-forward recovered; opens database root
file, validates logid and password with MPE/iX, and checks the DBSTORE flag. Multiple
databases can be roll-forward recovered concurrently if they have all logged to the same
log file by entering the >RECOVER command once for each database or as follows:
>RECOVER database name, database name
Syntax
>RECOVER database name[/maint word][.group[.account]]
Parameters
database name is the name of the TurboIMAGE/XL database to be recovered.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator. This word must
be supplied by anyone other than the database creator.
group
is the group where the database(s) resides.
account
is the account where the database(s) resides.
Discussion
If the >RECOVER command is accepted, the following message is returned:
DATABASE database name LAST DBSTORED day, date, time
The following conditions must be satisfied before the >RECOVER command is accepted:
1. The database must be accessible to the user (database administrator) running
DBRECOV. This user must either be the creator of the database or know the
maintenance word. If the database resides in a group or account different from the
user's logon, the MPE/iX file security must permit the user read and write access to the
database files.
2. The database must be enabled for recovery.
3. The log identifier characteristics (name, password, log file name and device type) must
not have been altered since the log file was generated. This restriction applies to
MPE/iX log commands as well as those provided for TurboIMAGE/XL by DBUTIL. This
is necessary because the MPE/iX log identifier is used by TurboIMAGE/XL to obtain the
name and device type of the log file.
The >RECOVER command will not be accepted if the logid is unknown to MPE/iX.
However, if the logid is known to MPE/iX but specifies the wrong log file, this condition
is not detected at this time and >RECOVER will be accepted. DBRECOV will generate
398
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>RECOVER
erroneous data in the database if the database is recovered with the wrong log file.
4. The DBSTORE flag must be set, indicating that the database has not been modified
between restoration and roll-forward recovery. This check can be overridden by the
NOSTORE option of the >CONTROL command.
5. No other users can be accessing the database when >RECOVER is called. Exception:
When the MODE4 option of the >CONTROL command is specified, the database can be
concurrently accessed in mode 6 (read only).
The >RECOVER command itself does not initiate recovery, but makes several preparatory
checks. The recovery system is actually initiated by the >RUN command.
Example
>RECOVER ORDERS, RETAIL
DATABASE ORDERS LAST DBSTORED THURS, SEP 7, 1989, 6:30 PM
DATABASE RETAIL LAST DBSTORED MON, SEP 11, 1989, 10:00 PM
ORDERS and RETAIL are database names.
Text Reference
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
399
Using the Database Utilities
>ROLLBACK
>ROLLBACK
Rolls out any incomplete transactions following a system crash. Multiple databases can be
roll-back recovered concurrently by entering the command as follows:
>ROLLBACK dbname, dbname
Syntax
>ROLLBACK dbname[/maint word][.group[.account]]
Parameters
database name is the name of individual database(s) to be rolled-back.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator. This word must
be supplied by anyone other than the database creator.
group
is the group where the database(s) resides.
account
is the account where the database(s) resides.
Discussion
If the >ROLLBACK command is accepted, the following message is returned:
DATABASE database name LAST USED day, date, time
The following conditions must be satisfied before the >ROLLBACK command is accepted:
1. The database must be accessible to the user (database administrator) running
DBRECOV. This user must either be the creator of the database or know the
maintenance word. If the database resides in a group or account different from the
user's on, the MPE/iX file security must permit the user read and write access to the
database files.
2. The database must have been enabled for roll-back recovery.
3. The log identifier characteristics (name, password, log file name and device type) must
not have been altered since the log file was generated. This restriction applies to
MPE/iX log commands as well as those provided by TurboIMAGE/XL by DBUTIL. This
is necessary because the MPE/iX log identifier is used by TurboIMAGE/XL to obtain the
name and device of the log file.
4. When roll-back is enabled, DBUTIL sets a roll-back flag to indicate that roll-back is
enabled for the database. The roll-back time stamp is updated when the database is
first opened and is logged to the log file. Roll-back recovery then uses the time stamp
during recovery to verify the correct log file for each database.
5. No other users can be accessing the database when >ROLLBACK is called. The database
400
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>ROLLBACK
can be concurrently accessed by users when the >CONTROL command is specified with
the MODE4 option.
The >ROLLBACK command itself does not initiate recovery, but makes several preparatory
checks. The recovery system is actually initiated by the >RUN command.
The following commands are used with >ROLLBACK:
>FILE
>PRINT
>CONTROL
The >FILE command optional parameter rmode is not used with >ROLLBACK.
The following >CONTROL options are not applicable with >ROLLBACK:
STAMP, NOSTAMP, STORE, NOSTORE, STOPTIME
Example
>CONTROL NOSTATS
>ROLLBACK ORDERS
DATABASE ORDERS LAST USED THURS, SEP 7, 1989, 6:00 PM
>RUN
ORDERS is the database name.
Text Reference
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
401
Using the Database Utilities
>RUN
>RUN
Initiates recovery-process. The recovery system opens the log file and validates the log
identifier before roll-forward recovery or roll-back recovery begins.
Syntax
>RUN
Discussion
For recovery to succeed, the log file must be accessible to the database administrator. This
means that the database administrator must either be the creator of the log identifier used
to create the log file, or know the maintenance word and have system manager (SM) or
operator (OP) capability. If the database administrator does not have system manager
capability, and if the log file resides on disk in a group and account different from logon,
then the administrator must have read access to the log file according to MPE/iX file
security. File equations are permitted. However, the fully qualified file name of the
expected log file must be specified. If the log file resides on tape, the database
administrator must know the volume identifier, so that the operator can respond to the log
file tape mount request.
If recovery succeeds, tabulated information is displayed and the program is terminated. A
table of process statistics includes the number of DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE log
records processed and the total transactions for each process.
When using roll-forward recovery, an asterisk (*) may appear next to any process
indicating that either a DBCLOSE record is missing or some transactions may not have been
recovered. Therefore, no asterisk for a process in the table of process statistics indicates
that all transactions were recovered.
The same table information is displayed when using roll-back recovery; however, there is a
slight difference. The database table will list all incomplete transactions or DBPUT,
DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE log records that were "rolled-out." An asterisk (*) will appear
next to these processes.
A table of database statistics includes the same information totaled for each database. A
logging system table includes the log identifier, log file information, and recovery file
information if this facility is used. Refer to "Recovery Tables" in chapter 7 for more
information on Process, Database, Logging and Recovery Tables.
402
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>RUN
Example 1
Roll-forward recovery of database ORDERS.
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
>RECOVER ORDERS
DATABASE ORDERS LAST DBSTORED FRI, SEP 22, 1989, 4:00 PM
>RUN
Example 2
Roll-back recovery of database ORDERS.
:RUN DBRECOV.PUB.SYS
>ROLLBACK ORDERS
DATABASE ORDERS LAST USED THURS, SEP 21, 1989, 6:00 PM
>RUN
Chapter 8
403
Using the Database Utilities
DBRESTOR
DBRESTOR
Copies a database to disk from the backup volume(s) created by the DBSTORE program or
by the MPE/iX STORE command.
Operation
1
2
[ :FILE DBRESTOR [=filename] [;DEV=device]
[;REC=recsize] [; {BUFNOBUF}
]]
:RUN DBRESTOR.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
3
WHICH DATABASE? database name [/maint word]
4
DATABASE RESTORED
END OF PROGRAM
Parameters
filename
is a name (up to 8 characters) that replaces DBRESTOR in the mount
prompt at the operator's console.
device
is the device class name of the device from which the database is to be
recorded.
recsize
is the record size of the record to be restored. recsize must be at least as
large as the record written to the device to avoid losing data.
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database root file to be restored.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator. This word must
be supplied by anyone other than the database creator.
Operation Discussion
1
An optional file equation that specifies the device class name for the device
from which the database is to be restored, the record size of the records to
be restored, and whether the records are buffered or not. The default
device class is TAPE.
2
Initiates execution of the DBRESTOR program in the PUB group of the SYS
account.
3
In session mode, DBRESTOR prompts for the database name and
maintenance word. In job mode, the database name and maintenance
word, if any, must be in the record immediately following the RUN
command.
4
After DBRESTOR has created the root file and data sets and restored the
data to these files, it prints a confirmation message.
404
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBRESTOR
Console Messages
After you supply the database name and DBRESTOR opens the file specified by filename, a
message is displayed on the system console. A tape must be mounted on the appropriate
unit and identified through an operator reply. Refer to Volume Management Reference
Manual for instructions about console interaction.
If the database is on more than one volume, another message is displayed on the system
console. The operator must mount the next volume in the sequence. If the volume that is
mounted is not the correct format, the operator is notified through a console message. If
the correct volume is available, the incorrect one should be removed and the correct one
mounted. The operator must enter a reply on the console.
Example
:JOB MRG.ACCOUNTA
:RUN DBRESTOR.PUB.SYS
ORDERS/SELL
:EOJ
Initiate job.
Initiate DBRESTOR.
Specify database name and maintenance word.
Terminate job.
After creating the files and restoring the file contents, DBRESTOR prints the following
message on $STDLIST:
DATABASE RESTORED
NOTE
Chapter 8
If there is already a copy of the database on disc, it must be purged using
DBUTIL before running DBRESTOR.
405
Using the Database Utilities
DBSTORE
DBSTORE
Stores the database root file and all data sets to a tape in a format compatible with backup
files created by the MPE STORE and SYSGEN commands. DBSTORE differs from these
commands in that it handles only TurboIMAGE/XL databases.
Operation
1
[:FILE DBSTORE [=filename] [;DEV=device] [;REC=recsize] [; { BUF
NOBUF} ] ]
2
:RUN DBSTORE.PUB.SYS [;INFO="MPE STORE options"]
.
.
.
3
WHICH DATABASE? database name [/maint word]
4
DATABASE STORED
END OF PROGRAM
If you try to store a database that needs recovery, DBSTORE will do the recovery before
storing the database.
Before copying the files, DBSTORE gains semi-exclusive access to the referenced database;
that is, DBSTORE determines that the only other database activity consists of other users
executing DBSTORE or application programs that open the database in mode 6 or 8. If
DBSTORE cannot gain semiexclusive access, it terminates and prints the following message:
DATABASE IN USE
You must be the database creator or provide the maintenance word to use DBSTORE.
Parameters
filename
is the name (up to 8 characters) that replaces DBSTORE in
the mount request at the operator's console.
device
is the device class name of the device on which the data
entries are to be stored.
recsize
is the record size of the record to be written to the device;
must be a multiple of 512 bytes and less than the
configured record size for the device.
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database to be stored.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator.
This word must be supplied by anyone other than the
database creator.
INFO=
is used for the parameters that can be passed to the MPE
STORE/RESTORE process. For example, the TRANSPORT
406
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBSTORE
parameter (INFO="TRANSPORT") allows you to migrate
files from MPE/iX to MPE V with the MPE/iX STORE
command.
Operation Discussion
1
The optional file equation that specifies the device class name for the
device on which the database is to be stored, the record size of the records
written to the device, and whether records are to be buffered. The default
device class is TAPE.
2
Initiates execution of the DBSTORE program in the PUB group of the SYS
account. The MPE STORE options are parameters that can be passed to the
STORE/RESTORE process. For example, the TRANSPORT option is used
when moving a TurboIMAGE/XL database to MPE V.
Note that the database may be too large to move to MPE V because, with
the expanded file size available on MPE/iX, data sets can exceed the MPE
V file size limit. If the database contains a data set larger than the MPE V
limit, an MPE error is displayed.
3
In session mode, DBSTORE prompts for the database name and
maintenance word. In job mode, the database name and maintenance
word, if any, must be in the record immediately following the RUN
command.
4
After DBSTORE has copied the root file and all data sets, it prints a
message to signal completion.
NOTE
DBSTORE does not store jumbo data sets or B-Tree index files. Instead, use the
STORE command with POSIX names or use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24
True-Online Backup with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END option.
Logging
DBSTORE updates a time stamp and store flag in the database root file before storing the
database. The time stamp designates the date and time of the DBSTORE operation, and is
used by DBRECOV to help identify the correspondence between log files and backup
databases.
The store flag is set by DBSTORE to indicate that the database has been stored; this flag is
cleared (reset) when the first modification to the database occurs by a call to DBPUT,
DBUPDATE, or DBDELETE. Both DBRECOV and DBUTIL interrogate the status of the DBSTORE
flag. DBRECOV (roll-forward) checks this flag to ensure that no one has modified the backup
database prior to recovery. DBUTIL checks this flag whenever logging and recovery is
enabled, because a valid database backup copy must exist for roll-forward recovery to be
possible. If the store flag is not set when a DBUTIL user enables the logging option a
warning is printed:
WARNING:
database modified and not DBSTORED
This warning does not necessarily indicate that a valid backup does not exist, because
Chapter 8
407
Using the Database Utilities
DBSTORE
either an MPE SYSGEN or STORE command could have been used instead of DBSTORE.
Because neither SYSGEN or STORE update the database time stamp and store flag, the
protection afforded by these mechanisms is not available if this form of backup is selected.
For this reason, it is highly recommended to use DBSTORE as the backup facility when
logging. See chapter 7 for further discussion of logging and recovery.
If the mirror database maintenance method is being used, storing the database on the
secondary system can be done differently than using the DBSTORE process. When using
DBRECOV STOP-RESTART recovery on the database, storing the database, RESTART file,
and the log files that were processed since the last successful RESTART can be done with an
MPE STORE command. DBRECOV STOP-RESTART places a time stamp in the RESTART file
and in the database to identify which RESTART file to apply to which database. If naming
conventions have been followed, an MPE STORE @ command can be used to store all the
necessary files and database(s). If DBSTORE is used, the user must remember to use an
MPE STORE command to store the RESTART file and the log files. For more information on
DBRECOV STOP-RESTART, refer to "The Mirror Database" in chapter 7.
Console Messages
After you supply the database name and DBSTORE opens the output file, a message is
displayed on the system console. A tape must be mounted on the appropriate unit and
identified through an operator reply. Refer to the Volume Management Reference Manual
for instructions about console interaction.
If more than one volume is required to store the database, a request is displayed on the
console for the next one. The next tape must be mounted and the unit readied. The volume
that has been removed should be properly labeled with the database name and volume
number.
Example
:JOB MGR.ACCOUNTA
:RUN DBSTORE.PUB.SYS
ORDERS/SELL
:EOJ
Initiate job.
Initiate DBSTORE program.
Supply database name and maintenance word.
Terminate job.
After copying the ORDERS root file and all data sets, DBSTORE prints the following
message on $STDLIST:
DATABASE STORED
CAUTION
If you need to cancel a DBSTORE, reply zero to the tape request:
:REPLY pin#,0
Do not use Break and ABORT to abort the process when the tape mount is
requested. When DBSTORE is aborted by using Break and ABORT, the date-time
stamp and store flag in the root file are updated even though the database
was not stored.
408
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBSTORE
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup
You can also use TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup to back up your database. The
advantages of using the option ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END are:
• You can store the database even when it is open for access.
• The related files including TC file, third-party indexing files, jumbo data set files, and
B-Tree index files are also stored along with it.
• The DBSTORE flag and time stamp are also set before storing the database.
• You can restore it using the MPE RESTORE command.
• If the database is enabled for roll-forward logging, DBRECOV can recover the database.
• You can store multiple databases with one command.
For more information, refer to the STORE and TurboSTORE/iX Products Manual.
Chapter 8
409
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
DBUNLOAD
Copies the data entries from each data set to specially formatted tape volumes.
Operation
1
[:FILE DBUNLOAD[=filename] [;DEV=device] ]
2
:RUN DBUNLOAD.PUB.SYS [ ,CHAINED
,SERIAL
]
.
.
.
3
WHICH DATA BASE? database name [/maint word]
.
.
.
4
DATA SET m: x ENTRIES EXPECTED, x ENTRIES PROCESSED
5
END OF VOLUME n, y WRITE ERRORS RECOVERED
SAVE VOLUME ON LOGICAL DEVICE z AS n
6
DATABASE UNLOADED
END OF PROGRAM
(Refer to "Operation Discussion" later in this section.)
Parameters
filename
is the name (up to 8 characters) that replaces DBUNLOAD in the mount
prompt at the operator's console.
If you want information about your data set chains without actually
performing a DBUNLOAD, supply $NULL as the filename. This causes a
simulated unloading of the database, preventing the need to mount a tape.
device
is the device class name of the device to which the data entries are to be
copied.
database name is the name of the TurboIMAGE/XL database to be unloaded.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator. This word must
be supplied by anyone other than the database creator.
Message Variables
m
is the number of data sets in the database.
x
is the number of entries (expected) and the number of entries processed or
copied from the specified data set.
410
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
n
is the number of the volume.
y
is the number of write errors from which DBUNLOAD has successfully
recovered.
z
is the logical device number of the unit.
DBUNLOAD is necessary if you want to modify the database structure to, for example,
increase the capacity of a data set. To increase a capacity,
1. Unload the entries.
2. Purge the database.
3. Change the schema and create a new root file.
4. Execute the DBUTIL >>CREATE command.
5. Reload the data entries from the volumes created by DBUNLOAD.
The data sets are unloaded in the order that they were defined in the original schema. No
data set names are recorded on the backup volume(s); entries are merely associated with
the corresponding data set from which they are read. DBUNLOAD calls the DBGET procedure
to read each entry from each set of the database and, to read the complete entry, uses a list
parameter of an at-sign followed by a semicolon (@;). Values for data items appear in each
entry in the same order as the items were mentioned in the data set definition in the
schema. The language ID is copied along with the data of the database.
DBUNLOAD requires exclusive access to the database. If the database is already open by any
other process, DBUNLOAD prints the message:
DATABASE IN USE
and prompts again for a database name.
DBUNLOAD operates in either serial or chained mode as explained below. The mode is
determined by the entry point specified with the RUN command; for example:
:RUN DBUNLOAD.PUB.SYS,CHAINED
The default entry, if none is specified, is chained.
• In serial mode, DBUNLOAD copies the data entries serially in record number order.
"Stand-alone" detail data sets, those which are not tied to any master data sets through
specified search item paths, are always unloaded serially.
• In chained mode, DBUNLOAD copies all of the detail entries with the same primary path
search item value to contiguous locations on the backup file. The ordering of the search
item values from the primary path is based on the physical order of the matching value
in the associated master data set. Figure 8-1. (shown at the end of this section on
DBUNLOAD) illustrates the method for unloading a data set in chained mode. After the
database is reloaded, chained access along the primary path is more efficient.
Chapter 8
411
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
Broken Chains
If a chained DBUNLOAD encounters a broken chain, it will unload all entries in the chain
down to, but not including the break. It will then go to the end of the chain and follow the
chain backward to the break, then unload the remaining records of the chain. In some
instances, this will save all entries in the chain. In any case, the order of the entries is
preserved. Information about each broken chain in a data set is printed before the
end-of-the-data-set summary (see statement 4 under "Operation Discussion" in this
section).
Operation Discussion
1
An optional file equation that specifies the device class name for the device
on which the data entries are to be copied. The default is device class
TAPE.
2
Initiates execution of the DBUNLOAD program in the PUB group of the SYS
account.
3
In session mode, DBUNLOAD prompts for the database name and
maintenance word. In job mode, the database name and maintenance
word, if any, must be in the record immediately following the RUN
command.
4
After copying a data set without detecting a broken chain, DBUNLOAD
prints a message that includes the data set number and the number of
entries copied.
If DBUNLOAD detects a broken chain, the following messages are also
returned:
DATA SET m:
Broken Chain at Entry #p[,following Entry #q]
Chain Head is Entry #r of Data Set #s
Key = k
l entries [expected,j entries salvaged]
where:
p
is the entry number where the break was detected.
q
is the number of the entry last unloaded from the front of
the chain, if any.
r
is the entry number of the chain head.
s
is the data set number of the chain head.
k
is the value of the key of the broken chain.
l
is the length of the chain according to the user label.
j
is the number of entries salvaged from the chain.
These four message lines are repeated for every broken chain in the data
set, followed by the end-of-data-set summary that reports the number of
lost entries, if any:
412
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
DATA SET m: x ENTRIES[EXPECTED, t LOST!!]
For example:
5
DATA SET 1:
3 ENTRIES
DATA SET 2:
Broken Chain at Entry #2, following Entry #1
Chain Head is Entry #5 of Data Set #1
KEY = AA
4 entries expected, 3 entries salvaged
DATA SET 2:
11 ENTRIES EXPECTED; 1 LOST!!
When the end of a volume is encountered, DBUNLOAD prints this message:
END OF VOLUME n, y WRITE ERRORS RECOVERED
where n is the number of the volume and y is the number of write errors
from which DBUNLOAD successfully recovered. DBUNLOAD also instructs the
operator to save the current volume and mount a new one by printing the
following two messages on the system console (where z is the logical device
number of the tape drive and n is the volume number):
SAVE VOLUME ON LOGICAL DEVICE z AS n
MOUNT NEXT VOLUME ON LOGICAL DEVICE z.
6
After the data sets have been successfully copied, DBUNLOAD issues a
completion message.
DATABASE UNLOADED
END OF PROGRAM
Console Messages
After you supply the database name and DBUNLOAD opens the output file, a message is
displayed on the system console. A tape must be mounted on the appropriate unit and
identified through an operator reply. Refer to the Volume Management Reference Manual
for instructions about console interaction.
Using ControlY
When executing DBUNLOAD in session mode, you can press ControlY to request the
approximate number of entries in the current data set that have already been written.
DBUNLOAD then prints the following message on $STDLIST:
<CONTROL Y>DATA SET m: x ENTRIES HAVE BEEN PROCESSED
Chapter 8
413
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
Writing Errors
If an unrecoverable write error occurs, DBUNLOAD prints the message:
UNRECOVERABLE WRITE ERROR, RESTARTING AT BEGINNING OF VOLUME
and attempts to recover by starting the current volume again. It also sends this message to
the system operator (where z is the logical device number of the unit):
WRITE PROBLEMS TRY ANOTHER VOLUME ON LOGICAL DEVICE z
If an excessive number of non-fatal write errors occur, DBUNLOAD again attempts to recover
from the beginning of the volume after printing the following message on the $STDLIST
and sends the same message to the system operator as described for unrecoverable errors
above:
EXCESSIVE WRITE ERROR RECOVERIES, RESTARTING AT BEGINNING OF VOLUME
Example (Session Mode)
:RUN DBUNLOAD.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
WHICH DATABASE? ORDERS
DATA SET 1: 3 ENTRIES EXPECTED, 3 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
DATA SET 2: 11 ENTRIES EXPECTED, 11 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
END OF VOLUME 1, 0 WRITE ERRORS RECOVERED
DATABASE UNLOADED
END OF PROGRAM
Example (Job Mode)
:JOB MGR.ACCOUNTA
:RUN DBUNLOAD.PUB.SYS
ORDERS
:EOJ
Initiate job.
Initiate execution of DBUNLOAD.
Specify database name.
Initiate end of job.
Because the user in this example is the database creator, a maintenance word is not
provided. The DBUNLOAD program is executed in chained mode by default because no entry
is specified.
As the job executes, the following information is printed on the $STDLIST:
414
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
50
9
24
12
5
0
ENTRIES
ENTRIES
ENTRIES
ENTRIES
ENTRIES
ENTRIES
EXPECTED,
EXPECTED,
EXPECTED,
EXPECTED,
EXPECTED,
EXPECTED,
50 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
9 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
24 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
12 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
5 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
0 ENTRIES PROCESSED.
END OF VOLUME 1,0 WRITE ERRORS RECOVERED
DATABASE UNLOADED
END OF PROGRAM
Chapter 8
415
Using the Database Utilities
DBUNLOAD
Figure 8-1. DBUNLOAD File: Sequence of Entries
416
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
DBUTIL
DBUTIL
The DBUTIL program performs several different functions according to the command you
enter. Each DBUTIL command is described separately on the following pages.
Operation
1
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
2
>>command
Operation Discussion
1
Initiates execution of the DBUTIL program in the PUB group of the SYS
account.
2
Prompts for a DBUTIL >>command.
Enter one of the following:
HELP
CREATE
ERASE
MOVE
PURGE
DEACTIVATE
ACTIVATE
VERIFY
SET
ENABLE
DISABLE
RELEASE
SECURE
SHOW
ADDINDEX
DROPINDEX
REBUILDINDEX
REDO
DO
LISTREDO
DETACH
EXIT
DBUTIL commands can be abbreviated to the first three characters or less. For example,
>>CREATE can be abbreviated to >>C or >>CRE. Enter the HELP command for the minimum
abbreviation for each command.
When using the >>CREATE, >>PURGE, or >>ERASE command, you can bypass the command
prompt by specifying the full command as an entry point with the RUN command; for
example,
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS,CREATE
If you use an entry point, TurboIMAGE/XL prompts you for the database name and,
optionally, for the maintenance word, as follows:
Database name: database name [/maint word]
where:
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database root file catalogued in the
current session or job's account and logon group.
maint word
Chapter 8
is an optional ASCII string, one to eight characters long with no commas
417
Using the Database Utilities
DBUTIL
or semicolons, that defines a password to be used by anyone other than the
database creator to enable them to execute certain DBUTIL commands,
and operate other utilities. (The database creator can also define or change
the maintenance word by using the >>SET command).
In job mode, the database name and maintenance word, if any, must be in the record
immediately following the RUN command. To perform any DBUTIL command except
>>SHOW, >>HELP, or >>EXIT, you must have exclusive access to the database or
database-access file.
418
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>ACTIVATE
>>ACTIVATE
Activates the database-access file for use with DBOPEN. Before using this command, read
the description of remote database access in chapter 9.
This command should be used to prepare a database-access file before accessing a remote
database residing on another HP 3000.
Syntax
>>A[CTIVATE] database-access file name
For example:
ACTIVATE ORDDBA
where ORDDBA is the database-access file name
Parameter
database-access file name is the name of the database-access file that you created
with an editor.
The database-access file (created on the local system) can
have any legal MPE/iX file name and is not dependent on
the database name.
Unexpected Results
TurboIMAGE/XL checks that the following conditions are not violated:
• File code is 0.
• Record length does not exceed 128 characters.
• File is unnumbered.
• File has at least three records.
An appropriate error message is returned if any of these conditions is violated. If all of the
conditions are satisfied, DBUTIL prints the message:
Verification follows:
and the syntax of the file is checked record by record. The monitoring messages associated
with the file records are of the form:
FILE command:
DSLINE command:
HELLO command:
Chapter 8
<result>
<result>
<result>
419
Using the Database Utilities
>>ACTIVATE
where <result> is "Looks good" if there are no errors associated with the record. Appendix
A lists the record errors (results) that would cause the file to be rejected.
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS Initiate DBUTIL execution.
.
.
.
>>ACT ORDDBA Enter abbreviated form of ACTIVATE command and
database-access file name.
Verification follows
FILE command:
Looks good
DSLINE command: Looks good
HELLO command:
Looks good
HELLO command:
Looks good
ACTIVATED
>>
DBUTIL checks the structure of the file named ORDDBA for correct format and activates
the file. You will not be able to edit the file unless you deactivate it using the DBUTIL
>>DEACTIVATE command.
420
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>ADDINDEX
>>ADDINDEX
The ADDINDEX command updates the root file, and adds the associated B-Tree index file.
When using the ALL option and there is no master dataset, a warning is generated, but
the command is considered to be successful.
Syntax
>>ADDI[NDEX] database name [/maintword] FOR { ALL
setnamelist
setnumlist }
For example:
>>ADDINDEX ORDERS FOR ALL
where ORDERS is the database name.
Parameters
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE database.
maintword
is the maintenance password.
setnamelist
is the list setname [,...]
setnumlist
is the list setnum[,...]
ALL
means all master data sets for the database.
Example
>>ADDINDEX
ORDERS/secret FOR ALL
Found 4 master datasets.
Adding index to set# 1
Adding index to set# 2
Adding index to set# 3
Adding index to set# 4
Done.
(#entries
(#entries
(#entries
(#entries
= 162,730, capacity = 218,987)
= 84,164, capacity = 188,517)
= 18,784, capacity = 21,943)
=
783, capacity =
2583)
If the data set is big and DBUTIL is interactive, a progress report at an interval of every 5%
will be displayed.
5% done ...
10% done ...
It is always displayed on the same line. It will be overwritten by the next permanent line.
Adding index to ... or Done.
Chapter 8
421
Using the Database Utilities
>>CREATE
>>CREATE
Creates and initializes a file for each data set in the database.
Once the Schema Processor has created the root file, the database creator must build a file
for each data set in the database using the >>CREATE command. DBUTIL initializes each
data set to zeros and saves it as a catalogued MPE/iX file in the same logon group as the
root file, on the device classes specified in the schema. The data set names are created by
appending two digits to the root file name. If the root file is named XXXX, then the first
data set defined in the schema is named XXXX01, the second data set is named XXXX02,
and so on. In order to save files for the maximum of 199 data sets per database, files are
incremented from XXXX01-99, XXXXA0-A9, XXXXB0-B9, up to XXXXJ9.
To execute the DBUTIL program to create and initialize the database, you must be the
database creator; that is, you must log on with the same user name, account and group
that was used to run the Schema Processor and create the root file. After DBUTIL has
created and initialized the database files, it prints a confirmation message on the list file
device and prompts for another command.
The CREATE command has been enhanced to create the required chunk control and chunk
data files for jumbo data sets. To specify a jumbo data set, the JUMBO option must be
included in the schema before defining a jumbo data set. Then any data set whose capacity
is greater than 4GB automatically becomes a jumbo data set.
The CREATE command does an implicit ADDINDEX command for each dataset marked by
DBSCHEMA as indexed.
Syntax
>>C[REATE] database name [/maint word]
For example:
CREATE ORDERS
where ORDERS is the database name.
Parameters
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database being created.
maint word
422
is the maintenance word that can be defined by the database creator when
the database is created. To access the database, anyone other than the
database creator must supply this word.
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>CREATE
Example (Session Mode)
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS Initiate DBUTIL executions.
.
.
.
>>CREATE ORDERS
Respond to DBUTIL prompt with >> CREATE command and database name.
Database ORDERS has been CREATED
>>
DBUTIL creates, initializes, and saves files named ORDERS01, ORDERS02, and so forth,
one file for each data set. These constitute the empty database.
Example (Job Mode)
:JOB MGR.ACCOUNTA
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
CREATE ORDERS
EXIT
:EOJ
Initiate job.
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
Enter >>CREATE command and database name.
Terminate DBUTIL.
Terminate job.
After the data files are created and initialized, DBUTIL prints the following message on the
list file device:
DATABASE ORDERS HAS BEEN CREATED
NOTE
Chapter 8
>>CREATE will fail if the native language defined for the database is not
supported at the system level. (Refer to appendix A or the Native Language
Support Programmer's Guide for more information.)
423
Using the Database Utilities
>>DEACTIVATE
>>DEACTIVATE
Deactivates the database-access file to allow modifications to the file or to disallow remote
database access.
This command is used before you change the contents of the database-access file. (Refer to
chapter 9 for more information about accessing remote databases.)
If DBUTIL successfully deactivates the file, it prints a confirmation message on the list file
device.
Syntax
>>DE[ACTIVATE] database-access file name
For example:
DEACTIVATE ORDDBA
where ORDDBA is the database-access file name.
Parameter
database-access file name is the name of the database-access file to be deactivated.
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>DEACTIVATE ORDDBA
DEACTIVATED
>>
424
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
Enter a >>DEACTIVATE command and the database-access file name.
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>DETACH
>>DETACH
The DETACH command detaches the database from the DBEnvironment(s) the database is
attached to. You can use one command of DBUTIL to detach a given database from all of the
DBEnvironments to which it is attached; you do not have to specify each DBEnvironment
name.
If you copy your database to a different account or different group, then issue a DETACH
command for the copied database, you will get an error stating that the detach failed from
dbename.group.account (ATCERR 32052). It is because the DETACH of the database
triggers a lookup of the TC file (which contains the names of the DBE to which the
database is attached). However, DBUTIL's subsequent verification of the original DBE
shows the name of the original database (not the name of the copied database) as the one
attached to this DBE. Due to this discrepancy, the following things happen:
• DBUTIL reports an error and does not perform a real detach of the copied database.
• The attached flag in the rootfile (copy) as well as the entry in the TC file is cleared, in
spite of the error.
• The original production database still remains attached to the DBE.
The DETACH command updates the root file. Therefore, use caution when copying an
attached database.
Syntax
>> DET[ACH]
database name [/maintword]
For example:
>>DETACH ORDERS
where ORDERS is the database name.
Parameters
database name
is the name of the database.
maint word
is the maintenance password.
Example
>>DETACH ORDERS/secret
Database has been detached from these HP SQL DBEnvironments:
NEWDBE.BTRTESTS.IMAGESQL
TEMDBE.BTRTESTS.IMAGESQL
>>
Chapter 8
425
Using the Database Utilities
>>DISABLE
>>DISABLE
Disables the access, automatic deferred output, data prefetching, dumping, ILR, indexing,
MUSTRECOVER, logging, and recovery options.
Syntax
>>DI[SABLE] database name[/maint word] FOR option[,option...]
For example:
DISABLE ORDERS FOR LOGGING,RECOVERY
where ORDERS is the database name, and LOGGING and RECOVERY are the options.
Parameters
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database root file created in the
current session or job's account and logon group.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator when the
database is created with DBUTIL. This word must be supplied by anyone
other than the database creator.
option
is an option from the list provided and described below. More than one
option can be specified.
Options
ACCESS
disables user access to the database.
AUTODEFER
disables automatic deferred output for the database. AUTODEFER must
be disabled if ILR or roll-back recovery is to be enabled for a database.
DSEM
disables the use of Dependency Semaphore employed to increase
concurrency of modification intrinsics (DBPUT, DELETE, and DBUPDATE
with CIU ON).
DUMPING
disables the automatic dumping of the user's stack and the database
control block in the event of a TurboIMAGE/XL abort. Unless requested by
Hewlett-Packard support representatives, under most circumstances
dumping should be disabled. When enabled, DUMPING creates files
(before TurboIMAGE/XL aborts) that can prove helpful in determining the
cause of such problems as a corrupted control block.
HWMPUT
disables DBPUT action of placing entries at the high-water mark first,
instead of at the delete chain head.
ILR
disables Intrinsic Level Recovery facility.
426
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>DISABLE
INDEXING
disables third-party indexing (TPI) for the database. Third-party indexing
provides the capability to do generic key searches, multiple keyword
retrievals, and sorted sequential searches on any database. Refer to your
vendor documentation for information on TPI.
LOGGING
disables the database roll-forward logging facility. Roll-back and
MUSTRECOVER must be disabled first.
MUSTRECOVER disables the MUSTRECOVER option for the database. Logging is not
affected by disabling MUSTRECOVER. If the database needs recovery
when you disable MUSTRECOVER, you are prompted to confirm the
DISABLE command. If you respond to continue, the consistency of the
database cannot be guaranteed. To ensure database consistency, respond
with N, recover the database, and then disable MUSTRECOVER after
recovering the database.
PREFETCH
disables the prefetching of data blocks required by the DBPUT and
DBDELETE intrinsics under certain conditions. Refer to "Coordinating
Additions to a Database" or "Coordinating Deletions from a Database" in
chapter 4 for additional information.
RECOVERY
disables the database roll-forward recovery facility.
ROLLBACK
disables the database roll-back logging facility. However, logging will not
be automatically disabled. To disable logging, use the >> database name
FOR LOGGING command. Otherwise, logging (roll-forward) will remain
enabled.
Default Conditions
Access is Enabled
Autodefer is Disabled
Dumping is Disabled
HWMPUT is Disabled
ILR is Disabled
Indexing is Disabled
Logging is Disabled
Mustrecover is Disabled
Prefetch is Disabled
Recovery is Disabled
Roll-Back is Disabled
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>DISABLE ORDERS FOR ACCESS
Access is Disabled
>>
Chapter 8
427
Using the Database Utilities
>>DROPINDEX
>>DROPINDEX
The DROPINDEX command drops the associated B-Tree index file and updates the root file.
When using the ALL option and there is no master dataset, a warning is generated, but
the command is considered to be successful.
Syntax
>>DROPI[NDEX] database name [/maintword] FOR { ALL
setnamelist
setnumlist }
For example:
>>DROPINDEX ORDERS FOR 2
where ORDERS is the database name and 2 is set# 2.
Parameters
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database.
maintword
is the maintenance password.
setnamelist is the name of the set list.
setnumlist
is the number of the set list.
ALL
means all master data sets for the database.
Example
>>DROPINDEX ORDERS/secret FOR 2
Dropping index from set# 2 (#entries = 84,164, capacity = 188,517)
Done.
428
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>ENABLE
>>ENABLE
Enables the access, automatic deferred output, data prefetching, dumping, ILR, indexing,
MUSTRECOVER, logging, and recovery options.
Syntax
>>EN[ABLE] database name[/maint word] FOR option[,option...]
For example:
ENABLE RETAIL FOR LOGGING
where RETAIL is the database name and LOGGING is an option.
Parameters
database name is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database being enabled.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator when the
database is created with DBUTIL. This word must be supplied by anyone
other than the database creator.
option
is an option from the list provided and described below. More than one
option can be specified.
Options
ACCESS
enables user access to the database.
AUTODEFER
enables automatic deferred output for the database. With deferred output
the MPE/iX transaction manager is not used to log database modifications
to the transaction manager log file. Instead, AUTODEFER uses the
MPE/iX file system default mode. This mode keeps data pages in memory
for as long as possible until either lack of memory or the closing of a file
causes the pages to be written to disk. In this mode a system failure can
cause the loss of database integrity. ILR is not compatible with
AUTODEFER; therefore, deferred output should be used only in a batch
situation where the database has been backed up prior to batch
processing. ILR must be disabled prior to enabling AUTODEFER.
AUTODEFER can be used to increase I/O performance by disabling
Transaction Management (XM). However, ILR and roll-back recovery must
be disabled. You must consider performance and the ability to recover data
when determining whether to use AUTODEFER. Roll-forward logging can
be used to preserve consistency.
DSEM
Chapter 8
enables use of Dependency Semaphore for increased concurrency of
429
Using the Database Utilities
>>ENABLE
modification intrinsics (DBPUT, DELETE, and DBUPDATE with CIU ON).
DUMPING
is an option for Hewlett-Packard support use, development, and debugging
only. When enabled, the TurboIMAGE/XL abort procedure copies the
user's stack and the database control blocks to files if a TurboIMAGE/XL
procedure aborts.
HWMPUT
enables DBPUT action of placing entries at the high-water mark first,
instead of at the delete chain head.
ILR
enables the Intrinsic Level Recovery facility. TurboIMAGE/XL maintains
structural integrity without ILR enabled.
INDEXING
enables third-party indexing (TPI) for the database if not already done by
the third-party software when configuring the database for TPI.
Third-party indexing provides the capability to do generic key searches,
multiple keyword retrievals, and sorted sequential searches on any
database. Refer to your vendor documentation for information on TPI.
LOGGING
enables the database roll-forward logging facility.
MUSTRECOVER enables the MUSTRECOVER option for the database. If logging is not
already enabled, it is automatically enabled when MUSTRECOVER is
enabled. While MUSTRECOVER is enabled, the database cannot be
accessed after a system failure until the database is recovered with
roll-forward or roll-back recovery.
PREFETCH
enables the prefetching of data blocks required by the DBPUT and
DBDELETE intrinsics under certain conditions. Refer to "Coordinating
Additions to a Database" or "Coordinating Deletions from a Database" in
chapter 4 for additional information.
RECOVERY
enables the database for recovery.
ROLLBACK
enables the database roll-back logging facility. A warning displays if the
log file does not exist, and the database remains disabled for roll-back
recovery. If logging is not in effect already, it will be enabled automatically.
Default Conditions
Access is Enabled
Autodefer is Disabled
Dumping is Disabled
HWMPUT is Disabled
ILR is Disabled
Indexing is Disabled
Logging is Disabled
Mustrecover is Disabled
Prefetch is Disabled
Recovery is Disabled
Roll-Back is Disabled
430
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>ENABLE
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>ENABLE ORDERS FOR RECOVERY
Recovery is Enabled
>>
Chapter 8
431
Using the Database Utilities
>>ERASE
>>ERASE
Reinitializes all data sets in the database to their empty condition and resets all flags
except the access, PREFETCH, and recovery flags (refer to the discussion of the DBUTIL
>>ENABLE command earlier in this chapter).
The data sets remain as catalogued MPE/iX files. To execute DBUTIL to reinitialize the
data sets, you must be the database creator or supply the correct maintenance word. This
utility function should be performed before data that was saved by DBUNLOAD is loaded
back into the database unless it was re-created.
After DBUTIL has completely reinitialized the data sets, it prints a confirmation message
on the list file device.
NOTE
The ERASE command erases any associated B-Tree index (.idx) files, but will
not delete them.
Syntax
>>ER[ASE] database name [/maint word]
For example:
ERASE ORDERS/SELL
where ORDERS is the database name and SELL is the maint word.
Parameters
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database being erased.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator
when the database is created with DBUTIL. This word
must be supplied by anyone other than the database
creator.
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>ERASE ORDERS/SELL
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
Enter >>ERASE command, database name, and
maintenance word.
Database ORDERS has been ERASED
>>
432
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>ERASE
DBUTIL reinitializes all the data sets in the ORDERS database to binary zeroes. With the
exception of the access, PREFETCH, and recovery flags, the database flags are reset to their
default conditions. The logging and MUSTRECOVER options are disabled if they were
previously enabled.
NOTE
Chapter 8
The execution of utilities is not logged. If you use DBUTIL to erase the
database, the >>ERASE command automatically disables logging, ILR,
third-party indexing, MUSTRECOVER, and roll-back recovery.
433
Using the Database Utilities
>>EXIT
>>EXIT
Terminates DBUTIL execution.
Syntax
>>E[XIT]
Example
>>CREATE ORDERS
Create a database.
Database ORDERS has been CREATED
>>EXIT
If no other DBUTIL functions are to be performed,
terminate DBUTIL with >>EXIT command.
END OF PROGRAM
434
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>HELP
>>HELP
Displays each of the DBUTIL commands.
>>H[ELP] [commandname]
Parameter
commandname is the name of a specific DBUTIL command whose format you want to
display. The name can be abbreviated to the minimum command
abbreviation permitted by DBUTIL.
If you do not specify a command, the >>HELP command lists the names of
all valid DBUTIL commands.
If you specify a command, the correct syntax for that command is
displayed.
Example
>>HELP
Commands are:
ACTIVATE
DISABLE
HELP
SECURE
ADDINDEX
DROPINDEX
MOVE
SET
CREATE
ENABLE
PURGE
SHOW
Commands may be abbreviated.
For help on a particular command type:
DEACTIVATE
ERASE
REBUILDINDEX
VERIFY
DETACH
EXIT
RELEASE
REDO
'HELP command name'.
>>HELP CREATE
C[REATE] database name [/maint word]
>>
Chapter 8
435
Using the Database Utilities
>>MOVE
>>MOVE
Moves TurboIMAGE/XL files across devices within the same volume set.
Syntax
>>M[OVE] TurboIMAGE/XL file name TO device
For example:
MOVE ORDERS05 to DISC2
where ORDERS05 is the file name and DISC2 is a device.
Parameters
file name
is a TurboIMAGE/XL root file, data set, or ILR file. Enter the file name
only; no group/account specification is allowed. The user must be the
creator of the file.
device
is the class name of the MPE/iX device or the number of the logical device
to which the TurboIMAGE/XL file should be moved. The device must be a
member of the volume set on which the database resides.
Discussion
It is recommended that you store the database with the DBSTORE command prior to
executing a MOVE command. This precaution is advisable in the event a system failure
occurs during the move operation. When a move has been initialized, the process checks
the root file flag to determine if the database has been modified since the last backup copy
was made. The program prompts the user to continue or to terminate the MOVE command
and proceed with a DBSTORE of the database before moving TurboIMAGE/XL files to
another device. If the user responds NO to the continue prompt, the following message is
printed on the terminal:
MOVE operation stopped.
The following steps outline the process involved in moving TurboIMAGE/XL files from one
device to another. The move process does the following:
1. Retrieves information from the old file. Old indicates the file on the originally specified
device.
2. Checks the device specified by the user for validity and existence, and determines if
there is sufficient space for the new file. (New indicates the file being moved to another
device.)
436
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>MOVE
3. Checks the root file to determine the database state.
4. Copies the old file to the new file.
5. Sets the flag in the root file.
6. Purges the old file, then saves the new file.
7. Resets the flag in the root file.
For jumbo datasets, the MOVE command enables you to move either the chunk control file or
a specific chunk data file to a different device.
The MOVE command does not allow a B-Tree index (".idx") file to be moved.
Example
>>MOVE ORDERS05 to 3
Database last stored on FRI, SEP 22, 1989, 8:32 PM
Database has been modified since last store date.
The database should be backed up before doing a MOVE operation.
Do you still want to continue the MOVE operation (Y/N)? Y
Starting file copy ...
... file copy completed.
Purging old copy of file "ORDERS05"
New copy of file "ORDERS05" saved as a permanent file
File "ORDERS05" moved to device 3
The data set ORDERS05 has been moved to logical device number 3. This file is the
INVENTORY data set and was originally assigned device class named DISC2 in the
schema.
To obtain a listing of where all the data sets for the database reside, do a
>>SHOW ORDERS DEVICE
Chapter 8
437
Using the Database Utilities
>>PURGE
>>PURGE
Purges the root file and all the data sets of the referenced database. If you use third-party
indexing, the >>PURGE command also purges any existing third-party index files
regardless of third-party indexing being enabled or disabled.
Purging removes the files from the catalog and returns the disk space to the system. As
with >>ERASE, you must be the database creator or must provide the maintenance word to
use DBUTIL with the >>PURGE entry. Before running the DBRESTOR program to restore a
database, use this utility function to purge the database.
If DBUTIL successfully purges the database, it prints a confirmation message on the list file
device.
NOTE
The PURGE command purges any associated B-Tree index (.idx) files.
Syntax
>>P[URGE] database name [/maint word] [DETACH]
For example:
PURGE ORDERS/SELL
where ORDERS is the database name and SELL is the maint word.
Parameters
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database being purged.
maint word
is the maintenance word defined by the database creator
when the database is created with DBUTIL. This word
must be supplied by anyone except the database creator
when using DBUTIL to access the database.
DETACH
is an option specific to the IMAGE/SQL users. This option
detaches the database from all ALLBASE/SQL database
environments (DBEnvironments) to which it is attached
via IMAGESQL. When DETACH is not used, the database
is purged without detaching from the DBEnvironment(s).
For more information, refer to the IMAGE/SQL
Administration Guide.
Unexpected Results
The following messages are printed if an unexpected situation occurs (refer to appendix A
for other error messages):
438
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>PURGE
Message
Meaning
No root file, >>PURGE
operation proceeding
DBUTIL was unable to locate the root file, but will attempt to
purge data set, if any.
Data set XXXXk has
been purged
DBUTIL successfully purged the root file and the n data sets of
the database. However, DBUTIL also discovered and purged an
unexpected data set named XXXXk, where k is a number
greater than the number of data sets defined for the database
(n).
Data set XXXXk is
missing
DBUTIL successfully purged the root file and all existing data
sets but data set XXXXk is unexpectedly missing. In this case k
is less than the number of data sets defined for the database.
Incomplete purge
An error occurred while DBUTIL was attempting to purge the
database and any Third-party indexing files. The specific error
message is printed above this one. Some of the data sets and, if
applicable, index files have been purged.
Detach failed from
DBEname
This message is returned if you are using IMAGE/SQL. DBUTIL
was unable to detach the TurboIMAGE/XL database from the
ALLBASE/SQL database environment (DBEnvironment) to
which it was attached. However, DBUTIL will continue executing
the >>PURGE command. For more information, refer to the
IMAGE/SQL Administration Guide.
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>PURGE ORDERS
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
Enter >>PURGE command and database name assuming there is
no maintenance word.
The next messages are returned if you are using IMAGE/SQL, and the DETACH option is
used with the >>PURGE command.
Database has been detached from these HP SQL DBEnvironments:
DBEname.group.account
DBEname.group.account
Database has been PURGED
DBUTIL confirms that the user is logged on with the same user name, account, and group
which were used to create the database. It then determines whether the root file exists and
if so, purges the root file and any files named ORDERS01, ORDERS02, and so forth. Even
if the root file does not exist, any data sets with file names based on the root file name are
purged.
Chapter 8
439
Using the Database Utilities
>>REBUILDINDEX
>>REBUILDINDEX
REBUILDINDEX rebuilds the B-Tree index file for a specified dataset that should have an
index file.
When using the ALL option and there is no master dataset, a warning is generated, but
the command is considered to be successful.
The KSAM file built by REBUILDINDEX has the Native Language Support language
specified to match the language of the database, if the key is a text (X or U) data type.
Syntax
>REBUILDI[NDEX] database name [/maintword] FOR { ALL
setnamelist
setnumlist
455 }
For example:
REBUILDINDEX ORDERS FOR 3
where ORDERS is the database name, and 3 is set# 3.
Parameters
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database.
maintword
is the maintenance password.
ALL
means all master data sets for the database.
setnamelist
is the name of the set list.
setnumlist
is the number of the set list.
Example 1
>>REBUILDINDEX ORDERS/secret FOR SalesrepName,Region,District
Example 2
>>REBUILDINDEX ORDERS/secret FOR 3
Rebuilding index for set# 3 (#entries = 18,784, capacity = 21,943)
Done.
440
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>REDO
>>REDO
Redo the previous command or the previous nth command. Redo follows exactly the
MPE/iX REDO syntax. REDO, LISTREDO, and DO work for DBUTIL the same was as the
MPE/iX commands.
Syntax
>>REDO [n]
For example:
>>REDO 8
where 8 is the eighth previous command.
Parameter
n
Chapter 8
is the backwards count of the command being repeated.
441
Using the Database Utilities
>>RELEASE
>>RELEASE
Suspends file system security provisions for the database root file and data sets, allowing
access to the database from other groups and accounts. If you use third-party indexing, the
>>RELEASE command suspends the file system security provisions for any existing index
files.
Syntax
>>R[ELEASE] database name
For example:
RELEASE ORDERS
where ORDERS is the database name.
Parameter
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database.
Discussion
The >>RELEASE command suspends file system security provisions for all of the database
files at the file, group, and account levels, but leaves TurboIMAGE/XL security and
MPE/iX privileged file security intact. Releasing the file system security allows the
database to be accessed by users from other groups and accounts, without relinquishing
the privacy of all other files in the database group. Only the creator of the database can
release security. In addition, the group's home volume set must be mounted.
The database file security remains suspended until the creator issues a >>SECURE
command. Suspension remains valid after job termination, or system failure followed by a
system boot.
The RELEASE command applies to the associated B-Tree index (.idx) files.
442
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SECURE
>>SECURE
Restores security provisions that were released by a >>RELEASE command for the database
root file and data sets. If you use third-party indexing, the >>SECURE command restores the
security provisions for any existing index files.
Syntax
>>SE[CURE] database name
For example:
>>SECURE ORDERS
where ORDERS is the database name.
Parameter
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database being secured.
Discussion
The >>SECURE command reinstates the file system security provisions for the entire
database. These security provisions can only be suspended by the >>RELEASE command.
Only the creator of the database can successfully issue the >>SECURE command. In
addition, the group's home volume set must be mounted.
The SECURE command applies to the associated ".idx" files.
Chapter 8
443
Using the Database Utilities
>>SET
>>SET
Changes or removes the maintenance word; only the database creator can change or
remove the maintenance word. The >>SET command also sets the log identifier into the
root file, modifies access class passwords, sets a subsystem flag, and sets the critical item
update (CIUPDATE) option. For databases that will be migrated to MPE V, the >>SET
command specifies the number of input/output buffers to be allocated by TurboIMAGE in
the Database Buffer Area Control Block (DBB) depending on the number of users
concurrently accessing the database.
Syntax
>>SET database name [/maint word]{BUFFSPECS=num buffers (from-users/to-users)
[,num buffers(from-users/to-users)] ...
LOGID=log identifier
MAINT=maintenance word
SUBSYSTEMS={NONE
READ
RW
}
PASSWORD classnum=[password]
LANGUAGE=language id
CIUPDATE=(DISALLOWED
ALLOWED
ON
}
BTREEMODE1={ON
OFF}[,[WILDCARD=]c]
}
For example:
SET ORDERS MAINT=SELL
or
SET ORDERS/SELL CIUPDATE=DISALLOWED
where ORDERS is the database name and SELL is the maintenance
word.
Parameters
database name
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database root file
catalogued in the current session or job's account and
logon group.
maint word
is the current maintenance word for the database, and
must be given by anyone using DBUTIL to access the
database other than the database creator.
BUFFSPECS
is for MPE V compatibility only, because the
TurboIMAGE/XL buffer specifications are fixed. For
444
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SET
databases that will be migrated to MPE V, it sets the
number of buffers to be allocated by TurboIMAGE in the
Database Buffer Area `Control Block (DBB). Refer to
"Moving from MPE/iX to MPE V" in appendix H for a
discussion of BUFFSPECS and a description of its
parameters.
LOGID
sets the MPE/iX log identifier. The log identifier is
obtained using the MPE/iX GETLOG command. Note that
DBUTIL prompts for the logid password specified in the
GETLOG command before it checks the validity of the log
identifier. Entry of the correct logid password causes the
valid log identifier to be stored in the root file and used
whenever the logging capability is enabled. However, if the
log identifier is left blank, it is removed from the database.
MAINT
sets the maintenance word for the database. The
maintenance word is the new maintenance word for the
database. If omitted, the currently defined maintenance
word is removed and the database has no maintenance
word. Only the database creator can change or remove the
maintenance word.
SUBSYSTEMS
sets subsystem access to the database. The following
options are valid:
NONE
is the option used to prohibit use of any subsystem (for
example, QUERY) on TurboIMAGE/XL.
READ
is the option that allows only read access to the database
by subsystems. The subsystem checks the root file flag to
determine what access a subsystem is allowed.
RW
is the option that allows read/write access to the database
by subsystems. The subsystem checks the root file flag to
determine what access a subsystem is allowed.
sets the password. The following parameters are used with
the PASSWORD parameter.
PASSWORD
LANGUAGE
classnum
is the access class whose password is being changed. It can
be a number from 1 to 63, inclusive.
password
is the new password being assigned to a particular access
class. Up to 8 characters are allowed. If omitted, any
password previously assigned to that class is removed.
(You must be the database creator.)
sets the native language for the database. The following
parameter is used with the LANGUAGE parameter:
language id is the number that identifies the native language. Refer to
the Native Language Support Programmer's Guide for
name and number information. The message "Language
changed" appears after using the >>SET command to
Chapter 8
445
Using the Database Utilities
>>SET
change the language ID. This command can be issued only
on a virgin root file or an empty database.
NOTE
When reloading the database, the language must match the language ID
stored in the backup media. A DBLOAD issued in a job fails if the language of
the media differs from the database language. A DBLOAD in session mode
provides a prompt to allow you to complete the DBLOAD operation when you
reply Y.
sets critical item update for the database. The following
option settings are valid:
CIUPDATE
NOTE
DISALLOWED
prevents any process from using the critical item update
option on this database.
ALLOWED
indicates that programmatic enabling of the option is
possible through a call to DBCONTROL mode 5, but
programs that do not make this call are prevented from
using critical item update on this database. Programs that
enable the option do so temporarily for the duration of the
process but can subsequently disable it through a call to
DBCONTROL mode 6.
ALLOWED is now the default setting. It was DISALLOWED in releases prior
to C.07.00.
ON
allows all processes to use the critical item update option
on this database without the need to call DBCONTROL mode
5. Any process can explicitly disable the option
temporarily for the duration of the process through a call
to DBCONTROL mode 6 but can subsequently enable it
through a call to DBCONTROL mode 5. This setting allows
the critical item update option to be disabled in selected
programs while enabling it for the majority.
Critical item update is useful for those processes that need
to update the values of detail data set search or sort items;
master data set key items cannot be updated regardless of
the CIUPDATE setting.
BTREEMODE1
sets the root file flag for B-Trees to ON or OFF. If it is ON,
then a DBFIND mode 1 on ASCII types having a B-Tree
index (explicit or implicit) and having the wildcard
character in the argument will be treated as a B-Tree
search. If set to OFF, then a DBFIND mode 1 will not be
treated as a B-Tree search, even if the item has a B-Tree.
See chapter 11, " B-Tree Indices," for more detailed
information on BTREEMODE1.
WILDCARD
is set with any printable ASCII character for c. When
446
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SET
doing a B-Tree DBFIND, mode-1-style arguments are
scanned to find the first occurrence of the current wildcard
character in the argument text. If the wildcard is not
found, a non- B-Tree search is done (even if the DBFIND
mode was 21). If the wildcard is found, the rest of the
argument text is ignored.
NOTE
This does not match the functionality of "@" in commands such as the MPE
LISTF, but does match the functionality of current TPI implementations.
If the wildcard character is found at character k+1
(1-based), then the qualified entries will consist of all keys
that match the argument in character positions 1..k.
When not doing a B-Tree find (even when mode=1 and
BTREEMODE1=ON; or mode=10), the entire argument,
including any wildcard characters, will be treated as the
actual argument for a DBFIND mode 1.
The length of the argument may not exceed the item
length.
Example 1
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
.
.
.
>>SET ORDERS MAINT
Maintenance word changed
>>
Remove current maintenance word.
Example 2
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
.
.
.
>>SET ORDERS CIUPDATE=ON
CIUPDATE is ON.
Chapter 8
Indicates that processes can update the values of
detail data set search or sort items in the ORDERS
database without a need to do DBCONTROL mode 5.
DBUTIL confirms the setting.
447
Using the Database Utilities
>>SET
Example 3
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS Initiate DBUTIL.
.
.
.
>>SET ORDERS BTREEMODE1 = ON,% Sets BTREEMODE1 option on for B-Tree search for
DBFIND mode 1 on X or U type having a B-Tree
index (explicit or implicit) and in the presence
of a wildcard character in the argument. Sets
the wildcard character as % in the ORDERS
database.
448
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
>>SHOW
Displays information about the database on a terminal or line printer. This can include a
list of processes that have the database open, the status of locks in the database, the log
identifier and flags, the current buffer specifications, and the setting for the critical item
update option. Displays the capacity expansion information for the database and the data
sets. If you are using IMAGE/SQL,
displays the names of any ALLBASE/SQL database environments (DBEnvironments) to
which the database is attached. This command should be used with care because it obtains
exclusive control of the database for several seconds preventing all other access.
Syntax
>>SH[OW] dbname [.group[.account]][/maint word] {ALL
BUFFSPECS
CAPACITY
CIUPDATE
DEVICE
FLAGS
INDEX
INDEXES
INDICES
LANGUAGE
LOCKS
LOGID
LOGINFO
MAINT
PASSWORDS
SUBSYSTEMS
USERS
} [OFFLINE]
For example:
SHOW ORDERS/SELL ALL OFFLINE
where ORDERS is the database name and SELL is the maint word.
Parameters
dbname
is the name of a TurboIMAGE/XL database root file catalogued in the
current session or job's account and logon group. If you have account
manager (AM) capability, you can qualify the database with the group
name. If you have system manager (SM) capability, you can qualify the
database with the group and account name.
group
is the group where the database resides. To qualify the database name by
group, you must have AM or SM capability. If you have AM capability and
want to qualify the database name by group, the database must have a
maintenance word as you will be required to supply one.
account
is the account where the database resides. To qualify the database name
Chapter 8
449
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
by account, you must have SM capability.
maint word
is the current maintenance word for the database. The database creator or
the user with SM capability can omit the maintenance word.
ALL
displays all the information provided with MAINT, BUFFSPECS,
LANGUAGE, LOCKS, USERS, LOGID, SUBSYSTEMS, FLAGS, and the
last-stored date. Displays number of detail data sets using dynamic
capacity expansion and if dynamic capacity expansion is used for master
data sets. Also, if the database is attached to any ALLBASE/SQL database
environments (DBEnvironments) via IMAGESQL, the DBEnvironment
names are displayed (refer to the IMAGE/SQL Administration Guide for
information).
BUFFSPECS
displays the current buffer specifications which can be either the
TurboIMAGE/V default setting or the values specified with the DBUTIL
>>SET command for those databases that will be migrated to MPE V; the
TurboIMAGE/XL default setting is not displayed. Refer to the discussion
of BUFFSPECS in the earlier section on the >>SET command and also in
"Moving from MPE/iX to MPE V" in appendix H.
CAPACITY
displays, for all data sets, capacity information including dynamic capacity
fields. Information includes: data set name, type, number of entries,
entries as a percentage of the maximum capacity for the data set,
maximum capacity, current capacity, initial capacity, incremental number
of entries and whether or not dynamic capacity expansion is used.
CIUPDATE
displays the setting for the critical item update option. Valid settings are
DISALLOWED, ALLOWED, and ON.
DEVICE
displays the TurboIMAGE/XL root and data sets and where files reside
(device class name or logical number) for a database.
FLAGS
displays the state (enabled or disabled) of the logging, roll-back, ILR,
recovery, restart, subsystem access, AUTODEFER, access, dumping,
HWMPUT, PREFETCH, MUSTRECOVER, and third-party indexing (TPI)
options. If MUSTRECOVER is enabled, the flags option also displays a
message if the database needs recovery. In addition, it displays the last
database store date, and information on whether the database has been
modified since the last-stored date (DBSTORE flag).
INDEX INDEXES INDICES displays the B-Tree indices for the database.
LANGUAGE
displays state of the native language declaration for the database.
LOCKS
displays the status of locks currently obtained (or requested).
LOGID
displays the current MPE/iX log identifier for the database.
LOGINFO
displays information about all types of logging available with
TurboIMAGE/XL.
MAINT
displays the maintenance word, if any.
PASSWORDS
displays the access class numbers from 1 through 63 together with the
passwords assigned to them. (You must be the database creator.)
450
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
SUBSYSTEMS
indicates whether subsystems, including user programs, can access the
TurboIMAGE/XL database and, if access is allowed, whether it is read
only or both read and write. Subsystem access is enforced by the
subsystem.
USERS
displays a list of the processes that have the database open with the
program file name and other information. (Refer to examples below.)
OFFLINE
requests that the information be listed on the line printer. The formal
designator for the list file is DBUTLIST. (Passwords and maintenance word
will not be printed.)
The >>SHOW database name USERS command can be executed at any time. The remaining
>>SHOW commands can be executed at any time except when another process has the
database opened in an exclusive access mode (mode 3 or 7).
Example (Show Users)
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>SHOW ORDERS USERS
1
2
3
4
5
PIN
PATH
EXECUTING PROGRAM
JOBNUM
MODE
21
22
28
29
31
1
1
1
1
1
INVENTRY.IMAGE.DATAMGT
BROWSE.IMAGE.DATAMGT
BROWSE.IMAGE.DATAMGT
INVENTRY.IMAGE.DATAMGT
ORDENTRY.IMAGE.DATAMGT
#S116
#S118
#S112
#S115
#S117
1
5
5
1
1
Example Discussion
The columns of information are described as follows:
1
The Process Identification Number (PIN). This is a number assigned to a
process by the operating system when the process is created. The table
above indicates that the process has opened the ORDERS database.
2
The access path number. The access paths for each process are numbered
consecutively beginning with 1. Refer to the discussion of access paths in
chapter 4.
3
The name of the program file, its group and account.
4
The number of the job or session in which the process is running.
5
The access mode in which the database is open.
DBUTIL does not call DBOPEN so it is not listed as an executing program.
Chapter 8
451
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
Example (Show All)
.
.
.
>>SHOW ORDERS ALL Display all information for ORDERS database.
For database ORDERS
MAINTENANCE WORD:
SELL
Access is enabled.
Autodefer is disabled.
Dumping is disabled.
Rollback recovery is disabled.
Recovery is enabled.
ILR is disabled.
Mustrecover is enabled.
Logging is enabled.
Prefetch is disabled.
Indexing is disabled.
HWMPUT is disabled.
Restart is disabled.
Database last stored using True-Online Backup and
logfile NLOG001 on WED, MAR 26, 1997, 8:07 AM.
Database has been modified since last store date.
Shadowing is disabled.
Subsystem access is READ/WRITE.
CIUPDATE is allowed.
Dynamic capacity expansion is not used.
Database has at least one indexed dataset.
BTREEMODE1 is off, wildcard = "@".
Logid:
NLOGID
is valid.
password is correct.
XM log set
:
XM log set type :
XM log set size :
The language is
default XM user log set
for volume set MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET
circular
32 megabytes
0 - NATIVE-3000.
Buffer specifications:
50(1/120)
No other users are accessing the database.
>>
where volname is the name of the volume set in which the database resides.
Example Discussion
The listing above indicates that the current buffer specifications provide for 50 buffers to
be allocated when there are between 1 and 120 concurrent users of the database. On
TurboIMAGE/XL the buffer specifications remain fixed, so the information shown in the
452
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
above listing is useful only for databases that will be migrated to an MPE V system. The
list above also shows that the database is enabled for roll-forward recovery, logging,
MUSTRECOVER, and user access. It shows that the database was backed up using
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup (with ONLINE=START or ONLINE=END
option), and the logfile in use at the time was NLOG001. In the example, PREFETCH and
third-party indexing (TPI) are disabled, critical item update (CIUPDATE) is allowed, and the
restart flag is disabled. The restart flag is set by DBRECOV when the user has requested to
suspend recovery between log files. The logid is shown, the password is verified, and the
maintenance word is displayed. The messages that appear during the SHOW command
can vary depending on what information is available on the database. If the maintenance
word and logid are not present, the following messages display:
Logid is not present.
Maintenance word is not present.
The message regarding the transaction manager (XM) log set will also vary. The following
message is printed if the database is not attached to transaction manager:
XM log set:
this database is not attached to an XM log set
The following message is printed if the database does not support NLS:
This database has been created before support of Native Languages.
If an error has occurred during dynamic roll-back recovery, the following message is
displayed:
Database is logically inconsistent.
The following message is printed if the database is attached to an ALLBASE/SQL
database environment (DBEnvironment) via the IMAGESQL utility:
Attached to these HP SQL DBEnvironments:
DBEname
DBEname
The following message is printed if the third-party indices are registered in the
DBEnvironments.
Third Party Indexes are registered in these HPSQL DBEnvironments:
DBEname
DBEname
Chapter 8
453
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
Refer to the IMAGE/SQL Administration Guide for more information.
The example displays, "Dynamic capacity expansion is used for 2 detail sets." Enable this
feature for new databases by using the capacity parameters for detail data sets. See
chapter 3 for more information. Enable this feature for existing databases by using
DBChange Plus or a third-party utility. Refer to the MPE/iX Release 5.0 Communicator
for information on using DBChange Plus.
Example (Show Capacity)
.
.
.
>>SHOW ORDERS CAPACITY
Data Set Name
Type
No. of %Max
Entries Cap
--------------Capacity-------------- Dyn
Maximum Current Initial Increment Exp
(Hashing)
CUSTOMER
DATE-MASTER
PRODUCT
SALES
SUP-MASTER
M
A
M
D
M
20
111
15
100
60
10
53
5
2
3
200
211
300
5012
2000
200
211
300
140
600
200
200
200
140
400
0
0
0
70
200
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
INVENTORY
>>
D
4998
1
500000
5000
5000
10000
YES
The example shows Maximum, Current, Initial and Increment Capacities. The "%Max
Cap" column shows how full the data set is as a percent of the maximum capacity for that
set. "Dyn Exp" column shows whether dynamic capacity expansion is enabled or not.
Enable this feature for new databases by using the capacity parameters when defining
data sets. See chapter 3 for more information. Enable this feature for existing databases by
using DBChange Plus or a third-party utility which supports this feature.
Format of Show Device List
The following example lists the TurboIMAGE/XL files for the ORDERS database, along
with the data set names and the device where each resides. In the following example, the
root file ORDERS and the data sets are shown. The file devices are listed as specified with
the device class names. The ORDERS05 data set was moved using the DBUTIL >>MOVE
command to logical device number 3; the device class name is displayed.
Example (Show Device)
>>SHOW ORDERS DEVICE
For database ORDERS
Volume set:
MPE/iX
volname
File Name
ORDERS.IMAGE.DATAMGT
ORDERS01.IMAGE.DATAMGT
454
Data Set Name
Device
Date-Master
DISC
DISC1
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
ORDERS02.IMAGE.DATAMGT
ORDERS03.IMAGE.DATAMGT
ORDERS04.IMAGE.DATAMGT
ORDERS05.IMAGE.DATAMGT
ORDERS06.IMAGE.DATAMGT
Customer
Product
Sup-Master
Inventory
Sales
DISC1
DISC1
DISC2
DISC3
DISC2
>>
where volname is the name of the volume set in which the database resides.
Format of Show Indices
The following example lists the data set names, type, and whether they are indexed.
Example (Show Indices)
>>SHOW ORDERS INDICES
For database ORDERS
Data Set Name Type Indexed?
DATE-MASTER
CUSTOMER
PRODUCT
SUP-MASTER
A
M
M
M
YES
YES
YES
YES
4 indexed datasets
>>
Format of Show Locks List
DBUTIL lists the locking information sequentially by locking level: database locks followed
by data set locks, followed by data entry locks. The names of locked entities (for example,
the database, data set, or lock descriptor for data entries) appear in uppercase followed by
a list of other processes waiting at that locking level. DBUTIL indicates in lowercase the
reason each process is waiting. This message is preceded by a hyphen so that it can be
identified on terminals or listings from a line printer without lowercase.
If the term (PENDING) appears after a locked entity, it indicates that the lock has been
obtained but control cannot be returned to the caller until other locks have been released.
The same process identification will appear elsewhere in the list together with an
explanation of why it is waiting.
Infrequently, the term (TEMP) may appear. TurboIMAGE/XL places a temporary lock on a
data set while it processes an existing data entry lock request. Temporary locks occur only
when a user requests data entry locks on different items. Whenever the lock item changes,
TurboIMAGE/XL must wait until all existing locks on the current lock item are cleared
before it places a lock on the new lock item. During the wait the lock is termed "TEMP."
These locks are held very briefly and only under rare circumstances. The Process
Identification Numbers (PINs) and job/session numbers listed are the same as those shown
by MPE/iX commands, such as SHOWJOB and SHOWQ.
Chapter 8
455
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
Example 1 (Show Locks)
.
.
.
>>SHOW ORDERS LOCKS OFFLINE
List the status of locks requested and held in
the ORDERS database on the line printer.
The line printer listing looks similar to this:
HP30391C.00.00 TurboIMAGE/XL: DBUTIL
THURS, SEP 21, 1989, 5:06 PM
For database ORDERS
LOCKED ENTITY - ( - waiting process)
PIN/
PATH
PROGRAM
NAME
JOBNUM
1
DATA SET SALES
30/1
BROWSE
#S126
2
-waiting for data set unlock:
-waiting for data set unlock:
-waiting for data set unlock:
17
32
21
INVENTRY #S128
ORDENTRY #S129
ORDENTRY #S118
3
DATA SET CUSTOMER
DATA SET INVENTORY
30/1
30/1
BROWSE
BROWSE
#S126
#S126
Example 1 Discussion
1
Indicates process 30 (program BROWSE executing in session 126) has the
SALES data set locked through access path 1.
2
Shows a queue of processes waiting for the SALES data set to unlock. For
example, in the first line, process 17 (program INVENTRY executing in
session 128) is waiting. Because it is listed first in the queue, it will be the
next process to resume execution after the SALES data set is unlocked. It
could be waiting to place a lock on the data set or entries in the set.
3
Indicates process 30 (program BROWSE, session 126, access path 1) has
the CUSTOMER data set locked. No processes are waiting for the lock to
be released.
456
Chapter 8
Using the Database Utilities
>>SHOW
Example 2 (Show Locks)
Here is another example of a locking list that might appear when the >>SHOW LOCKS
command is entered.
HP30391C.00.00 TurboIMAGE/XL: DBUTIL
THURS, SEP 21, 1989, 5:15 PM
For database ORDERS
LOCKED ENTITY - ( - waiting process)
PIN/
PATH
PROGRAM
NAME
JOBNUM
1
DATABASE (PENDING)
22
-waiting for zero locks within database:22
BROWSE
BROWSE
#S118
#S118
2
DATA SET INVENTORY
29/1
INVENTRY
#S115
3
SALES: QUANTITY<= 50
28/1
BROWSE
#S112
4
CUSTOMER: CUST-NAME = DON'S MERCANTILE
31/1
ORDENTRY
#S117
Example 2 Discussion
1
Indicates process 22 (program BROWSE, session 118) has requested a lock
on the database and yet it cannot continue until existing locks held in the
database are released. In this example, the reason for the pending lock is
listed on the line below.
2
Indicates process 29 (program INVENTRY, session 115, access path 1) has
the INVENTORY data set locked.
3
Indicates that process 28 (program BROWSE, session 112, access path 1)
has all entries in the SALES data set with QUANTITY less than or equal
to 50 locked.
4
Indicates process 31 (program ORDENTRY, session 117, access path 1)
has all entries in the CUSTOMER data set with LAST-NAME equal to
DON'S MERCANTILE locked.
All subsequent requests for locks must be made to wait until process 22 releases its
database lock.
Chapter 8
457
Using the Database Utilities
>>VERIFY
>>VERIFY
Reports whether a remote database-access (RDBA) file is activated or deactivated and
checks the validity of the RDBA file.
Syntax
>>V[ERIFY] database-access file name
For example:
VERIFY ORDDBA
where ORDDBA is the database-access file name.
Parameter
database-access file name is the name of a remote database-access file.
Example
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
Initiate DBUTIL execution.
.
.
.
>>VERIFY ORDDBA
Database-access file
ORDDBA is ACTIVATED
>>
Enter >>VERIFY command and database-access file name.
When an RDBA file is activated, it is changed to a privileged file and cannot be edited; it is
changed back to an editor file when it is deactivated.
458
Chapter 8
Using a Remote Database
9 Using a Remote Database
You can access a TurboIMAGE/XL database that resides on one HP 3000 computer system
while operating a session on another HP 3000 computer system if both systems are
configured with Network Services capability. You can access a TurboIMAGE/V database
from an MPE/iX system or a TurboIMAGE/XL database from an MPE V system.
Programmatically accessing an IMAGE/3000 database from a TurboIMAGE/XL database
requires another MPE V system with NS/3000 and TurboIMAGE/V acting as an
intermediate node. The limits on the remote database must not exceed those allowed on
the local system, or programmatic access will not be successful.
You can use a database on a remote HP 3000 either from a program that is running on the
remote system or from a program running on your local HP 3000. There are various ways
to open a communications line and initiate a remote session. For example, you can
establish a remote session through a communications link then run a remote program
accessing a database on the remote machine as illustrated in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1. Using a Remote Program
For details about using this method, refer to the NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference
Manual.
Chapter 9
459
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
Access Through a Local Application Program
If you want to access a remote database using a local application program, you have three
methods to choose from.
• Establishing communications link and remote session interactively.
• Using the COMMAND intrinsic.
• Using a database-access file.
In all three cases, a local program accesses a remote database and the data is passed
across the communication line.
Method 1--Establishing Communications Link and Remote Session
Interactively
To use the first method, interactively establish a communications link and a remote
session and enter a FILE equation for each remote database. The FILE equation specifies
which database is to be accessed on which remote system and device. A local application
program can now access a remotely located database, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2. Using Method 1
For details about using this method refer to the NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference
Manual.
Method 2--Using the COMMAND Intrinsic
The second method is very similar to the first, but you use the MPE/iX COMMAND intrinsic
within your application program to establish the communications link, remote session and
remote database access.
460
Chapter 9
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
To use this method you must issue a REMOTE HELLO command (either with the DSLINE
parameter or issue the DSLINE as a separate command) and a FILE equation by calling
the COMMAND intrinsic for each of these commands. Use of the COMMAND intrinsic is
explained in the MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual, and information about accessing
remote files is given in the NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference Manual. Figure 9-3.
contains a diagram of method 2.
Figure 9-3. Using Method 2
If you want to access more than one remotely located database with an application
program, you must enter one FILE equation for each remote database.
To terminate execution perform the following steps:
1. Close the database.
2. Log off (REMOTE BYE).
3. Close the communication line.
Method 3--Using a Database-Access File
The third method involves creating a special privileged (PRIV) file which is called the
database-access file (DBA file). This file provides TurboIMAGE/XL with the necessary
information to establish a communications link and a remote session. It also specifies the
remote database or database-access file name so that the necessary TurboIMAGE/XL
intrinsics can be executed on the remote computer. Figure 9-4. illustrates method 3.
Chapter 9
461
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
Figure 9-4. Using Method 3
Using the database-access file, only one database can be accessed using each
database-access file per DSLINE. For example, if two computers are linked through two
DSLINEs, you can open one database on each line.
When the user or an application program calls DBOPEN with the database-access file name,
the remote session is established and the remote database is opened. Then other
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics can perform desired operations on the database. Under this
method the remote session is automatically released when the database is closed (with or
without an explicit DBCLOSE call). A second REMOTE HELLO on one DSLINE terminates the
previous REMOTE HELLO. For multiple remote database access, method 1 or method 2 is
recommended. If the database-access file is used, an automatic REMOTE BYE and DSLINE
commands are issued on the communications line specified in the database-access file
when the application program closes the database or terminates execution.
Using method 3, the database administrator can set up a user-table that provides more
control over the database access and enhances database security. To create the
database-access file, use an editor such as EDIT/3000. First use the SET LENGTH command
to accommodate the largest record to be included in the database-access file if the record
exceeds the default length specified for your editor. The length must be less than or equal
to 128 characters.
The following sections discuss how to create, activate, deactivate, and reference a
database-access file.
462
Chapter 9
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
Creating a Database-Access File
The content of the database-access file should be created in the format shown below.
Syntax
Record 1
FILE dbname1=dbname2:nodename
Record 2
DSLINE nodename[; . . .]
(See NS3000/XL document for applicable parameters.)
Record 3
lusername.lacctname[,lgroupname]=HELLO rusername
[/rupasw] .racctname[/rapasw][,rgroupname[/rgpasw]] . . .
(See MPE/iX commands document for additional parameters.)
Record 4
Same format as record 3. Specifies other "user.account,group"
identification.
.
.
.
Record n
Parameters
dbname1
is the name of the database-access file on the local system or the database
on the remote system you want to access, or is the formal file designator
used in the program if dbname2 is specified. (Required parameter.)
dbname2
is the name of the database-access file or the database on the remote
system you want to access. (Required parameter.)
nodename
is the remote location of the database. This parameter is preceded by a
colon when used with the FILE command; if followed by options with the
DSLINE command, it is followed by a semicolon. (Required parameter.)
Refer to the NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference Manual for
additional information.
lusername
is a user name on the local HP 3000, as established by an account
manager, that allows you to log on under this account. This name is unique
within the account. It contains from 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters,
beginning with a letter. An at-sign (@) can be used to indicate the logon
user name. (Required parameter.)
lacctname
is the name of your account on the local HP 3000 as established by a
system manager. It contains 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters, beginning
with a letter. An at-sign (@) can be used to indicate the logon account.
(Required parameter.)
lgroupname
is the name of a file group to be used for the local file domain as
established by an account manager. It contains from 1 to 8 alphanumeric
characters, beginning with a letter. An at-sign (@) can be used to indicate
the logon group. (Optional parameter.)
rusername
is a user name on the remote HP 3000 that allows you to log on under the
Chapter 9
463
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
remote account. It follows the same rules as username. An at-sign (@) can
be used to indicate rusername as with lusername. (Required parameter.)
rupasw
is the password assigned to username. (Optional parameter.)
racctname
is the name of the logon account on the remote HP 3000. It follows the
same rules as lacctname. An at-sign (@) can be used to indicate racctname
is the same as lacctname. (Required parameter.)
rapasw
is the password assigned to racctname. (Optional parameter.)
rgroupname
is the name of the logon group on the remote HP 3000. It follows the same
rules as lgroupname. An at-sign (@) can be used to indicate rgroupname is
the same as lgroupname. (Optional parameter.)
rgpasw
is the password assigned to rgroupname. (Optional parameter.)
Discussion
The following syntax rules apply:
• No spaces are allowed around any periods that could exist in the second file reference in
record 1 (for example, dbname2.group).
• Passwords are not allowed with the local user, account, and group names. They are not
necessary because the local user passes the security password checks when logging onto
the local system.
NOTE
Remote logon parameters must define a valid logon known to the remote
machine. For example, if a particular user name requires a password on the
remote machine, the password parameter is required in the database-access
file and must be supplied in the HELLO command.
After you have created the file with an editor, you must KEEP it UNNumbered. The file
name must follow the same rules as a database name. It must be an alphanumeric string
from 1 to 6 characters; the first character must be alphabetic.
Records 3 through n define a table that tells TurboIMAGE/XL which user, account, and
group names on the local computer can access which user, account, and group names on
the remote computer. You can specify remote user identification for more than one local
user by creating a record for each local "user.account,group" using the record 3 format
shown earlier. An at-sign (@) can be substituted for any user, account, or group name in the
record. If an at-sign is substituted for lusername, lacctname, or lgroupname, the name is
replaced with the corresponding name specified at logon time.
TurboIMAGE/XL searches for a match between the local user, account and group names in
the user table and the names used to log on to the local session. When a match has been
found, TurboIMAGE/XL performs a REMOTE HELLO using the corresponding rusername,
racctname, rgroupname, and passwords, if present. If an at-sign is found, it is replaced
with the corresponding name to the left of =HELLO. For example, if the record contains
USERA.ACCTA,[email protected],@, TurboIMAGE/XL replaces the first at-sign with
USERA and the second with GROUPA. If an at-sign is not found, no substitutions are
made. In either case, the information to the right of =HELLO is used as the remote logon
identification.
464
Chapter 9
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
Example
Record 1
FILE ORDERS=ORDERS:NODEX
Record 2
DSLINE NODEX
Record 3
USERA.ACCTA,GROUPA=HELLO USERB.ACCTA,GROUPB
Record 4
@.ACCTA,GROUPA=HELLO USERA.ACCTA,GROUPA
Record 5
USERB.ACCTB,@=HELLO USERB.ACCTX,@
End of file
If a user logs on with the logon identification indicated in the first column below,
TurboIMAGE/XL uses the corresponding USER.ACCT,GROUP identification in the second
column to establish communication with the remote system.
Logon Identification Remote Identification
User1 USERA.ACCTA,GROUPA USERB.ACCTA,GROUPB
User2 USERB.ACCTA,GROUPA USERA.ACCTA,GROUPA
User3 USERB.ACCTB,GROUPB USERB.ACCTX,GROUPB
User4 USERA.ACCTB,GROUPB None, no match found.
The first user's logon identification matches the local user, account, and group names
specified in record 3, so the remote names specified in that record are used.
The second user's account matches record 3 but the user name does not, so
TurboIMAGE/XL looks for another table entry with account ACCTA. Because the entry in
record 4 specifies any user (@) of ACCTA if their group is GROUPA, the second user's
remote identification will be that specified in record 4.
The third user logs on to ACCTB and a match is found in record 5 because it specifies the
same user name and accepts any group in the account.
The fourth user's account matches record 5 but the user name does not match. Therefore,
the fourth user cannot access the remote database with this application program.
Chapter 9
465
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
Activating a Database-Access File
After you have constructed a database-access file, you must use the DBUTIL utility program
to activate the file. The complete syntax for running the utility program is given in
chapter 8. Here is a summary of the operating instructions:
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>ACTIVATE database-access file name
Verification follows:
FILE command:
DSLINE command:
HELLO command:
<result>
<result>
<result>
ACTIVATED
>>EXIT
DBUTIL verifies that the file to be activated adheres to the following criteria:
• Has a file code of zero.
• Is an unnumbered, ASCII file.
• Has a record length <=128 characters.
• Has at least three records.
If any of these conditions is not satisfied, activation fails, and the following message is
printed:
filename is NOT a suitable database-access file
If the file has already been activated, the following message is printed:
filename is already ACTIVE
If all of the above are satisfied, DBUTIL prints the following message:
Verification follows:
Then the utility program verifies the syntax of the following records:
• Record 1.
• Record 2 through nodename; must be identical to the nodename specified in record 1.
• Records 3 through n, through the parameter rgpasw.
This means that for records 2 through n only the positional parameters (those whose
function is determined by their relative position within the command) are verified by
466
Chapter 9
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
DBUTIL. The remaining keyword parameters are checked by the command interpreter at
DBOPEN time.
If all of the above conditions are met, DBUTIL successfully activates the database-access
file, by changing the file code to the TurboIMAGE/XL reserved code −402, which makes it a
privileged (PRI V) file.
Deactivating a Database-Access File
In order to deactivate the database-access file, you use the DEACTIVATE command of the
DBUTIL utility program. Complete syntax for this program is given in chapter 8. Here is a
summary of the operating instructions:
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
.
.
.
>>DEACTIVATE database-access file name
DEACTIVATED
>>EXIT
You can do this if you want to edit the content of the database-access file or to prevent
access through this file to the remote database.
Referencing the Database
To reference the database from your local application program, use the database-access file
name instead of the root file name when calling the TurboIMAGE/XL procedure. The word
array specified as the base parameter must contain a pair of blanks followed by the
left-justified database-access file name and terminated by a semicolon or blank ( ).
TurboIMAGE/XL recognizes the −402 file code and establishes a communications link to
the remote HP 3000. If the database is successfully opened, TurboIMAGE/XL replaces the
pair of blanks with the baseid of the assigned Remote Database Control Block. The base
parameter must remain unchanged for the remainder of the process. When the application
program calls the DBCLOSE procedure or terminates execution, automatic REMOTE BYE and
DSLINE commands are issued to terminate the session and close the communications line.
Example
The example in Figure 9-5. illustrates how to create and activate a database-access file. A
description follows the example.
In this sample case, the file named ORDDBA is to be used to gain access to the ORDERS
database residing on a remote system in the PAYACCT account. The remote system is
referenced by nodename NODEX.
After the database-access file is created, it is enabled by using the DBUTIL utility program.
Chapter 9
467
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
Figure 9-5. Preparing a Database-Access File
1
2
3
:HELLO MEMBER1.PAYACCT
.
.
.
:EDITOR
HP32201A.00.00 EDIT/3000 FRI, SEP 6, 1991, 3:30 PM
(C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1985
/ADD
1
FILE ORDERS=ORDERS:NODEX
2
DSLINE NODEX
3
MEMBER1.PAYACCT=HELLO MEMBER1.PAYACCT
4
MEMBER2.PAYACCT=HELLO @.PAYACCT
5
//
4
/KEEP ORDDBA,UNN
/END
5
:RUN DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
>>ACTIVATE ORDDBA
Verification follows:
FILE command:
Looks
DSLINE command: Looks
HELLO command:
Looks
HELLO command:
Looks
ACTIVATED
>>EXIT
good
good
good
good
END OF PROGRAM
Description
1
Initiate an MPE/iX session by logging on with appropriate user name and
account.
2
Initiate text editor execution.
3
Enter the Editor ADD command in response to the first prompt, then enter
the lines to define the database-access file.
4
Save the work file in a disk file (ORDDBA in the above example).
Remember to keep it unnumbered. Then exit the Editor.
5
Initiate execution of DBUTIL and activate the database-access file ORDDBA.
Verification messages will follow (in session mode). Exit from DBUTIL.
Example
Figure 9-6. illustrates use of the database-access file through a program named
APPLICAN. A description follows the example.
468
Chapter 9
Using a Remote Database
Access Through a Local Application Program
In this sample case, after logging on to the local system, the user runs the program named
APPLICAN from the local session. The base array in this program contains ORDDBA.
When a call to DBOPEN is executed, TurboIMAGE/XL establishes a communication line and
remote session. When the program closes the database, TurboIMAGE/XL closes the line
and terminates the remote session.
Figure 9-6. Using a Database-Access File
1
2
3
4
5
:HELLO MEMBER2.PAYACCT
.
.
.
:RUN APPLICAN
HP3000 / MPE/iX G.00.00 FRI SEP 6, 1991, 3:55 PM
ENVIRONMENT 1: ELECTRA.DOC.ITG
WELCOME TO SYSTEM B.
.
.
.
CPU=2. CONNECT=1. FRI, SEP 6, 1991, 3:59 PM
ENVIRONMENT 1: ELECTRA.DOC.ITG CLOSED
:BYE
Description
1
Initiate an MPE/iX session on the local system by logging on with the
appropriate user name and account.
2
Execute the application program APPLICAN. (The program calls DBOPEN
using ORDDBA as the baseid.)
3
TurboIMAGE/XL establishes a communications line and remote session.
4
When the database is closed, TurboIMAGE/XL closes communications line
and ends remote session.
5
Log off local system.
Chapter 9
469
Using a Remote Database
Access Using QUERY/3000
Access Using QUERY/3000
When you use QUERY/3000 to retrieve information from a database, you must specify a
database name, password and access mode before you can actually access the database.
The "DATABASE=" prompt can be answered with a remote database name or the
database-access file name. Note, however, that performance can be significantly improved
if you run QUERY/3000 in a remote session, thereby accessing the database on the system
where it resides, rather than running QUERY/3000 locally to access a remote database.
For more information, refer to the QUERY/V Reference Manual.
470
Chapter 9
Internal Structures and Techniques
10 Internal Structures and Techniques
In addition to the data elements discussed in chapter 2, TurboIMAGE/XL uses a number of
internal structures and techniques to provide rapid and efficient access to the database
content. This chapter describes these structures and techniques to give you an overview of
the way TurboIMAGE/XL works.
NOTE
Chapter 10
In this manual a word is a 32-bit storage unit and a halfword is a 16-bit
storage unit. One byte is 8 bits.
471
Internal Structures and Techniques
Data Set Internal Structures
Data Set Internal Structures
The following internal structures are used by TurboIMAGE/XL to manage the information
in data sets.
Pointers
TurboIMAGE/XL uses pointers to link one data set record to another. A pointer is a value
containing the block number in the first three bytes plus one byte that contains the offset
within the block for a given data entry.
Data Chains
A data chain is a set of detail data set entries that are bi-directionally linked together by
pairs of pointers. All entries with a common search item value are placed in the same
chain. Each chain has a first and a last member. The pointer pairs constitute backward
and forward links to the entry's predecessor and successor within the chain. The first
member of a chain contains a zero backward pointer and the last member of a chain
contains a zero forward pointer. A single chain can consist of at most 231−1 (2,147,483,647)
entries.
Chain Heads
TurboIMAGE/XL locates the first or last member of a chain within a detail data set by
using a chain head. The chain head for a particular chain is stored in the corresponding
master data set with the entry whose key item value is the same as the detail search item
value. Each chain head is 12 bytes long. The first four bytes contain a count of the number
of member entries in the referenced chain. The count is zero if the chain is empty. The
remaining eight bytes contain two pointers. One points to the last chain entry, the other to
the first chain entry. If the count is zero, these pointers are both zero. If the count is one,
these pointers have the same value.
Media Records
TurboIMAGE/XL transfers information to and from a storage location on disk in 4096-byte
pages using the system storage manager. Access to the data in memory is synchronized
through blocks of media records. A media record consists of both a data entry and its
pointers or a null record if no data entry is present.
Media Records of Detail Data Sets
For each detail entry, the media record consists of the data entry itself preceded by all of its
related data chain pointer pairs. The number of pointer pairs corresponds to the number of
paths specified for the data set within the schema. Figure 10-1. illustrates a media record
for a detail data set defined with two paths. The first set of pointers corresponds to the first
path defined in the set part of the schema and the second set corresponds to the second
path.
472
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Data Set Internal Structures
Figure 10-1. Media Record for Detail Entry
Media Records of Master Data Sets
Media records of master data entries are composed of the following:
• A 10-byte field serving as a synonym chain head for primary entries or a synonym chain
link for secondary entries.
• A 3 times n word field in which the chain heads of all related detail chains are
maintained. n is the number of paths defined for the master data set. Between 0 and 16
paths can be defined.
• The data entry itself.
Figure 10-2. illustrates the media record for a primary entry of a master data set with two
paths defined.
Figure 10-2. Media Record for Primary Entry
Figure 10-3. illustrates a media record for a secondary entry of a master data set with two
paths defined.
Chapter 10
473
Internal Structures and Techniques
Data Set Internal Structures
Figure 10-3. Media Record for Secondary Entry
When more than one detail chain head is present, they are physically ordered left-to-right
in the order that the associated paths are specified in the schema.
Primary Entries
Selection of record addresses for master entries begins with a calculated address
determined by a hashing algorithm applied to the value of each entry's key item. The
algorithm is described later in this chapter. Each such calculated address is known as a
primary address and each entry residing at its primary address is called a primary
entry.
Secondary Entries
A new entry with a unique key item value will be assigned the same primary address as an
existing primary entry whenever the key item values of both entries generate the same
calculated address. When this occurs, the entries are considered synonyms of one another.
TurboIMAGE/XL assigns the new entry a secondary address obtained from unused
records in the vicinity of the primary entry. For master sets which are designated for
dynamic expansion, a secondary address may also be obtained from the expanded area.
Each entry residing at a secondary address is called a secondary entry.
Synonym Chains
When multiple data entries "arrive" at the same primary area, they are linked together to
form a synonym chain. A synonym chain consists of the primary entry and all of the data
entries with key values that hash to the same key location. Each synonym chain is
maintained by a 10-byte chain head in the media record of the primary entry and 10-byte
links in the media records of the secondary entries. A master data set entry can contain
both a synonym chain head and multiple detail chain heads. These are two distinct types
of chain heads.
If no secondary entries are present, the synonym chain count is one (for the total number
of entries that hash to this location) and the pointers to the first and last secondary entries
are zeros. If one or more secondaries are present, the synonym chain count is equal to the
total number of entries that hash to the same primary address and the pointers reference
the first and last secondary entries.
474
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Data Set Internal Structures
The first two bytes of the 10-byte link in the media record of each secondary entry are
always zero. The remaining eight bytes consist of two pointers bi-directionally linking the
secondary entries of the synonym chain to each other. As with detail chains, the first
member of this chain of secondary entries contains a zero backward pointer, and the last
member of the chain contains a zero forward pointer.
Blocks and Bit Maps
Each group of media records involved in a single MPE file record is a block. The first few
halfwords of each block contain a bit map employed by TurboIMAGE/XL to indicate
whether the corresponding media record is full or empty. There is one bit for each record in
the block. The bits occur in the bit map in the same order that the records occur in the
block. The bit map occupies as many integral halfwords as are required to contain one bit
for each record in the block. If a bit is zero, the corresponding record is empty. If a bit is
one, the record contains a data entry preceded by the associated structure information.
The format of a block is illustrated in Figure 10-4. The sample block contains four records
and the third record contains no entry.
Figure 10-4. Block with Blocking Factor of Four
Chapter 10
475
Internal Structures and Techniques
Dynamic Data Set Expansion
Dynamic Data Set Expansion
The capacity of non-jumbo (less than or equal to 4 GB in size) master and detail data sets
can be expanded dynamically during DBPUT, or implied DBPUT for automatic master. The
expansion can occur only if the data set is enabled for dynamic expansion, that is, if the
required capacity parameters are set prior to the expansion.
The capacity parameters are:
• maximum capacity
is a required parameter and is a maximum number of entries the data set can contain.
It must be less than or equal to 231−1 (2,147,483,647). The maximum capacity both for
masters and details is adjusted by TurboIMAGE/XL to represent an even multiple of
the blocking factor.
• initial capacity
is a required parameter and is the initial capacity for the data set, that is, the number
of entries for which space will be allocated and initialized when the data set is created.
For a master data set, this is also the primary or hashing capacity. This number must
be between 1 and 231 −1 inclusive but must be less than or equal to the maximum
capacity. This parameter should be used to closely approximate the current volume of
data. If it is very low, there can be frequent expansions leading to severe disk
fragmentation. If it is very high, DBPUT may take a long time to complete which could
impact other database users. The initial capacity is adjusted to represent an even
multiple of the blocking factor. If initial capacity is not specified, or if initial capacity is
either zero or equal to the maximum capacity, then dynamic capacity expansion is not
enabled for the data set, and maximum capacity is used for the data set file creation.
• increment
is an optional parameter and is either the number of entries or the percentage of the
initial capacity by which the data set will be expanded each time its initialized space is
exhausted. If a percentage is used, the percent sign (%) must follow the incremental
amount. This increment parameter can only be used if the initial capacity parameter is
also specified. This number must be 1 to 32767 inclusive for percent, or 1 to 231 −1
(2,147,483,647) inclusive for number of entries. If it is very low, there can be frequent
expansions leading to severe disk fragmentation. If it is very high, DBPUT may take a
long time to complete which could impact other database users.
The number of entries defined, or the entries calculated from the percent, cannot exceed
the maximum entry count minus the initial allocation. That is, the expansion must not
result in exceeding the maximum capacity. The increment is adjusted to represent an
even multiple of the blocking factor. If the increment is not specified for the data set, or
is zero, but the initial capacity is greater than zero, then the increment for each
expansion is defaulted to ten percent (10%) of the initial capacity for the data set. If the
initial capacity is equal to the maximum capacity, or the initial capacity is zero, then
this indicates the data set cannot be expanded and increment is ignored.
In brief, a data set is enabled for dynamic expansion when both are true:
476
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Dynamic Data Set Expansion
• Both maximum capacity and initial capacity are specified
• Initial capacity is neither zero nor equal to the maximum capacity
You can select data sets which need dynamic expansion based on anticipated growth.
For new databases, the expansion parameters for data sets can be specified using the
CAPACITY statement of DBSCHEMA as follows:
{ CAPACITY:
C:
} maximum capacity [(blocking factor)] [ ,initial capacity
[,increment]
] ;
To specify the expansion parameters for data sets of existing databases, use DBChange
Plus, or other third-party tools which support this feature.
In order to use this feature from the user point of view, the only required step is to identify
and enable the data set(s) for dynamic expansion as described above.
When a data set enabled for dynamic expansion is first created, disk space for only the
initial capacity is allocated and initialized. Later when the data set is expanded during
DBPUT, or implied DBPUT for automatic master, additional disk space based on the
increment is allocated and initialized. It can grow up to the maximum capacity specified
for the set. Following the expansion, TurboIMAGE/XL updates various fields related to the
expansion such as current capacity including the expansion and free space counter in the
user label.
The instant when the expansion is triggered and how record addresses are assigned to the
new entry vary in detail data sets from master data sets.
Detail Data Sets
For a detail data set, expansion takes place during DBPUT when the free space counter for
the set is zero. Following the expansion, TurboIMAGE/XL updates the expansion related
fields in the user label such as the end-of-file pointer (high-water mark) and the free space
counter. The expanded data set is perceived as one larger data set and the new record
addresses are assigned using the pointer to delete chain head and the end-of-file pointer
(high-water mark) as done prior to the dynamic expansion feature. The new entry is
assigned the first record address in the expanded area.
Master Data Sets
For a master data set, expansion is triggered when the set is almost full. That is, when the
set has approximated its maximum capacity which will not allow DBPUT to be successful.
For an example, a DBPUT to a detail set with multiple paths to the same automatic master
will require multiple record additions to the automatic master.
Once the expansion is done, the master data set can be perceived as having two areas,
original area and expanded area, managed differently. The original area can have primary
entries and secondary entries, while the expanded area can only have the secondary
entries. Note that the primary capacity (also called hashing capacity or initial capacity),
which is used to calculate the primary address does not change. In essence, the dynamic
expansion results in allocating additional space for secondary entries which implicitly
makes room for additional primary entries in the original area. The primary address of a
Chapter 10
477
Internal Structures and Techniques
Dynamic Data Set Expansion
new entry is calculated using the value of the entry's key item in the hashing algorithm.
The new entry can reside either at its primary address in the original area, or in the close
vicinity of the primary address in the original area, or in the expanded area. The use of
expanded area is controlled using the pointer to a delete chain head and an end-of-file
pointer (high-water mark) as in detail data sets.
To elaborate further, when a DBPUT for manual master, or implied DBPUT to an automatic
master, is processed, the address where the new entry resides is based on the following:
1. If the primary address in the original area is not occupied, the new entry resides there.
The new entry also becomes a synonym chain head with a count of one.
2. If the primary address is occupied by another primary entry, TurboIMAGE/XL scans a
few blocks (quick search) in the close proximity of the primary address to find an
unoccupied address (empty record). If found, the new entry resides at this secondary
address in the original area. Otherwise, the pointer to the delete chain head and the
end-of-file pointer for the expansion area are interrogated to determine the secondary
address in the expansion area for the new entry. When there is room, the new entry is
assigned a secondary address in the expanded area. If the expanded area is full and can
be expanded, it is further expanded to accommodate the new entry. When there is no
room in the expanded area and cannot be expanded further, however, there is room in
the original area, the original area is scanned once again (long search) to find a
secondary address for the new entry. If an unoccupied address is found, the new entry
resides there, and it becomes the last entry in the synonym chain. Otherwise, the set is
full and DBPUT will fail.
3. If the primary address is occupied by a secondary entry, a secondary entry is relocated
to another secondary address in either the original area or the expansion area as
described above. The new entry becomes a synonym chain head with a count of one.
TurboIMAGE/XL performs synonym chain maintenance for the secondary entry which
relocates.
478
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Scalability
Scalability
In versions prior to C.07.00, TurboIMAGE/XL serialized the execution of DBPUT,
DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE when critical item update (CIU) is enabled, to protect the
structural integrity of the database. This serialization is done via a semaphore known as
PUTDELETE semaphore. This translates into processing only one DBPUT, DBDELETE, or
DBUPDATE with CIU enabled at a time for every database. This is acceptable for the
low-end machines but not for the high-end and multi-processor machines. It became
imperative that TurboIMAGE/XL scale to the performance of these high-end and
multi-processor machines. That is, TurboIMAGE/XL must increase the throughput of the
intrinsics, DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE with CIU enabled, which are collectively
termed modify intrinsics. In order to achieve this, the approach taken is to increase the
concurrency of the modify intrinsics.
Approach in Version C.07.00
The enhanced approach in TurboIMAGE/XL version C.07.00 (and later) is based strictly on
the database design and is optional. By default, TurboIMAGE/XL continues to work the
way it did in versions prior to C.07.00. For the revised approach, the database is internally
grouped by TurboIMAGE/XL into independent sub-databases based on physical
linkages/relationships or dependency of master and detail data sets. In addition, it uses
multiple semaphores as well as a specific criteria to lock the necessary semaphores for a
sub-database. The result is that the modify intrinsics can execute concurrently for these
independent sub-databases.
In brief, the criteria pertaining to semaphores is as follows:
1. Assign ONE semaphore for each data set.
2. When modifying a master set, lock only the semaphore for this master.
3. When modifying a detail data set, lock the semaphore for the detail as well as all its
related master sets, manual as well as automatic. This can result in locking 1
(minimum, standalone detail) up to 17 (maximum, 1 + 16) semaphores.
To illustrate this, look at the following diagram:
Figure 10-5. Independent Sub-Databases for Concurrency
-----\ M1 /
\ /
\/
-------\ D1 /
\
/
----
Chapter 10
-----\ M2 /
\ /
\/
.
.
.
.
-------\ D2 /
\
/
----
-----\ M3 /
\ /
\/
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
-------- -------\ D3 / \ D4 /
\
/
\
/
-------
----------- -----\ M4 /
\ M5 / \ M6 /
\ /
\ /
\ /
\/
\/
\/
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
--------------\ D5 /
\ D6 /
\
/
\
/
-------
479
Internal Structures and Techniques
Scalability
In the above diagram, the independent sub-databases are:
1. M1
2. D1
3. D2 and M2
4. D3 and M3
5. D4 and M3
6. D5, M4 and M5
7. D6, M5 and M6
There are several different scenarios when concurrent modifications can be in progress.
For example:
M1
at all times as there is no dependency.
D1
at all times as there is no dependency.
Other masters M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 if the depending detail is not being modified.
Other details
D2, D3 or D4, and D5 or D6. This is if the dependent master(s) are not
being modified. Note that both D3 and D4, or D5 and D6 cannot be
concurrently modified.
Based on this approach, the throughput is dependent on the number of sub-databases, the
more, the better. The worst case is a database which can be sub-divided into only one
sub-database. For example, one detail linked to 16 masters. The best case is when there
are several stand-alone masters or details.
With this approach, some databases may benefit in throughput and some may not.
Therefore, by default, TurboIMAGE/XL continues to work the way it did in versions prior
to C.07.00.
To use this enhancement, your database must be activated to use the Dependency
Semaphore. To achieve this, use the option, DSEM, with the ENABLE command of DBUTIL.
The default for DSEM is DISABLED.
New syntax:
EN[ABLE] database name [/maint word] FOR DSEM
DI[SABLE] database name [/maint word] FOR DSEM
After enabling your database for DSEM, if you feel that your database cannot benefit by
using this feature, you may DISABLE it.
480
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Run-Time TurboIMAGE/XL Control Blocks
Run-Time TurboIMAGE/XL Control Blocks
As mentioned in chapter 4, TurboIMAGE/XL uses control blocks resident in privileged
mapped files to provide and control user access to a database through the
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures. The contents of these control blocks are maintained by
TurboIMAGE/XL. Although it is not necessary to know the details in order to use the
TurboIMAGE/XL procedures, the following descriptions are provided for those who prefer
to understand the control blocks and their functions.
Local Database Access
The following structures are involved in local database access:
• Database System Control Block (DBS) -- Contains pointers to all of the DBGs on the
system.
• Database Globals Control Block (DBG) -- Contains global information required during
run-time and space for DBLOCK's lock descriptors. The DBG also contains a pointer to
the DBB and pointers to the DBUs.
• Database Buffer Area Control Block (DBB) -- Contains a set of addresses and
temporary locks used to coordinate access to the data set, a set of buffer headers, and a
pointer to the DBG.
• Database User Local Control Block (DBU) -- Contains information pertaining to each
access path (each DBOPEN) to the database. The DBU also contains pointers to the DBG,
DBB, and DBS.
• Database User Local Index Control Block (DBUX) -- Contains the addresses of all the
DBUs and DBRs (Remote Database Control Blocks) belonging to a specific process. The
DBUX also contains dynamic roll-back information.
• Database Lock Table (TURBOLKT) -- Contains information pertaining to locks on the
database and is used to avoid deadlocks.
• Multi-Database Transactions (TURBOGTX) -- Contains information pertaining to
dynamic transactions constituting multiple databases.
• QOPEN Table (QOPEN) -- Contains information about user logging process for active
DBOPENS of modes 1-4.
• QLOCK Table (QLOCK) -- Contains information about all writers to databases and a
pointer to QOPEN.
The DBS is a permanent file, TURBODBS.PUB.SYS, that is created by DBOPEN if it does not
exist beforehand. Thereafter, it is opened when the first user opens any database on the
system. It is reinitialized after a system abort. Each system has only one DBS; it contains
pointers to the current DBGs for any currently open database(s).
Both the DBG and the DBB are created when the first user opens a database (DBOPEN).
They remain allocated until the last user closes the database. Each opened database has
only one DBB and one DBG, regardless of the number of users. Both of these control blocks
are part of a permanent mapped file called dbnameGB located in the same group and
Chapter 10
481
Internal Structures and Techniques
Run-Time TurboIMAGE/XL Control Blocks
account as the database.
NOTE
If you have an existing file with the same name that TurboIMAGE/XL would
assign to the permanent mapped file (that is, dbnameGB), you will get the
following message for status code −9:
CANNOT CREATE DBG : MPE ERROR <nnn>
The DBG is derived mostly from the root file and contains global information required by
TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics during run-time. In addition, the DBG contains the lock table
which holds user-level locking information. The DBG is used as a reference area for global
data and lock information.
The DBB is used to retrieve, log, and update data located within the data sets. It contains
a set of buffer headers which are shared by all concurrent users accessing the database.
These buffer headers contain information about data set blocks. The DBB also contains
information pertaining to logging and recovery.
A two-level resource priority locking scheme is used within the DBB to allow single data
block operations to access the control block concurrently. This involves DBGET, DBFIND and
DBUPDATE processes. DBPUT and DBDELETE operations, and DBUPDATE operations on detail
data set search or sort items made possible through the critical item update (CIUPDATE)
option, are unable to access the data blocks concurrently with other DBPUTs, DBDELETEs,
and search or sort item DBUPDATEs. These block put-delete lock operations must hold a
global lock on the DBB throughout part of the operation; therefore, there is less
concurrency when using DBPUT and DBDELETE and when using DBUPDATE on search or sort
items via the CIUPDATE option. When you update a search or sort item value, you get the
same net effect as performing a DBDELETE and DBPUT.
One DBU is created and stored in a privileged, unnamed temporary file each time a user
issues a DBOPEN, and remains allocated until the corresponding DBCLOSE is issued. The
DBU contains information pertaining to the user's individual access to the database. This
includes information about the user's access mode, record position, list specifications, and
security table. All TurboIMAGE/XL intrinsics process on the DBU, except accesses for
global and buffer area information found in the DBG and DBB.
The DBUX is created and stored in a privileged, unnamed temporary file the first time the
user's process calls DBOPEN. One DBUX exists for each process. Its purpose is to keep track
of the addresses of all the DBUs belonging to that process. Because 127 entries are allowed
in the DBUX, each process is allowed a maximum of 127 DBOPENs (63 per database)
depending on the availability of system resources. The DBUX remains allocated until the
user's process is terminated.
When accessing a local database, the TurboIMAGE/XL procedures usually make use of,
and can modify information in all of the control blocks.
The TURBOLKT is a permanent file, TURBOLKT.PUB.SYS, that is created by DBOPEN (if it does
not exist beforehand). Thereafter, it is opened when the first user opens any database on
the system. It is purged when the system is rebooted. Each system has only one TURBOLKT
file. It is used to avoid deadlocks for all IMAGE/SQL users. Additionally, it is also used to
detect potential deadlock for TurboIMAGE/XL users if, and only if, deadlock detection is
activated by DBCONTROL mode 7.
482
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Run-Time TurboIMAGE/XL Control Blocks
The TURBOGTX is a permanent file, TURBOGTX.PUB.SYS, that is created by DBXBEGIN (if it
does not exist beforehand). Thereafter, it is opened for all users who employ dynamic
multi-database transaction(s) (DMDBX). Each system has only one TURBOGTX file, and it
remains on the system even after the system is rebooted. It is used for tracking DMDBX.
The QOPEN table is an unnamed global object and is first created by DBOPEN when the first
writer of any database enabled for user logging opens a database. It is subsequently
accessed only by writers of databases enabled for user logging. Each system has only one
QOPEN table, and it is purged when all processes accessing it are terminated. It contains
information pertaining to user logging process for DBOPEN. This information is used to
write to log records for DBRECOV and to coordinate with DBQUIESCE called by
TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online Backup.
The QLOCK is an unnamed permanent global structure that is created by DBOPEN (if it does
not exist beforehand). There is one per system, and it is accessed by all writers to all
databases. It is purged only at system reboot time. It is used for containing database
information required to quiesce database(s) for TurboSTORE/iX 7x24 True-Online
Backup.
Remote Database Access
TurboIMAGE/XL provides the capability of accessing a database on a remote HP 3000
system from a user program running on the local HP 3000 system, as described in
chapter 9. This capability is provided in conjunction with NS3000/XL and is accomplished
by transmitting TurboIMAGE/XL database access requests (DBGET, DBPUT, and so forth)
to the remote computer where they are executed and the results returned to the local
calling process. The control block structures used by TurboIMAGE/XL for the remote
computer which contains the database are those described in the preceding section.
On the local computer running the user application program, TurboIMAGE/XL constructs
and uses a structure called the Remote Database Control Block (DBR). One DBR is created
each time a user's process issues a DBOPEN accessing a remote TurboIMAGE/XL database
(each access path to a remote database); this DBR is released when the corresponding
DBCLOSE is issued. The DBR resides in a privileged, unnamed temporary file associated
with the user application process on the local computer, and contains database, set, and
item information plus the work areas necessary to set up communication with the remote
computer. Returned data and status information is also processed in the DBR and is
transferred to the appropriate user stack areas before TurboIMAGE/XL returns to the
local calling process.
Access to a TurboIMAGE/V database from an MPE/iX system or access to a
TurboIMAGE/XL database from an MPE V system is allowed provided both systems are
configured with Network Services (NS3000). To access an IMAGE/3000 database, an MPE
V system (with NS/3000 and TurboIMAGE/V) acting as an intermediary is required.
However, if the limits on the remote database exceed those allowed on the local system,
access will not be successful. This is because the DBR will be too small to handle remote
capacities that exceed the local limits.
Chapter 10
483
Internal Structures and Techniques
Internal Techniques
Control Block Sizes
It is not necessary to predict the exact length of the control blocks used by
TurboIMAGE/XL to manage user accesses to databases. However, the exact length of the
DBU and the exact current length of the DBG are returned in the status array by DBOPEN.
These lengths can be truncated to 32767 if the control block is greater than 32767.
Internal Techniques
Although it is not necessary to know the following techniques to use TurboIMAGE/XL, an
understanding of them can help you design a more efficient database.
Primary Address Calculation
TurboIMAGE/XL employs two distinct methods of calculating primary addresses in
master data sets. The intent of the first method is to spread master entries as uniformly as
possible throughout the record space of the data file. This method is referred to as
"hashing" and applies only to master data sets with key items of type U, X, Z, or P. In this
case, the entire key item value regardless of its length is folded into a positive 32-bit value.
This value is reduced modulo the hashing capacity and then incremented by one to form a
primary address. The hashing capacity is the maximum capacity for a set not enabled for
dynamic expansion, or initial capacity for a set enabled for dynamic expansion of a new
database, or the original capacity (excluding expansions) for a set enabled for dynamic
expansion of an existing database.
NOTE
Because values are folded from right to left, applications should place values
in a type U, X, Z, or P field as follows:
• Values that change should be placed first in the field.
• Values that are static should be placed last in the field.
The intent of the second method is to permit you to control the primary address
assignment. This method applies only to master data sets with key items of type I, J, K, R,
or E. In this case, the right-most block of 32 bits of the key value is treated as a double
integer. (If its sign bit is not zero, it is set to zero. If the key item is only 16 bits long, a
32-bit value is created by prefacing these 16 bits with 16 zero bits.)
This 32-bit integer is decremented by 1 and reduced modulo the data set hashing capacity
after which 1 is added to the result to form the primary address. If the application provides
key values whose right-most 32 bits take on values between 1 and N (where N is no
greater than the data set hashing capacity), the corresponding entries will be assigned
primary addresses 1 through N which is identical to the Direct Access Method (DAM). In
this event, there are no secondaries and performance is outstanding. However, if the
application has no control of the key value assignment and/or if N exceeds the hashing
capacity, secondaries will occur; this, along with the clustering typical of this method, may
484
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Internal Techniques
result in poor DBPUT performance. This method should be used only if you have
determined that the potential poor performance consequences cannot occur.
The intent of the two primary address algorithms is to spread master entries as uniformly
as possible throughout the record space of the data file. This uniform spread reduces the
number of synonyms occurring in the master data set.
NOTE
In general, a master data set with a capacity equal to a prime number or to
the product of two or three primes can yield fewer synonyms than master
data sets with capacities consisting of many factors. Refer to appendix C for a
list of prime numbers. More information on dynamic data set expansion is
given earlier in this chapter.
Migrating Secondaries
In some cases, secondary entries of master data sets are automatically moved to storage
locations other than the one originally assigned. This most often occurs when a new
master data entry is assigned a primary address occupied by a secondary entry. By
definition, the secondary entry is a synonym to some other primary entry resident at their
common primary address. Thus, the new entry represents the beginning of a new synonym
chain. To accommodate this new chain, the secondary entry is moved to an alternate
secondary address and the new entry is added to the data set as a new primary entry. This
move and the necessary linkage and chain head maintenance is done automatically.
A move can also occur when the primary entry of a synonym chain that has one or more
secondary entries is deleted. Because retrieval of each entry occurs through a synonym
chain, each synonym chain must have a primary entry. To maintain the integrity of a
synonym chain, TurboIMAGE/XL always moves the first secondary entry to the primary
address of the deleted primary entry.
Space Allocation for Master Data Sets
Space allocation for each master data set is controlled by a free space counter resident in
the user label of the data set, by each bit map that monitors each block of the data set, and
by enabling of the data set for dynamic expansion.
When a data set is enabled for dynamic expansion, the expansion is triggered at run-time
during DBPUT (implied for automatic master) when the data set has reached its almost-full
capacity. Once an expansion is done, the master data set is partitioned into two areas: the
original area corresponding to the original initial capacity (hashing) and the expansion
area corresponding to all extents allocated as a result of run-time expansion. The original
area has a mixture of primary and secondary entries. The expansion area has only
secondary entries which are added using a delete chain head and end-of-file pointer (high
water mark), similar to detail data sets.
The master data sets which are not enabled for dynamic expansion have only one area
which contains both primary and secondary entries.
When a new entry is added, TurboIMAGE/XL decrements the free space counter and sets
the bit corresponding to the newly assigned record address to a one. If the bit is a zero
Chapter 10
485
Internal Structures and Techniques
Internal Techniques
before the record is added, the assigned record address is the primary address. If the bit is
a one before the record is added, it indicates that an entry already exists. If this existing
entry is a primary entry, a search is done to find a free location, secondary address, for the
new entry. However, if the existing entry is a secondary entry, this secondary entry is
relocated to another free secondary address, and the new entry is added at this location. If
the data set is enabled for dynamic expansion, the search for a free secondary address is
done in the original as well as expansion area. For the original (primary, hashing, or
initial) area, a secondary address is identified by a serial search of the bit maps of blocks
for a zero indicating an unused record. For the expanded area, a secondary address is
identified using the pointer to a delete chain and end-of-file pointer, as in detail data sets.
Space Allocation for Detail Data Sets
Space allocation for each detail data set is controlled by a free space counter, an end-of-file
pointer and a pointer to a delete chain. The end-of-file pointer contains the record
address of the highest-numbered entry which has existed so far in the data set. The delete
chain pointer contains the record address of the entry which was most recently deleted.
When each detail data set is first created, the end-of-file pointer and delete chain pointer
are both zero.
When a new entry is added to a detail data set, TurboIMAGE/XL assigns to it the record
address referenced by the delete chain pointer, unless the pointer is zero or HWMPUT has
been enabled either using DBCONTROL or using DBUTIL. If the delete chain pointer is zero or
if the HWMPUT flag is enabled, the end-of-file pointer is incremented and then used as the
assigned record address. The free space counter is decremented in either case. When a new
entry is to be added to a detail data set and the free space counter is zero, at run-time, the
data set is expanded according to the capacity expansion parameter specified for this data
set (if any). The capacity expansion parameters can be set using DBSCHEMA for new
databases or by using DBCHANGE Plus or other third-party utilities for existing databases.
When an existing entry is deleted, its media record is zeroed, the first word is replaced
with the current delete chain pointer, and the block is written to disk. The delete chain
pointer is set to the address of the newly deleted entry and the free space counter is
incremented.
The delete chain is, in effect, a "last-in–first-out" linked list of reusable media record space.
Reusable space is allocated in preference to the unused space represented by record
addresses beyond the end-of-file pointer except when HWMPUT is enabled.
Addition and deletion of data entries also requires data chain maintenance and turning on
or turning off the corresponding bit of the appropriate bit map. Both of these are necessary
for retrieval integrity but neither play a role in space allocation for detail data sets.
486
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
Internal Techniques
Buffer Management
TurboIMAGE/XL maintains a set of buffer partitions in the DBB for all users of an open
database. DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE, DBPUT, and DBDELETE locate a buffer header from
one of these partitions.
Each partition is allocated its own buffer header pool, hash table, and free list. The buffer
header pool is a set of buffer headers allocated for the accessors of its corresponding
partition. The hash table consists of linked lists of buffer header addresses either in use or
ready to be released. The free list is a linked list of available buffer headers. Initially, when
the DBB is created, all of the buffer headers belonging to a partition are linked to a free
list and all the hash table chains are empty. TurboIMAGE/XL uses a two-level hashing
algorithm based on the block number of the data set to determine the partition number as
well as the hash table entry to be used.
When an intrinsic issues a request for a data set block, the buffer manager starts the
search from its hash table entry. If the hash table chain is empty, it acquires a buffer
header from the free list. The buffer header is first allocated from the free list to build the
buffer header for the data set block and link it to its appropriate hash table chain. When
the hash chain, as well as the free list search, is exhausted, the process pauses to wait for
other processes to release buffers then retries the buffer header pool scan.
Locking Internals
Within the DBG is a large lock area that provides space for the entries described below.
Accessor Entries
One of these is created for each successful call to DBOPEN (each access path). Although
located in the lock area, each accessor entry is the link with which TurboIMAGE/XL
controls access to the database. An accessor entry is deleted when DBCLOSE is called for the
access path, and the space is reused.
Set Entries
One of these is created for every data set that is specified in a lock request. Therefore, the
maximum number of set entries is equal to the number of data sets in the database. These
entries are never deleted.
Descriptor Entries
These entries contain the internal form of the lock descriptors specified in locking mode 5
or 6. They disappear when the locks are released (when DBUNLOCK is called) and the space
is reused.
In addition to DBG, the global database lock table, TURBOLKT, is used to avoid deadlocks by
IMAGE/SQL users, and from TurboIMAGE/XL users (if deadlock detection is activated by
DBCONTROL mode 7). The TURBOLKT contains information pertaining to every lock by every
user on the system. In the event of a potential deadlock, an error is returned instead of
causing a system hang.
Chapter 10
487
Internal Structures and Techniques
MPE/iX Transaction Management
MPE/iX Transaction Management
When AUTODEFER is not enabled, TurboIMAGE/XL uses an internal MPE/iX service,
called Transaction Management (XM), to ensure physical consistency of the database, to
reduce physical disk I/O, to perform Intrinsic Level Recovery (ILR), and to perform
dynamic roll-back recovery.
When XM is used, modifying intrinsics (DBPUTs, DBDELETEs, and DBUPDATEs) are bracketed
as XM transactions. XM logs these transactions in its own XM log file. The volume set is
the XM unit of logging and recovery. Each volume set has one XM log file.
In default recovery mode, TurboIMAGE/XL uses XM to ensure the structural integrity of
the database. The writes of each database modification (every DBPUT, DBUPDATE and
DBDELETE) are bracketed as an XM transaction and logged to XM log file pages. XM log file
pages are written to disk when one of the following occurs:
1. A system-specified time has elapsed.
2. A request is made by a subsystem, such as, TurboIMAGE/XL, or another process to
flush the log file to disk.
3. The XM buffer (or log file pages) is full.
Thus, intrinsics that have completed may not yet be written to disk. If a system failure
occurs, only completed modifications that have been written to disk are recovered.
When the operating system is restarted, the physical integrity of the database is recovered
via XM recovery. However, the "user defined" logical transactions affecting logical
consistency and needing recovery are not processed at this time. Instead, they are posted
to a hidden global file called the "AUX" file. When the very first DPOPEN is processed on the
system, this "AUX" file is processed, and the transactions pertaining to the same database
are posted to their respective "00" file (dbname00). Subsequently, when the first DBOPEN for
a specific database is done, its "00" file will be processed to restore the logical consistency
of the database.
A dynamic transaction is denoted by the DBXBEGIN and DBXEND intrinsics. With dynamic
roll-back recovery, a dynamic transaction is rolled back with a program abort or with a call
to DBXUNDO. DBXUNDO can be called when other database activity is occurring.
ILR is similar to TurboIMAGE/XL in that it also uses XM. When ILR is enabled, changes
to data sets are bracketed as XM transactions and logged to XM log file pages. With ILR,
however, XM log file pages are written to disk at the end of each completed DBDELETE and
DBPUT. If a system failure occurs, only one DBPUT or DBDELETE will not be recovered. (A
completed DBUPDATE does not force a log write to disk.)
When AUTODEFER is enabled, MPE/iX Transaction Management is not used. Instead,
AUTODEFER uses the MPE/iX file system defaults which keep data pages in memory until
lack of memory or the closing of a file forces the pages to be written to disk. In this mode, a
system failure can cause the loss of database integrity unless roll-forward recovery is used.
488
Chapter 10
Internal Structures and Techniques
System Limits
System Limits
The following is a table that shows the current limits in TurboIMAGE. The left column
describes the resource(s) based on the unit. The right column is the maximum number it
can have. For example, ‘Opened databases/system’ means ‘numbers of databases that can
concurrently be opened on a system’; ‘Data items/database’ means ‘numbers of items that
can be defined within a database’.
Chapter 10
489
Internal Structures and Techniques
System Limits
Table 10-1. Static System Limits
Resource
Limit
Opened databases / system
2004
Data items / database
1023
Data sets / database
199
Passwords / database
63
Data items / data set
255
Paths / data set
16
No. of chunks / data set
99
Locked item / data set
1
Data entries / data set
2 ** 31 – 1
Data entries / chain
2 ** 31 – 1
DBOPENs / process
127
DBOPENs / process / database
63
Remote DBOPENs / process
127
Remote DBOPENs process / database
63
Sub item count / item
255
Sub item length
510 bytes
Item length
4096 bytes
Entry length
4756 bytes
Block length
5120 bytes
Data set size
80 GB
Databases / transaction
15
Lock descriptors size / DBLOCK
4096 bytes
Dynamic transaction size / process
4MB
Dynamic transaction size / volume set
64MB
B-tree index key size
252 bytes
490
Chapter 10
B-Tree Indices
Overview of B-Tree Indices
11 B-Tree Indices
This chapter is new with the release which includes the enhancement to support B-Tree
indices (C.07.00). This chapter gives an overview of the B-Tree index enhancement. It
addresses changes in TurboIMAGE/XL utilities and intrinsics, and presents a quick start
for using B-Tree indices.
This chapter has the following major sections:
• Overview of B-Tree Indices
• External Commands and Utilities Affected
• Limits
• Quick Start for Using B-Tree Indices
Overview of B-Tree Indices
An index on an item allows generic and range searches. To optimize the search of an index,
a technique commonly know as "Binary Tree Searching" is used. Hence, the name B-Tree
index is used to refer to an index in TurboIMAGE/XL.
You can create a B-Tree index only on the master data set's key item. Nevertheless, you
are able to perform index searches using all of its corresponding detail data set search
items as well. A master data set key item is perceived as having an explicit B-Tree index
and all of its corresponding detail data set search items are perceived as having implicit
B-Tree indices. The index searches are done using DBFIND. If you create an index on a key
item of the master data set, you can use this master data set in the DBFIND intrinsic.
Terminology
Explicit B-Tree index
is an index actually created on the key item of the master
data set. The index searches can be done using this key
item in the DBFIND intrinsic.
Implicit B-Tree index
is an implied index, which does not physically exist, but
index search is allowed on the detail data set search item
whose corresponding master data set key item has a
B-Tree index.
B-Tree DBFIND
is a DBFIND on a master or detail data set using a key
item or a search item that has a B-Tree index (explicit or
implicit). For a master set, it is a set of entries in the
master which satisfy the DBFIND criteria. For a detail
data set, DBFIND is also referred to as a super-find
which locates a set of master data set entries, all of which
Chapter 11
491
B-Tree Indices
Overview of B-Tree Indices
have keys that satisfy the DBFIND criteria. The total of all
corresponding chains in a detail data set is referred to as a
super-chain. TurboIMAGE/XL fetches each qualifying
master entry in order to determine the total number of
associated detail entries to calculate the sum of the chain
counts. To retrieve all qualified entries in a detail data set
using DBGET, TurboIMAGE "walks" (traverses) this
super-chain.
B-Tree Search
is the same as B-Tree DBFIND.
Super-chain
is the sum of all detail data set chains involved in the
B-Tree DBFIND.
Trailing-@ Search
is a B-Tree search where only the characters left of the @
(wildcard character) of the argument are compared to
qualify an entry. (For example, "cat@" is a trailing-@
search, but "cat@dog" is not and the result will be the
same for both arguments. That is, "dog" will be ignored.)
Wildcard Character
refers to a printable ASCII character. The default is @
which means "matches all trailing characters" (unlike "?"
or "#" in MPE terms).
BTREEMODE1
is an option which can be turned ON or OFF using the SET
command of DBUTIL or programmatically using
DBCONTROL. When it is ON, DBFIND mode 1 of an item of X
or U type having a B-Tree index (explicit or implicit), and
having a wildcard character in the argument will result in
a B-Tree search. The ON option allows applications to
benefit from B-Tree indices without modifying
applications. When it is OFF, which is also the default,
DBFIND mode 1 described above works as it did in releases
prior to a release with the B-Tree index feature (C.07.00).
Simple Argument
is a DBFIND argument that consists of a sequence of bytes,
as in DBFIND mode 1 argument in releases prior to a
release with the B-Tree index feature (C.07.00). This is
used predominantly for modes 1, 10, and 21. For DBFIND
modes 1 and 21, an X or U type item having B-Tree index
(explicit or implicit) and having the BTREEMODE1 option
ON, the text is scanned for a wildcard character, if any. If a
wildcard is found, DBFIND is treated as a B-Tree DBFIND.
Otherwise, it is treated as DBFIND in releases prior to a
release with the B-Tree index feature (C.07.00).
Structured Argument
is a DBFIND fixed format argument construct introduced
with B-Trees enhancement. It is defined as a record
structure, containing search control information as well as
key data. This is used for DBFIND modes 4 and 24, and is
described later in this chapter.
492
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
Overview of B-Tree Indices
Key Points
These are the key points of TurboIMAGE/XL B-Tree indices:
• You can create a B-Tree index only on the key item of the master data set.
• Although you can create a B-Tree index only for the key item of a master data set, you
can still perform a B-Tree search using the search items of all of its corresponding
detail sets as well. A master data set is perceived as having an explicit B-Tree index
and each of its corresponding detail data sets is perceived as having an implicit
B-Tree index.
• You may create B-Tree indices for zero, one, or more data sets.
• DBSCHEMA has a new option, INDEXED, for the SET specification.
• DBUTIL has new commands and options.
a. New ADDINDEX, DROPINDEX, and REBUILDINDEX commands (to be used for one,
more than one, or all masters)
b. The SET command has a new BTREEMODE1 option to set DBFIND mode 1 access
ON or OFF for a B-Tree wildcard search for X and U types. The default is OFF. The
ON setting allows you to use B-Tree indices for generic search without making
application changes.
c. The SET command allows you to define your own database-wide wildcard character.
d. CREATE, ERASE, PURGE, SECURE, RELEASE, and SHOW commands include
B-Tree index files in their operation.
e. The MOVE command does not allow moving the index file.
• DBCONTROL has these modes pertaining to B-Tree indices:
13
is for B-Tree index file control. That is, to ADD, DROP, REBUILD,
ATTACH, or DETACH a B-Tree index file.
14
is used to set database-wide BTREEMODE1 and wildcard character.
15
sets BTREEMODE1 ON for the current DBOPEN (base parameter), and
optionally allows the wildcard character to be set for the current
DBOPEN.
16
sets BTREEMODE1 OFF for the current DBOPEN (base parameter).
• DBINFO has these modes pertaining to B-Tree indices:
209
informs whether or not a B-Tree index exists for a master.
113
gives BTREEMODE1 setting and the wildcard character for the
database as well as current DBOPEN.
• DBPUT or DBDELETE to an indexed master triggers a similar operation to indexed
master's B-Tree index file. (DBUPDATE to a master data set to modify a key item, despite
CIPUDATE setting, is not allowed.)
• DBFIND has these features pertaining to B-Tree indices:
a. Can be used for details as well as masters to specify B-Tree index searches.
Chapter 11
493
B-Tree Indices
Overview of B-Tree Indices
b. DBFIND modes with added functionality pertaining to B-Tree indices:
1
can continue to work as it does in releases prior to the release of
B-Tree index feature (C.07.00), despite the presence of a B-Tree
index, or it can be used for a B-Tree search if BTREEMODE1 is ON.
4
used for B-Tree index searches on numeric as well as ASCII types
and returns accurate chain (super-chain) counts. Requires a
structured argument.
10
allows you to simulate the DBFIND mode 1 in releases prior to the
release with B-tree index feature even when the item has a B-Tree
index (explicit or implicit), BTREEMODE1 is on, and the argument
contains a wildcard character. It returns accurate chain count. This
is the same as TPI mode 10. Requires a simple argument.
21
is the same as B-Tree index search using DBFIND mode 1, except it is
a faster version and does not return accurate chain counts. Requires
a simple argument.
24
is the same as B-Tree index search using DBFIND mode 4, except it is
a faster version and does not return accurate chain counts. Requires
a structured argument.
c. Allows wildcard search, as well as range search (< , <=, > , >=,"PK", or [ ] for
between).
d. If BTREEMODE1 is ON, DBFIND mode 1 of X or U type item having a B-Tree index
(explicit or implicit) and the argument containing a wildcard character will result in
a B-Tree index search.
e. For wildcard (generic) search, the wildcard should be the terminating character in
the argument. Characters beyond that will be ignored.
f. Status array reflects information based on data set, mode, and search type. B-Tree
index searches for modes 1 and 4 for details give super-chain (multiple detail chain)
counts and record numbers of first entry in first detail chain and last entry in last
detail chain.
• DBGET modes 5 and 6 can be used for B-Tree index retrieval for masters or details.
Super-chains are traversed for detail data sets.
• KSAM/iX files are used for B-Tree index files. These are KSAM related key points:
a. There is one KSAM/iX privileged file with a filecode of -412 for each B-Tree index file.
The size limit for this B-Tree index file is 4 Gbytes. A jumbo master (larger than 4
Gbytes) can have a B-Tree index file provided the B-Tree index file remains within
its 4 Gbyte limit.
b. KSAM/iX B-Tree index file is named using the POSIX file format with the "idx"
extension (lowercase). For example:
/ACTSALES/GRPSALES/ORDERS03.idx
c. KSAM/iX B-Tree index file records consist only of a single key, which is a duplicate of
494
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
the master data set key value. No pointer information is present in the B-Tree index
records.
d. The KSAM file has the Native Language Support language specified to match the
language of the database, if the key is a text (X or U) data type.
• Record zero of the root file contains "C4" for the root file version if at least one B-Tree
index file exists for the database. When all B-Tree indices are dropped, it reverts to the
appropriate version: "C3" if at least one jumbo set exists, "C2" otherwise.
• A new bit map is added in the root file for B-Tree indices.
• Third-party indices can coexist with B-Tree indices, that is, on the same item of the
data set.
External Commands and Utilities Affected
The root file, utilities, and intrinsics affected by the implementation of B-Tree index files
include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Root file
DBSCHEMA
DBUTIL
DBCONTROL
DBFIND
DBGET
DBINFO
DBPUT
DBDELETE
DBUPDATE
Root File
The root file version level will be "C4" if at least one master data set has a B-Tree index. If
there are no B-Tree indices, the root file version will be "C3" if any jumbo data sets exist,
and "C2" otherwise. In other words, a value greater than "C2" indicates that at least one
POSIX named file exists as part of the database.
DBSCHEMA
DBSCHEMA has an INDEXED option added to the data set NAME specification.
New Syntax for DBSCHEMA
NAME:setname, { M[ANUAL]
A[UTOMATIC]} [/INDEXED] [(read class list)/(write class list)]
[,device class];
Chapter 11
495
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
Example
NAME:
Employeename, MANUAL /INDEXED(10,20/30);
DBUTIL
DBUTIL has three new commands:
• ADDINDEX
• DROPINDEX
• REBUILDINDEX
Syntax for ADDINDEX
ADDI[NDEX] database name [/maintword] FOR { ALL
setnamelist
setnumlist }
Syntax for DROPINDEX
DROPI[NDEX] database name [/maintword] FOR { ALL
setnamelist
setnumlist}
Syntax for REBUILDINDEX
REBUILDI[NDEX] database name [/maintword] FOR { ALL
setnamelist
setnumlist}
Parameters
setnamelist
is the list setname[,...]
setnumlist
is the list setnum[,...]
ALL
means all master data sets for the database.
Examples
>>ADDINDEX
ORDERS/secret for ALL
>>DROPINDEX ORDERS/secret for 1,7
>>REBUILDINDEX ORDERS/secret FOR SalesrepName,Region,District
Discussion
The ADDINDEX command adds the associated B-Tree index file and updates the root file.
The DROPINDEX command drops the associated B-Tree index file and updates the root file.
REBUILDINDEX rebuilds the index file for a master data set that has an index file.
The KSAM file has the Native Language Support language specified to match the
496
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
language of the database, if the key is an ASCII (X or U) data type.
When using the ALL option and there is no master data set, a warning is generated, but
the command is considered to be successful.
Other DBUTIL Commands
The following lists the impact of B-Tree indices on other DBUTIL commands:
• CREATE does an implicit ADDINDEX command for each data set marked by DBSCHEMA
as indexed.
• ERASE erases any associated B-Tree index (.idx) files, but will not delete them.
• MOVE does NOT allow a B-Tree index (.idx) file to be moved.
• PURGE purges any associated B-Tree index (.idx) files.
• SECURE and RELEASE apply to the associated B-Tree index (.idx) files.
• SET has a new option, BTREEMODE1.
• SHOW has a new option: INDEX, INDEXES, or INDICES.
New Syntax for SET
SET database name [/maintword] BTREEMODE1={ ON
OFF} [,[WILDCARD=]c]
where c is any printable ASCII character, and the default character is @.
The BTREEMODE1 option sets DBFIND mode 1 access ON or OFF for a B-Tree index
search for X and U types. The default is OFF, in which case DBFIND mode 1 with the
argument containing a wildcard character will continue to work the way it did in releases
prior to a release with the B-Tree index feature (C.07.00). When BTREEMODE1 is ON,
DBFIND mode 1 with the argument containing a wildcard character will be treated as a
B-Tree index search. Refer to the DBFIND section for more information on BTREEMODE1.
Examples
>>SET ORDERS/secret BTREEMODE1 = ON
>>SET ORDERS/secret BTREEMODE1 = ON,%
The DBUTIL SHOW ALL command shows if any B-Tree index files exist and the value of
BTREEMODE1. Example output:
>> show ORDERS all
For database ORDERS
...
Dynamic capacity expansion is not used.
Database has at least one indexed data set.
BTREEMODE1 is off, wildcard = "@"
Logid is not present.
...
Example if no B-Tree index files exist:
Chapter 11
497
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
>> show ORDERS all
For database ORDERS
...
Dynamic capacity expansion is not used.
BTREEMODE1 is off, wildcard = "@"
Logid is not present.
...
New Syntax for SHOW
SHOW has a new option INDEX, alternatively INDEXES or INDICES.
SHOW database name [/maintword] INDEX
>>SHOW ORDERS INDEX
For database ORDERS
Database root version < "C"4; there are no indexes.
>>addindex orders for all
Found 4 master datasets.
Adding index to set# 1 (#entries
Adding index to set# 2 (#entries
Adding index to set# 3 (#entries
Adding index to set# 4 (#entries
Done.
>>
= 162,730, capacity = 218,987)
= 84,164, capacity = 188,517)
= 18,784, capacity = 21,943)
=
783, capacity =
2583)
>>SHOW ORDERS INDICES
For database ORDERS
Data Set Name Type Indexed?
DATE-MASTER
CUSTOMER
PRODUCT
SUP-MASTER
A
M
M
M
YES
YES
YES
YES
4 indexed datasets
>>
DBCONTROL
DBCONTROL allows DBUTIL and privileged callers to perform several B-Tree index file
related functions such as the addition, deletion, or rebuilding of a B-Tree index file for a
specified master data set. Some functions require exclusive database access.
There are four additional DBCONTROL modes pertaining to B-Trees:
Mode 13
B-Tree index file functions.
Mode 14
obtain/control database-wide B-Tree index information.
Mode 15
sets BTREEMODE1 option ON and optionally sets the wildcard character
for the current DBOPEN.
Mode 16
sets BTREEMODE1 option OFF for the database for the current DBOPEN.
498
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
NOTE
General use of privileged mode can seriously damage your system, if not used
wisely.
Mode 13
Mode 13 is used to perform functions related to B-Tree index files. The caller must be
privileged. Exclusive database access is required for adding, dropping, and rebuilding
B-Tree index, that is functions 1, 2, and 3. Qualifier has a structured record containing
data set information and directives. This is the qualifier layout (an element is 16-bits):
Element
Contents
1
Function code:
0
mode 13 inquiry (returns "OK" in status indicating mode
13 is a valid mode for the TurboIMAGE/XL version on the
system. It also means that the B-Tree index feature is
available in the version of TurboIMAGE/XL. Ignores the
rest of the record).
1
add B-Tree index file.
2
drop B-Tree index file.
3
rebuild B-Tree index file.
4
attach XM to B-Tree index.
5
for internal use only.
6
release B-Tree index file (file system security)
7
secure B-Tree index file (file system security)
2
ignored when function code is 0 in element 1 data set number (1..199)
when function code is 1 through 7 in element 1
3-4
ignored on input, zeroed at entry to DBCONTROL mode 13, and used to
return a 32-bit status at exit if at least one of the internal B-Tree index file
routines was executed.
5
flags for internal use only: bit 15: 1 = report progress, if appropriate,
when function code is 1 through 7 in element 1
6-16
reserved; should be 0.
Mode 14
Mode 14 is used to set BTREEMODE1 option ON or OFF for the database and set the
wildcard character for the database. The changes will be made in the root file, unlike mode
15 and 16 of DBCONTROL. The caller must be privileged. The result is same as using the
SET command with BTREEMODE1 option of DBUTIL. This is the qualifier layout (16
halfwords):
Chapter 11
499
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
Element
Contents
1
Function code:
0
mode support inquiry (returns "OK" in status, and ignores
the rest of the record). That is, to validate if mode 14 is
supported in the TurboIMAGE software on the system.
1-6
reserved for internal use.
7
set wildcard (in root file, not DBU). Wildcard is in lower 8
bits of the second element of qualifier. An error is returned
if the value is less than ASCII 33, or greater than ASCII
126.
8
set BTREEMODE1 option ON (in root file, not DBU).
9
set BTREEMODE1 option OFF (in root file, not DBU).
2
ignored for function codes 0-6, 8, or 9. wildcard in lower 8 bits for function
code 7.
3-4
ignored on input, zeroed at entry to DBCONTROL mode 14, and used to
return a 32-bit status at exit ONLY IF the B-Tree index routines are
executed. (This is useful for debugging purposes only.)
5-16
reserved; should be 0.
Mode 15
Mode 15 sets BTREEMODE1 ON for the current database. It examines the first byte of the
qualifier. If it is null or blank, then the current wildcard character is not changed. If it is in
the ASCII range (33..126), then the wildcard character is changed to that value for the
current database open. If the qualifier byte is any other value, DBCONTROL returns an error.
Mode 15 affects just the current database open, not the root file. The caller need not be
privileged. The setting remains in effect until the database is closed or the application
terminates.
Mode 16
For mode 16, the qualifier is ignored, and BTREEMODE1 is set to OFF for the current
database open. Mode 16 affects just the current database open, not the root file. The caller
need not be privileged. The setting remains in effect until the database is closed or the
application terminates.
DBFIND
Prior to a release with the B-Tree index feature, DBFIND required the caller to specify
detail data set on the qualifier and a search item in the item parameter. It used that pair of
data to determine the master set to search for the exact value in the item parameter. The
B-Tree index feature extends DBFIND to allow a master data set as well as the key item in
that data set. Also, it allows for searches other than just equality. This is useful for
obtaining sorted access by key value to entries in a master data set as well as detail data
set.
500
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
Supported Modes of DBFIND
These are modes of DBFIND supported by the B-Tree index feature:
1
do a B-Tree DBFIND if all of the following are true:
• BTREEMODE1 is on.
• The item type is X or U.
• The item has a B-Tree index (explicit or implicit).
• The argument contains wildcard character.
Otherwise execute DBFIND as done without this feature.
For B-Tree DBFINDs, the argument is scanned for the first occurrence of the
wildcard character, and a trailing-@ search is done. Subsequent text in the
key value is ignored.
For B-Tree DBFINDs pertaining to detail data sets, the chain-count is
accurate, and status halfwords 7-8 and 9-10 give the record numbers of the
last entry in the last chain, and the first entry in the first chain of the
super-chain.
For B-Tree DBFINDs pertaining to master data sets, the status halfwords
5-6 (chain-count for detail) reflect the total number of entries qualified in
the master data set. All other fields of the status array return zeroes.
4
do a B-Tree index search, and give accurate chain counts and record
numbers in the status array. For masters, the status array returns the
same information as in B-Tree DBFIND mode 1. The argument is in
structured format described later.
10
do a non-B-Tree DBFIND mode 1 equivalent. This gives the same result as
if there were no B-Tree index.
21
is the same as mode 1, above, but the chain count and record numbers for
last entry and first entry are not accurate. (This is a high-speed version of
mode 1.) For detail data set, the halfwords 5-6, 7-8, and 9-10 have 231−1.
For master data set, the halfword 5-6 has 231−1 and 7-8 and 9-10 have
zeroes. Following this DBFIND, you may do DBGET mode 5 or 6.
24
is the same as mode 4, above, but the chain count and record numbers for
last entry and first entry are not accurate. (This is a high-speed version of
mode 4.) For detail data set, the halfwords 5-6, 7-8, and 9-10 will have
231−1. For master data set, the halfword 5-6 has 231−1 and 7-8 and 9-10
have zeroes. The argument is in structured format described later.
Chapter 11
501
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
TPI Modes of DBFIND Not Supported for B-Tree Indices
Third-Party Indexing (TPI) adds more DBFIND modes. The TPI modes 1 and 10 are similar
to B-Tree index modes 1 and 10.
NOTE
These are the known Third Party Indexing (TPI) modes of DBFIND which are
NOT supported for B-Tree searches:
11
do a B-Tree index DBFIND when the key is binary.
12
is a keyword search.
other
1nn, 2nn, 3nn, 4nn, and 5nn are other unsupported TPI DBFIND modes.
A B-Tree index search will never be done with a DBFIND mode 1 style argument if the key
item is binary (not X or U) (this affects DBFIND modes 1 and 21). For a B-Tree index search
on binary (non-ASCII) data, use modes 4 or 24 in conjunction with a structured argument.
A DBFIND mode 21 on a non-ASCII item returns an error.
All TurboIMAGE data types are allowed as keys for B-Tree searches.
DBFIND Modes
Following is a DBFIND mode summary table (see footnotes for explanations):
Table 11-1. DBFIND Mode Summary Chart
DBFIND\Mode
B-Tree index \search?
Accurate\Chain
counts?
Argument\style
1
MAYBEa
YESb or YESc
mode 1d
4
YES
YESc
mode 4e
10
NO
YESb
mode 1d
21
YESf
NOg
mode 1d
24
YES
NOg
mode 4e
a. If BTREEMODE1 is ON, a DBFIND mode 1 on an ASCII item with a B-Tree index (explicit or
implicit), and mode 1 style argument contains a wildcard character, it will be treated as a
B-Tree index search. If BTREEMODE1 is OFF, a DBFIND mode 1 in the above scenario will be
treated as a non-B-Tree index search (as if there were no B-Tree index feature). DBFIND
mode 1 on binary items (not X and U) will be treated as non-B-Tree search regardless of
the presence of a B-Tree index as well as the BTREEMODE1 option. To do B-Tree searches
on binary items, use modes 4 or 24 in conjunction with a structured argument.
b. The chain count is the number of entries in the single chain (non-B-Tree DBFIND). Record
number for the last entry and first entry is obtained from the chain head.
502
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
c. The chain count is the sum of all chain counts (that is, the number of entries in the
super-chain for a B-Tree DBFIND). Record number for the last entry is obtained from the
last entry in the last chain. For first entry, record number of the first entry in the first
chain is obtained. For masters, the chain count reflects the total number of master entries
qualified, and last entry and first entry values are zeroes.
d. When doing a B-Tree index search, mode-1-style argument is scanned to find the first
occurrence of the wildcard character in the argument text. If the wildcard is not found, a
non-B-Tree index search is done. If the wildcard is found, the rest of the argument text is
ignored. When not doing a B-Tree search (mode is 1 and BTREEMODE1 is OFF, or mode is
10), the entire argument, including any wildcard characters, will be treated as the actual
argument is for a DBFIND mode 1 in releases prior to the release with B-tree index
feature.
e. See "DBFIND Structured Argument" description later in this chapter.
f. For items that are text types (X, U), a B-Tree index search is done if the wildcard is
present in the argument. If the key item is a non-ASCII item, then a B-Tree index find is
not done, and a non-B-Tree index find (mode 1 with BTREEMODE1 is OFF) is done instead.
A programmer can do a B-Tree index find with non-ASCII items by explicitly using
DBFIND modes 4 or 24. (See "DBFIND mode 1-style and non-ASCII keys" below.) This mode
is similar to current TPI mode 21.
g. For detail data set, the halfwords 5-6, 7-8, and 9-10 have 231−1. For master data set, the
halfword 5-6 has 231−1 and 7-8 and 9-10 have zeroes.
NOTE
The length of the argument may not exceed the item length.
DBFIND Arguments
There are two distinct argument styles. The simple argument of the basic DBFIND mode 1
argument is generally interpreted as a sequence of bytes, perhaps containing a wildcard
character.
Another argument style, the structured argument, has been defined for DBFIND modes 4
and 24. This structure allows ranges of item values to be requested, and is explained
below.
DBFIND Structured Argument
The structure of the structured argument for DBFIND modes 4 and 24:
Bytes
Meaning
1-2
Type of generic search. An ASCII character pair is in this field:
Chapter 11
=
search for key values equal to argument1
<
search for key values less than argument1
<=
search for key values less than or equal to argument1
>
search for key values greater than argument1
>=
search for key values greater than or equal to argument1
[]
search for key values greater than or equal to argument1
AND less than or equal to argument2
503
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
@c
wildcard search. Scan argument for the first wildcard
character. (Call that character position n, 1-based). Search
for keys that match first n−1 characters of argument. If c
is non-blank and non-null, then it is the wildcard
character that will be used. Some examples are: @* and
@@. If c is a blank or null, then the current default
wildcard (stored in the root file) is used. The wildcard
character is changeable via the DBUTIL SET command or
DBCONTROL mode 15.
PK
Partial Key search. Search for key values that match n
characters in argument1 (n is length of argument1
provided in bytes 5-6). Argument1 need not contain a
wildcard. If it does within the n characters, it will be
included in the search. For example, if argument1 is
ABC@, bytes 5-6 have 4 for length, and the wildcard for
the database is @, DBFIND will return records containing
ABC@ as the first four characters in the key value.
3-4
version number. It must be numeric zero, or an error will be returned.
5-6
The size (in bytes) of argument1 (not including these two bytes) for search
types < , <=, = , >=, > , @c, PK.
7-8
The size (in bytes) of argument2 (not including these two bytes) for the
between search type [ ].
9... 9+n-1
Argument1. The n bytes of argument data (for example, for an X10 field, n
= 10).
9+n... 9+n+m-1 Argument2. For search-type [ ] only. The m bytes of the second argument's
data (for example, for an X10 field, m = 10, n must match m). Must be
numeric zero for other search types, or an error is returned.
If a wildcard character is present in the argument(s), the wildcard will be considered as
part of the value for these B-tree search types: = , < , <=, > , >=, [ ], and PK on ASCII types.
Pascal/iX Example
A Pascal/iX view of the above is:
type
dbfind_structured_arg_type
dbf_type
dbf_version
dbf_arg1_bytes
dbf_arg2_bytes
{NOTE:
{
{
{
$alignment 2$ record
pac2;
{e.g., "<="}
shortint;
{must be 0}
shortint;
shortint;
{0
{2
{4
{6
@
@
@
@
2}
2}
2}
2}
arg1 data is variable sized...2 to 256 bytes}
and, arg2 data might not even be present.
}
Still, the following serve to define a record}
that can hold the worst case arg1 & arg2... }
dbf_arg1_data
504
=
:
:
:
:
: packed array [1..256] of
char;
{8 @ x}
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
{*REAL* dbf_arg1_data is variable sized}
{*REAL* dbf_arg2_data is variable sized}
spare_area
: packed array [1..256] of
{8 @ x}
char;
{if present, arg2 data starts at record + 8 + arg1_bytes}
end;
{8 + 256 + 256}
Examples of Structured Argument
Three examples of using the structured argument type are given below.
Example 1
X4 field, looking for <= "JOHN", using SPL:
move arg' := ("<=", 0, 4, 0, "JOHN");
Example 2
X4 field, looking for keys >= JOHN, <= STAN, using Pascal:
type
structured_argument_type
search_type
version
arg1_bytes
arg2_bytes
arg1
arg2
end;
var
arg
=
:
:
:
:
:
:
crunched record
pac2;
{bytes
shortint;
{bytes
shortint;
{bytes
shortint;
{bytes
pac4;
pac4;
0,
2,
4,
6,
1}
3}
5}
7}
: structured_argument_type;
fast_fill (addr (arg), 0, sizeof (arg));
{optional}
arg.search_type := '[]';
{in-range search}
arg.arg1_bytes := sizeof (arg.arg1);
arg.arg1 := 'JOHN';
arg.arg2_bytes := sizeof (arg.arg2);
arg.arg2 := 'STAN';
mode4 := 4;
item := 'FIRSTNAME;';
dbfind (base, set, mode4, status, item, arg);
Example 3
X20 field, looking for keys that start with "SMITH", using C:
char
arg
arg [0] = '@';
arg [1] = '@';
Chapter 11
[29];
/* 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 20 + 1 trailing null */
/* want a wildcard search */
/* use an @ as a wildcard character */
505
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
arg
arg
arg
arg
arg
arg
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
=
=
=
=
=
=
(char)
(char)
(char)
(char)
(char)
(char)
0;
0;
0;
20;
0;
0;
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
upper half of version */
bottom half of version */
upper half of arg1 size field */
bottom half of arg1 size field */
upper half of arg2 size field */
bottom half of arg2 size field */
strcpy (arg [8], "SMITH@");
Example 4
I2 field, looking for keys >= 123 and <= 45698, using SPL:
double array
arg'd
(0 : 3);
integer array
arg'i
(*) = arg'd;
integer
mode4
:= 4;
byte array
arg'
(*) = arg'd;
! 4 byte prefix + three I2 fields
! find super-chain for SALARY in range [123..45698]...
arg'i
arg'i
arg'i
arg'i
arg'd
arg'd
:= "[]";
(1) := 0;
(2) := 4;
(3) := 4;
(2) := 123d;
(3) := 45698d;
!
!
!
!
!
!
range search
version
size of arg1 (in bytes)
size of arg2 (in bytes)
arg1
arg2
move item := "SALARY;";
dbfind (base, set, mode4, status, item, arg'i);
DBGET
DBGET has no changes to the calling sequence. It has the semantic change that chained
access modes can be used for both masters and details. For master data sets, DBGET mode 5
or 6 following a B-Tree DBFIND implies the next or previous qualified record of the master
data set. Also, DBGET mode 5 (forward chained read) and mode 6 (backward chained read)
may now traverse super-chains for a B-Tree index DBFIND on a detail data set.
NOTE
506
After a super-chain (B-Tree index DBFIND) read has started, a directed DBGET
(mode 4), may perturb the super-chain.
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
DBINFO
DBINFO has new modes 113 and 209.
Mode 113
DBINFO mode 113 reports the wildcard character in use for the database, and the value of
BTREEMODE1. The qualifier is ignored.
The output buffer for mode 113 must be at least 32 bytes in size and is shown below
(elements are 16-bits wide and are counted starting with 1):
Element
Contents
1
0 if BTREEMODE1 is off in the root file
1 if BTREEMODE1 is on in the root file
2
The first byte (8 bits) is always 0. The second byte (8 bits) represents c,
where c is the current wildcard character. For example, if the current
wildcard character is @, the element's hex value will be $0040, or decimal
64.
3
Highest B-Tree index argument version supported (currently 0)
4
Number of sets with B-Tree indices attached
5
0 if BTREEMODE1 is OFF for current DBOPEN
1 if BTREEMODE1 is ON for current DBOPEN
6
The first byte (8 bits) is always 0 for current DBOPEN. The second byte (8
bits) represents c, where c is the current wildcard character.
7-16
(reserved)
Mode 209
DBINFO mode 209 reports whether or not a data set has a B-Tree index attached. The
qualifier is a data set number or name. The output buffer is required to be 64 bytes (32
halfwords) or larger. The output buffer for mode 209 is shown below (elements are 16-bits
wide, and are counted starting with 1):
Element
Contents
1
0 if no B-Tree index exists 1 if B-Tree index exists
2
1 if attached B-Tree is not damaged or index does not exist
3-32
For internal use
Chapter 11
507
B-Tree Indices
External Commands and Utilities Affected
DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUPDATE
DBPUT and DBDELETE trigger similar operation to the associated B-Tree index file for all
adds or deletes to or from a master data set. DBUPDATE to a master is not allowed even
when critical item update is on.
Adding a record to the B-Tree index file is done with an FWRITE call. The KSAM files do not
have the DUP option, so KSAM will reject FWRITEs that attempt to add a duplicate key
value. The KSAM files are built with the REUSE option, which means that the space
occupied by deleted records will eventually be reused.
508
Chapter 11
B-Tree Indices
Limits
Limits
These are some limits on the use of B-Tree indices:
• Key limits
KSAM limits keys up to 255 bytes. TurboIMAGE/XL limits keys to 510 bytes (255
halfwords). TurboIMAGE items are always an even number of bytes in length, with 2
bytes for internal use. This means that the maximum TurboIMAGE key that can be
indexed is 252 bytes. Attempting to build an index for a master data set whose key is
greater than 252 bytes will not succeed, and will generate an error message.
• Maximum number of file opens
MPE/iX currently limits a single process to opening a maximum of 1023 files at a time.
For a database with 199 sets, 100 of which are master data sets with B-Tree indices, if
all sets are open at the same time, an additional 100 files will be open.
• Pattern matching
The only types of generic key pattern matching supported are:
=
search for item values equal to the specified value
<
search for item values less than specified value
<=
search for item values less than or equal to the specified value
>
search for item values greater than specified value
>=
search for item values greater than or equal to the specified value
[]
search for item values between and including two specified values.
@c
search for items with a common prefix.
PK
search for items with partial key.
The operator < > for "not equal to" and the range search ( ) are not supported.
Chapter 11
509
B-Tree Indices
Quick Start for Using B-Tree Indices
Quick Start for Using B-Tree Indices
If you are interested in generic trailing-@ searches only and want to get started quickly
without making any application changes, you may use the following steps.
1. Identify the masters with ASCII key item and can benefit from B-Tree indices.
2. Create B-Tree indices using either of these methods:
a. Use the INDEXED option of DBSCHEMA for new databases.
b. Use the ADDINDEX command of DBUTIL for existing databases.
3. Set the BTREEMODE1 option ON using DBUTIL as follows:
:Run DBUTIL.PUB.SYS
>SET database name [/maintword] BTREEMODE1=ON
If your database is new, you will need to add data. Then you are ready to perform B-Tree
index searches. You can include the wildcard character in your DBFIND argument and
observe the results.
510
Chapter 11
Error Messages
A Error Messages
TurboIMAGE/XL issues three different types of error messages:
• Schema Processor Error Messages
• Library Procedure Error Messages
• Utility Error Messages
Schema processor error messages result from errors detected during processing of the
database schema. The library procedure error messages are returned to the calling
program from the library procedures. The utility error messages are caused by errors in
execution of the database utility programs.
Appendix A
511
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
The Schema Processor accesses three files:
• The text file (DBSTEXT) containing the schema records and Schema Processor
commands for processing.
• The list file (DBSLIST) containing the schema listing, if requested, and error messages,
if any.
• The root file, if requested, created as a result of an error-free schema.
Any file error which occurs while accessing any of these files causes the Schema Processor
to terminate execution. A message indicating the nature of the error is sent to $STDLIST
(and to the list file, if the list file is different from $STDLIST).
Schema Processor command errors can occur. They neither cause termination nor do they
prohibit the creation of a root file. In some cases, however, the resultant root file will differ
from what might have occurred had the commands been error free. Command errors are
added to an error count which, if it exceeds a limit (see chapter 3), will cause the Schema
Processor to terminate execution.
Note that if the LIST option is active (see chapter 3), error messages for command errors
and syntax errors appear in the list file following the offending statement. If the NOLIST
option is active, only the offending statement, followed by the error message, is listed.
512
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
Schema Processor File Errors
Various file error messages are listed in this section. Each such message is preceded by the
character string:
****** FILE ERROR ******
Additionally, the Schema Processor prints a standard MPE file information display on the
$STDLIST file.
MESSAGE
FILE ALREADY EXISTS; UNABLE TO CLOSE file name
MEANING
FCLOSE error occurred on specified file. Can be caused by duplicate file in
group with same name as root file.
ACTION
Change database name or purge file of same name. Or, be sure correct file
and file name used. Check MPE FILE commands used. If other cause,
consult MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual for similar message.
MESSAGE
READ ERROR ON file name
MEANING
FREAD error occurred on the specified file.
ACTION
Check text file or MPE FILE command.
MESSAGE
UNABLE TO USE file name
MEANING
Specified file cannot be opened with FOPEN, or its characteristics make it
unsuitable for its intended use.
ACTION
Change database name, or purge file of same name. Or, be sure correct file
and file name used. Check MPE FILE commands used. If other cause,
consult MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual for similar message.
MESSAGE
UNABLE TO WRITE LABEL OF file name
MEANING
FWRITELABEL error occurred on specified file.
ACTION
Change database name or purge file of same name. Or, be sure correct file
and file name used. Check MPE FILE commands used. If other cause,
consult MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual for similar message.
MESSAGE
UNEXPECTED END-OF-FILE ON file name
MEANING
Call to FREAD or FWRITE on specified file has yielded unexpected end of file
condition.
ACTION
Change database name, or purge file of same name. Or, be sure correct file
and file name used. Check MPE FILE commands used. If other cause,
consult MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual for similar message.
Appendix A
513
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
WRITE ERROR ON file name
MEANING
FWRITE error occurred on the specified file.
ACTION
Change database name or purge file of same name. Or, be sure correct file
and file name used. Check MPE FILE commands used. If other cause,
consult MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual for similar message.
514
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
Schema Processor Command Errors
Various Schema Processor command error messages are listed in this section. Each such
message is preceded by the character string:
***** ERROR ******
MESSAGE
COMMAND CONTINUATION NOT FOUND
MEANING
If the schema processor command is continued to the next record, the last
non-blank character of the preceding line must be an ampersand (&) and
the continuation record must start with a dollar sign ($).
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
COUNT HAS BAD FORMAT
MEANING
The numbers in ERRORS, LINES, or BLOCKMAX parameters of the
$CONTROL command are not properly formatted integer values.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
ILLEGAL COMMAND
MEANING
The Schema Processor does not recognize the command. Valid commands
are $PAGE, $TITLE, and $CONTROL.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
IMPROPER COMMAND PARAMETER
MEANING
One of the commands in the parameter is not valid.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
MISSING QUOTATION MARK
MEANING
Character string specified in $PAGE or $TITLE command must be
bracketed by quotation marks (“).
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SPECIFIED TITLE TOO LONG
MEANING
Character string in $TITLE or $PAGE command exceeds 104 characters.
Appendix A
515
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
ACTION
516
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
Schema Syntax Errors
Database definition syntax errors can be detected by the Schema Processor. Their
existence does not cause termination but does prohibit root file creation. Discovery of one
can trigger others which disappear after the first is corrected. Also, detection of one can
preclude detection of others which appear after the first is corrected. Syntax errors are also
added to an error count which, if excessive, will cause Schema Processor termination.
Various syntax error messages are listed in this section. As with command errors, each
syntax error is preceded by the character string:
***** ERROR ******
MESSAGE
AUTOMATIC MASTER MUST HAVE SEARCH ITEM ONLY
MEANING
Automatic master data sets must contain entries with only one data item.
The data item must be a key item.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD BLOCKING FACTOR OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
A bad blocking factor or terminator was specified.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find any incorrect commands. Edit the text
file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD CAPACITY (MAX, INIT, INCREMENT) OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
One of the capacity parameters (maximum, initial, or increment) is
incorrect, or the terminator is not ";".
ACTION
Change the maximum, initial, or increment capacity parameter, and use
";" as the terminator. See "Set Part" in chapter 3 for correct values for the
parameters.
MESSAGE
BAD CHARACTER IN USER CLASS NUMBER
MEANING
User class number in password is not an integer from 1 to 63.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD DATABASE NAME OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
Database name in BEGIN DATABASE statement is not a valid database
name beginning with an alphabetic character and having up to 6
alphanumeric characters. Or, the name is not followed by a semicolon (;).
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
Appendix A
517
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
BAD DATA SET TYPE
MEANING
The data set type designator is not AUTOMATIC (or A), MANUAL (or M),
or DETAIL (or D).
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD DEVICE CLASS NAME
MEANING
The device class name specified contains an invalid character. The name
must be less than eight characters and begin with a letter.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD DEVICE CLASS NAME OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
The device class name specified contains an invalid character or was not
ended with a semicolon ";".
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD LANGUAGE
MEANING
Language name contains invalid characters, or the language number is
not a valid integer.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD PATH CONTROL PART DELIMITER
MEANING
Data item defined as sort item in detail data set is not properly delimited
with parentheses ().
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD PATH COUNT OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
The path count in the master data set definition is not an integer from 1 to
16 (for an automatic master), or 0 to 16 (for a manual master). This
message can also mean the path count is not followed by a quotation mark
(“).
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
518
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
BAD PATH SPECIFICATION DELIMITER
MEANING
Name of master data set following search item name in detail data set
definition is not followed by a right parenthesis ")" or by a sort item name
in parentheses.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD READ CLASS OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
Read user class number defined for either a data set or data item is not an
integer from 0 to 63, or it is not terminated by a comma (,) or slash (/).
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD SET NAME OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
The data set name does not conform to naming rules. (Names must start
with a letter and can have up to 16 alphanumeric characters including + −
∗ / ? ∋ # % & @.) Or the data set name is not terminated by the correct
character for the context in which it appears.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD SUBITEM COUNT OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
Subitem count for a data item defined in schema item part is not an
integer from 1 to 255.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD SUBITEM LENGTH OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
Subitem length for data item defined in schema item is not an integer from
1 to 255.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD TERMINATOR-';' EXPECTED
MEANING
Password or capacity was not followed by a semicolon.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
Appendix A
519
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
BAD TERMINATOR- ';' OR ',' EXPECTED
MEANING
Items within an entry definition must be separated from each other with
commas and terminated with a semicolon.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD TYPE DESIGNATOR
MEANING
Data item defined in schema item part is not defined as type I, J, K, R, U,
X, Z, or P.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BAD WRITE CLASS OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
Write user class number shown for the data set or data item is not an
integer from 0 to 63, or it is not terminated by a right parenthesis ")" or
comma.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
'BEGIN' EXPECTED
MEANING
Missing 'Begin' in the schema.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
BLANKS WILL BE REMOVED
MEANING
A blank ' ' character in a password has been suppressed before writing the
password to the root file.
ACTION
Edit and remove.
MESSAGE
'CAPACITY:' EXPECTED
MEANING
CAPACITY statement must follow entry definition in the definition of data
sets in the set part of schema.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
520
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
DATABASE HAS NO DATA SETS
MEANING
No data sets were defined in the set part of schema. The database must
contain at least one data set.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
DATABASE NAME TOO LONG
MEANING
Database name has more than six characters.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
DATA SET SIZE EXCEEDS MPE/XL FILE SIZE LIMITS
MEANING
The data set size, which is calculated using the media record length, the
capacity, and the blocking factor, exceeds the limitation of the MPE/iX file
size.
ACTION
Decrease the capacity of the data set. Edit the text file, and run the
Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
DUPLICATE ITEM NAME
MEANING
A duplicate item name is specified.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
DUPLICATE ITEM SPECIFIED
MEANING
The same data item name was used more than once in the entry definition
of data sets.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
DUPLICATE SET NAME
MEANING
The same data set name was used to define more than one data set in the
set part of schema.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
Appendix A
521
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
'ENTRY:' EXPECTED
MEANING
Each set defined in the set part of schema must contain ENTRY statement
followed by the data item names of the data items in entry.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
ENTRY LENGTH SHOULD BE LESS THAN 2048
MEANING
Entry length exceeds 2047 halfwords.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
ENTRY TOO BIG
MEANING
The number and size of the data items defined for an entry makes an entry
too big for maximum block size. The block size is specified by the
$CONTROL or BLOCKMAX= command, or by default.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
ENTRY TOO SMALL
MEANING
A detail data set that is not linked to any master data set must have a
data entry length of two or more halfwords. This length is determined by
adding the size in halfwords of each data item defined in the data entry.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN PASSWORD
MEANING
The password cannot contain a period, semicolon, slash, or carriage
return.
ACTION
Edit and remove.
MESSAGE
ILLEGAL ITEM NAME OR TERMINATOR
MEANING
The data item name does not conform to naming rules. (Names must start
with a letter and can have up to 16 alphanumeric characters including + −
? / # ∃ & * @ ). Or if in the item part, it is not followed by a comma.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
522
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
ILLEGAL USER CLASS NUMBER
MEANING
User class number defined in schema password part is not an integer
between 1 and 63.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
INCREMENT NUMBER TOO LARGE
MEANING
The increment number of entries, or the entries calculated from the
percent, exceeded maximum capacity minus initial capacity.
ACTION
Change the increment amount to a smaller number.
MESSAGE
INCREMENT PARAMETER IGNORED (INITCAP = MAXCAP)
MEANING
The increment parameter is not used, since initial capacity is equal to
maximum capacity and expansion is not on.
ACTION
Warning only; delete the increment parameter.
MESSAGE
INCREMENT PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED
MEANING
The increment capacity parameter can only be defined if the initial
capacity parameter is also defined.
ACTION
Either specify a number for initial capacity along with the increment, or do
not specify the increment parameter. Defining initial capacity and
increment option means allowing dynamic expansion for the data set.
MESSAGE
INITIAL CAPACITY = MAXIMUM CAPACITY, NO EXPANSION
MEANING
The initial capacity is equal to the maximum capacity, no dynamic
expansion for the data set.
ACTION
Warning only.
MESSAGE
INITIAL CAPACITY EXCEEDS MAXIMUM CAPACITY
MEANING
The initial capacity defined is greater than maximum capacity.
ACTION
Either change the maximum capacity or the initial capacity. Initial
capacity must be less than or equal to the maximum capacity.
MESSAGE
ITEM LENGTH NOT INTEGRAL WORDS
MEANING
Item length is not in an even number of bytes.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
Appendix A
523
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
ITEM TOO LONG
MEANING
The length of a single data item cannot exceed 2047 halfwords.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
'LANGUAGE:' EXPECTED
MEANING
The Schema Processor expected to find a LANGUAGE statement after the
comma following the BEGIN DATABASE name statement.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
LANGUAGE NOT SUPPORTED
MEANING
Language specified is not supported on your system, or is not a valid
language.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
MASTER DATA SET LACKS EXPECTED DETAIL(S)
MEANING
Master data set was defined with a non-zero data count, but the number of
detail search items which back-referenced the master is less than the
value of the path count.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
MASTER DATA SET LACKS KEY ITEM
MEANING
A master data set was defined without defining one of the data items in
the set as a key item.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
MAXIMUM CAPACITY EXCEEDS MPE/IX FILE SIZE LIMITS
MEANING
The maximum capacity defined exceeds MPE/iX file size limits (currently
MPE/iX file limit is 4 gigabytes).
ACTION
Change the maximum capacity to a smaller number.
524
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
MORE THAN ONE KEY ITEM
MEANING
A master data set cannot be defined with more than one key item.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
MORE THAN ONE PRIMARY MASTER
MEANING
User has defined more than one primary path for a detail data set.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
'NAME:' OR 'END.' EXPECTED
MEANING
Schema Processor expected, at this point, to find the beginning of another
data set definition, or the end of schema.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
NATIVE LANGUAGE SUPPORT ERROR
MEANING
NLS/3000 returned an error.
ACTION
Notify the system manager
MESSAGE
'PASSWORDS:' NOT FOUND
MEANING
PASSWORDS statement must immediately follow the BEGIN DATABASE
statement in schema. If it does not, DBSCHEMA terminates execution.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
PASSWORD TOO LONG
MEANING
A password defined in data schema cannot exceed eight characters.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
PHYSICAL RECORD (BLOCK) TOO LARGE
MEANING
Although the specified data entry is within the limit of 2048 halfwords, the
path pointers cause the physical record size to exceed 2048 halfwords.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the entry to a smaller
size, and run the Schema Processor again.
Appendix A
525
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
REFERENCED SET NOT MASTER
MEANING
The data set referenced by the detail data set search item is another detail
data set instead of a master data set.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SCHEMA PROCESSOR LACKS NEEDED TABLE SPACE
MEANING
Schema Processor is unable to expand its data stack to accommodate all of
the translated information which will make up the root file. It continues to
scan the schema for the proper form, but will not perform all of the checks
for correctness nor will it create a root file. To process the schema correctly,
the operating system must be configured with a larger maximum stack
size.
ACTION
Ask system manager to increase maximum stack size.
MESSAGE
SEARCH OR KEY ITEM NOT SIMPLE
MEANING
All data items defined in data schema as master data set key or detail data
set search items must be simple items.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SEARCH AND KEY ITEMS NOT OF SAME LENGTH
MEANING
Master key item must be the same length as any related detail data set
search item.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SEARCH AND KEY ITEMS NOT OF SAME TYPE
MEANING
Master key item must be of the same type as any related detail data set
search item.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SET HAS NO PATHS AVAILABLE
MEANING
More detail data set search items have specified a relationship with a
master data set than the number specified in the master set's path count.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
526
Appendix A
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
SORT ITEM OF BAD TYPE
MEANING
Data item defined as sort item must be of type U, K, or X.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SORT ITEM NOT IN DATA SET
MEANING
Detail data set's entry definition does not include an item which is
specified as a sort item for another item in the entry.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
SORT ITEM SAME AS SEARCH ITEM
MEANING
The same item cannot be both a search and a sort item for the same path.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
TOO MANY DATA ITEMS
MEANING
The item part of schema cannot have more than 1023 data item names.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
TOO MANY DATA SETS
MEANING
The database cannot have more than 199 data sets.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
TOO MANY ERRORS
MEANING
The specified or default number of errors has been exceeded. Processing is
terminated.
ACTION
Correct the errors, or increase the ERROR parameter value.
MESSAGE
TOO MANY ITEMS SPECIFIED
MEANING
The data set entry cannot have more than 255 data items.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
Appendix A
527
Error Messages
Schema Processor Error Messages
MESSAGE
TOO MANY PATHS IN DATA SET
MEANING
Detail data set entries cannot have more than 16 search items.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file to find the error. Edit the text file, and run
the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
UNDEFINED ITEM REFERENCED
MEANING
A data item appearing in the data set definition was not previously defined
in the item part of schema.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file and find the incorrect statement. Edit the
text file, and run the Schema Processor again.
MESSAGE
UNDEFINED SET REFERENCED
MEANING
Master data set referenced by detail search item was not previously
defined in the set part of schema.
ACTION
Examine the schema text file and find the incorrect statement. Edit the
text file, and run the Schema Processor again.
528
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
The success of each call to a TurboIMAGE/XL library procedure is reflected upon return to
the user by the condition code and the value of the return status in the first element of the
status area.
If the procedure fails to execute properly, the condition code is set to CCL (Condition Code
Less) and the return status is a negative integer. In this section, "Library Procedure File
System and Memory Management" describes the negative integers resulting from file
system and memory management failures, while "Library Procedure Calling Errors"
describes the negative integers resulting from calling errors and communications errors
respectively.
If the procedure operates properly but encounters an exceptional condition, such as
end-of-file, the condition code is set to CCG (Condition Code Greater) and the return status
is a positive integer. "Library Procedure Exceptional Conditions" describes the positive
integers resulting from exceptional conditions. If the procedure operates properly and
normally, the condition code is set to CCE (Condition Code Equal) and the return status is
zero.
In addition to the return status, all TurboIMAGE/XL library procedures put information
about the procedure call into the fifth through tenth elements of the status area. This
information can be useful in debugging your programs, because it describes the conditions
under which the particular results were obtained. This information is used by DBEXPLAIN
and DBERROR when they are interpreting the results of TurboIMAGE/XL calls.
In a few cases this information is not returned by the TurboIMAGE/XL procedure because
it uses the same locations in the status area for returning other data. Specifically,
successful execution of DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE, DBPUT, or DBDELETE puts other
information here as described in chapter 5 of this manual. For all other returns from a
library procedure, the specified elements of the status area have the following contents:
Table A-1. Status Area Changes for MPE/iX Native Applications
Element
TurboIMAGE/V and Compatibility Mode
TurboIMAGE/XL
5
PB-relative address of the caller.
0
6
Bits 6–15: Intrinsic number of called library
procedure. Bits 0–3: Zero or access mode in
which database is opened.
No change.
7
16-bit address of the database.
First 16 bits of the database
address.
8
16-bit address of the data set name or
qualifier.
Second 16 bits of database
address.
9
Value of the mode parameter.
No change.
10
PB-relative address of the library procedure
or the Compatibility Mode switch stub.
0
Appendix A
529
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
Abort Conditions
In general, four types of error conditions can cause TurboIMAGE/XL to abort the calling
process:
1. A call from a Compatibility Mode user process with the hardware DB register not
pointing to the process stack.
2. A structurally damaged database.
3. An internal error in an MPE file intrinsic which the calling procedure cannot correct.
4. An internal inconsistency in the database or the DBG, DBB, or DBU discovered by a
library procedure.
In case 1, the procedure prints the standard MPE run-time abort message. In cases 2, 3,
and 4, TurboIMAGE/XL prints additional information on the standard list device about
the error prior to printing the standard MPE abort message. The first line of this
information is:
ABORT: procedure name ON DATABASE name;
where procedure name is the name of the library procedure which caused the abort and
name is the name of the database being accessed at the time of the abort. "Library
Procedure Abort Condition Messages" describes additional lines of information which
could appear prior to the standard MPE abort message.
Some of the abort conditions are due to an error in one of the MPE file intrinsics FOPEN,
FREADLABEL, FREADDIR, FWRITELABEL, FWRITEDIR, or FCLOSE. Aborts of this type
generally occur after the procedure has possibly altered the database so that the database
structure has been damaged in some way. Each of the messages in the section entitled
"Library Procedure Abort Condition Messages," which refer to a TurboIMAGE/XL data
file, are followed by an MPE file information display listing all of the characteristics of the
MPE data set or root file where the error occurred, along with an MPE error number.
I and J Files
When TurboIMAGE/XL detects an internal inconsistency or other abnormal situation and
the database is enabled for dumping, it can create special "I" and "J" files before it
terminates. The "I" file consists of the user's stack and procedure call trace markers; the
"J" file consists of the TurboIMAGE/XL database control blocks. TurboIMAGE/XL only
creates these "I" and "J" files if a database user has run DBUTIL and specified ENABLE
database name FOR DUMPING. So, if you want "I" and "J" files, you must specifically
request them through this DBUTIL command. Note that "I" and "J" files are useful for
debugging only if the database is known to be structurally sound.
530
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
Library Procedure File System and Memory Management
For return status values −1 through −6, the second element of the calling program's status
area is the data set number for which file error occurred (zero indicates root file). The third
element is the MPE failure code returned by the FCHECK intrinsic. Refer to MPE
documentation for meaning of this code.
-1
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FOPEN on root
file or data set nn
MEANING
For DBOPEN, error can indicate that database could not be
opened. Possible reasons:
• Database name string not terminated with semicolon
or blank.
• Database does not exist or is secured against access by
its group or account security.
• Database is already opened exclusively or in mode
incompatible with requested mode.
• MPE file system error occurred.
• MPE file system limit has been reached.
For DBOPEN, DBINFO, DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE,
DBPUT, and DBDELETE, error can occur if:
• The process has too many files open external to the
database.
• Data set does not exist or is secured against access.
• Some other MPE file system error has occurred.
-2
Appendix A
ACTION
Determine which of probable causes applies and either
modify application program or see system manager about
file system error.
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FCLOSE on root
file or data set nn
MEANING
This is an exceptional error (should never happen) and is
returned only by DBOPEN or DBCLOSE. Indicates a
hardware or system software failure.
ACTION
Notify system manager of error.
531
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
532
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FREADDIR on
root file or data set nn
MEANING
This is an exceptional error (as −2 above) and is returned
by DBOPEN, DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE, DBPUT,
DBDELETE.
ACTION
Notify system manager of error.
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FREADLABEL on
root file or data set nn
MEANING
This is an exceptional error (as −2 above) and is returned
by DBOPEN, DBINFO, DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE,
DBPUT, DBDELETE, and DBUNLOCK.
ACTION
Notify system manager of error.
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FWRITEDIR on
root file or data set nn
MEANING
This exceptional condition could be returned when DBPUT,
DBDELETE, DBUPDATE, or DBCLOSE calls FWRITEDIR.
ACTION
Notify system manager of error.
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FWRITELABEL on
root file or data set nn
MEANING
This exceptional condition could be returned when DBPUT,
DBDELETE, DBUNLOCK, or DBCLOSE calls FWRITELABEL.
ACTION
Notify system manager of error.
MESSAGE
Previous MPE file error nn found in desired
buffer
MEANING
This exceptional condition could be returned due to
corrupted buffer for multi-user environment from DBPUT,
DBUPDATE, or DBOPEN.
ACTION
Notify your system manager of
MESSAGE
MPE file error nn returned by FUNLOCK on root
file
MEANING
This exceptional condition could be returned when DBOPEN
calls FUNLOCK on a remote database-access file.
ACTION
Notify system manager of error.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-9
-10
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Cannot create control block name: MPE file
error %nn
MEANING
This is an exceptional error returned when DBOPEN fails to
call HPFOPEN to create a control block.
ACTION
Notify system manager or HP support personnel.
MESSAGE
MPE file error %nn returned by FFILEINFO on
root file or data set nn
MEANING
This is an exceptional error returned when DBOPEN fails to
call FFILEINFO on the root file.
ACTION
Notify system manager or HP support personnel.
533
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
Library Procedure Calling Errors
-11
-12
-12
-13
-14
534
MESSAGE
Bad base reference
MEANING
For DBOPEN, the first two characters in base are not blank,
or database name contains special characters other than
period. For all other procedures, either first two characters
in base do not contain the value assigned by DBOPEN or the
parameters passed to the procedure are incorrect in type,
sequence, or quantity.
ACTION
Check application program's procedure call. Correct error
in call.
MESSAGE
intrinsic name called without covering lock
in effect (See below for additional status code −12
message.)
MEANING
For DBUPDATE, DBPUT, and DBDELETE, database has
been opened in DBOPEN mode 1 but there is no lock to
cover entry. DBPUT or DBDELETE to master requires data
set or database be locked. In all other cases, entry, set, or
database can be locked.
ACTION
Modify program to apply proper lock or change mode.
MESSAGE
Database must be in logon group and account
(See above for additional status code −12 message.)
MEANING
For DBOPEN, when the database has been opened in access
mode -2, the database must be in the user’s logon group
and account.
ACTION
Retry call to DBOPEN from group and account containing
database.
MESSAGE
Not allowed; must be creator of root file or
database
MEANING
DBOPEN failed because the caller is not the creator of the
database and no maintenance word is specified.
ACTION
Supply the correct maintenance word and retry call to
DBOPEN.
MESSAGE
Illegal intrinsic in current access mode
MEANING
DBPUT and DBDELETE cannot be used with DBOPEN mode
2, 5, 6, 7, or 8. DBUPDATE cannot be used with DBOPEN
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
mode 5, 6, 7, or 8.
-15
-21
-21
ACTION
Modify program or notify current user that operation
cannot be performed.
MESSAGE
Setup for RDBA failed
MEANING
DBOPEN will issue a DSLINE command and a REMOTE
HELLO on behalf of the user if a DBA file is being used for
RDBA. One of these commands failed.
ACTION
Check your DBA file to make sure the DSLINE and REMOTE
HELLO commands are correct.
MESSAGE
Bad password (See below for additional status code −21
messages.)
MEANING
For DBOPEN, user class granted does not permit access to
any data in database. This is usually due to an incorrect or
null password or maintenance word.
ACTION
Supply correct password and/or maintenance word.
MESSAGE
Bad data set reference (See above or below for
additional status code −21 messages.)
MEANING
For DBINFO (modes 104, 201, 202, 301, and 302),
DBCLOSE, DBFIND, DBGET, DBUPDATE, DBPUT,
DBDELETE, when data set reference is:
• Numeric but out of range of the number of data sets in
database
• An erroneous data set name
• A reference to data set which is inaccessible to user
class established when database opened
For DBFIND, this error is also returned if referenced data
set is a master. Erroneous data set name can arise when a
terminating semicolon or blank is omitted.
ACTION
Appendix A
Check application program's procedure call. Correct error
in call.
535
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-21
MESSAGE
Bad data item reference (See above for additional
status code −21 messages.)
MEANING
For DBINFO (modes 101, 102, and 204), data item
reference is:
• Numeric but out of range of the number of data items
in database
• An erroneous data item name
• A reference to data item which is inaccessible to user
class established when database opened.
An erroneous data item name can arise when a
terminating semicolon or blank is omitted.
-22
-23
-24
-30
536
ACTION
Check application program's procedure call. Correct error
in call.
MESSAGE
Maintenance word required
MEANING
For DBOPEN, maintenance word is required for noncreator to access the database.
ACTION
Supply the correct maintenance word.
MESSAGE
Data set not writable
MEANING
For DBPUT and DBDELETE, database has been opened in
DBOPEN mode 1, 3, or 4 and user has read but not write
access to the referenced data set.
ACTION
Modify access mode set in procedure call or notify current
user operation cannot be performed.
MESSAGE
Operation not allowed on automatic master
data set
MEANING
For DBPUT and DBDELETE, the referenced data set is an
automatic master.
ACTION
Modify data set name in call or in data set type in schema.
MESSAGE
ILR enabled and bad access
MEANING
The database has been ported from MPE V with ILR
enabled. The only allowable access to the database is
DBOPEN, mode 1–8, or DBUTIL to disable ILR.
ACTION
Open the database with mode 1–8 or disable ILR.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-31
-32
MESSAGE
Bad mode
MEANING
This error occurs in all procedures when the mode
parameter is invalid. For DBGET, mode is 7 or 8 and
referenced data set is a detail, or mode is 5 or 6 and
referenced data set is a detail without search items.
ACTION
Correct mode in procedure call.
MESSAGE
Unobtainable access mode; AOPTIONS requested:
n, granted: m
MEANING
For DBOPEN, root file cannot be opened with FOPEN using
the access options (AOPTIONS) requested for the specified
access mode. The second element of the calling program's
status area contains the requested AOPTIONS, and the
third element contains the AOPTIONS granted to DBOPEN
by the MPE file system.
This error usually occurs either due to concurrent
database access by other users or due to MPE account or
group security provisions.
ACTION
See the MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual for meaning
of AOPTIONS values.
Action depends on program's design. Normally notify user
that requested access mode is not available.
-33
-34
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Mode 7 diagnostics not allowed
MEANING
For DBGET, mode 7 is not appropriate for diagnostics.
ACTION
Use a different mode for DBGET when diagnostic item list
is in effect.
MESSAGE
Database must be recovered before access is
allowed.
MEANING
The system failed while the MUSTRECOVER option was
enabled. The MUSTRECOVER option prevents write access
to the database until it is recovered with DBRECOV.
ACTION
Recover the database with DBRECOV.
537
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-51
MESSAGE
Bad list length
MEANING
For DBGET, DBUPDATE, and DBPUT, the list is too long.
This can occur if list is not terminated with a semicolon or
blank. It can also occur for otherwise legitimate lists
which are too long for TurboIMAGE/XL's work area.
It will never occur for numeric lists.
-52
ACTION
Shorten list array contents. If necessary, change to
numeric list.
MESSAGE
Bad list or bad item
MEANING
For DBGET, DBUPDATE, or DBPUT, the list parameter is
invalid. list either has a bad format or contains a data
item reference which meets one of the following
conditions:
• It is out of range of the number of data items in the
database.
• It refers to an inaccessible data item.
• It duplicates another reference in the list.
For DBFIND, the item parameter contains a data item
reference which meets one of the following conditions:
• It is out of range of the number of data items in the
database.
• It is not a search item for the referenced data set.
-53
-60
538
ACTION
Check procedure call. Correct error in call or parameter.
MESSAGE
Missing search or sort item
MEANING
For DBPUT, a search or sort item of the referenced data set
is not included in list parameter.
ACTION
Check procedure call. Correct error in call or parameter.
MESSAGE
Illegal file equation on root file
MEANING
When using an MPE FILE command with the database
name or a database-access file name, only the file
designators and DEV= parameters are allowed.
ACTION
Reenter the MPE FILE command without illegal
parameters.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-61
-80
-81
-82
-88
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Error while obtaining information about file
equation.
MEANING
HPSWITCHTOCM procedure failed while trying to evaluate
the file equation used for DBOPEN.
ACTION
Correct the file equation. If that does not resolve the error,
notify your system manager.
MESSAGE
Output Deferred not allowed with ILR enabled
MEANING
DBCONTROL (mode 1) was used to request deferred output,
but deferred output cannot be used when ILR is enabled.
Deferred output is not initiated.
ACTION
Do not use deferred output; or run DBUTIL and disable
ILR.
MESSAGE
Output Deferred not allowed with ROLLBACK
enabled
MEANING
DBCONTROL (mode 1) was used to request deferred output,
but deferred output cannot be used when ROLLBACK is
enabled. Deferred output is not initiated.
ACTION
Do not use deferred output; or run DBUTIL and disable
ROLLBACK.
MESSAGE
CIUPDATE is set to DISALLOWED; cannot use
critical item update
MEANING
A process issued a call to DBCONTROL in mode 5 to use the
critical item update option, but CIUPDATE is set to
DISALLOWED for this database.
ACTION
Do not use CIUPDATE. Or request that your database
administrator set CIUPDATE to ALLOWED for this database.
MESSAGE
Database bad: Third party indexing was in
process (index again).
MEANING
Third party indexing is in progress or was in process but
failed.
ACTION
Notify database administrator. Re-index if failed.
539
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-89
-90
-91
-92
-93
540
MESSAGE
Database bad: Restructuring was in process
(restore database).
MEANING
DBChangePlus is restructuring the database or was
restructuring the database but failed in the middle.
ACTION
Notify database administrator. Restore the database and
redo restructuring if failed.
MESSAGE
Root file bad: unrecognized state: %octal
integer
MEANING
For DBOPEN, this error is returned if the root file is in an
unrecognized state. The octal integer represents an ASCII
error code.
ACTION
Restore old copy of the database.
MESSAGE
Bad root modification level
MEANING
For DBOPEN, the software version of the DBOPEN procedure
is incompatible with version of Schema Processor which
created root file.
ACTION
Check with system manager that you have correct
TurboIMAGE/XL software. If necessary ask HP support
personnel about conversion.
MESSAGE
Database not created
MEANING
For DBOPEN, the referenced database has not yet been
created and initialized by the DBUTIL CREATE command.
ACTION
Run DBUTIL to create database. Try application program
again.
MESSAGE
DATABASE ALREADY EXISTS.
MEANING
Database already exists when attempted to create a new
one.
ACTION
Change the database name in the schema. If you want to
create in the same name, purge the existing one and then
recreate.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-94
-95
-96
-97
-98
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Database bad - Output deferred; may not be
accessed in mode nn
MEANING
For DBOPEN, referenced database was damaged while
being modified in deferred output.
ACTION
Either DBLOAD from backup tape; or DBUNLOAD to ERASE
data and then DBLOAD.
MESSAGE
Database bad - Creation was in process
(create again)
MEANING
For DBOPEN, database was damaged by a file system
failure, system failure, or TurboIMAGE/XL abort while
DBUTIL CREATE command was creating the database.
ACTION
Because database was not created, run DBUTIL CREATE
command to create the database.
MESSAGE
Database bad - Erase was in process (erase
again)
MEANING
For DBOPEN, database was damaged by a file system
failure, system failure, or TurboIMAGE/XL abort while
DBUTIL ERASE command was erasing the database.
ACTION
Because data was not erased, run DBUTIL ERASE
command to erase the data from the database.
MESSAGE
Database bad - ILR enable in process (enable
again)
MEANING
DBOPEN attempted to open a database but prior disable of
ILR was not complete.
ACTION
Run DBUTIL with ENABLE command to enable ILR.
MESSAGE
Database bad - ILR disable in process
(disable again)
MEANING
DBOPEN attempted to open a database, but prior disable of
ILR was not complete.
ACTION
Run DBUTIL with DISABLE command to disable ILR.
541
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-99
MESSAGE
UNSUPPORTED FEATURE.
MEANING
A feature unavailable in TurboIMAGE is attempted.
ACTION
Change the application to not use the feature that has not
been implemented.
Return statuses −100 through −107 are communication errors. For −100 through −102, the
third element of the calling program's status area is the MPE failure code returned by
DSCHECK intrinsics.
-100
-101
-102
-103
542
MESSAGE
DSOPEN failure
MEANING
While executing a DBOPEN, TurboIMAGE/XL has
encountered a hardware failure trying to obtain a
communications line.
ACTION
Try opening the database again. If error persists, contact
your HP customer engineer.
MESSAGE
DSCLOSE failure
MEANING
This is an exceptional error returned by DBOPEN or
DBCLOSE. It indicates a hardware or system software
failure.
ACTION
Notify system manager of problem.
MESSAGE
DSWRITE failure
MEANING
A line failure has occurred while attempting an operation
on a remote database. Can be returned by DBOPEN,
DBFIND, DBGET, DBPUT, DBUPDATE, DBDELETE,
DBLOCK, DBUNLOCK, DBINFO, or DBCLOSE.
ACTION
Try calling the procedure again. If error persists, notify
system manager.
MESSAGE
Remote 3000 stack too small
MEANING
Command Interpreter on remote HP 3000 cannot obtain
stack space necessary to execute a DBOPEN or DBLOCK.
ACTION
Ask system manager of remote system to increase
available stack size.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-104
-105
-106
-107
-108
-109
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Remote 3000 does not support TurboIMAGE/XL
MEANING
This is an exceptional error and is returned by DBOPEN on
the remote system.
ACTION
Notify system manager of problem.
MESSAGE
Remote 3000 cannot create TurboIMAGE control
block.
MEANING
This is an exceptional error and is returned by DBOPEN on
the remote system.
ACTION
Notify system manager of problem.
MESSAGE
Remote 3000 data inconsistent
MEANING
This is an exceptional error returned by same intrinsics as
−102 (see message listed earlier in this appendix). It
indicates a hardware or system software failure.
ACTION
Notify system manager of problem.
MESSAGE
NS 3000 or DS 3000 system error.
MEANING
This is an exceptional error returned by same intrinsics as
−102 (see above). It indicates a hardware or system
software failure.
ACTION
Notify system manager of problem.
MESSAGE
HPUNLOADCMPROCEDURE call failed.
MEANING
This is an internal error encountered during switching to
Compatibility Mode.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
MESSAGE
ERROR RETURNED BY LOGINFO INTRINSIC.
MEANING
LOGINFO intrinsic does not support the feature used by
DBOPEN. It is available in MPE/iX 5.5 and later releases.
ACTION
The version of TurboIMAGE/XL can only be used on
MPE/iX 5.5 or later. Notify your system administrator.
543
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-110
-111
-112
-113
-114
-120
544
MESSAGE
MPE OPENLOG intrinsic failure
MEANING
OPENLOG returned error number nn to DBOPEN. This error
can occur following a call to DBOPEN when a database is
enabled for logging. Refer to MPE/iX Intrinsics Manual
for listing of second values of status array and error
messages.
ACTION
Notify system manager or HP support personnel.
MESSAGE
MPE WRITELOG intrinsic failure
MEANING
When a database is enabled for logging, this error can be
returned by DBOPEN, DBCLOSE, DBPUT, DBUPDATE,
DBDELETE, DBMEMO, DBBEGIN, DBEND, DBXBEGIN,
DBXEND, DBXUNDO.
ACTION
Notify database administrator.
MESSAGE
MPE CLOSELOG intrinsic failure
MEANING
When a database is enabled for logging, this error can be
returned by DBCLOSE. Or CLOSELOG returned error
number nn to DBCLOSE.
ACTION
Consult MPE error message documentation. Or notify
database administrator.
MESSAGE
FLUSHLOG returned error number nn to DBEND
MEANING
User called DBEND in mode 2 to write the logging buffer to
disk, but the MPE logging facility returned an error.
ACTION
Consult MPE error message documentation.
MESSAGE
ROLLBACK without logging
MEANING
DBOPEN has detected that ROLLBACK is enabled but
logging is not.
ACTION
Notify your database administrator or HP support
personnel.
MESSAGE
OUT OF STACK SPACE FOR A LOCK.
MEANING
Available space is not sufficient to process a DBLOCK.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-121
-123
-124
-125
-126
-127
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Descriptor count error
MEANING
DBLOCK detected an error in the descriptor count (first
element of qualifier array) in locking mode 5 or 6.
ACTION
Count must be a positive integer.
MESSAGE
Illegal relop in a descriptor
MEANING
DBLOCK encountered a relop field containing characters
other than >=, <=, = or =.
ACTION
Check contents of qualifier array.
MESSAGE
Descriptor too short. Must be greater than or
equal to 9
MEANING
DBLOCK encountered a lock descriptor less than 9
halfwords long.
ACTION
Check contents of qualifier array.
MESSAGE
Bad set name/number
MEANING
DBLOCK qualifier array contains an invalid data set name
or number. (Refer to error -21 for rules.)
ACTION
Check contents of qualifier array. Be sure names are
delimited by semicolon or space if less than 16 bytes long.
MESSAGE
Bad item name/number
MEANING
DBLOCK qualifier array contains an invalid data item
name or number. (Refer to error -21 for rules.)
ACTION
Check contents of qualifier array. Be sure names are
delimited by semicolon or space if less than 16 bytes long.
MESSAGE
Attempt to lock using a compound item
MEANING
DBLOCK does not allow compound items in lock descriptors.
ACTION
Modify locking strategy to lock on a non-compound item.
545
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-128
-129
-130
-131
-132
-133
546
MESSAGE
Value field too short in a descriptor
MEANING
A value field in a DBLOCK lock descriptor must be at least
as long as the data item for which it is specified.
ACTION
Check the length of the value field.
MESSAGE
P-type item longer than P28 specified
MEANING
DBLOCK does not allow P-type data items longer than 28 in
lock descriptors (27 digits plus sign).
ACTION
Modify locking strategy to lock on a different item.
MESSAGE
Illegal digit in a P-type value
MEANING
DBLOCK has encountered a P-type value in a lock
descriptor with an invalid packed decimal digit.
ACTION
Check qualifier array contents to determine why data is
invalid.
MESSAGE
Lowercase character in type-U value
MEANING
DBLOCK has encountered a lowercase character in a type-U
value specified in a lock descriptor.
ACTION
Check qualifier array contents to determine why data is
invalid.
MESSAGE
Illegal digit in type Z value
MEANING
Lock descriptor value specified to DBLOCK contains an
invalid zoned decimal digit.
ACTION
Check qualifier array contents to determine why data is
invalid.
MESSAGE
Illegal sign in type Z value
MEANING
Lock descriptor value specified to DBLOCK contains an
invalid zoned decimal sign.
ACTION
Check qualifier array contents to determine why data is
invalid.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-134
-135
-136
-137
-139
-140
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Two descriptors conflict
MEANING
DBLOCK has detected two lock descriptors in the same call
that lock the same or part of the same database entity.
(For example, lock on set and database in same request.)
ACTION
Check qualifier array contents for conflicting lock
descriptors.
MESSAGE
Second lock without CAP=MR
MEANING
A second call to DBLOCK has been made without an
intervening DBUNLOCK call and program does not have MR
capability.
ACTION
Read discussion of multiple calls to DBLOCK in chapter 4 of
this manual if you plan to use CAP=MR.
MESSAGE
Descriptor list exceeds 4094 bytes
MEANING
DBLOCK allows a maximum length of 4094 bytes for lock
descriptor lists (qualifier array).
ACTION
Change qualifier array contents so lock descriptor list is
shorter.
MESSAGE
USER ABOUT TO WAIT FOR SELF.
MEANING
There is a potential for an imminent deadlock situation.
ACTION
Examine the locking scheme in your application; may need
to call DBUNLOCK and then DBLOCK.
MESSAGE
Invalid number of base IDs.
MEANING
The number of base IDs involved in the multiple database
transaction is greater than 15.
ACTION
Modify your application program so that not more than 15
databases are involved in a multiple database transaction.
MESSAGE
Bad base ID list.
MEANING
The base IDs are not correctly formatted for a multiple
database transaction.
ACTION
Modify your application program so that the base ID list is
correctly formatted. Refer to the discussion of DBBEGIN in
chapter 5 for more information.
547
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-141
-142
-143
-144
-145
548
MESSAGE
All MDBX databases must be on same system.
MEANING
An attempt was made to begin a multiple database
transaction (MDBX) on remote databases when all
databases were not located on the same system (node).
ACTION
Modify your application program to only perform multiple
database transactions on databases which are located on
the same system.
MESSAGE
All MDBX databases must log to the same log
file.
MEANING
All databases involved in a multiple database transaction
(MDBX) must have synchronized logging facilities.
ACTION
Ask your database administrator or application
programmer to synchronize the logging facilities.
MESSAGE
Logging must be enabled or disabled for all
MDBX databases.
MEANING
All databases involved in a multiple database transaction
(MDBX) must have synchronized logging facilities.
ACTION
Ask your database administrator or application
programmer to synchronize the logging facilities.
MESSAGE
MUSTRECOVER must be enabled or disabled for
all MDBX databases.' ' \MEANING\All databases
involved in a multiple database transaction (MDBX) must
have synchronized logging facilities.
ACTION
Ask your database administrator or application
programmer to synchronize the logging facilities.
MESSAGE
Roll-back recovery must be enabled or
disabled for all MDBX databases.
MEANING
All databases involved in a multiple database transaction
(MDBX) must have synchronized logging facilities.
ACTION
Ask your database administrator or application
programmer to synchronize the logging facilities.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-146
-147
-148
-151
-152
-153
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Invalid transaction ID.
MEANING
The transaction ID used in a call to DBBEGIN and in the
call to its corresponding DBEND do not match.
ACTION
Contact your database administrator or application
programmer.
MESSAGE
Mode doesn't match DBBEGIN mode.
MEANING
The DBBEGIN mode and its corresponding DBEND mode
must match.
ACTION
Contact your database administrator or application
programmer.
MESSAGE
Base ID list doesn't match DBBEGIN base ID
list.
MEANING
The base ID list passed to DBBEGIN for a multiple
database transaction does not match the DBEND base ID
list for the same transaction.
ACTION
Contact your database administrator or application
programmer.
MESSAGE
Text length greater than 512 bytes
MEANING
Text provided to DBBEGIN, DBEND, DBMEMO,
DBXBEGIN, DBXEND, DBXUNDO is too long.
ACTION
Modify program.
MESSAGE
DBCLOSE called while a transaction is in
process; DBBEGIN called while a transaction
is in process; DBXBEGIN called while a
transaction is in progress
MEANING
A transaction is in process.
ACTION
Call DBEND before DBCLOSE. Call DBEND before the next
DBBEGIN. Call DBXEND before the next DBXBEGIN.
MESSAGE
DBEND called while no transaction in progress
MEANING
No DBBEGIN precedes the call to DBEND.
ACTION
Call DBBEGIN before DBEND.
549
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-160
-161
-166
-167
-168
-169
550
MESSAGE
ILR log file name conflict
MEANING
A user file has the same name as the ILR log file name.
ACTION
Replace the user file with a valid MPE ILR log file.
MESSAGE
Cannot check for an ILR log file conflict:
file system error nn
MEANING
DBUTIL DISABLE command or call to DBOPEN failed to
open ILR log file.
ACTION
Check file system error number.
MESSAGE
Cannot purge ILR log file: file system error
nn
MEANING
DBUTIL DISABLE, PURGE, or ERASE command could not
purge an ILR log file because of a file system error.
ACTION
Check file system error number.
MESSAGE
Cannot begin MPE XL XM transaction: XM error
nn
MEANING
The logical beginning of an MPE transaction failed. nn
represents the error number returned.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
MESSAGE
Cannot attach n to MPE XL X<: file system
error nn
MEANING
Data set n could not be attached to the MPE transaction
recovery mechanism. MPE intrinsic FILEINFO or
FLABELINFO failed.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
MESSAGE
Invalid mode for XM attach options
MEANING
An internal error has occurred.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-170
-172
-173
-174
-175
-176
Appendix A
MESSAGE
Cannot open ILR log file: file system error
nn
MEANING
DBUTIL DISABLE command or call to DBOPEN was not
able to open ILR log file due to file system error.
ACTION
Check file system error number.
MESSAGE
Cannot read ILR log file: file system error
nn
MEANING
DBUTIL DISABLE command or call to DBOPEN was not
able to read ILR log file due to file system error.
ACTION
Check file system error number.
MESSAGE
Unable to obtain write access
MEANING
DBOPEN has determined that it is necessary to perform
ILR. The current user does not have write access to the
database.
ACTION
Have the database opened by a user with write access.
MESSAGE
Bad mode for ILR
MEANING
DBOPEN has determined that it is necessary to perform
ILR. The database must be opened for writing.
ACTION
Open the database in mode 1–4.
MESSAGE
Cannot attach n to MPE XL XM: XM error nn
MEANING
The data set n could not be attached to the transaction
recovery mechanism. nn is the MPE error number
returned.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
MESSAGE
Cannot detach n from MPE XL XM: XM error nn
MEANING
The data set n could not be detached from the transaction
recovery mechanism. nn is the MPE error number
returned.
ACTION
Notify HP support personnel.
551
Error Messages
Library Procedure Error Messages
-177
-178
-179
-180
-181
552
MESSAGE
MPE log file is not in the same volume set as
the database.
MEANING
MPE transaction recovery requires that the user log file
must reside in the same volume set as the database.
ACTION
Build the MPE user log file in same volume set as
database. NOTE: Because all files in a group are in same
volume set, the MPE LISTGROUP command indicates the
volume set where a dat">